AutoCAD 2012 User's Guide February 2011
© 2011 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.
Contents Part 1 Get Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Access Help and Other Sources of Information . . . . . Overview of InfoCenter and Autodesk Exchange . Learn the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the Product Readme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Where to Find the AutoCAD Express Tools . . . . . . . Join the Customer Involvement Program . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 . . . . . .
Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the Ribbon . . . . . . Display and Organize the Ribbon . Customize the Ribbon . . . . . . Cursors in the Drawing Area . . . . . . Viewport Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . The ViewCube Tool . . . . . . . . . . . The UCS Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Searching with Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Searching with Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . Manage Saved Searches in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . Browse Folders with Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Results in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sort and Group Results in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . Customize the View in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . Perform Tasks with Files in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . .
Switch Between Open Drawings . . . . . . . . . . Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing . Transfer Information between Open Drawings . . Save a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find a Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Search Paths and File Locations . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 . 234 . 237 . 238 . 244 . 245 Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files . . . . . .
ViewCube Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Reorient the View of a Model with ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . 339 Change the UCS with ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Navigate with SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Overview of SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Wheel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Navigation Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work on a Named Layout . . . . . . . . . . . Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport . Export a Layout to Model Space . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . Control Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . Scale Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . Control Visibility in Layout Viewports . . . . Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports . . . . . Align Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . Rotate Views in Layout Viewports . . . . .
Use Color Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Current Linetype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Linetype of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Linetype Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines . . . Control Lineweights . . . .
Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) . Track to Offset Point Locations (Tracking) . . . . . Specify Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Direct Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset from Temporary Reference Points . . . . . . Specify Intervals on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extract Geometric Information from Objects . . . . . . . Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations . . . Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information . . . Use a Calculator . . . .
Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choose a Method to Modify Objects . . . . Modify Objects Using Grips . . . . . . . . . Move or Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects . . . . Change the Size and Shape of Objects . . . Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects . . . . Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) . Modify Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Helixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Blocks Within a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks . . . . . . . . Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks . Nest Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Block Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks . . . . . . . . . Create Construction Geometry Within a Block . . . . Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 24 Create 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 Overview of 3D Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves . Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces . . Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding . . . . Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping . . . . Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting . . . . . Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving . . . . Create Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Creating 3D Solids . . . . . . .
Modify Vertices on 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . . . Display Original Forms of Composite Solids . . . . . Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . . . Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects . . . Press or Pull Bounded Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Facets to Faces on Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . Modify the Properties of 3D Solids, Surfaces, and Meshes . Modify Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Annotative Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351 Add and Modify Scale Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353 Set Orientation for Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills . . . . . . . . . Specify Hatch and Fill Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control the Appearance of Hatches . . . . . . . . . Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill . . . . . . . . .
Change Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Changing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Single-Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Multiline Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Text Scale and Justification . . . . . . . . Check Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use an Alternate Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor . . . .
Composite Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625 Part 10 Plot and Publish Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627 Chapter 32 Specify Settings for Plotting and Publishing . . . . . . . . . . 1629 Save Plot Settings as Named Page Setups . . . . . . . . . . Reuse Named Page Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Page Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select a Printer or Plotter for a Layout . . . . . . . . Select a Paper Size for a Layout . . . . . . . .
Plot to DXB File Formats . . Plot to Raster File Formats . Plot Adobe PDF Files . . . . Plot Adobe PostScript Files . Create Plot Files . . . . . . . Chapter 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718 . 1719 . 1721 . 1723 . 1724 Publish Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727 Overview of Publishing . . . . . . . . . . .
Track External Reference Operations (Log File) . . Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings . Overview of Demand Loading . . . . . . . . . . . Unload Xrefs in Large Drawings . . . . . . . . . . Work with Demand Loading in Large Drawings . . Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes . . . . . . . Set Paths for Temporary Xref File Copies . . . . . Chapter 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1812 . 1815 . 1815 . 1816 . 1816 . 1818 .
Overview of Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach, Scale, and Detach Raster Images . . . . . . . Modify Raster Images and Image Boundaries . . . . Manage Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tune Raster Image Performance . . . . . . . . . . . Export Drawings to Other File Formats . . . . . . . . . . Export DWF and DWFx Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export FBX Files . . . . . .
Edit Data in a Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Database Records to Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Edit Links and Link Templates . . . . . . . . . Identify and Select Existing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Correct Link Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Link Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Labels to Display Database Information in the Drawing . . Create and Edit Labels and Label Templates . . . . . . . .
Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration . Work with Xrefs over the Internet . . . . . . . . . Insert Content from a Website . . . . . . . . . . . Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission . . Review and Markup Files with Design Review . . . . . . Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages . . Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings . . . . . Chapter 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2101 . 2105 . 2106 . 2109 . 2119 .
Chapter 45 Materials and Textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2203 Overview of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Manage Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browse Material Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage and Organize Materials . . . . . . . . . Modify Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Materials to Objects and Faces . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2287 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part 1: Get Information 1
2
Find the Information You Need 1 There are various ways to find information about how to use this program, and multiple resources are available. This AutoCAD is often intuitive, but when you do need to look something up, you can save time and avoid frustration if you use the Help system to find information. The Help system is organized in a structured design that makes information easy to locate.
Autodesk Exchange for AutoCAD Autodesk Exchange provides a web-based experience directly within the product. Included are tabs that access the following sources of information: ■ Home. Provides a wide variety of content, including announcements, expert tips, videos, and links to blogs. When enabled for online access, the Home tab also includes access to the Knowledge Base, Communication Center, and Subscription Center. ■ Apps. Offers popular accessories, libraries, and plug-ins for purchase. ■ Help.
Autodesk Official Training Courseware Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) is technical training material developed by ----- Autodesk. You can purchase AOTC from your local reseller or distributor, or you can order it online from the Autodesk Store. e-Learning Autodesk e-Learning for Autodesk Subscription ----- customers features interactive lessons organized into product catalogs.
View the online readme Where to Find the AutoCAD Express Tools The AutoCAD Express Tools contain a library of productivity tools designed to help you extend the power of AutoCAD. They are easy to use, easily integrated into your menus and toolbars, and cover a wide range of functions, including dimensioning, drawing, and selecting and modifying objects. The AutoCAD Express Tools are installed as a Typical installation of AutoCAD.
Join the Customer Involvement Program If you participate in the Customer Involvement Program (CIP), specific information about how you use AutoCAD is forwarded to Autodesk. This information includes what features you use the most, problems that you encounter, and other information helpful to the future direction of the product. See the following links for more information. ■ Learn more about the Autodesk Customer Involvement Program: http://www.autodesk.
8
Get Information from Drawings 2 You can retrieve general information from a drawing including identifying information and the number of objects that it contains. There are types of information stored in a drawing that are not specific to objects within the drawing, but provide useful information to help you understand the behavior of the drawing, the settings of system variables, the number of objects, descriptive information, and so on.
■ Compare Dimension Styles and Variables on page 1531 Quick Reference Commands DWGPROPS Sets and displays the file properties of the current drawing. SETVAR Lists or changes the values of system variables. STATUS Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents. TIME Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing. System Variables CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format. DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format.
To count specified types of objects in a drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select. 2 In the Quick Select dialog box, do one of the following: ■ In the Apply To List, select Entire Drawing. ■ Click the Select Objects button to select a group of objects. Press Enter. In the Apply To list, select Current selection. 3 In the Object Type list, select the type of object you want to count. 4 In the Properties list, select a property that belongs to the type of objects you want to count.
12
Part 2: The User Interface 13
14
Tools in the Application Window 3 Use the Application menu, ribbon, and other elements in the application window to access frequently used commands, and control the operation of the product. The Application Menu Click the application button to search for commands, as well as access tools to create, open, and publish a file. Search for Commands Perform a real-time search for commands on the Quick Access toolbar, in the application menu, and on the ribbon.
Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Access Common Tools Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.
■ Close AutoCAD NOTE You can also close AutoCAD by double-clicking the Application button. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Browse Files View, sort, and access supported files that you have recently opened. Recent Documents View the most recently used files with the Recent Documents list. Files display in the Recent Documents list with the most recently used file at the top by default.
Pinned Files You can keep a file listed regardless of files that you save later using the push pin button to the right. The file is displayed at the bottom of the list until you turn off the push pin button.
To change the number of recent documents listed 1 Click Tools ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click the Open and Save tab. 3 In the Application Menu ➤ Number of Recently Used Files text box, enter the number of recent documents to be listed. You can choose any number between 0 and 50. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
To change the preview display options for currently open documents 1 Click the Application menu and then, click Open Documents. 2 Under the Search text box, click the Display Options menu. 3 Select a display option.
NOTE The preview display option you choose remains in both the Recent Documents and Open Documents quick menus. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Preview Documents View a thumbnail of files in the Recent Documents and Open Documents lists.
When you hover over a file in either of the lists, a preview of the file is displayed along with the following information: ■ Path where the file is stored ■ Date the file was last modified ■ Version of the product used to create the file ■ Name of the person who last saved the file ■ Name of the person who is currently editing the file You can also include a thumbnail of the file next to the files in the list.
View Undo and Redo History The Quick Access toolbar displays options to undo and redo changes to your file. To undo or redo a less recent change, click the drop-down button to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Add Commands and Controls Add unlimited tools to the Quick Access toolbar. Tools that extend past the maximum length of the toolbar are displayed in a flyout button.
To add a ribbon button to the Quick Access toolbar, right-click the button on the ribbon and click Add to Quick Access toolbar. Buttons are added to the right of the default commands on the Quick Access toolbar. Move the Quick Access Toolbar Place the Quick Access toolbar either above or below the ribbon using the Customization button. See also: ■ Quick Access Toolbars ■ Toolbars on page 40 To add a command to the Quick Access toolbar 1 Right-click the Quick Access toolbar.
Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. The Ribbon The ribbon is a palette that displays task-based tools and controls. Overview of the Ribbon The ribbon is displayed by default when you open a file, providing a compact palette of all of the tools necessary to create or modify your drawing. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. RIBBONCLOSE Closes the ribbon window.
System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT Determines whether the horizontally docked ribbon is set to the height of the current tab or a predetermined height.
Some ribbon panels display a dialog box related to that panel. The dialog box launcher is denoted by an arrow icon, , in the lower-right corner of the panel. The dialog box launcher indicates that you can display a related dialog box. Display the related dialog box by clicking the dialog box launcher. To specify which ribbon tabs and panels are displayed, right-click the ribbon and, on the shortcut menu, click or clear the names of tabs or panels.
automatically closes when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded, click the push pin, , in the bottom-left corner of the slideout panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you select a particular type of object or execute some commands, a special contextual ribbon tab is displayed instead of a toolbar or dialog box. The contextual tab is closed when you end the command. Checkboxes Checkboxes allow you to toggle an option on or off.
Radio Buttons Depending on the available space in the vertical or horizontal ribbon, radio buttons can collapse into a single button. A single radio button works as a toggle, allowing you to cycle through each item in the list, or as a split button, where the top half of the radio button is a toggle button and clicking on the arrow icon in the lower half displays a drop-down of all items in the list.
To minimize the ribbon 1 The first button toggles the between the full ribbon state, the default ribbon state, and the minimize ribbon state. 2 The second drop-down button allows you to select the minimize ribbon state. These are the four minimize ribbon states: ■ Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles are displayed. ■ Minimize to Panel Titles: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab and panel titles are displayed.
System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONBGLOADRIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls whether ribbon tabs are loaded into memory by a background process during idle processor time. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab.
■ You can change the order of ribbon tabs. Click the tab you want to move, drag it to the desired position, and release. ■ You can change the order of ribbon panels. Click the panel you want to move, drag it to the desired position, and release. ■ You can convert toolbars into ribbon panels using the Customize User Interface Editor. See Ribbon in the Customization Guide. See also: ■ Ribbon To associate a tool palette group with a ribbon tab 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. RIBBONCLOSE Closes the ribbon window. System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab.
Cursors in the Drawing Area In the drawing area, the appearance of the cursor changes depending on what you are doing.
The labels display the current viewport settings. For example, the labels might read [+] [Top] [2D Wireframe] You can click within each of the three bracketed areas to change the settings. ■ Click + to display options for maximizing the viewport, changing the viewport configuration, or controlling the display of navigation tools. ■ Click Top to choose between several standard and custom views. ■ Click 2D Wireframe to choose one of several visual styles.
System Variables VPCONTROL Controls whether the menus for viewport tools, views, and visual styles that are located in the upper-left corner of every viewport are displayed. The ViewCube Tool The ViewCube is a handy tool to control the orientation of 3D views. This tool is available in most Autodesk products, and provides a common experience when you switch between products. Alternatively, you can use the 3DORBIT command to drag 3D views, and right-click for additional 3D viewing options.
You can select, move, and rotate the UCS icon to change the current UCS. The UCS is useful in 2D, and essential in 3D. For more information about the UCS, see Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 591. You can control whether the UCS icon is visible, and change its appearance, with the UCSICON command, Properties option.
38
Other Tool Locations 4 Use common tools in the classic menu bar, toolbars, tool palettes, status bars, shortcut menus, and Design Center to find more commands, settings, and modes. Access the Classic Menu Bar Display pull-down menus from the classic menu bar using one of several methods. You can also specify alternate menus. The classic menu bar can be displayed at the top of the drawing area. The classic menu bar is displayed by default in the AutoCAD Classic workspace.
See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 189 ■ “Pull-down and Shortcut Menus” in the Customization Guide To display the classic menu bar ■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click the Customization drop-down menu ➤ Show Menu Bar. Quick Reference System Variables MENUBAR Controls the display of the menu bar. Toolbars Use buttons on toolbars to start commands, display flyout toolbars, and display tooltips. You can display or hide, dock, and resize toolbars.
NOTE You can choose from a list of toolbars from the View tab, Windows panel on the ribbon. A toolbar displays as floating or docked. A floating toolbar displays anywhere in the drawing area, and you can drag a floating toolbar to a new location, resize it, or dock it. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. A toolbar docked at the top edge of the drawing area is located below the ribbon. You can move a docked toolbar by dragging it to a new docking location.
Status Bars The application and drawing status bars provide useful information and buttons for turning drawing tools on and off. Application Status Bar The application status bar displays the coordinate values of your cursor, drawing tools, and tools for Quick View and annotation scaling. You can view the drawing tool buttons as icons or text. You also can easily change the settings of snap, polar, osnap, and otrack from the shortcut menus of these drawing tools.
To control the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray 1 Right-click in an unused area of the application status bar. 2 In the Status Bar drop-down, click Tray Settings. 3 In the Tray Settings dialog box, select or clear the following display options: ■ Display Icons from Services. Displays the tray at the right end of the status bar and displays icons from services. When this option is cleared, the tray is not displayed. ■ Display Notifications from Services.
WORKSPACELABEL Controls whether to display the name of the current workspace in the status bar. Drawing Status Bar The drawing status bar displays several tools for scaling annotations. Different tools display for model space and paper space. When the drawing status bar is turned on, it displays at the bottom of the drawing area. When the drawing status bar is turned off, the tools found on the drawing status bar are moved to the application status bar.
Press the Alt key to display shortcut keys for common tools in the application window. When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool. The Command Line Window Enter Commands on the Command Line You can enter a command by using the keyboard. Some commands also have abbreviated names called command aliases. Commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts are displayed in a dockable and resizable window called the command window.
■ To enter a command by using the keyboard, type the full command name on the command line, and then press Enter or Spacebar. ■ To repeat the previous command, press Enter or Spacebar without entering a command. NOTE When Dynamic Input is turned on and is set to display dynamic prompts, you can enter commands in a tooltip near the cursor. Display Valid Commands and System Variables By default, AutoCAD automatically completes the name of a command or system variable as you type it.
Enter Alternate Names of Commands Some commands also have alternate names. For example, instead of entering line to start the LINE command, you can enter l. Alternate command names are called command aliases and are defined in the acad.pgp file. To define your own command aliases, see Create Command Aliases in the Customization Guide. Specify Command Options When you enter commands on the command line, you see either a set of options or a dialog box.
To use a command transparently, enter an apostrophe (') before entering the command at any prompt. On the command line, double angle brackets (>>) precede prompts that are displayed for transparent commands. After you complete the transparent command, the original command resumes. In the following example, you turn on the dot grid and set it to one-unit intervals while you draw a line, and then you continue drawing the line.
MULTIPLE Repeats the next command until canceled. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. System Variables AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY Controls the amount of time that elapses before automated keyboard features display at the Command prompt. AUTOCOMPLETEMODE Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the Command prompt. CMDNAMES Displays the names of the active and transparent commands.
Bitcode Variables Some system variables are controlled using bitcodes. With these system variables, you add values to specify a unique combination of behaviors.
Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window You can edit text in the command window to correct or repeat commands. Use the standard keys: ■ Up, Down, Left Arrow, and Right Arrow ■ Insert, Delete ■ Page Up, Page Down ■ Home, End ■ Backspace You can repeat any command used in the current session by cycling through the commands in the command window with Up ArrowCtrl and Down Arrow and pressing Enter. By default, pressing Ctrl+C copies highlighted text to the Clipboard.
To copy all the text in the text window to the Clipboard, use the COPYHIST command. To save commands to a log file, use the LOGFILEON command. See also: ■ Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window on page 55 ■ Use Dynamic Input on page 619 To close the text window ■ At the Command prompt, enter graphscr. NOTE You can also close the text window by pressing F2, or using the standard Windows controls.
Quick Reference COPYCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. COPYHIST Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard. GRAPHSCR Switches from the text window to the drawing area. LOGFILEOFF Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON Writes the contents of the command history to a file. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. TEXTSCR Opens the text window.
Some functions are available both on the command line and in a dialog box. In many cases, you can enter a hyphen before the command to suppress the dialog box and display prompts on the command line instead. For example, entering layer on the command line displays the Layer Properties Manager. Entering -layer on the command line displays the equivalent command line options. Suppressing the dialog box is useful for compatibility with earlier versions of AutoCAD® and for using script files.
System Variables ATTDIA Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. CMDNAMES Displays the names of the active and transparent commands. EXPERT Controls whether certain prompts are issued. FILEDIA Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes. Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window Change the position and display of the command window to suit the way you work. Dock the Command Window By default, the command window is docked.
the command window make sure it is floating, and then right-click over its title bar and select either Anchor Left or Anchor Right. Resize the Command Window You can resize the command window vertically by dragging the splitter bar, which is located on the top edge of the window when it is docked on the bottom and at the bottom edge of the window when it is docked at the top.
To dock the command window ■ Click the title bar and drag the command window until it is over the top or bottom docking region of the AutoCAD window. When the command window becomes the same width as the AutoCAD window, release the mouse button to dock it. The docking region is an edge of the AutoCAD application window that allows you to dock a toolbar, palette, or the command window. ■ Right-click the title bar of the Command window, and select Allow Docking.
System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. Shortcut Menus Display a shortcut menu for quick access to commands that are relevant to your current activity. You can display different shortcut menus when you right-click different areas of the screen.
editing-oriented shortcut menu is displayed. You can also display a shortcut menu during PAN or ZOOM. To turn off shortcut menus in the drawing area 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Windows Standard Behavior, clear Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area. 3 To control Default, Edit, and Command shortcut menus individually, select Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area. Right-Click Customization.
2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Windows Standard Behavior, click Right-Click Customization. 3 In the Right-Click Customization dialog box, select Turn on Time-Sensitive Right-Click. You can specify the duration of the longer click. The default is 250 milliseconds 4 Click Apply & Close. 5 In the Options dialog box, click OK. To control the display of recent input 1 At the Command prompt, enter inputhistorymode. 2 Enter a sum of one or more of the following values: ■ 0.
CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. CUTCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PAN Moves the view planar to the screen. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. TRAYSETTINGS Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray. U Reverses the most recent operation.
SHORTCUTMENU Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. TRAYICONS Controls whether a tray is displayed on the status bar. TRAYNOTIFY Controls whether service notifications are displayed in the status bar tray. TRAYTIMEOUT Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service notifications are displayed.
■ External references (xrefs) ■ Tables ■ Lights ■ Cameras ■ Visual styles from the Visual Styles Manager ■ Materials from the Materials Browser palette NOTE When you drag an object onto a tool palette, you can switch to a different tab by hovering over the tab for a few seconds. You can then use the new tool to create objects in your drawing with the same properties as the object you dragged to the tool palette. For example, if you drag a red circle with a lineweight of .
current drawing uses meters as units and a block uses centimeters, the unit ratio is 1 m/100 cm. When you drag the block into the drawing, it is inserted at 1/100 scale. NOTE In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to Unitless, either in the source block or target drawing.
NOTE A block on a tool palette may reside in another drawing. The drawing that contains the block definition is opened in the Block Editor. To add or remove a tool flyout 1 On a tool palette, right-click the geometric object or dimension tool whose flyout you want to add or remove. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Command, click in the Use Flyout box. 3 In the drop-down list, select Yes if you want to add a flyout, or select No if you want to remove one. 4 Click OK.
NOTE This option ignores the angle specified in the Rotation box of he Tool Properties dialog box. The rotation angle prompt does not display if you drag the block or xref, or if you enter rotate at the initial insertion Command prompt. Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.
You can add frequently used commands to a tool palette. When the Customize dialog box is open, you can drag tools from a toolbar or the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor to a tool palette. NOTE You cannot drag commands from the Quick Access toolbar to a tool palette. Once you add a command to a tool palette, you can click the tool to execute the command. For example, clicking a Save tool on a tool palette saves a drawing just as the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar does.
5 In the Customize dialog box, click Close. To create a command tool from the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface. If the CUI Editor is covering the Tool Palettes window, then move the CUI Editor to the side. 2 In the Command List pane, drag a command to the tool palette and, without releasing the button on the pointing device, move the cursor to the place on the tool palette where you want the tool.
2 Follow any Command prompts that are shown. Quick Reference CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. Change Tool Palette Settings The options and settings for tool palettes are accessible from shortcut menus that are displayed when you right-click in different areas of the Tool Palettes window.
■ Auto-hide. Controls the display of the palette window when it is floating. When this option is selected, only the title bar of the palette window is displayed when the cursor moves outside the palette window. When this option is cleared, the palette window stays open continuously. You can display the title bar of palette window as either icons or text from the shortcut menu of the title bar. ■ Transparency. Sets the transparency of the palette window so it does not obscure objects under it. ■ Views.
3 Under Rollover, adjust the level of transparency for the Tool Palettes window when it has focus. 4 Click OK. NOTE Transparency is available when the Tool Palettes window is undocked or anchored. To change the icon display style in the Tool Palettes window 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click View Options. 2 In the View Options dialog box, click the icon display option that you want to set. You can also change the size of the icons.
Control Tool Properties You can change the properties of any tool on a tool palette. Once a tool is on a tool palette, you can change its properties. For example, you can change the insertion scale of a block or the angle of a hatch pattern. To change tool properties, right-click on a tool, and click Properties to display the Tool Properties dialog box. The Tool Properties dialog box has the following categories of properties: ■ Command. Controls the display of a tool flyout and the tools command string.
You can expand and collapse the property categories by clicking the arrow buttons. Specify a Different Icon for a Tool You can replace the icon for a tool with an image that you specify. This is useful when the automatically generated icon is too cluttered to be easily recognizable. To replace the image, right-click the tool in the tool palette and click Specify Image. To restore the default image for a tool, right-click the tool and click Remove Specified Image.
2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click any property in the list of properties and specify the new value or setting. ■ Properties listed under the Insert, Attach, or Pattern category control object-specific properties such as scale, rotation, and angle. ■ Properties listed under the General category override the current drawing property settings such as layer, color, and linetype. ■ Auxiliary scale for a block or a hatch tool overrides the regular scale setting when the tool is used.
To restore the image, name, and description of a flyout tool to the default settings 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, right-click in the image area. Click Remove Specified Image. 3 Click in the Name box and delete the text. 4 Click in the Description box and delete the text. 5 Click OK.
Customize Tool Palettes You can add tools to a tool palette with several methods.
■ You can associate a customizable tool palette group with each panel on the ribbon. Right-click the ribbon panel to display a list of available tool palette groups. NOTE If the source drawing file for a block, xref, or raster image tool is moved to a different folder, you must modify the tool that references it by right-clicking the tool and, in the Tool Properties dialog box, specifying the new source file folder.
Read-Only Tool Palettes If a tool palette file is set with a read-only attribute, a lock icon is displayed in a lower corner of the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify the tool palette beyond changing its display settings and rearranging the icons. To apply a read-only attribute to a tool palette, right-click the tool palette (ATC) file in one of the following locations: ■ Windows XP: :\Documents and Settings\\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD 2012\\\Sup
To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon panel ■ Right-click a ribbon panel and click Show Related Tool Palette Group. To add text to a tool palette 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add Text. 2 In the text box, add the text you want to display in the window. 3 If necessary, drag the text to the appropriate location in the window. To add a separator line to a tool palette 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add Separator.
For example, if you have several tool palettes that contain hatch patterns, use CUSTOMIZE to create a new palette group called Hatch Patterns. Then add all of your tool palettes that contain hatch patterns to the Hatch Pattern group. When you set the Hatch Pattern group current, only the tool palettes in that group are displayed in the Tool Palettes window.
To copy a tool palette from one group to another 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, select the tool palette that you want to copy. 3 Press Ctrl while you drag the selected tool palette to another group. A copy of the tool palette is displayed in the new location. 4 Click Close. To display a tool palette group 1 Right-click the title bar of the Tool Palettes window.
TPNAVIGATE Displays a specified tool palette or palette group. Save and Share Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups Export and import tool palette files (XTP) and tool palette group files (XPG) to share with others. NOTE For read-only tool palette files, a lock icon is displayed in a lower corner of the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify the tool palette beyond changing its display settings and rearranging the icons.
WARNING If you share tool palettes with someone who is not using the same AutoCAD-based product or release in which they were created, it is possible that the tools might not work properly or be accessible. See also: ■ Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) on page 193 To export a tool palette or tool palette group 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Export a tool palette. Under Palettes, right-click a tool palette.
Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. DesignCenter You can drag content from any source drawing to your current drawing. You can drag drawings, blocks, and hatches to a tool palette. Source drawings can be on your computer, on a network location, or on a website.
Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Understand the DesignCenter Window You can control the size, location, and appearance of DesignCenter.
■ Undock DesignCenter by dragging the area above the toolbar away from the docking region. Pressing Ctrl while dragging prevents docking. ■ Anchor DesignCenter by choosing Anchor Right or Anchor Left from the shortcut menu. An anchored DesignCenter window rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored DesignCenter window is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. It cannot be set to stay open.
To display and hide the DesignCenter tree view 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Tree View Toggle. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed.
■ Xrefs, layouts, hatch styles, and named objects, including blocks, layers, linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, table styles, multileader styles, and plot styles within a drawing Click an item in the tree view to display its contents in the content area. Click the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to display and hide additional levels in the hierarchy. You can also double-click an item to display deeper levels. Right-clicking in the tree view displays a shortcut menu with several related options.
original file or folder doesn't actually move; in fact, all the shortcuts you create are stored in the Favorites folder. The shortcuts saved in the Favorites folder can ® be moved, copied, or deleted using Windows Explorer. To change the source of the content displayed in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter window, click one of the following tabs: ■ Folders. Lists your local and network drives. ■ Open Drawings. Lists the drawings that are currently open.
2 Right-click the item in the DesignCenter tree view or content area. Click Add to Favorites. To display the contents of the Favorites folder in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button. When you are working in the tree view, you can use the Folders tab to navigate to the Favorites folder. To organize your DesignCenter Favorites folder 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button.
Add Content with DesignCenter The right portion of the DesignCenter window operates on the content displayed. Double-clicking an item in the content area displays successive levels of detail. For example, double-clicking a drawing image displays several icons, including an icon for blocks. Double-clicking the Blocks icon displays images of each block in the drawing.
Add Items from DesignCenter to a Tool Palette You can add drawings, blocks, and hatches from DesignCenter to the current tool palette. ■ From the DesignCenter content area, you can drag one or more items to the current tool palette. ■ From the DesignCenter tree view, you can right-click and, from the shortcut menu, create a new tool palette from the current folder, drawing file, or block icon.
2 In DesignCenter, use one of the following methods: ■ Drag the item from the search results list into the content area. ■ Double-click the item in the search results list. ■ Right-click the item in the search results list. Click Load into Content Area. 3 In the DesignCenter content area, double-click the Blocks icon. To load the content area of DesignCenter with a symbol library 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Home.
To open a drawing from DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, do one of the following: ■ Right-click the drawing icon in the DesignCenter content area. Click Open in Application Window. ■ Press Ctrl and drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content area to the drawing area. ■ Drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content area to a location anywhere outside the drawing area of the application window.
ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online DesignCenter Online provides access to pre-drawn content such as blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturers' content, and online catalogs.
In the DesignCenter Online window, two panes are displayed—a right pane and a left pane. The right pane is called the content area. The content area displays the items or folders that you selected in the left pane. The left pane can display one of the following four views: ■ Category Listing. Displays folders containing libraries of standard parts, manufacturer-specific content, and content aggregator websites. ■ Search. Searches for online content.
■ Random Number Identifier. DesignCenter Online assigns a random number identifier to each person who uses the feature. This identifier is used to retain your Collections and your Settings views each time DesignCenter Online is used. Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from DesignCenter Online to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved.
Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. Understand DesignCenter Online Content Types With DesignCenter Online, content is categorized into folders. In the DesignCenter Online folders, you can retrieve discipline-specific content. The content that you can retrieve includes the following: ■ Standard Parts. Generic standard parts that are commonly used in design. These parts include blocks for architectural, mechanical, and GIS applications.
Browse for Content When you use the Category Listing view, you can click the folders in the left pane to view their contents. These folders may contain other folders. When you click a folder or an item inside a folder, the contents are displayed in the Content area. When you click a block, graphical and descriptive information about the block is displayed in the preview area.
Download Content To download content from the Web, locate the folder containing the content that you want to use. Then, click a thumbnail image of the content in the content area. The content is displayed in the preview area along with information about the content. You can drag the block directly from the preview area into a drawing or tool palette, or you can save it to your computer to be used later.
5 Click Save. The content is downloaded to your computer. To download content to your drawing 1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Category Listing. 2 In the Category folders, click a content item to display it in the Preview area. 3 Drag the image from the Preview area into your drawing or tool palette. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
NOTE Specify the Autodesk Seek Library download folder as a watched folder and any downloaded files will also be indexed.
NOTE Refer to the Content Service help for more information. Personal vs. Public Content Service Content Service is installed as either a personal service or a public service, depending on how it will be used. Personal Service ■ Whenever AutoCAD is installed, Content Service is automatically installed on the local system as a personal service. This means that you are going to be using AutoCAD to access design files and will be managing watched folders with Content Explorer in AutoCAD.
AutoCAD users on other machines will be able to search them and access them. NOTE Refer to the Content Service help file for more information on using Content Service on a network machine. Understand the Content Explorer Window Content Explorer is a powerful indexing and searching application with a compact and efficient design similar to the AutoCAD External References Manager window. Just as with other secondary windows in AutoCAD, you can configure transparency, auto-collapse, and docking preferences.
Image Feature Description Back Recalls the last results you viewed. The last results can be from browsing, searching, or recalling a saved search. For example, you’ve performed a search that returned multiple results. You double-clicked on a file to browse its contents. Click Back to return to the search results.
Image Feature Description You can click Back until you reach the first search performed since starting the Content Explorer session. Up Climbs the breadcrumbs path one step at a time. You can click Up until you reach the top level for the specified content source. Home Click Home to return to the top level of the Home. This view shows the local folders that are currently watched and indexed. Watched folders on the local machine can be added and removed at the top level of Home.
Image Feature Description Only the current content source is searched. Results are displayed based on the current filter settings. Recent Searches Click Search to perform a search. Click the Search drop-down arrow to display previous searches. Saved Searches Click Saved Searches to save the current search string. Select the saved search drop-down to display the list of saved searches. You can also delete saved searches, edit the names of existing searches, and save new searches in this context menu.
Image Feature Description everything is being displayed, based on your filter requisites. View Options Click View Options to cycle through icon size. Click the View Options drop-down arrow to configure the icon size, whether the folders are displayed in thumbnail or detailed view, which labels are displayed, and how the results are grouped. Configure Settings Click Configure Settings to add, remove, enable, and disable content sources.
To Determine State of Content Explorer Window ■ Enter CONTENTEXPLORERSTATE on the command line to retrieve a read-only variable indicating whether the Content Explorer window is open or closed. Understand How Content Is Indexed When a folder is specified as a watched folder, the Content Service, a companion component to Content Explorer, indexes all of the design files and design objects in the folder, including associated metadata.
Stage Icon Displayed Description 2 Thumbnail and DWG-specific file properties have been discovered. During this stage, all objects and any text in the drawing, including block attributes, are being indexed. You can now search for DWG properties, but you cannot explore the content within the file. 3 File is completely indexed. You can now explore or search for content within the file. ! There was an issue while indexing this file.
■ Tablestyles ■ Textstyles ■ Xrefs ■ Hyperlinks View Indexing Statistics in Content Explorer You can review the indexing status of your files on the Statistics tab of the Configure Settings dialog. To review the indexing statistics in Content Explorer 1 In Content Explorer, click Configure Settings. 2 On the Configure Settings dialog, select either your local computer or a network content source and click the Statistics tab.
NOTE The Statistics tab is also available in the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console. Refer to the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console help for more information. Understand Watched Folders A watched folder is a folder which has been selected for monitoring and indexing by the Content Service. A content source may be the local machine, Autodesk Seek, or designated network location. When you search a content source that is a local or network machine, all watched folders are searched.
files are read-only. However, users will not be able to access read-only content; they will only see content if they browse to it or if it meets search criteria. ■ If the top level of a folder hierarchy is shared and specified as a watched folder, all of the subfolders are watched and indexed, regardless of the share setting. If you do not want content inside a folder hierarchy to be shared, move it to a private location or build a new hierarchy of data to share.
You can search only one content source at a time. When searching your local drive or a network computer, you can search all watched folders for that content source at the same time or drill down to a specific folder for a smaller number of files and objects to search. Select content sources from the source drop-down menu. The content source type currently selected is represented by a unique icon. Icon Content Source Home. The Home content source represents all watched folders on the local drive.
See also: ■ Understand the Home Content Source on page 117 ■ Understand the Seek Content Source on page 119 ■ Understand the Network Content Source on page 122 To add a content source Add a new content source to the list of available sources for searching. 1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings icon. 2 On the Configure Settings dialog, click the Add Network Content button. 3 Enter the name of the computer on the network that you want to add to the Content Source list.
The network computer is added as an available content source. To remove a content source Remove content sources which you no longer want to browse or search, or which are no longer available. 1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings icon. 2 In the Content Sources list, right-click on the content source and select Remove. The content source is removed from the list and is no longer available for browsing or searching.
Understand the Home Content Source Home represents the local file system folders that are currently being indexed and monitored. Folders added to Home are watched for file system events, such as Add, Save, and Delete. An indexing process keeps a current catalog of the files and objects located in the watched folders. You can easily locate files in the specified folders based on search criteria, such as the date last updated, the author, a property value, or the file type.
Feature Description button on the Browse for Folder dialog box. NOTE Folders already added to Home for indexing are displayed with a red check mark and are grayed out. Remove Right-click on a folder and select Remove to remove the selected folder location from the Home content source. You can also drag a folder from the Home content source and drop it outside of the window to remove it from the Home. A folder which has been removed is no longer indexed.
NOTE Adding a folder to Home does not move the folder or its contents. To remove a folder from Home 1 Launch Content Explorer. 2 Click the Home icon to go to the Home content source. 3 Right-click on the folder you want to remove from Home and select Remove from the context menu. The folder is removed from Home and is no longer indexed. NOTE Folders removed from Home are not deleted from the file system.
content and insert it directly into your drawing. You can also access the external web site by clicking View products at Autodesk Seek. Access the products online by clicking View Products at Autodesk Seek. A web browser opens directly to the Autodesk seek site online. The results are displayed according the search you entered in Content Explorer. NOTE Refer to the section on Autodesk Seek for more information.
NOTE Click the Back button to return to the previous view. To insert and open content 1 Launch the Content Explorer window. 2 Click the Seek icon to go to the Seek content source. 3 Enter your search parameters in the Search field. 4 Navigate to the product that you want to insert into your drawing. 5 Perform one of the following actions: ■ To open and insert–Right-click on the file and select Open to download and open the file.
Understand the Network Content Source A network content source represents the file system folders that are currently being indexed and monitored on a network machine. Folders shown in a network content source are watched for file system events, such as Add, Save, and Delete. An indexing process keeps a current catalog of the files and objects located in the watched folders.
NOTE Folders on a network computer must be set as shared to be added as watched folders on that network computer. Only a network computer running Content Service can be added as a network content source in Content Explorer. If the network machine does not have AutoCAD or an AutoCAD vertical installed, you can specify watched folders for that machine through the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console. These folders must be set to shared before you can add them as a watched folder.
To add or remove watched folders with Content Explorer 1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings icon. 2 Click Add Watched Folder to launch the Add Watched Folder dialog box. 3 Navigate to the folder that you want to add, select it, and click OK. The folder is added to the watched folder list. 4 To remove a folder, right-click on the folder in the Watched Folders list and select remove. The folder is no longer available for searching or browsing with Content Explorer.
NOTE If the folder you are looking for is not listed, verify that it is configured as a shared folder. 7 Click OK to add the selected folder to the watched list. Content Service will now index and monitor all activities in that folder. 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each folder that you want Content Service to watch. New watched folders automatically appear in the specified Network Content source in Content Explorer. 9 To remove a folder from the watched list, right-click the folder and select remove.
NOTE The search feature is relative. If you have browsed to a subfolder, Content Explorer will search files and folders within the current folder only. Search results for local and network content sources are displayed 100 to a page. Search results for the Seek content source are displayed 20 to a page. Search with Wild Cards You can use wild cards when specifying search criteria. Wild Cards * Represents any number of characters within a string. ? Represents a single character within a string.
For example, enter author:jsmith in the Search field to find all of the DWG files where the author was JSmith. More than one property:value pair can be used in a search string. For example, you can search for all of the drawing files identified as seating which were created by jsmith by entering objecttype:seating author:jsmith in the Search field. You can create custom properties and values for your files on the AutoCAD properties dialog box.
Operators AND Searches for x AND y in any order. The search granny AND smith returns anything containing both words. OR Searches for either x OR y. The search granny OR smith returns anything containing either word. NOT Searches for x but NOT y. The search granny NOT smith returns anything containing granny but not smith. "" Searches for the exact phrase contained within the quotation marks. The search "granny smith" returns everything containing the exact phrase granny smith.
Save, Edit, and Delete Searches in Content Explorer Saving and reusing previous searches can save you time. You can manage your saved searches in the Saved Searches drop-down list. The five most recently entered search strings are stored in the search field drop-down list. When you enter text that matches the beginning characters of a previously entered search string, that search string is recommended.
2 Click the Save Searches icon. 3 Enter a name for the saved search in the field. The search is added to the Saved Searches list. To use a saved search in Content Explorer Use saved searches at any time for fast access to your indexed files and objects. ■ and then select a saved search. Click the saved search drop-down The search is performed. Configure any sorting, icon size, or other settings to suit your needs.
TIP Perform a search for files recently modified and then save the configuration as a default search. Whenever the Content Explorer window launches, a fresh search is performed and the files you have been using most recently are displayed. Navigate a saved search in Content Explorer After performing a saved search, you can see the search that was performed by examining the breadcrumbs path. You can also return to a previous search or determine the folder path that was searched.
■ Click the back button to return to the previous browsing results. NOTE If your browse results are not what you expected, try changing your filter settings. Using breadcrumbs ■ When browsing, a breadcrumb path records your steps. ■ Click a breadcrumb to jump directly to that location. ■ Click the first breadcrumb to return to the top level of the content source that you are searching or browsing.
■ If the filter icon is illuminated , click the filter icon to disable it and see all objects regardless of date and time. To filter by type in Content Explorer 1 Click the Filter drop-down and select the Type tab. 2 Select the check boxes for the types of objects you want to display when you search or browse. By default, all objects are displayed when searching and browsing. 3 Once all of the settings are determined, click outside the filter menu to apply the results.
■ Type ■ Date Created ■ Date Modified ■ Location Click on a column to sort the results based on that column. Click the column again to reverse the sort order. Group Results Sometimes even after refining a search, it might be handy to group the results based on a certain property type. You can group results by Name, Type, Date Created, or Date Modified. When Group By is turned on, the results are collected together based on the column selected.
To display results without grouping them 1 Click the View Options disable all groupings. drop-down ➤ Group By ➤ None to 2 Click outside the Group By menu to apply the changes. To expand and collapse groups After selecting how results are grouped, you can control whether grouped results are hidden or displayed. ■ Click a group heading to expand or collapse that group. ■ Right-click a group header and then select Expand All or Collapse All to act on all the groups on the page.
To configure the display of folder results 1 Click the View Options drop-down and select either Thumbnail View or Detail View from the context menu. 2 If Thumbnail View is selected, you can also choose to display the column headers or the text labels for the folders by selecting their respective check boxes. Perform Tasks with Files in Content Explorer Once you locate your content, you can perform different AutoCAD tasks with the files.
Task Access Generally, the command will automatically highlight and zoom in to the text, except in these cases: ■ The text is a file-level property so there is nothing to highlight on the screen. ■ The text is an object definition property that has not been instantiated in the file. For example, a block attribute for a block that has not been inserted would not be higlighted. NOTE You can instead examine the properties on the block to see the text.
Task Access NOTE This feature is available only for block references. Go to Folder Right-click on an object and select Go to Folder to go directly to the folder containing the object. Right-click on a block definition and select Go to Folder to go directly to the parent file containing the block definition. Open Drawing Right-click on an object and select Open to Open the drawing containing the selected object.
Task Access Insert Right-click on the object and select Insert to insert the object into the current AutoCAD document. You can also drag and drop the object from the display window into the current document window to insert it. Properties Right-click on the object and select Properties to view a read-only list of the properties stored in the index for the object.
Tab Description the file is contained in a watched folder, when the file is saved, these properties are indexed and can be searched using Content Explorer. TIP The property values for the properties contained in the Summary tab are searched automatically with a general search string. Fill in these values as soon as possible so that you can start refining your searches using the property:value search feature. Statistics The Statistics tab displays the created and modified dates for the file.
If the file is already contained in a watched folder, the new property is automatically indexed. The property and value can be searched using Content Explorer. View Properties on an Indexed File or Object You can view which properties have been indexed on a file or an object. Knowing which properties have been indexed allows you to create stronger search strings. 1 Right-click on the object or file for which you want to view the properties and select Properties.
NOTE Properties in bold are default properties. TIP Advanced users can add custom properties to the basic search list by accessing the Connect.Service.exe.config file and following the instructions under the heading. 2 Select another object or file to view its properties as well.
The properties window automatically updates to display the properties that have been indexed on the selected file or object. Use Saved Searches with User-Created Properties in Content Explorer When the Saved Searches feature is used in conjunction with properties and searching, you can create fast access to the files you use most often. For example, if you frequently use furniture files when designing, you can add a FURNITURE TYPE property with suitable values, such as SEATING, to your furniture files.
If you accidentally uninstall the service, the Content Explorer interface will no longer work within AutoCAD. To reinstall Content Service 1 Launch the AutoCAD installation wizard. 2 Click the Tools and Utilities button. 3 On the Configure Settings screen, select one of these options under Autodesk Content Service: ■ For Personal Access - Select this option if you intend to use AutoCAD with Content Explorer on your personal machine.
■ The Content Service may have stopped running. Check to make sure that it is still running by typing Services in the Search box of the Windows Start menu. In the Services window, locate Autodesk Content Service in the list of services and make sure that the status is Started and the Startup Type is Automatic. ■ When trying to connect to a network computer, you may encounter firewall issues.
You cannot find the Plug-ins tab on the ribbon or the Explorer button does not show up on the Plug-ins tab If the Plug-ins tab does not show up on the ribbon or the Explorer button does not show up on the Plug-ins tab of the ribbon, one reason might be that Content Explorer is not loaded as an add-in. To manually reload Content Explorer as an add-in 1 Go to the AutoCAD command line. 2 Type CUILOAD. 3 If CONTENTEXPLORER is in the list, click the Unload button to unload it. 4 Browse for the contentexplorer.
Indexing process is producing errors There are various reasons why the indexing process might encounter an issue. If you suspect that there were issues when watched folders were being indexed, you can review the indexing statistics to find out more about the errors. To review the indexing statistics in Content Explorer 1 In Content Explorer, click Configure Settings. 2 On the Configure Settings dialog, select either your local computer or a network content source and click the Statistics tab.
148
Customize the Drawing Environment 5 You can change many window and drawing environment settings in the Options dialog box. For example, you can change how often a drawing is automatically saved to a temporary file, and you can link the program to folders containing files you use frequently. You can create workspaces to set up a drawing environment that is specific to your drawing needs. Experiment with different settings until you create the drawing environment that best fits your needs.
window frame background, status bar, title bar, application menu, toolbars, and palettes. ■ Background Colors (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). You specify the background colors used in model space, layouts, and the block editor. Background colors on the Model tab change to indicate whether you are working in a 2D design context, 3D modeling (parallel projection), or 3D modeling (perspective projection). ■ UCS Icon and Crosshairs Cursor (Options dialog box, 3D Modeling tab).
■ Rollover Tooltips in the Customization Guide ■ Create Tooltips and Extended Help for Commands in the Customization Guide To set options 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click a tab. 3 Set options as desired. 4 Do either or both of the following: ■ Click Apply to record the current options settings in the system registry.
2 In the View Transitions dialog box, check one or more of the following options: ■ Enable Animation for Pan and Zoom. Makes a smooth view transition during panning and zooming. ■ Enable Animation When View Rotates. Makes a smooth view transition when the view angle is changed. ■ Enable Animation During Scripts. Makes a smooth view transition while a script is running. 3 Set the transition speed by moving the slider.
Quick Reference Commands 3DCONFIG Sets options that affect 3D display performance. CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. CLEANSCREENOFF Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition.
DRAGMODE Controls the display of objects being dragged. DRAGP1 When hardware acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new input sample from the mouse. DRAGP2 When software acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new input sample from the mouse.
INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed.
OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVEROPACITY Controls the transparency of a palette while the cursor moves over the palette. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. SAVEFILE Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session.
TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy.
Quick Reference Commands 3DCONFIG Sets options that affect 3D display performance. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.
MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps.
PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name.
VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Switch Between Model and Named Layouts You can control how you change between the Model and one or more named layouts.
Quick Reference Commands DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing.
PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command.
SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements.
You can specify the font that is displayed in both the application and text windows. To change the application font, use the Display tab (Options dialog box). NOTE This setting does not affect the text in your drawings. To change the font displayed in the Command window 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Window Elements, click Fonts.
CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.
MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps.
PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name.
VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows Windows such as the ribbon, Properties palette, tool palettes, and DesignCenter can be docked, anchored, or floated.
You can hide all the palettes at once with HIDEPALETTES and turn on all hidden palettes with SHOWPALETTES. NOTE If a palette has been turned back on manually and moved, it is not affected by SHOWPALETTES. To anchor a dockable window 1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Propterties button. Click Allow Docking. 2 Click the Properties button again. Click Anchor Right or Anchor Left.
To dock a window or palette 1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button. Click Allow Docking. 2 Click and drag the window or palette to a docking location on the right or left side of the drawing area. 3 When the outline of the window is displayed in the docking area, release the button. NOTE To place a toolbar in a docking region without docking it, hold down the Ctrl key as you drag.
HIDEPALETTES Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window. LOGFILEOFF Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON Writes the contents of the command history to a file. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SHOWPALETTES Restores the display of hidden palettes. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition.
DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in.
ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed.
OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it.
ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer.
XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Control the Display of Toolbars Similar to dockable windows, you can control the behavior of toolbars. To display or hide toolbars, right-click any toolbar to display a list of toolbars. A check mark next to a toolbar name indicates that it is displayed. Click a toolbar name in the list to display or clear the check mark. A toolbar can be docked or floating.
Quick Reference Commands CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. CLEANSCREENOFF Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. HIDEPALETTES Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window. LOGFILEOFF Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON Writes the contents of the command history to a file.
CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.
GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a session. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting.
PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed.
TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy.
Interface items that you do not need for 3D modeling are hidden, maximizing the screen area available for your work. When you make changes to your drawing display (such as moving, hiding, or displaying a toolbar or a tool palette group) and you want to preserve the display settings for future use, you can save the current settings to a workspace. Switch Workspaces You can switch to another workspace whenever you need to work on a different task from the Workspace icon on the status bar.
You can control the display order of your saved workspaces and other options in the Workspace Settings dialog box. NOTE For more information about creating or modifying workspaces, and how toolbars and menus interact with workspaces, see Customize Workspaces in the Customization Guide. Select a Sample Workspace You can experiment with the sample workspace included with the product. This predefined workspace demonstrates how you might use a workspace to streamline your work tasks.
To switch workspaces 1 On the status bar, click Workspace Switching. 2 From the list of workspaces, select the workspace you want to switch to. The workspace with a check mark is your current workspace. To change workspace settings 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Workspaces ➤ Workspace Settings. 2 In the Workspace Settings dialog box, change workspace settings as needed. 3 Click OK. To save a workspace 1 Tools ➤ Workspaces ➤ Save Current As.
WSAUTOSAVE Saves changes you made to a workspace when you switch to another work space. WSCURRENT Returns the current workspace name at the Command prompt and sets a workspace to current. Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) Profiles store drawing environment settings. You can create profiles for different users or projects, and you can share profiles by importing and exporting them as files.
If you make changes to your current profile during a work session and you want to save those changes in an ARG file, you must re-export the profile. When you export the profile with the current profile name, the ARG file is updated with the new settings. For more information about profiles, see OPTIONS in the Command Reference. To make a profile current 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options.
Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables CPROFILE Displays the name of the current profile. Customize Startup Command line switches can specify a separate startup routine for each project. You can use command line switches to specify several options when you start the program. For example, you can run a script, start with a specified drawing template, and display a specified view when a drawing is opened.
or ACADCFG environment variable is used as a way to define the configuration file and directory location. /v View name Designates a particular view of the drawing for display at startup. /ld ARX or DBX application Loads a specified ARX or DBX application. Use the following format: \.ARX If the path or file name contains spaces, then the path or file name should be wrapped in double quotes. If no path information is included, the program search path is used.
/nohardware Disables hardware acceleration Disables hardware acceleration on startup. /nossm No Sheet Set Manager window Suppresses the display of the Sheet Set Manager window on startup. /set Sheet set Loads the named sheet set on startup. Use the following format: \.DST /w Default workspace Designates which workspace in the loaded CUIx files should be restored on startup.
NOTE Command line switches and environment variables override values set in the Options dialog box for the current session only. They do not alter the system registry. To start the program with a command line switch 1 Right-click the program icon on the Windows desktop. Click Properties. 2 In the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, Shortcut tab, in the Target box, edit the parameters for the switch using the following syntax: "drive:pathname\acad.
3 Click OK. Play Back an Action Macro After an action macro is recorded with the Action Recorder, you can play back the series of recorded commands and input values. You play back an action macro from the Action Recorder panel. You can also enter the name of the action macro at the Command prompt. As an action macro is played back, you might be paused for input or requested to respond to a message or requested to insert a base point.
Record and Modify Action Macros Recording and modifying action macros is done with the Action Recorder panel on the ribbon. To learn how to record and modify action macros, see Record and Modify Action Macros in the Customization Guide. See also: ■ Record and Modify Action Macros To play back an action macro from the Action Recorder panel 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel. Click the down arrow next to the Action Macro list and select the action macro to play back. 2 Click Play.
Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. System Variables ACTPATH Specifies the additional paths to use when locating available action macros for playback. ACTRECPATH Specifies the path used to store new action macros. Migrate Custom Settings and Files Migrating from an older release of AutoCAD allows you to use your custom settings and files in the latest release.
202
Part 3: Start and Save Drawings 203
204
Start a Drawing 6 All drawings start from either a default drawing template file or a custom drawing template file that you create. Drawing template files store default settings, styles, and additional data. Overview of Starting a New Drawing Before you start to draw, you need to decide what system of drawing units that you will use in the drawing, and then choose a drawing template file appropriate for those drawing units.
Customize a Drawing Template File By customizing your own drawing template file, you save yourself a lot of work changing settings, and you also ensure that the settings are standardized. Choose a drawing template file Start a new drawing, choose a drawing template ----- file similar to what you need for your discipline and units of measurement. Specify units and precision ----- Specify a unit format and precision.
Quick Reference Commands NEW Creates a new drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Specify Units and Unit Formats Before you start to draw, you decide on the units of measurement to be used in the drawing, and set the format, precision, and other conventions to be used in coordinates and distances.
Convert Drawing Units If you start a drawing in one system of measurement (imperial or metric) and then want to switch to the other system, use SCALE to scale the model geometry by the appropriate conversion factor to obtain correct distances and dimensions. For example, to convert a drawing created in inches to centimeters, you scale the model geometry by a factor of 2.54. To convert from centimeters to inches, the scale factor is 1/2.54 or about 0.3937.
2 At the Select Objects prompt, enter all. All objects in the drawing are selected for scaling. 3 Enter a base point of *0,0. Scaling is performed relative to the world coordinate system origin, and the location of the drawing origin will remain at the WCS origin. 4 Enter a scale factor of 0.3937 (the inverse of 2.54 centimeters per inch). All objects in the drawing are now smaller, corresponding to the equivalent distance in inches.
Set the Unit Format Conventions You can set the format and the number of decimal places to be used when you enter and display linear and angular units. Set Linear Units You can choose from several common conventions to represent the format and the precision of linear distances and coordinates displayed in the Properties palette, dynamic input, the status bar, and other locations. For example, here are three variations of dynamic input.
Quick Reference Commands UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. AUNITS Sets units for angles. AUPREC Sets the display precision for angular units and coordinates. LUNITS Sets linear units. LUPREC Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates.
Select a Drawing Template File A set of drawing template files is installed with AutoCAD. Many of them are provided either for imperial or for metric units, and some are optimized for 3D modeling. All drawing template files have a .dwt file extension. While these drawing templates provide a quick way to start a new drawing, it is best to create drawing templates specific to your company and the type of drawings you create.
To start a drawing by selecting a template file 1 Click the Application menu, and click New menu ➤ Drawing. 2 In the Select Template dialog box, select a template from the list. 3 Click Open. To start a new drawing with no template file, click the arrow next to the Open button. Select one of the “no template” options from the list. To create a drawing template file from an existing drawing 1 Click the Application button, and click Open ➤ Drawing.
OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Add Identifying Information to Drawings You can keep track of your drawings more easily if you add keywords or other information to them. Use Windows Explorer Drawing properties can help you identify a drawing.
Use Sheet Set Manager Properties With the Sheet Set Manager, you can assign a sheet title, number, and a description to every sheet in a sheet set. For more information about sheet sets, see Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets on page 491. Display Properties in Fields You can assign any of the drawing properties to a field in a text object. For more information about fields, see Use Fields in Text on page 1458.
Quick Reference Commands DWGPROPS Sets and displays the file properties of the current drawing. System Variables CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format. DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. TDCREATE Stores the local time and date the drawing was created. TDINDWG Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed time between saves of the current drawing. TDUCREATE Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was created.
■ Import a KML or KMZ file with the geographic information ■ Import a location from Google Earth When you specify the geographic location of a drawing, a geographic marker is created. The geographic marker is a visual representation of the location information, and is created at a specified point on the drawing. This marker cannot be selected, but you can control whether it is displayed using the GEOMARKERVISIBILITY system variable.
To import a kml or kmz file into a drawing 1 Click Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ Set Location. 2 Click Import a KML or KMZ File. 3 Navigate to the location of the KML or KMZ file. Click Open. NOTE If a KML or KMZ file references multiple locations, only the first location is used. Click Close if the Multiple Locations Found dialog box is displayed. 4 Click or specify the coordinates for the location in the World Coordinate System (WCS) X, Y, Z format. 5 Click to specify the north direction.
Quick Reference Command GEOGRAPHICLOCATION Specifies the geographic location information for a drawing file. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. XATTACH Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref). System Variables GEOLATLONGFORMAT Controls the format of the latitude or longitude values in the Geographic Location dialog box, and the coordinate status bar in Geographic mode. GEOMARKERVISIBILITY Controls the visibility of geographic markers.
220
Open or Save a Drawing 7 You can use several methods to find and open drawings, even damaged drawings. You can save and backup drawings automatically. Open a Drawing You open drawings to work on them just as you do with other applications. In addition, you can choose from several alternative methods. To open a drawing, you can ■ Use Open on the File menu to display the Select File dialog box.
Work on Drawings During Loading You can work on drawings before they are fully open. This is useful when you work on large drawings and you want to begin working immediately. To take advantage of this capability, three conditions are required. ■ The drawing must have been saved in paper space. ■ The OPENPARTIAL system variable must be set to 1. ■ The INDEXCTL system variable must be set to a non-zero value.
Missing Reference Types Description Shapes Missing shape files are often the result of custom shapes being used in a linetype. Browse to the missing linetype file, or place the shape file in the folder with the drawing or one of the support paths defined in the Options dialog box. For information about custom shape files in linetypes, see Shapes in Custom Linetypes in the Customization Guide. You can use eTransmit to avoid missing files when sharing drawings with others outside of your company.
Recover Defective Drawing Files In some circumstances, it is possible that a drawing file becomes defective. This can result from hardware problems or transmission errors. If a drawing file is corrupt, you might be able to recover it. See Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files on page 247. Change the Default Drawing Folder Each time you start AutoCAD, the My Documents folder is the default path in each standard file selection dialog box.
Quick Reference Commands CLOSE Closes the current drawing. CLOSEALL Closes all currently open drawings. ETRANSMIT Packages a set of files for Internet transmission. OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. WHOHAS Displays ownership information for opened drawing files. System Variables DWGCHECK Checks drawings for potential problems when opening them. FILEDIA Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes.
ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where roamable customizable files were installed. Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) If you work with large drawings, you can improve performance by opening only the view and layer geometry that you want to work with. If you work with large drawings, you can use the Partial Open option of the OPEN command to select which view and layer geometry (graphical objects only) that you want to work with in a drawing.
Partial Open option is available only for drawings in AutoCAD 2004 or later format. To partially open a drawing 1 Click the Application button, and click Open ➤ Drawing. 2 In the Select File dialog box, select a drawing. 3 Click the arrow next to Open. Click Partial Open. 4 In the Partial Open dialog box, select a view; the default view is EXTENTS. You can load only geometry from model space views that are saved in the current drawing. 5 Select one or more layers.
To load additional geometry into a partially open drawing 1 Click File menu ➤ Partial Load. NOTE The Partial Load option is available only if the current drawing is a partially open drawing. 2 In the Partial Load dialog box, select a view, or click Pick Window to define a view. The default view is Extents. You can load only geometry from model space views that are saved in the current drawing. 3 Select one or more layers.
Preview Open Drawings and Layouts With Quick View, you can easily preview and switch between open drawings and the model space and layouts in an open drawing. These are displayed in thumbnail images called Quick View images at the bottom of the application window. The Quick View tools in the application status bar do the following: ■ Quick View Drawings Displays all currently open drawings in a row of Quick View drawing images.
QVLAYOUTCLOSE Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing. System Variables STATUSBAR Controls the display of the application and drawing status bars. Switch Between Open Drawings Preview and switch between all open drawings and layouts in a drawing in two-level structure with the Quick View Drawings tool. The first level displays the Quick View images of open drawings and the second level displays the images for model space and all layouts in a drawing.
Creates a drawing that is also displayed at the end of the Quick View images row. ■ Open Opens an existing drawing that is also displayed at the end of the Quick View images row. ■ Close Closes all the Quick View images. Use the Quick View Drawings Tool You can do any of the following with the Quick View Drawings tool: ■ Click a Quick View drawing image to make that drawing current.
This placeholder image is displayed in the following cases: ■ When the model space is not initialized ■ When the UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable is set to 0. In this case, the image is not updated even if you use the UPDATETHUMBSNOW command. When a drawing is saved in DXF format, it does not have a stored image for a drawing. The image is not updated even if you use the UPDATETHUMBSNOW command. A static image is displayed instead. To preview and switch between open drawings 1 Click the status bar.
To preview and switch between layouts in a drawing 1 Click the status bar. A row of Quick View images is displayed at the bottom of the program. 2 Move your cursor over a drawing image to preview the model and layouts in a drawing. 3 Click a Quick View image to make the drawing or layout current. To resize a Quick View image 1 On the status bar, click . A row of Quick View images is displayed at the bottom of the program. 2 Press Ctrl + scrollwheel over a Quick View image to resize.
UPDATETHUMBNAIL Controls updating of the thumbnail previews for views and layouts. Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing Preview and switch between the model space and layouts in the current drawing with the Quick View Layouts tool. When you click the Quick View Layouts button on the status bar, the model space and layouts in the drawing are displayed in a horizontal row. You can plot or publish when you move the cursor over a Quick View image of a layout.
Closes all the Quick View layout images.
This placeholder image is displayed in the following cases: ■ When the layout is not initialized ■ When the UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable is set to 0. In this case, the image is not updated even if you use the UPDATETHUMBSNOW command. To update a thumbnail image NOTE Verify that updatethumbnail is not set to 0 1 At the Command prompt, enter updatethumbsnow. 2 On the status bar, click . Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
UPDATETHUMBNAIL Controls updating of the thumbnail previews for views and layouts. Transfer Information between Open Drawings You can easily transfer information between drawings that are open in a single session. When you open multiple drawings in a single session, you can ■ Reference other drawings. ■ Copy and paste between drawings. ■ Drag selected objects from one drawing to another with the right-click button on your pointing device.
PASTEORIG Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing using the original coordinates. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. TASKBAR Controls whether multiple open drawings are displayed separately or grouped on the Windows taskbar. Save a Drawing You save drawing files for later use just as you do with other applications. You can also set up automatic saving and backup files and save only selected objects. When you work on a drawing, you should save it frequently.
Save with Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects When working with annotative objects, this option allows you to maintain visual fidelity for these objects when they are viewed in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier releases. Visual fidelity is controlled by the SAVEFIDELITY system variable. If you work primarily in model space, it is recommended that you turn off visual fidelity (set SAVEFIDELITY to 0).
To reduce the size of drawing files, it is recommended that you perform a full save (with ISAVEPERCENT set to 0) before transmitting or archiving a drawing. Work Internationally If you share drawing files with companies in other countries and regions, the drawing file names might contain characters that are not used in other languages.
■ Each individual object in a drawing cannot exceed an uncompressed size limit of 256MB. For example, a mesh object, when saved to a file and compressed, might be 75MB in size while the same object when uncompressed might be 257MB. In these situations, the drawing cannot be saved to an AutoCAD 2007 or earlier file format until the issues are resolved. You can resolve the size limits by breaking the drawing or objects up into several drawings or objects.
2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, select Create Backup Copy with Each Save. Click OK. To maintain visual fidelity for annotative objects 1 Click the Application button, and click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, under File Save, select Maintain Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects. 3 Click OK. To maintain large object compatibility with legacy drawing file formats 1 Click the Application button, click Options.
WBLOCK Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file. System Variables DWGCHECK Checks drawings for potential problems when opening them. DWGNAME Stores the name of the current drawing. DWGPREFIX Stores the drive and folder prefix for the drawing. DWGTITLED Indicates whether the current drawing has been named. FILEDIA Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
SAVENAME Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. Find a Drawing File You can search for a drawing using name, location, and date filters, properties such as keywords that you added to the drawing, or text strings containing a specific word or phrase. ■ Use the Search tool in Microsoft® Windows® to search for drawings using name, location, and date filters.
4 On the Date Modified tab, click All Files, or click Find All Files Created or Modified to specify a date filter. You can search for drawings modified between a specified range of dates or within a specified number of months or days. 5 Click Find Now. 6 Select one or more files from the search results. Click OK. 7 In the Select File dialog box, click Open. Quick Reference Commands OPEN Opens an existing drawing file.
on a regular basis to ensure sufficient space is provided for temporary files. If not enough space is available for temporary files, you may experience errors or instability in the program. If you want to use a file that contains custom interface elements, specify it in the Customizations Files item on the Files tab (Options dialog box). The default customization file is acad.cuix. To change a search path 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click the Options button.
Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files 8 If a drawing file is damaged or if your program terminates unexpectedly, you can recover some or all of the data by using commands to find and correct errors, or by reverting to a backup file. Repair a Damaged Drawing File If a drawing file is damaged, you can recover some or all of the data by using commands to find and correct errors. Repair and Recovery When an error occurs, diagnostic information is recorded in the acad.
Example: Auditing Files Auditing a file generates a description of problems with a drawing file and recommendations for correcting them. As you start the audit, you specify whether you want the program to try to fix the problems it encounters.
2 Restart the program. 3 In the Drawing Recovery window, under Backup Files, double-click the drawing node to expand it. On the list, double-click one of the drawing or backup files to open it. If the program detects that the drawing has been damaged, a message is displayed asking if you want to proceed. 4 Enter y to proceed. As the program attempts to repair the drawing, a diagnostic report is displayed.
Quick Reference Commands AUDIT Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors. DRAWINGRECOVERY Displays a list of drawing files that can be recovered after a program or system failure. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. RECOVER Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file. RECOVERALL Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file. System Variables AUDITCTL Controls whether AUDIT creates an audit report (ADT) file.
Use Backup Files In the Open and Save tab (Options dialog box), you can specify that backup files are created when you save drawings. If you do, each time you save a drawing, the previous version of your drawing is saved to a file with the same name and a .bak file extension. The backup file is located in the same folder as the drawing file. You can revert to your backup version by renaming the .bak file in Windows Explorer to a file with a .dwg extension.
3 Click File menu ➤ Rename 4 Enter a new name using the .dwg file extension. 5 Open the file as you would open any other drawing file. Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. Recover from a System Failure A hardware problem, power failure, or software problem can cause this program to terminate unexpectedly. If this happens, you can restore the drawing files that were open.
For each drawing, you can open and choose from the following files if they exist: ■ DrawingFileName_recover.dwg ■ DrawingFileName_a_b_nnnn.sv$ ■ DrawingFileName.dwg ■ DrawingFileName.bak NOTE The drawing, backup, and recover files are listed in the order of their time stamps—the time when they were last saved. Double-click a top-level drawing node listed under Backup Files to display up to four files as listed above. Right-click any node under Backup Files to display shortcut menu options.
2 In the Drawing Recovery Manager, under Backup Files, double-click a drawing node to list all available drawing and backup files. 3 Double-click a file to open it. If the drawing file is damaged, the drawing is automatically repaired, if possible. To remove a drawing from the Drawing Recovery Manager 1 If necessary, click the Application button, and click Drawing Utilities ➤ Open the Drawing Recovery Manager. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Restore the drawing and then save it.
RECOVER Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file. System Variables DRSTATE Indicates whether the Drawing Recovery Manager window is open or closed. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. RECOVERYMODE Controls whether drawing recovery information is recorded after a system failure. REPORTERROR Controls whether an error report can be sent to Autodesk if the program closes unexpectedly.
256
Maintain Standards in Drawings 9 Drawings are easier to interpret if you set standards to enforce consistency. You can set standards for layer names, dimension styles, and other elements; check drawings against these standards; and then change any properties that do not conform. Overview of CAD Standards You can create a standards file to define common properties in order to maintain consistency throughout your drawing files.
Standards File After you define standards, you save them as a standards file. You can then associate the standards file with one or more drawing files. After you associate a standards file with a drawing, you should periodically check the drawing to make sure it conforms with the standards. How a Standards Audit Works When you check a drawing for standards violations, each named object of a specific type is checked against the standards files associated with the drawing.
■ Linetype ■ Lineweight ■ Plot style mode ■ Plot style name (when the PSTYLEMODE system variable is set to 0) The following layer properties are not checked by the layer plug-in: ■ On/Off ■ Freeze/Thaw ■ Lock ■ Plot/No Plot Standards Settings A variety of settings that may be useful to CAD managers are available in the CAD Standards Settings dialog box. This dialog box can be accessed by clicking Settings in the Check Standards and Configure Standards dialog boxes.
Define Standards To set standards, you create a file that defines properties for layers, dimension styles, linetypes, and text styles, and you save it as a standards file with the .dws file name extension. Depending on how you organize your projects, you may decide to create and associate more than one project-specific standards file with an individual drawing. When you audit the drawing file, conflicts may arise between settings in the standards files.
2 In the Configure Standards dialog box, Standards tab, click the plus (+) button (Add Standards File). 3 In the Select Standards File dialog box, select a standards file. Click Open. 4 (Optional) Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to associate additional standards files with the current drawing. 5 Click OK. To remove a standards file from the current drawing 1 Click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Configure.
To specify which standards plug-ins to use when auditing a drawing 1 Click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Configure. 2 In the Configure Standards dialog box, Plug-ins tab, do one of the following: ■ Select the check box for at least one plug-in to audit a drawing for standards violations. ■ To select all plug-ins, right-click in the Plug-ins list. Click Select All. (You can clear all plug-ins. Right-click in the Plug-ins list. Click Clear All.) 3 Click OK.
Check a Single Drawing You can use the CHECKSTANDARDS command to view all standards violations in the current drawing. The Check Standards dialog box reports each nonstandard object, along with any suggested fixes. You can choose to fix or ignore each reported standards violation. If you ignore a reported violation, it is flagged in the drawing. You can turn off the display of ignored problems so that they are not reported as violations the next time you audit the drawing.
Use Notification of Standards Violations While Working in a Drawing You can set options for notification in the CAD Standards Settings dialog box and with the STANDARDSVIOLATION system variable. If you select Display Alert upon Standards Violation in the dialog box, then an alert is displayed when a violation occurs while you work. If you select Display Standards Status Bar Icon, an icon is displayed when you open a file associated with a standards file and when you create or modify nonstandard objects.
NOTE If you select Display Alert upon Standards Violation in the Check Standards dialog box and you fix a violation, you can return to a fixing operation where you left off. If you select Display Standards Status Bar icon and you click the icon and fix a violation, you must return to a standards-fixing operation from the beginning. To audit a drawing for standards violations 1 Open a drawing that has one or more associated standards files.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have cycled through all standards violations. 5 Click Close. To turn the display of ignored problems on or off 1 In a drawing with one or more associated standards files, click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Check. 2 In the Check Standards dialog box, click Settings. 3 In the CAD Standards Settings dialog box, select or clear Show Ignored Problems. Click OK. To turn notification for standards violations on or off 1 Click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Configure.
To create a standards check file for the Batch Standards Checker 1 Click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Check. 2 In the Batch Standards Checker, click File menu ➤ New Check File. (You can also click New on the Batch Standards Checker toolbar.) 3 On the Drawings tab, click the + button (Add Drawing). 4 In the Open dialog box, select a drawing to audit. 5 (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 if you want to add additional drawings to the standards check file. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
5 In the Open dialog box, select a standards file to use as an override. Click Open. 6 (Optional) Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to add additional standards files as overrides. 7 In the Batch Standards Checker, click File menu ➤ Save Check File. (You can also click Save on the Batch Standards Checker toolbar.) To audit a set of drawings for standards violations 1 Click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Check. 2 Open an existing standards check file, or create a new one.
2 Open the standards check file that generated the report you want to view. 3 In the Batch Standards Checker, click Check menu ➤ View Report.(You can also click View Report on the Batch Standards Checker toolbar.) The report is displayed in a browser window. 4 Select one of the following options to filter the data displayed in the report: ■ Overview. Summarizes the number of problems encountered in each audited drawing. ■ Plug-ins.
STANDARDS Manages the association of standards files with drawings. STANDARDSVIOLATION Specifies whether a user is notified of standards violations in the current drawing when a nonstandard object is created or modified. Batch Standards Checker Audits a set of drawings for standards violations. Translate Layer Names and Properties You can reorganize a drawing's layers to match a set of layer standards.
For example, if your drawing includes layers that you do not need, you may want to remove those layers. Reducing the number of layers makes working with the remaining layers more manageable. To convert a drawing's layers to standard layer settings 1 Click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Layer Translator. 2 In the Layer Translator, do one of the following: ■ Click Load to load layers from a drawing, a drawing template, or a drawing standards file.
■ To save layer mappings to a file, click Save. In the Save Layer Mappings dialog box, enter a file name. Click OK. 5 Click Translate to perform the layer translations you have specified. To specify which layers are displayed in the drawing area 1 Click Manage tab ➤ CAD Standards panel ➤ Layer Translator. 2 In the Layer Translator, click Settings. 3 In the Settings dialog box, do one of the following: ■ To display objects on selected layers in your drawing, select Show Layer Contents When Selected.
Part 4: Control the Drawing Views 273
274
Change Views 10 You can magnify the details in your drawing for a closer view or shift the view to a different part of the drawing. If you save views by name, you can restore them later. Pan or Zoom a View You can pan to reposition the view in the drawing area or zoom to change magnification. With the Realtime option of PAN, you pan dynamically by moving your pointing device.
Zoom to Magnify a Specified Rectangular Area You can quickly zoom on a rectangular area of your drawing by specifying two diagonal corners of the area you are interested in. The lower-left corner of the area you specify becomes the lower-left corner of the new display. The shape of the zoom area you specify does not correspond exactly to the new view, which must fit the shape of the viewport. Zoom in Real Time With the Realtime option, you zoom dynamically by moving your pointing device up or down.
See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports on page 450 ■ Pointing Devices ■ Toolbars on page 40 To pan by dragging 1 Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Pan. 2 When the hand cursor is displayed, click and hold your pointing device as you move. NOTE If you are using a wheel mouse, hold down the wheel button and move the mouse. 3 To exit, press Enter or Esc, or right-click. To pan by specifying points 1 Click View menu ➤ Pan ➤ Point. 2 Specify a base point. This is the point you want to change.
3 Specify a second (pan to) point. This is the new location for the point you selected first. To zoom by dragging 1 Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Realtime. 2 When the magnifying glass cursor is displayed, click and hold your pointing device and drag vertically to zoom in and out. 3 To exit, press Enter or Esc, or right-click. To zoom in to an area by specifying its boundaries 1 Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Window.
To restore the previous view ■ Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Previous. Zoom Previous restores only the view magnification and position, not the previous content of an edited drawing. Quick Reference Commands PAN Moves the view planar to the screen. UNDO Reverses the effect of commands. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition.
RTDISPLAY Controls the display of raster images and OLE objects during Realtime ZOOM or PAN. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth.
■ View category that you assign to the view (optional) ■ The location of the view (the Model or a specific named layout) ■ Layer visibility in the drawing at the time the view is saved ■ User coordinate system ■ 3D perspective ■ Live section ■ Visual style ■ Background Restore a Named View You can use named views to do the following: ■ Restore a view that you use frequently while working in model space. ■ Restore a view on a layout that is zoomed into an area of interest on the layout.
To save and name a view 1 Do one of the following: ■ If you have more than one viewport in model space, click inside the viewport that contains the view you want to save. ■ If you are working in a layout, select the viewport. 2 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ View Manager. 3 In the View Manager, click New. 4 In the New View dialog box, View Name box, enter a name for the view. If the drawing is part of a sheet set, the view categories for the sheet set are listed.
To rename a view 1 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ View Manager. 2 In the View Manager, click the view name you want to change. If the view isn’t already displayed, expand the appropriate View list, and then click a view name. 3 In the General section of the Properties panel, select the view name. Enter a new name. 4 Click OK. To change the properties of a view 1 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ View Manager. 2 In the View Manager, click the view name you want to change.
Quick Reference Commands CAMERA Sets a camera and target location to create and save a 3D perspective view of objects. VIEW Saves and restores named model space views, layout views, and preset views. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. ZOOM Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport. Control the 3D Projection Style You can view both parallel and perspective projection of a 3D model.
Quick Reference Commands 3DORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only. DVIEW Defines parallel projection or perspective views by using a camera and target. System Variables BACKZ Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. FRONTZ Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units.
Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) Perspective projections require a distance between a theoretical camera and a target point. Small distances produce severe perspective effects; large distances produce milder effects. A perspective view remains in effect until the perspective effect is turned off or until a new view is defined in its place. To define a perspective view of a 3D model using DVIEW 1 At the Command prompt, enter dview. 2 Select the objects to display. 3 Enter ca (Camera).
To turn off a perspective view using DVIEW 1 At the Command prompt, enter dview. 2 Select the objects to display. 3 Enter o (Off). Perspective is turned off and the view is restored to a parallel projection. Quick Reference Commands 3DORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only. DVIEW Defines parallel projection or perspective views by using a camera and target.
VIEWDIR Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport, expressed in UCS coordinates. VIEWMODE Stores the View mode for the current viewport. VIEWTWIST Stores the view rotation angle for the current viewport measured relative to the WCS. WORLDVIEW Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS. Define a Parallel Projection You can define a parallel projection.
■ Press Enter without selecting objects to see a representation of a house that shows the current viewing angle. 3 Enter ca (Camera). By default, a camera point is set at the center of the drawing. 4 Adjust the view as if you're aiming a camera. You can set your view dynamically by moving the crosshairs and clicking. 5 To switch between the angle-input methods, enter t (Toggle Angle). You can also adjust the view with one of two angle-input methods.
System Variables PERSPECTIVE Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view. VIEWDIR Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport, expressed in UCS coordinates. WORLDVIEW Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS. Choose Preset 3D Views You can select predefined standard orthographic and isometric views by name or description. A quick way to set a view is to choose one of the predefined 3D views.
Quick Reference Commands VIEW Saves and restores named model space views, layout views, and preset views. Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles You can define a viewing direction by entering the coordinate values of a point or the measures of two angles of rotation. This point represents your position in 3D space as you view the model while looking toward the origin (0,0,0). Viewpoint coordinate values are relative to the world coordinate system unless you change the WORLDVIEW system variable.
2 Enter r (Rotate) to specify a new direction using two angles. 3 Enter an angle in the XY plane measured from the positive X axis. 4 Enter an angle from the XY plane that represents your position while viewing the model in the direction of 0,0,0. To set standard views with VPOINT (AEC convention) 1 Click View menu ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint. 2 Enter a coordinate according to the viewpoint you want: ■ Enter 0,0,1 for a top (plan) view. ■ Enter 0,-1,0 for a front view. ■ Enter 1,0,0 for a right side view.
System Variables WORLDVIEW Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS. Change to a View of the XY Plane You can change the current viewpoint to a plan view of the current UCS, a previously saved UCS, or the WCS. A plan view is a view aimed toward the origin (0,0,0) from a point on the positive Z axis. This results in a view of the XY plane.
PLAN Displays an orthographic view of the XY plane of a specified user coordinate system. System Variables BACKZ Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. FRONTZ Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. VIEWDIR Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport, expressed in UCS coordinates.
From the ribbon on page 25, you can change some frequently used settings or open the Visual Styles Manager. The following predefined visual styles are supplied with the product: ■ 2D Wireframe. Displays objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. NOTE Raster images, OLE objects, linetypes, and lineweights are visible. ■ Conceptual. Displays objects using smooth shading and the Gooch face style. The Gooch face style transitions between cool and warm colors, rather than dark and light.
In shaded visual styles, faces are lit by two distant light sources that follow the viewpoint as you move around the model. This default lighting is designed to illuminate all faces in the model so that they are visually discernable. Default lighting is available only when other lights, including the sun, are off. Select a visual style and change its settings at any time. The changes are reflected in the viewports to which the visual style is applied.
To store a visual style on a tool palette 1 Click View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ ➤ Visual Styles Manager. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 3 In the Tool Palettes window, click the Visual Styles tab. 4 In the Visual Styles Manager, select the sample image of the visual style. 5 Below the images, click the Export the Selected Visual Style to the Tool Palette button. To use a visual style from another drawing 1 Open the drawing that has the visual style that you want to use.
To restore the default settings of a predefined visual style 1 Click View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ ➤ Visual Styles Manager. 2 Right-click a predefined visual style and click Reset to Default. (Predefined visual styles display a drawing icon at bottom right in the sample image.) Quick Reference Commands SHADEMODE Starts the VSCURRENT command. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.
Customize a Visual Style You can create your own visual styles by changing the face and edge settings and using shadows and backgrounds. Shade and Color Faces Shading and color effects control the display of faces in a model. Face Styles The face style defines the shading on a face. Realistic (below left) is meant to produce the effect of realism. Gooch (below right) can show details better by softening the contrast between lit areas and shadowed areas.
the colors as a gradient between the faces’ vertices. This gives objects a smooth appearance. For the Smoothest option, the Per-Pixel Lighting setting must be enabled in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box. The colors are computed for individual pixels, giving a smoother appearance. If not, the Smooth setting is used instead. Highlights The size of an object’s highlights affect the perception of shininess. A smaller, more intense highlight makes objects appear shinier.
Face Color Modes Display face colors in the normal way, or specify a face color mode. Monochrome displays faces in the varying shades of a specified color. Tint shades faces by changing the hue and saturation values based on a specified color. Desaturate softens colors. To change the display of faces from smooth to faceted 1 Click View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ ➤ Visual Styles Manager.
To control the face style 1 Click View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ ➤ Visual Styles Manager. 2 With the current visual style selected in the sample images, under Face Settings, Face Style, select one of the following options: ■ Realistic. Shades faces as close as possible to how they would appear in the real world. ■ Gooch. Uses cool and warm colors instead of dark and light to enhance the display of faces that might be shadowed and difficult to see in a realistic display. ■ None.
3 On the Visual Styles panel, set the opacity by dragging the opacity slider. Quick Reference Commands VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. VISUALSTYLESCLOSE Closes the Visual Styles Manager. VSCURRENT Sets the visual style in the current viewport. VSSAVE Saves a visual style. System Variables VSFACECOLORMODE Controls how the color of faces is calculated.
Display Backgrounds and Shadows The visual style also controls the display of backgrounds and shadows in the viewport. Backgrounds You can use a color, a gradient fill, an image, or the sun & sky as a background in the viewport in any 3D visual style, even one that does not shade objects. When Background is set to On in the current visual style, the background is displayed. To use a background, you first create a named view with a background and set the named view as current in the viewport.
See also: ■ Overview of Lighting on page 2143 ■ Use Shadows in Rendering on page 2268 To control the display of shadows in a viewport 1 Click View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ ➤ Visual Styles Manager. 2 With the current visual style selected in the sample images, under Lighting, Shadow Display, select Off, Ground Shadow, or Mapped Object Shadows. To set a solid as a viewport background 1 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ View Manager. 2 In the View Manager, click the view name you want to change.
4 Select Solid from the Background Override drop-down list. 5 In the Background dialog box, click the swatch under the Color section. 6 In the Select Color dialog box, specify the color you want to use for the background. 7 Click OK. 8 In the Background dialog box, click OK. 9 In the View Manager, click Set Current. 10 Click OK. To set a gradient as a viewport background 1 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ View Manager. 2 In the View Manager, click the view name you want to change.
2 In the View Manager, click the view name you want to change. If the view isn’t already displayed, expand the appropriate View list, and then click a view name. 3 In the Properties panel, click the Background Override field. 4 Select Image from the Background Override drop-down list. 5 In the Background dialog box, click Browse and specify the image for the background. 6 Click Adjust Image. 7 In the Adjust Background Image dialog box, specify the desired options for the image.
3 In the View Manager, click the view name you want to change. If the view isn’t already displayed, expand the appropriate View list, and then click a view name. 4 In the middle section, click the Background Override drop-down list and select Sun&Sky. 5 In the Adjust Sun & Sky Background dialog box, specify the desired options for the background. 6 Click OK. 7 In the View Manager, click Set Current. Click OK.
SHADOWPLANELOCATION Controls the location of an invisible ground plane used to display shadows. VSBACKGROUNDS Controls whether backgrounds are displayed in the visual style applied to the current viewport. VSSHADOWS Controls whether a visual style displays shadows. Control the Display of Edges Different edge types can be displayed using different colors and linetypes. You can also add special effects, such as jitter and line extensions.
OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable and occluded color with OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable. To control the display of occluded lines in 2D View, you can: ■ Hide them or make them partially visible with dashes and dots. ■ Make them completely visible. ■ Make them distinctive or indistinctive by changing its color. NOTE You can only change occluded color when the occluded lines are partially or completely visible.
To add a line extension effect to edges 1 Click View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ ➤ Visual Styles Manager. 2 With the current visual style selected in the sample images, in Edge Modifiers, click the Line Extensions Edges button and adjust the amount of line extensions in Line Extensions. NOTE The line extension is scaled to have an appropriate appearance in viewports of different sizes. The line extension effect is not applied to a line that is less than twice as long as the line extension would be.
2 With the current visual style selected to Hidden in sample images, in Edge Settings, Show, click Facet Edges. 3 In Occluded Edges, Show, select Yes. 4 In Color drop-down, select a color from the list. 5 In Linetype drop-down, select a linetype. To control the display of occluded lines and color 1 Click View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ ➤ Visual Styles Manager. 2 With the current visual style selected to 2D Wireframe in sample images, in 2D Hide - Occluded Lines, Linetype drop-down, select a linetype.
System Variables FACETRES Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. INTERSECTIONCOLOR Controls the color of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. INTERSECTIONDISPLAY Specifies the display of intersection polylines. VSEDGECOLOR Sets the color of edges in the visual style in the current viewport. VSEDGEJITTER Makes edges on 3D objects appear wavy, as though they were sketched with a pencil.
VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR Specifies the color of intersection polylines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE Sets the linetype for intersection lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. VSOBSCUREDEDGES Controls whether obscured (hidden) edges are displayed. VSOBSCUREDCOLOR Specifies the color of obscured (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
Adaptive Degradation Adaptive degradation is a way to control performance of features as you use them. With adaptive degradation on, if performance goes below the level you specify, effects are turned off or turned down in a certain order until performance returns to an acceptable level. Each visual style sets a degradation order appropriate for itself, based on a master order that you can adjust manually.
Quick Reference Commands 3DCONFIG Sets options that affect 3D display performance. GRAPHICSCONFIG Sets options for 3D display performance. System Variables VSBACKGROUNDS Controls whether backgrounds are displayed in the visual style applied to the current viewport. VSFACEOPACITY Turns on and off a preset level of transparency for 3D objects. VSINTERSECTIONEDGES Controls the display of intersection edges in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
NOTE If you are using a graphics card that does not support all of the available hardware effects, you can plot a drawing through software emulation. (To enable the emulation of hardware effects in software, enter 3dconfig at the Command prompt. In the Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box, click Manual Tune. Then click Emulate Unsupported Hardware Effects in Software When Plotting.
driver.
To view the performance tuner log 1 On the status bar, click Performance Tuner. 2 In the Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box, click View Tune Log. 3 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To tune performance manually 1 On the status bar, click Performance Tuner. 2 In the Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box, click Manual Tune.
Quick Reference Commands 3DCONFIG Sets options that affect 3D display performance. GRAPHICSCONFIG Sets options for 3D display performance. System Variables VSSHADOWS Controls whether a visual style displays shadows. Memory Tuning Performance can also be improved by adding memory to your system. This is especially true when working on larger models. The system requirements for AutoCAD require at least 512 MB of physical memory (RAM) for working in 2D.
■ How to set the switch. Refer to the Microsoft website for details regarding the /3GB switch. To check physical memory (RAM) 1 On the Start menu (Windows), click Control Panel (or Settings ➤ Control Panel). 2 In the Control Panel, click System. You might have to click Performance and Maintenance and then System. 3 On the General tab, review the information about your computer. The amount of RAM should be listed on this tab.
322
Use Viewing Tools 11 When working in 3D, you'll often want to display different views so that you can see and verify the 3D effects in your drawing. Specify 3D Views You can control the 3D navigation display, projection, and visualization tools. Overview of 3D Views You can create an interactive view of your drawing in the current viewport.
3DFLY Changes the 3D view in a drawing interactively to create the appearance of flying through the model. 3DFORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space without constraining roll. 3DORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only. 3DORBITCTR Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view. 3DPAN When a drawing is in a Perspective view, starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically.
System Variables CAMERADISPLAY Turns the display of camera objects on or off. CAMERAHEIGHT Specifies the default height for new camera objects. Use 3D Navigation Tools 3D navigation tools allow you to view objects in a drawing from different angles, heights, and distances. Use the following 3D tools to orbit, swivel, adjust distance, zoom, and pan in a 3D view. ■ 3D Orbit. Moves around a target. The target of the view stays stationary while the camera location, or point of view, moves.
Animate a Navigation You can create a preview animation of any navigation. Create the preview to fine-tune your animation before you create a motion path animation. You can create, record, play back, and save the animation. For more information about previewing an animation, see Create Preview Animations on page 396. For more information about creating motion path animations, see Create Motion Path Animations on page 400.
To change a visual style in a 3D view 1 Start any 3D navigation command, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Visual Styles. 2 Select a visual style. For more information about visual styles, see Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model on page 294. To start a continuous orbit 1 Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Orbit drop-down ➤ Continuous Orbit. 2 Click in the drawing and drag the cursor to start a continuous motion.
Quick Reference Commands 3DCORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space with continuous motion. 3DDISTANCE Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away. 3DFORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space without constraining roll. 3DORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only. 3DORBITCTR Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view.
When you walk through a model, you travel along the XY plane. When you fly through a model, you are not constrained by the XY plane, so you appear to “fly” over an area in a model. Use the Keyboard and Mouse Interactions to Walk and Fly You can use a standard set of keys and mouse interactions to walk and fly through a drawing. Use the four arrow keys or the W, A, S, and D keys to move up, down, left, or right. To toggle between walk and fly mode, press the F key.
NOTE The Animations panel is hidden by default. To display the Animations panel: In 3D Modeling workspace, click the Render tab, then right-click and choose Show Panels, and then click Animations. To start walk mode ■ Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Walk and Fly drop-down ➤ Walk. To start fly mode ■ Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Walk and Fly drop-down ➤ Fly. To specify Walk or Fly settings 1 Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Walk and Fly drop-down ➤ Walk and Fly Settings.
To change the viewing position in the Position Locator window 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Walk and Fly drop-down ➤ Walk. ■ Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Walk and Fly drop-down ➤ Fly. 2 In the Position Locator window, Preview area, click the position indicator (a colored dot) and drag it to a new position. 3 If the target indicator is displayed, click it and drag it to the new target. 4 In the General section, make any changes to the current settings.
WALKFLYSETTINGS Controls the walk and fly navigation settings. Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW) You can change a view without interrupting your current operation using a feature that combines panning and zooming. With dynamic viewing, you can display the effects of changing your viewpoint as you make the changes. Using this method, you can also simplify your view temporarily by choosing only the objects that you need to determine the view.
To set clipping planes (DVIEW) 1 At the Command prompt, enter dview. 2 Select the objects on which to base the view. 3 At the Command prompt, enter cl (Clip). 4 Enter f to set a front clipping plane or b to set a back clipping plane, or press Enter. 5 Position the clipping plane by dragging the slider or entering a distance from the target. 6 Press Enter to exit the command. NOTE You can also set clipping planes when you create a camera glyph. For more information, see Change Camera Properties on page 392.
WORLDVIEW Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS. Use ViewCube ViewCube provides visual feedback of the current orientation of a model. You can use the ViewCube tool to adjust the viewpoint of the model. Overview of ViewCube ViewCube tool is a navigation tool that is displayed when you are working in 2D model space or 3D visual style. With ViewCube tool, you can switch between standard and isometric views.
In addition to controlling the inactive opacity level of the ViewCube tool, you can also control the following properties for the ViewCube tool: ■ Size ■ Position ■ Display of the UCS menu ■ Default orientation ■ Compass display Using the Compass The compass is displayed below the ViewCube tool and indicates which direction North is defined for the model.
4 Turn the check box on or off to hide or display the ViewCube in the current viewport To display or hide the ViewCube tool in all viewports and drawings 1 At the command prompt, enter options and press Enter.
To control the inactive opacity of the ViewCube tool 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop down ➤ ViewCube. 2 Right-click the ViewCube tool and click ViewCube Settings. 3 In the ViewCube Settings dialog box, under Display, drag the Inactive Opacity slider left or right. Dragging the slider to the left increases the transparency of the ViewCube tool, while dragging the slider to the right increases the opacity of the ViewCube tool. 4 Click OK.
System Variables NAVVCUBEDISPLAY Controls the display of the ViewCube tool in the current visual style and the current viewport. NAVVCUBELOCATION Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed. NAVVCUBEOPACITY Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive. NAVVCUBESIZE Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool.
To display the ViewCube menu To display the ViewCube menu, do one of the following: ■ Right-click on the compass, Home icon, or the main area of the ViewCube tool. ■ Click the context menu button located below the ViewCube tool. Quick Reference Commands NAVVCUBE Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube tool rotates the scene. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables PERSPECTIVE Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view.
of the model to a three-quarter view, based on a viewpoint defined by three sides of the model. Clicking one of the edges reorients the view of the model to a half view based on two sides of the model. The outline of the ViewCube tool helps you identify the form of orientation it is in: standard or fixed. When the ViewCube tool is in standard orientation, not orientated to one of the twenty-six predefined parts, its outline is displayed as dashed.
Roll a Face View When you view a model from one of the face views, two roll arrow buttons are displayed near the ViewCube tool. Use the roll arrows to rotate the current view 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise around the center of the view. Switch to an Adjacent Face When the ViewCube tool is active while viewing a model from one of the face views, four orthogonal triangles are displayed near the ViewCube tool. You use these triangles to switch to one of the adjacent face views.
To view an adjacent face NOTE Make sure a face view is current. ■ Click one of the triangles displayed near the edges of the ViewCube tool. To interactively reorient the view ■ Click the ViewCube tool, hold down the left mouse button, and drag in the direction that you want to orbit the model. To use animated transitions when reorienting a view to a preset orientation 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop down ➤ ViewCube. 2 Right-click the ViewCube tool, and click ViewCube Settings.
To roll a face view NOTE Make sure a face view is displayed. ■ Click one of the roll arrows displayed above and to the right of the ViewCube tool. The left roll arrow rotates the view 90 degrees counterclockwise; the right roll arrow rotates the view 90 degrees clockwise. Quick Reference Commands NAVVCUBE Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube tool rotates the scene. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
The following illustration shows the same model viewed from the same viewing direction, but with different view projections. Parallel Perspective When you change the view for a model, the view is updated using the previous projection mode unless the current projection mode for the ViewCube tool is Perspective with Ortho Faces.
System Variables NAVVCUBEDISPLAY Controls the display of the ViewCube tool in the current visual style and the current viewport. PERSPECTIVE Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view. Home View You can define a Home view for a model so you can restore a familiar view when you use the navigation tools. The Home view is a special view stored with a model that makes it easy to return to a known or familiar view. You can define any view of the model as the Home view.
To reset the Home view to the default view 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, under File Save, click Thumbnail Preview Settings. 3 In the Thumbnail Preview Settings dialog box, click Reset Home to Default. 4 Click OK to close the Thumbnail Preview Settings dialog box. 5 Click OK to close the Options dialog box. Quick Reference Commands NAVVCUBE Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube tool rotates the scene.
Quick Reference Commands NAVVCUBE Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube tool rotates the scene. Change the UCS with ViewCube With the ViewCube tool you can change the current UCS for the model to one of the named UCSs saved with the model or you can define a new UCS. The UCS menu, located below the ViewCube tool, displays the name of the current UCS in the model.
To control the display of the UCS menu 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop down ➤ ViewCube. 2 Right-click the ViewCube tool and click ViewCube Settings. 3 In the ViewCube Settings dialog box, under Display, click Show UCS Menu. The UCS menu is displayed below the ViewCube tool. You can see which UCS is current and switch to a different named UCS. 4 Click OK. To switch to a different UCS 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop down ➤ ViewCube.
To switch to WCS 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop down ➤ ViewCube. 2 On the UCS menu located below the ViewCube tool, click the down arrow next to the current UCS name. 3 Select a WCS from the list. To set the orientation of the ViewCube tool based on the current UCS or WCS 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop down ➤ ViewCube. 2 Right-click the ViewCube tool and click ViewCube Settings. 3 In the ViewCube Settings dialog box, select Orient ViewCube to Current UCS.
Navigate with SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that allow you to access different 2D and 3D navigation tools from a single tool. Overview of SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that are divided into different sections known as wedges. Each wedge on a wheel represents a single navigation tool. SteeringWheels, also known as wheels, can save you time by combining many of the common navigation tools into a single interface.
The following illustrations show the different wheels available: 2D Navigation Wheel Full Navigation Wheel View Object Wheel (Basic Wheel) Mini Full Navigation Wheel Mini View Object Wheel Tour Building Wheel (Basic Wheel) Mini Tour Building Wheel NOTE In paper space only 2D Wheel is available. Display and Use Wheels Pressing and dragging on a wedge of a wheel is the primary mode of interaction.
Appearance of the Wheels You can control the appearance of the wheels by switching between the different styles of wheels that are available, or by adjusting the size and opacity. Wheels (except the 2D Navigation wheel) are available in two different styles: big and mini. The size of a wheel controls how large or small the wedges and labels appear on the wheel; the opacity level controls the visibility of the objects in the model behind the wheel.
Moving the slider to the left decreases the size of the wheel, while moving the slider to the right increases the size of the wheel. 5 Click OK. To change the opacity of the wheels 1 Click Navigation Bar ➤ Steering Wheels drop-down ➤ click one of the available SteeringWheels. 2 Right-click the wheel and click SteeringWheel Settings. 3 In the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box, under Big Wheels or Mini Wheels, slide the Wheel Opacity slider left or right.
Messages are displayed when you use the navigation tools. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables NAVSWHEELMODE Specifies the current mode of the SteeringWheel. NAVSWHEELOPACITYBIG Controls the opacity of the big SteeringWheels. NAVSWHEELOPACITYMINI Controls the opacity of the mini SteeringWheels.
The Wheel menu has the following options: ■ Mini View Object Wheel. Displays the mini View Object wheel. ■ Mini Tour Building Wheel. Displays the mini Tour Building wheel. ■ Mini Full Navigation Wheel. Displays the mini Full Navigation wheel. ■ Full Navigation Wheel. Displays the big Full Navigation wheel. ■ Basic Wheels. Displays the big View Object or Tour Building wheel. ■ Go Home. Goes to the Home view saved with the model.
Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. System Variables NAVSWHEELMODE Specifies the current mode of the SteeringWheel. Navigation Wheels You can choose from several different wheels. Some wheels are designed for 2D navigation while other wheels are better suited for 3D navigation. 2D Navigation Wheel The 2D Navigation wheel is for basic navigation of 2D views.
To switch to the 2D navigation wheel ■ Click Navigation Bar ➤ SteeringWheels drop-down ➤ 2D Wheel. Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. System Variables NAVSWHEELMODE Specifies the current mode of the SteeringWheel. View Object Wheels The View Object wheels are used for 3D navigation. Use these wheels to view individual or groups of objects in a model.
■ Orbit. Rotates the current view around a fixed pivot point at the view’s center. Mini View Object Wheel The mini View Object wheel wedges have the following options: ■ Zoom (Top wedge). Adjusts the magnification of the current view. ■ Rewind (Right wedge). Restores the most recent view. You can move backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right. ■ Pan (Bottom wedge). Repositions the current view by panning. ■ Orbit (Left wedge). Rotates the current view around a fixed pivot point.
Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. System Variables NAVSWHEELMODE Specifies the current mode of the SteeringWheel. Tour Building Wheels The Tour Building wheels are for 3D navigation. Use these wheels to navigate within the interior of a model. With the Tour Building wheels (big and mini), you can move through a model, such as a building, an assembly line, ship, or oil rig.
■ Up/DownTool. Slides the current view of a model along the Z axis of the model. Mini Tour Building Wheel The mini Tour Building wheel wedges have the following options: ■ Walk (Top wedge). Simulates walking through a model. ■ Rewind (Right wedge). Restores the most recent view. You can move backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right. ■ Up/Down (Bottom wedge). Slides the current view of a model along the Z axis of the model. ■ Look (Left wedge). Swivels the current view.
Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. System Variables NAVSWHEELMODE Specifies the current mode of the SteeringWheel. Full Navigation Wheels The Full Navigation wheels combine the 2D and 3D navigation tools found on the 2D Navigation, View Object, and Tour Building wheels into a single wheel.
■ Pan. Repositions the current view by panning. ■ Orbit. Rotates the current view around a fixed pivot point. ■ Center. Specifies a point on a model to adjust the center of the current view or change the target point used for some of the navigation tools. ■ Walk. Simulates walking through a model. ■ Look. Swivels the current view. ■ Up/Down. Slides the current view of a model along the Z axis of the model.
To switch to the mini Full Navigation wheel Do one of the following: ■ Click Navigation Bar ➤ Steering Wheels drop-down ➤ Mini Full Navigation Wheel . ■ Right-click the wheel, and click Mini Full Navigation Wheel. Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. System Variables NAVSWHEELMODE Specifies the current mode of the SteeringWheel. Navigation Tools The navigation tools reorient the current view of a model.
is displayed in addition to the cursor. The sphere indicates that the point below the cursor in the model will be the center of the current view when you release the mouse button. The model is centered on the sphere. NOTE If the cursor is not over the model, the center cannot be set and a prohibited cursor is displayed. The point defined by the Center tool provides a focal point for the Zoom tool and a pivot point for the Orbit tool.
If you are using one of the Full Navigation wheels, hold down the CTRL key before using the Zoom tool. Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Forward Tool The Forward tool adjusts the distance between the current point of view and the defined pivot point of the model.
The Drag Distance indicator is displayed. NOTE If you click the Forward wedge once, the model moves forward 50% of the distance between the current location and the pivot point. 3 Drag the cursor up or down to change the distance from which you view the model. 4 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor.
Walking through a Model When using the Look tool from the big Full Navigation wheel, you can walk through a model by using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Use the properties dialog box for the SteeringWheels to adjust the walk speed. Invert Vertical Axis When you drag the cursor upward, the target point of the view raises; dragging the cursor downward lowers the target point of the view. Use the properties dialog box for the SteeringWheels to invert the vertical axis for the Look tool.
3 Drag to change the direction in which you are looking. 4 While holding down the button on your pointing device, press the arrow keys to walk in the model. 5 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. 6 Click Close to exit the wheel. To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool 1 Click Navigation Bar ➤ Steering Wheels drop-down ➤ click one of the available SteeringWheels. 2 Right-click the wheel and click SteeringWheel Settings.
Specify the Pivot Point The pivot point is the base point used when rotating the model with the Orbit tool. You can specify the pivot point in the following ways: ■ Default pivot point. When you first open a model, the target point of the current view is used as the pivot point for orbiting the model. ■ Select objects. You can select objects before the Orbit tool is used to calculate the pivot point. The pivot point is calculated based on the center of the extents of the selected objects.
To orbit a model with the Orbit tool 1 Display one of the View Object or Full Navigation wheels. 2 Click and hold down the Orbit wedge. The cursor changes to the Orbit cursor. 3 Drag to rotate the model. NOTE Use the Center tool to re-center the model in the current view, if you are using one of the Full Navigation or View Object wheels. 4 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.
4 Click OK. To maintain the up direction for the Orbit tool 1 Click Navigation Bar ➤ Steering Wheels drop-down ➤ click one of the View Object or Full Navigation wheels. 2 Right-click the wheel and click SteeringWheel Settings. 3 In the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box, click Maintain Up Direction for Orbit Tool. Orbiting the model is constrained along the XY plane and Z directions. 4 Click OK.
TIP If the cursor reaches the edge of the screen, you can continue panning by dragging further to force it to wrap around the screen. To pan the view with the Pan tool 1 Display the 2D Navigation wheel, one of the Full Navigation wheels, or the mini View Object wheel. 2 Click and hold the Pan wedge. The cursor changes to the Pan cursor. 3 Drag to reposition the model. 4 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.
separate navigation history is maintained for each window; it is not maintained after the window is closed. Rewind navigation history is view-specific. With the Rewind tool, you can retrieve previous views from the navigation history. From the navigation history, you can restore a previous view or scroll through all of the saved views. When a view change occurs, the previous view is recorded to the navigation history.
2 Right-click the wheel and click SteeringWheel Settings. 3 In the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box, select one of the following: ■ Never - Only display thumbnails for view changes made with the SteeringWheels. ■ On Demand When the Bracket Is Moved Over an Empty Frame Display thumbnails on demand for a previous view change when using the Rewind UI. ■ Automatically When a View Change Occurs - Display thumbnails for all view changes saved to the navigation history. 4 Click OK.
bright orange indicator, while the previous elevation is shown by the dim orange indicator. To change the elevation of a view 1 Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the Tour Building wheels. 2 Click and hold down the Up/Down wedge. The Vertical Distance indicator is displayed. 3 Drag up or down to change the elevation of the view. 4 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.
Constrain the Walk Angle When walking through a model, you can constrain the movement angle to the ground plane. If the Constrain Walk Angle to Ground Plane option is enabled, you can freely walk around while maintaining a constant camera viewpoint elevation; if the walk angle is not constrained, you will “fly” in the direction you are looking. Use the properties dialog box for the SteeringWheels to constrain the movement angle to the ground plane for the Walk tool.
NOTE While walking, press and hold down the + (plus) key to temporarily increase your movement speed. 4 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. To change the movement speed for the Walk tool 1 Display a wheel. 2 Right-click the wheel and click SteeringWheel Settings. 3 In the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box, under Walk Tool, drag the Walk Speed slider to the left to decrease the walking speed or to the right to increase the walking speed. 4 Click OK.
Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Zoom Tool The Zoom tool adjusts the magnification of the current view of a model. You use the Zoom tool to change the zoom magnification of a model. The following mouse click and key combinations are available to control how the Zoom tool behaves: ■ SHIFT+click.
NOTE When you use the Zoom tool from the Full Navigation wheel or the View Object wheel, the point in the view where you click to zoom becomes the Center point for future Orbit operations until you either use the Zoom tool again or use the Center tool. If you press CTRL before you click the Zoom wedge, the Center point does not change. Zoom Constraints When changing the magnification of a model with the Zoom tool, you cannot zoom in any further than the focus point or out past the extents of the model.
To zoom a view in and out by dragging 1 Display the 2D Navigation wheel, one of the Full Navigation wheels, or the mini View Object wheel. 2 Click and hold down the Zoom wedge. The cursor changes to the Zoom cursor. 3 Drag vertically to zoom in or out. 4 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a wheel is displayed 1 Display one of the wheels other than the big Tour Building wheel.
■ Recorded Walk. Records an animation by navigating around and through a model. Shot Sequences Shot sequences are used to organize related shots together. These sequences are also called view categories. By using shot sequences, you can do the following: ■ Quickly locate a shot ■ Play back more than one shot at a time ■ Control the order in which shots are played back Using ShowMotion ShowMotion is made up of three main parts: shot thumbnails, shot sequence thumbnails, and the ShowMotion control.
ShowMotion. When ShowMotion is not pinned, the ShowMotion control and all thumbnails disappear if the focus is switched away from ShowMotion. ■ Play All. Starts the playback of shots in all shot sequences. Shots are played left to right, starting with the leftmost shot sequence. ■ Stop. Stops the playback of the current shot. ■ Turn On/Off Looping. Enables or disables playback looping for the animation assigned to the shot or shot sequence when played back. ■ New Shot.
System Variables SHOWMOTIONPIN Controls the default state of the thumbnail shots. THUMBSIZE Specifies the maximum generated size for thumbnail previews in pixels. Create and Modify Shots and Shot Sequences You create and modify shots from ShowMotion. As you create or modify a shot, a thumbnail is generated and added to a shot sequence. Create and Modify a Shot When a shot is created, it must be given a name and view type.
The shortcut menu of a shot sequence has the following options: ■ Rename. Renames a shot sequence. ■ Delete. Removes a shot sequence. ■ Move Left and Move Right. Changes the position of a shot sequence in ShowMotion by one position to the left or right. ■ Update the Thumbnail. Updates the thumbnails for all shots in a shot sequence or for all shots saved with the model. To create a still shot 1 On the ShowMotion control, click New Shot.
8 Click on the 3D canvas and drag the mouse along the desired path of animation. Release the mouse to stop recording. 9 Click OK. To create a cinematic shot 1 On the ShowMotion control, click New Shot. 2 In the New View/Shot Properties dialog box, in the View name box, enter a name. 3 In the View Category drop-down list, select a view category. 4 In the View Type drop-down list, select Cinematic.
To resequence a shot or shot sequence 1 On ShowMotion, hover the cursor over the shot or shot sequence you want to resequence. 2 Right-click, and click Move Left or Move Right. To delete a shot 1 On ShowMotion, hover the cursor over the shot you want to delete. 2 Right-click, and click Delete. To delete a shot sequence 1 On ShowMotion, hover the cursor over the shot sequence you want to delete. 2 Right-click, and click Delete. 3 In the ShowMotion - Delete View Category dialog box, click Delete Category.
NEWSHOT Creates a named view with motion that is played back when viewed with ShowMotion. Play Back a Shot You can view shots individually or together in a shot sequence. Once a shot is created, you can play back the animation assigned to the shot by using the view controls located on each shot or shot sequence thumbnail or the ShowMotion control. The available view controls are: ■ Play. Starts the playback of a shot or shot sequence.
To play a shot 1 On ShowMotion, hover the cursor over the shot sequence that contains the shot you want to play. 2 Position the cursor over the thumbnail of the shot you want to view. 3 On the shot thumbnail, in the upper-left corner, click the Play button. To play all shots within a shot sequence 1 On ShowMotion, hover the cursor over the shot sequence that contains the shots you want to play.
VIEWGO Restores a named view. VIEWPLAY Plays the animation associated to a named view. Define a 3D View with a Camera Define a 3D view by placing a camera in model space and adjusting camera settings to suit your needs. Overview of Cameras You can place a camera in a drawing to define a 3D view. You can turn a camera on or off in a drawing and use grips to edit a camera’s location, target, or lens length.
Quick Reference Commands CAMERA Sets a camera and target location to create and save a 3D perspective view of objects. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables CAMERADISPLAY Turns the display of camera objects on or off. CAMERAHEIGHT Specifies the default height for new camera objects. Create a Camera Set a camera and target location to create and save 3D perspective views of objects.
To create a camera from the Tool palette 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Tool Palettes window, click the Camera tool palette tab to make it active. 3 Select a camera type. Drag the camera icon from the tool palette, and click in the drawing where you want to set its location. 4 Click again in the drawing when you want to place the target. To display a camera ■ Click Render tab ➤ Camera panel ➤ Show Cameras.
Change Camera Properties You can modify a camera’s lens length, change its front and back clipping planes, name a camera, and turn the display of all cameras on or off in a drawing. When you select a camera, the Camera Preview dialog box opens to display the camera's view. There are several ways to change camera settings: ■ Click and drag grips to resize or relocate a lens length or field of view.
■ Use the Dynamic Input tooltip to enter X,Y, Z coordinate values. ■ Modify camera properties in the Camera Properties palette.
NOTE The Camera panel is hidden by default. To display the Camera panel: In 3D Modeling workspace, click the Render tab, then right-click and choose Show Panels, and then click Camera. To change a camera’s lens length 1 If cameras are not already displayed in the drawing, click Render tab ➤ Camera panel ➤ Show Cameras. 2 Click the camera glyph. 3 Click a Lens Length/FOV grip tool. 4 Move the cursor and click where you want to position the lens. 5 Press Enter.
To set a camera’s clipping planes 1 If cameras are not already displayed in the drawing, click Render tab ➤ Camera panel ➤ Show Cameras. 2 Double-click the camera whose clipping planes you want to set. 3 In the Properties palette, Clipping section, Clipping option, select Front On, Back On, or Front and Back On. 4 In the Front Plane or Back Plane option, enter numeric values. 5 Press Enter.
2 Click the camera glyph whose target you want to change. 3 Click the Target Distance grip tool (the blue grip in the center), drag it to the new location, and click to place the target. 4 Press Enter. To specify whether the camera glyph plots 1 If cameras are not already displayed in the drawing, click Render tab ➤ Camera panel ➤ Show Cameras. 2 Double-click a camera. 3 In the Properties palette, Camera section, Plot option, click Yes or No.
The following commands can be used to create an animation ■ 3DCORBIT ■ 3DDISTANCE ■ 3DFLY ■ 3DFORBIT ■ 3DORBIT ■ 3DPAN ■ 3DSWIVEL ■ 3DWALK ■ 3DZOOM To learn more about the 3D navigation tools available for creating an animation, see Use 3D Navigation Tools on page 325. To create a preview animation 1 If the Animations panel is not displayed on the Render tab, right-click the Render tab and click Panels ➤ Animations. 2 Start any 3D navigation command such as 3DORBIT.
6 To review the animation, click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Play. In the Animation Preview dialog box, view the animation, and do the following: ■ If you want to preview the animation in a different visual style, select another style from the drop-down list. ■ If you are satisfied with the animation playback, click the Pause button. Then click the Save button. 7 In the Save As dialog box, select a file location, file name, and file type (AVI, MPG, MOV, or WMV). 8 Click Save.
9 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands 3DCLIP Starts an interactive 3D view and opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window. 3DCORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space with continuous motion. 3DDISTANCE Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away. 3DFLY Changes the 3D view in a drawing interactively to create the appearance of flying through the model. 3DFORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space without constraining roll.
3DZOOM Zooms in and out in a perspective view. Create Motion Path Animations Motion path animations, such as 3D animated walk-throughs of a model, allow you to visually demonstrate a model to both a technical and non-technical audience. You can record and play back a navigation to communicate your design intent dynamically. Control a Camera Motion Path You control the camera motion, and therefore the animation, by linking the camera and its target to a point or a path.
3 Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Motion Path. 4 In the Motion Path Animation dialog box, Camera section, click either Point or Path. 5 Do one of the following: ■ To specify a new camera point, click the Pick Point button, and specify a point in the drawing. Enter a name for the point. Click OK. ■ To specify a new camera path, click the Select Path button, and specify a path in the drawing. Enter a name for the path. Click OK.
Specify Motion Path Settings You determine the format of the animation file of a motion path animation by specifying settings in the Motion Path Animation dialog box. Several settings control the animation's frame rate, duration, resolution, visual style, and file format. To view a reverse motion path animation 1 If the Animations panel is not displayed on the Render tab, right-click the Render tab and click Panels ➤ Animations. 2 Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Motion Path.
2 Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Motion Path. 3 In the Motion Path Animation dialog box, Animation Settings section, select a resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. To set the video format 1 If the Animations panel is not displayed on the Render tab, right-click the Render tab and click Panels ➤ Animations. 2 Click Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Motion Path.
3 In the Motion Path Animations dialog box, do the following: ■ Specify a point or path for the camera. ■ Specify a point or path for the target. ■ Adjust any animation settings. 4 To preview the animation, click the Preview button. 5 In the Animation Preview window, view the animation. When the preview animation is complete, close the Animation Preview window. 6 In the Motion Path Animations dialog box, click OK.
You start navigation tools by clicking one of the buttons on the navigation bar or selecting one of the tools from a list that is displayed when you click the smaller portion of a split button. The following unified navigation tools are available from the navigation bar: ■ ViewCube. Indicates the current orientation of a model and is used to reorient the current view of a model. ■ SteeringWheels. Collection of wheels that offer rapid switching between specialized navigation tools. ■ ShowMotion.
■ Use 3D Navigation Tools on page 325 ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing on page 328 Quick Reference Commands NAVBAR Provides access to navigation and orientation tools from a single interface. System Variables NAVBARDISPLAY Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports.
To reposition the navigation bar and ViewCube 1 On the navigation bar, click Customize. 2 Click Customize menu ➤ Docking Positions ➤ check Link to ViewCube. When Link to ViewCube is checked, both the navigation bar and ViewCube are repositioned together around the current window. When ViewCube is not displayed, the navigation bar is docked in the same location in which ViewCube would be instead. 3 Click Customize menu ➤ Docking Positions ➤ and then a docking position.
Quick Reference Commands NAVBAR Provides access to navigation and orientation tools from a single interface. System Variables NAVBARDISPLAY Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports. Control the Display of Navigation Tools on the Navigation Bar You can control which unified and product-specific navigation tools are displayed on the navigation bar with the Customize menu. The Customize menu is displayed by clicking the Customize button on the lower-right side of the navigation bar.
A check mark next to a navigation tool’s name indicates it is displayed on the navigation bar. Uncheck the navigation tool to remove it from the navigation bar. Alternately, right click a tool from the navigation bar and click Remove From Navigation Bar. Quick Reference Commands NAVBAR Provides access to navigation and orientation tools from a single interface. System Variables NAVBARDISPLAY Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports.
When a view change occurs with the 3Dconnexion 3D mouse, the ViewCube tool is reoriented to reflect the current view. You can change the behavior of the 3Dconnexion 3D mouse from the navigation bar. 3Dconnexion options on the navigation bar Option Description Example Object Mode Navigates and reorients the view in the direction of the controller cap. Move the controller cap right to pan the view to the right. Walk Mode Simulates walking through a model.
Configuration Editor to customize the operations of these buttons. When you click any of these buttons on the device, you can ■ Fit the view to the model extents. Rotates the view of the object around the center of the scene and zooms out to fit the scene into the viewport. ■ Reorient the current view to a preset view. Returns the view of the object to a predetermined view. ■ Maintain selection sensitivity. Reorients the model around a defined pivot point based on the current selection.
412
Display Multiple Views in Model Space 12 To see several views at the same time, you can split the drawing area of the Model layout into separate viewing areas called model space viewports. You can save arrangements of model space viewports for reuse at any time. Set Model Space Viewports On the Model layout, you can split the drawing area into one or more adjacent rectangular views known as model space viewports. Viewports are areas that display different views of your model.
You can also create viewports on a named (paper space) layout. You use those viewports, called layout viewports, to arrange the views of your drawing on a sheet. You can move and resize layout viewports. By using layout viewports, you have more control over the display; for example, you can freeze certain layers in one layout viewport without affecting the others. For more information about layouts and layout viewports, see Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) on page 431.
You can easily modify model space viewports by splitting and joining them. If you want to join two viewports, they must share a common edge of the same length. To subdivide a viewport on the Model layout 1 If you have more than one viewport, click inside the viewport you want to subdivide. 2 To indicate how many model space viewports should be created, do one of the following: ■ Click View menu ➤ Viewports ➤ 2 Viewports. ■ Click View menu ➤ Viewports ➤ 3 Viewports.
To restore a single viewport on the Model layout ■ Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Viewports ➤ Viewport Configurations List ➤ Single To switch from a named layout to the Model layout ■ Click the Model tab at the bottom of the drawing area. Quick Reference Commands MODEL Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space.
To draw a line using two model space viewports, you start the line in the current viewport, make another viewport current by clicking within it, and then specify the endpoint of the line in the second viewport. In a large drawing, you can use this method to draw a line from a detail in one corner to a detail in a distant corner. To make a viewport current ■ Click anywhere within the viewport border. To cycle through viewports without clicking ■ Press Ctrl+ R repeatedly.
Save and Restore Model Layout Viewport Arrangements Arrangements of model viewports can be saved and restored by name. You do not have to set up viewports and views every time you need them. With VPORTS, viewport arrangements can be saved and later restored by name.
To delete a saved viewport arrangement 1 Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Named. 2 In the Viewports dialog box, Named Viewports tab, select the name of the viewport configuration you want to delete. 3 Press DELETE. To view a list of saved viewport arrangements ■ Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Named. The Viewports dialog box is displayed. All saved viewport arrangements in the drawing are listed on the Named Viewports tab under Named Viewports.
420
Part 5: Organize Drawings and Layouts 421
422
Create Single-View Drawings (Model Space) 13 To create a two dimensional drawing that has one view, you can create the drawing and its annotation entirely in model space. This is the traditional method for creating drawings with AutoCAD®. With this method, you create the building, mechanical part, or geographic area that you want to represent at full scale (1:1), but you create the text, dimensions, and the title block of the drawing at a scale to match the intended plot scale.
With this method, you always draw geometric objects at full scale (1:1) and text, dimensions, and other annotation at a scale that will appear at the correct size when you output the drawing. For information about using annotative objects and scaling annotations automatically, see Scale Annotations on page 1324.
VIEWSIZE Stores the height of the view displayed in the current viewport, measured in drawing units. Draw, Scale, and Annotate in Model Space If you draw and plot from model space, you must determine and apply a scale factor to annotate objects before you plot. You can draw and plot entirely from model space. This method is useful primarily for two-dimensional drawings that have a single view.
Specify the display style of drawing units with the UNITS command. The default drawing unit type is decimal. Set the Scale for Annotations and Blocks Before you draw, you should set the scale for dimensions, annotations, and blocks in your drawings. Scaling these elements beforehand ensures that they are at the correct size when you plot the final drawing. You should enter the scale for the following objects: ■ Text.
1 (plotted unit) = 48 (drawing units) Using the same calculation, the scale factor for 1 centimeter = 1 meter is 100, and the scale factor for 1 inch = 20 feet is 240. Sample Scale Ratios The sample architectural scale ratios in the table can be used to calculate text sizes in model space.
To specify the display style for drawing units 1 Click Format menu ➤ Units. 2 In the Drawing Units dialog box, set the unit values for your drawing. 3 As you change unit settings, you can see examples under Sample Output. ■ Under Length, select a unit type and level of precision. This determines the display style for linear drawing units. ■ Under Drawing Units for DesignCenter Blocks, select the unit that you want used to scale blocks, images, or other content inserted into the drawing.
LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. LTSCALE PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables CELTSCALE Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.
LUNITS Sets linear units. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style.
Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) 14 Paper space is a sheet layout environment where you can specify the size of your sheet, add a title block, display multiple views of your model, and create dimensions and notes for your drawing. Quick Start for Layouts There are two distinct working environments, or “spaces,” in which you can create objects in a drawing. Typically, a model composed of geometric objects is created in a three-dimensional space called model space.
Each layout viewport is like a picture frame containing a “photograph” of the model in model space. Each layout viewport contains a view that displays the model at the scale and orientation that you specify. You can also specify which layers are visible in each layout viewport. After you finish arranging the layout, you turn off the layer that contains the layout viewport objects. The views are still visible, and you can plot the layout without displaying the viewport boundaries.
PSETUPIN Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout. PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. VPLAYER Sets layer visibility within viewports. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. PSLTSCALE Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports. TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
■ Initialize a named layout. ■ Specify layout page settings such as output device, paper size, drawing area, output scale, and drawing orientation. ■ Insert a title block into the layout (unless you have started with a drawing template that already has a title block). ■ Create a new layer to be used for layout viewports. ■ Create layout viewports and position them on the layout. ■ Set the orientation, scale, and layer visibility of the view in each layout viewport.
PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PSETUPIN Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout. PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. VPLAYER Sets layer visibility within viewports. VPMAX Expands the current layout viewport for editing. VPMIN Restores the current layout viewport.
Work in Model Space By default, you start working in a limitless drawing area called model space. In model space, you draw, view, and edit your model. You first decide whether one unit represents one millimeter, one centimeter, one inch, one foot, or whatever unit is most convenient or customary in your business. You then create your model at 1:1 scale. In model space, you can view and edit model space objects. The crosshairs cursor is active over the entire drawing area.
PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current. Work on a Named Layout Named layouts access an area called paper space.
You can create a new layout using one of the following methods: ■ Add a new layout with no settings and then specify the settings in the Page Setup Manager. ■ Use the Create Layout wizard to create the layout tab and specify settings. ■ Copy a layout and its settings from the current drawing file. ■ Import a layout from an existing drawing template (DWT) file or drawing (DWG) file. NOTE You can create multiple layouts in a drawing; each layout can contain different page setup settings.
To activate the previous layout 1 Right-click any layout tab or the Model tab. 2 Click Activate Previous Layout. To select all layouts ■ Right-click any layout tab. Click Select All Layouts. Quick Reference LAYOUT Creates and modifies drawing layouts. LAYOUTWIZARD Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings. MODEL Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout. MSPACE In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport.
VPLAYER Sets layer visibility within viewports. CTAB Returns the name of the current layout in the drawing. CVPORT Displays the identification number of the current viewport. LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT Controls whether a viewport is created automatically on each new layout added to a drawing. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout.
Create and Modify Objects in a Layout Viewport If you plan to create or modify objects, use the Maximize Viewport button on the status bar to make the layout viewport fill the application window. The center point and the layer visibility settings of the layout viewport are retained, and the surrounding objects are displayed.
To switch between model space and paper space on a layout On a layout, use one of the following methods: ■ If you are in paper space, double-click within a layout viewport. You are now in model space. The selected layout viewport becomes the current viewport, and you can pan the view and change layer properties. If you need to make significant changes to the model, it is recommended that you use VPMAX to maximize the layout viewport or switch to the Model tab.
MSPACE In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport. PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. VPMAX Expands the current layout viewport for editing. VPMIN Restores the current layout viewport. VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE Indicates whether the viewport is maximized or not. Export a Layout to Model Space You can export all visible objects from the current layout to model space.
Object Type Representation in Exported Drawing Constraints Dimensional constraints are removed. Standard or dynamic block (with or without attributes) Standard or dynamic blocks, with or without attributes, that exceed the boundaries of the layout viewport will be converted to a new, anonymous block. Attributes are converted to text objects in the block. NOTE The “Allow Exploding” setting (a setting on the block definition) is ignored if the block exceeds the boundaries of the layout viewport.
■ Some objects are converted or exploded in order to trim them. ■ Viewports in a layout can each have a different visual style; only a single visual style can be used in model space. ■ Polylines with width that is clipped by the viewport boundary may not be accurately trimmed in the exported drawing. Recommendations When exporting a layout to model space, consider the following: ■ The performance of the EXPORTLAYOUT command may be slower if a model space viewport is active.
To achieve better visual fidelity for a drawing containing AEC objects 1 In an open drawing, enter aectoacad. The AECTOACAD command creates a new DWG file with all AEC objects exploded into basic AutoCAD objects. NOTE It is also recommended to select Insert as the bind type when using the AECTOACAD command. 2 Navigate to the converted drawing. Click Open. 3 On the command line, enter exportlatyout.
Create Nonrectangular Layout Viewports You can create a new viewport with nonrectangular boundaries by converting an object drawn in paper space into a layout viewport. You can use the MVIEW command to create nonrectangular viewports. ■ With the Object option, you can select a closed object, such as a circle or closed polyline created in paper space, to convert into a layout viewport.
A nonrectangular viewport consists of two objects: the viewport itself and the clipping boundary. You can make changes to the viewport, the clipping boundary, or both. NOTE In the Properties palette, the default selection for a nonrectangular viewport is Viewport. This is because you are more likely to change the properties of the viewport than of the clipping boundary.
The list includes top, bottom, front, back, left, right, and isometric views, along with any named views that are saved in the drawing. The selected view is displayed under Preview. 7 Click OK. 8 In the drawing area, specify two points to indicate the area to contain the viewport configuration. To place a named viewport configuration into a layout 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Named.
5 ■ Enter p (Polygonal) to specify a series of points to define a polygonal boundary. ■ Select a paper space object that will define the new viewport boundary. Quick Reference MVIEW Creates and controls layout viewports. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. VPCLIP Clips layout viewport objects and reshapes the viewport border. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout.
NOTE You can modify the list of scales that are displayed in all view and plot scale lists with SCALELISTEDIT. After you add a new scale to the default scale list, you can use the Reset button in the Edit Drawing Scales dialog box to add the new scale to your drawing. When you work in a layout, the scale factor of a view in a layout viewport represents a ratio between the actual size of the model displayed in the viewport and the size of the layout.
For more information about annotation scaling, see Scale Annotations on page 1324. To modify a layout viewport scale using the Properties palette 1 Make sure you are on a layout tab in paper space. 2 Click the border of the viewport whose scale you want to modify. 3 Right-click, and then click Properties. 4 In the Properties palette, select Standard Scale, and then select a new scale from the list. The scale you choose is applied to the viewport.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. ZOOM Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport. Control Visibility in Layout Viewports You can control the visibility of objects in layout viewports using several methods. These methods are useful for emphasizing or hiding different elements of a drawing, and for reducing screen regeneration time.
Thawing the layer restores visibility. The easiest way to freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport is to use the Layer Properties Manager. In the Layer Properties Manager, on the right side, use the column labeled VP Freeze to freeze one or more layers in the current layout viewport. To display the VP Freeze column, you must be on a layout. Specify the current layout viewport by double-clicking anywhere within its borders.
To freeze or thaw layers in all viewports 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layer panel ➤ Layer Properties. 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select one or more layers to freeze or thaw. Hold down Ctrl to select more than one layer. Hold down Shift to select a sequence of layers. 4 In the Freeze column, click the icon to freeze or thaw. To freeze or thaw layers in paper space 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Make sure that you are in paper space. (On the status bar, PAPER is on.
3 Click the New Layer button to create a layer. 4 Rename the new layer. 5 Click the icon in the Freeze column to change the layer's state to frozen. The sun icon means that a layer is thawed; the snowflake icon means that a layer is frozen. Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. VPLAYER Sets layer visibility within viewports. Screen Objects in Layout Viewports Screening refers to applying less ink to an object when it is plotted.
5 Click Save & Close. 6 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 7 In the Page Setup dialog box, Plot Device tab, select the edited plot style table from the Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments) list. 8 Double-click within the layout viewport that contains the objects whose screening you want to change. 9 Select the objects whose plot style you want to change. 10 Right-click in the drawing area and click Properties.
New layout viewports are turned on by default. If you turn off the layout viewports you aren't using, you can copy layout viewports without waiting for each one to regenerate. If you don't want to plot a layout viewport, you can turn the layout viewport off. To turn viewports on or off using the Properties palette 1 Make sure you are on a layout tab in paper space. 2 Click the border of the viewport to turn on or off. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Layer panel ➤ Layer Properties.
MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports You can scale linetypes in paper space either based on the drawing units of the space in which the object was created or based on the paper space units. You can set thePSLTSCALE system variable to maintain the same linetype scaling for objects displayed at different zoom factors in a layout and in a layout viewport.
To scale linetypes globally in paper space 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype Manager, click Show Details. 3 Under Global Scale Factor, enter a global scale to apply to the linetypes. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. PSLTSCALE Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports.
To adjust the views on a layout with precision, you can create construction geometry, use object snaps on the model space objects displayed in layout viewports, or use one of the drafting aids on the status bar. To align objects between viewports using a construction line 1 Make sure you are on a layout tab. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Construction Line. 3 Specify a point in the first viewport. Specify a second point to determine a line for the alignment.
4 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 5 Select the viewport to align to the first viewport. Press Enter. 6 When prompted for a base point, specify a point in the second viewport. Choose a point that corresponds with the point selected in the first viewport. 7 When prompted for the second point, hold down Shift and right-click. Click Object Snap ➤ Perpendicular. 8 Click the construction line you created. The first and second viewports, and the objects in the viewports, are aligned.
Quick Reference MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. MVSETUP Sets up the specifications of a drawing. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. UCSMAN Manages UCS definitions. UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon.
Another way is to use the Align and then Rotate View options in the MVSETUP command. NOTE The ROTATE command rotates individual objects only and should not be used to try to rotate a view. To rotate a view within a viewport 1 At the Command prompt, enter vprotateassoc. 2 Set the value to 1. 3 Make sure you are on a layout tab. 4 Select the viewport with the view you want to rotate. 5 Enter r (Rotate) to rotate the view to a specified angle or with two points. 6 Specify a base point for the rotation.
To rotate the view 90 degrees clockwise, enter 90. To rotate the view 90 degrees counter-clockwise, enter -90. 5 Click View menu ➤ 3D Views ➤ Plan View ➤ Current UCS. The entire view rotates within the viewport. You may need to specify the scale of the viewport again. To rotate a layout view using MVSETUP 1 On a layout, enter mvsetup at the Command prompt. 2 Enter a (Align). 3 Enter r (Rotate) to rotate the view to a specified angle or with two points.
UCSMAN Manages UCS definitions. UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. UCSVP Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect the UCS of the current viewport. VIEWTWIST Stores the view rotation angle for the current viewport measured relative to the WCS. VPROTATEASSOC Controls whether the view within a viewport is rotated with the viewport when the viewport is rotated.
dialog box). The layout template has a .dwt or .dwg extension like a drawing template or drawing file, but it contains little information not essential to the layout. When you create a new layout template, any named items, such as blocks, layers, and dimension styles, that are used in the layout are saved with the template. These definition table items are imported as part of the layout settings if you import this template into a new layout.
To save a layout template 1 At the Command prompt, enter layout. 2 At the prompt, enter sa to save the current layout as a template. 3 Enter the name of the layout you are saving. 4 In the Create Drawing File dialog box, enter a name for the drawing template file you are saving. 5 In Files of Type, select Drawing Template File (*.dwt). 6 Click Save. To insert a layout using DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
PCINWIZARD Displays a wizard to import PCP and PC2 configuration file plot settings into the Model or current named (paper space) layout. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. TDCREATE Stores the local time and date the drawing was created. TDUCREATE Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was created. TDUPDATE Stores the local time and date of the last update/save. TDUUPDATE Stores the universal time and date of the last update or save.
470
Work with Sheets in a Sheet Set 15 With the Sheet Set Manager, you can organize drawing layouts into named sheet sets. The sheets in a sheet set can be transmitted, published, and archived as a unit. Sheet sets facilitate the organization and management of drawings in a project, and improve the communication in a work group. Quick Start for Sheet Sets A sheet set is an organized collection of sheets from several drawing files. A sheet is a selected layout from a drawing file.
You can manage, transmit, publish, and archive sheet sets as a unit. Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful.
SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened. SSMPOLLTIME Controls whether plotting a sheet set, multi-sheet plot file, or plot spool file can be interrupted by other plot jobs. SSMSHEETSTATUS Controls how the status data in a sheet set is refreshed. SSMSTATE Indicates whether the Sheet Set Manager window is open or closed.
Sheet Views Tab. Displays an organized list of all sheet views in the sheet set. Only sheet views created with AutoCAD 2005 and later are listed. Model Views Tab. Lists the paths and folder names for the drawings containing model space views to be used in the sheet set. ■ Click a folder to list the drawing files that are located in that folder. ■ Click a drawing file to list the named model space views that are available for placement in the current sheet.
Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened.
Create and Manage a Sheet Set There are several methods for setting up and organizing a sheet set. You can also include relevant information with a sheet set and its components. Create a Sheet Set You create a sheet set with the Create a Sheet Set wizard. In the wizard, you can either create a sheet set from scratch based on existing drawings or use an example sheet set as a template. Layouts from specified drawing files are imported into the sheet set.
■ Create a page setup overrides file. Create or identify a DWT file to store page setups for plotting and publishing. This file, called the page setup overrides file, can be used to apply a single page setup to all sheets in a sheet set, overriding the individual page setups stored in each drawing. NOTE Although it is possible to use several layouts from the same drawing file as separate sheets in a sheet set, it is not recommended. This makes concurrent access to each layout by multiple users impossible.
recommended that you copy the existing DST file to another file name. Finally, rename the backup file from the DS$ file extension to the DST file extension. Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager.
SSMSTATE Indicates whether the Sheet Set Manager window is open or closed. Organize a Sheet Set With a large sheet set, you will find it essential to organize sheets and views in the tree view. On the Sheet List tab, sheets can be arranged into collections called subsets. On the Sheet Views tab, views can be arranged into collections called categories. Use Sheet Subsets Sheet subsets are often associated with a discipline such as architecture or mechanical design.
You can nest categories into other categories as needed. To move a view to a different category, drag them in the tree view or use the Set Category shortcut menu option. To create a new subset in the sheet list 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, right-click the sheet set node (at the top of the list), or an existing subset. Click New Subset. 3 In the Subset Properties dialog box, under Subset Name, enter the name of the new subset. Click OK.
5 If a list of blocks is displayed, select the callout blocks to be used for the views in this view category. You can add blocks to the list by clicking the Add Blocks button. To remove a subset from the sheet list 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, drag all sheets out of the subset that you want to remove. 3 Right-click the subset that you want to remove. Click Remove Subset.
SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened.
from layouts in several drawings. In the current drawing, you can drag a layout tab directly onto the Sheets area of the Sheet List tab in the Sheet Set Manager. ■ Create a new sheet. As an alternative to importing existing layouts, you can create a new sheet. When you place views in this sheet, the drawing files associated with the views are attached as xrefs to the sheet drawing.
NOTE You can quickly confirm whether a sheet is in the expected folder by looking at Details at the bottom of the Sheet List tab. If the selected sheet is not in the expected location, path information for both Expected Location and Found Location is displayed in Details. ■ Add a view to a sheet. From the Model Views tab, you can easily add a view to a sheet by placing a named model space view or the entire drawing onto the current sheet.
all the sheets in the sheet set. Once a sheet list table is created, you also have options to edit, update, or delete the cell content of the table. You can create a sheet list table from the shortcut menu of sheet set subsets and sheets only when a sheet is open. You can also create sheet list tables for multiple subsets and sheets. Any sheets added to a subset later on are automatically added to the sheet list table.
NOTE The xref is attached using a relative path. If you need to change the path to a fully specified (absolute) path, use the External References palette. ■ A layout viewport that displays the model space view is created on your current sheet. ■ A named view that encompasses the area of the layout viewport is created in paper space. When you place a sheet view on a sheet, all the layers in the current drawing (including layer 0) are frozen in the new viewport created by the view.
To import layouts from several drawings as sheets 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, right-click the sheet set node, a subset node, or a sheet node. Click Import Layout as Sheet. 3 In the Import Layouts as Sheets dialog box, click Browse for Drawings and navigate to the drawing that you want to use. To select several drawings, use SHIFT or CTRL when you click on the drawing files.
5 Save the drawing. 6 In the Sheet Set Manager, right-click the Sheet Set. Click Import Layout as Sheet. 7 In the Import Layout as Sheet dialog box, click Browse for Drawings. Navigate to the drawing that you want to use. 8 Click the check box of the layout to be reassociated as a sheet in the current sheet set. Click Import Checked. To add a view to a sheet 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set.
To add a sheet list table 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set. 3 Right-click a sheet set name, subset, or multiple sheet set names and subsets. Click Insert Sheet List Table. 4 In the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box, do the following: ■ Set the Table Style in the Table Style Settings group. ■ On the Table Data tab, specify Title Text for the table and add, remove, or change the order of the column entries.
To change the default block used for sheet view labels 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set. 3 On the Sheet Views tab, right-click the sheet set node. 4 In the Sheet Set Properties dialog box, click Label Block for Views. Click the [...] button. 5 In the Select Block dialog box, specify a new block to be used as the default view label block. 6 Click OK to close each dialog box.
SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened.
In addition, you can define custom properties for a sheet and a sheet set. The values for custom properties for sheets are typically specific to each sheet. For example, a custom property for a sheet might include the name of the designer. The values for custom properties for a sheet set are typically specific to a project. For example, a custom property for a sheet set might include the contract number. You cannot create custom properties for subsets.
4 In the Sheet Set Properties dialog box, click the Edit Custom Properties button. 5 In the Custom Properties dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Click Add to create a new custom property for the sheet set. Click the name and the default value to enter the information for these fields. To assign this property to the sheet set, make sure that Sheet Set is selected under Owner. ■ Click the name and the default value to change the information for these fields. ■ Click a custom property from the list.
Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened.
Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets After you have organized drawings into a sheet set, you can publish, transmit, and archive the sheet set as a package. ■ Publish a sheet set: Use the Publish feature to output the sheet set to a plotter in either normal or reverse order. For more information, see Publish a Sheet Set on page 1742. You can create single and multiple-sheet DWF or DWFx files from a sheet set or portion of a sheet set. For information on DWF files, see Plot DWF Files on page 1716.
NOTE With page setup overrides, you can use the PUBLISHCOLLATE system variable to control whether plotting a sheet set can be interrupted by other plot jobs or not. Save a Selection of Sheets You can select part of a sheet set for publishing and transmitting. On the Sheet List tab, you can select individual sheets using standard Microsoft® Windows® selection methods—press CTRL or SHIFT when you click items. You can specify all the sheets in a sheet subset by clicking the subset node.
The sheet selection is activated and available for publishing and transmitting operations. To rename or delete a sheet selection 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set. 3 On the Sheet List tab, near the upper-right corner, click the Sheet Selections button. Click Manage. 4 In the Sheet Selections dialog box, select the name of a sheet selection and do one of the following: ■ Click Rename to rename the sheet selection.
7 Click OK to close the Sheet Selections dialog box. 8 On the Sheet List Manager, near the upper-right corner, click the Sheet Selections button. Click Create. 9 In the New Sheet Selection dialog box, enter the name of the sheet selection. Click OK. To publish a DWF or DWFx file including layer, block, sheet set, and sheet information 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, select the sheet set to publish in a DWF or DWFx file.
To publish a DWF or DWFx file using a block template file to include block properties and attributes 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, select the sheet set to publish in a DWF or DWFx file. 3 Click the Publish button. Click Sheet Set Publish Options. 4 In the Sheet Set Publish Options dialog box, under DWF Data Options, Block Information, click to display the drop-down list, and select “Include.
System Variables PUBLISHCOLLATE Controls whether plotting a sheet set, multi-sheet plot file, or plot spool file can be interrupted by other plot jobs. SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened.
A green dot in the lock icon indicates that the Sheet Set Manager session on your computer has temporarily locked the DST file. A red dot indicates that the Sheet Set Manager session on a team member's computer has temporarily locked the DST file. A yellow dot in the lock icon means that the sheet is in a special state; for example, its file properties may be set to Read-Only. Other members of the team can automatically see changes to the sheet set in the Sheet Set Manager tree view.
Work in a Team That Does Not Use Sheet Set Manager With some limitations, you can use sheet sets in a team with members who do not have network access, or do not have access to the Sheet Set Manager. These team members may be using an older version of AutoCAD LT or AutoCAD. In those circumstances, not all members of the team will have access to the DST file.
System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened. SSMPOLLTIME Controls whether plotting a sheet set, multi-sheet plot file, or plot spool file can be interrupted by other plot jobs.
504
Part 6: Create and Modify Objects 505
506
Control the Properties of Objects 16 You can organize objects in your drawing and control how they are displayed and plotted by changing their properties, which include layer, linetype, color, lineweight, transparency, and plot style. Work with Object Properties You can change the object properties in your drawing by using the Properties palette or the Quick Properties palette. Overview of Object Properties Every object you draw has properties.
Object properties can be specified and changed with the Properties and Quick Properties palettes, and with the controls available on the Home tab, Properties panel of the ribbon. See also: ■ Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks on page 934 Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PROPERTIESCLOSE Closes the Properties palette. QUICKPROPERTIES Displays quick property data for selected objects.
PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE Controls whether object transparency is plotted. PROPOBJLIMIT Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the Properties and Quick Properties palettes. QPMODE Controls whether the Quick Properties palette is displayed when objects are selected. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed.
Several types of objects open an editor or start an object-specific command when you double-click them instead of the Quick Properties palette. These types of objects include blocks, polylines, splines, text, and more. Use the Customize User Interface dialog box (CUI) to control what palette or command is used when double-clicking each type of object.
If you need to change the properties of a larger number of objects, you can either change the default values for their system variables, or you can use the CHANGE or CHPROP commands. See also: ■ Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks on page 934 ■ Select Objects by Properties on page 749 ■ Set Interface Options on page 149 ■ Quick Properties in the Customization Guide To change the settings of a Quick Properties palette 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PROPERTIESCLOSE Closes the Properties palette. QUICKPROPERTIES Displays quick property data for selected objects. SETBYLAYER Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer. CETRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency level for new objects. DBLCLKEDIT Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area. LUPREC Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. SETBYLAYERMODE Controls which properties are selected for the SETBYLAYER command. TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed. Copy Properties Between Objects You can copy some or all properties of one object to other objects using Match Properties.
4 Select the objects to which you want to apply the selected properties and press Enter. Quick Reference MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. Work with Layers Layers are like transparent overlays on which you organize and group objects in a drawing. Overview of Layers Layers are used to group information in a drawing by function and to enforce linetype, color, and other standards. Layers are the equivalent of the overlays used in paper-based drafting.
■ What default linetype and lineweight are assigned to all objects on a layer ■ Whether objects on a layer can be modified ■ Whether objects display with different layer properties in individual layout viewports Every drawing includes a layer named 0. Layer 0 cannot be deleted or renamed.
Use Layers to Manage Complexity You can use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties to objects. Layers can be locked to prevent objects from being modified. You can reduce the visual complexity of a drawing and improve display performance by controlling how objects are displayed or plotted. For example, you can use layers to control the properties and visibility of similar objects, such as electrical parts or dimensions.
Assign a Default Color and Linetype to a Layer Each layer has associated properties such as color, linetype, and transparency that are assumed by all objects on that layer when the setting is ByLayer. For example, if the Properties palette set to BYLAYER when no object is selected, the color of new objects is determined by the color setting for the layer in the Layer Properties Manager.
The LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable controls the fading applied to locked layers. Locked layers that are faded are plotted normally. When you lock a layer that contains transparent objects, the visibiltiy of those objects is further reduced by the specified locked layer fading value. NOTE Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. To copy an object to another layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer. 2 Select the objects you want to copy. 3 Press Enter.
TIP To set the same trasparency level for multiple selected layers, press CTRL and click to select more than one layer. Then click the Transparency or the VP Transparency column to display the Layer Transparency dialog box. To turn the Always Show option on or off in the LayerWalk dialog box 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Walk. 2 In the LayerWalk dialog box, Layer list, double-click the layer you want to set to Always Show.
To assign a color to a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select a layer. Click the color icon. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, select a color. 4 Click OK. To change the properties of more than one layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager list view, use one of the following methods to select the layers: ■ Hold down Ctrl and select layer names. ■ Right-click.
LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYFRZ Freezes the layer of selected objects. LAYISO Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. LAYMCH Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer. LAYMCUR Sets the current layer to that of a selected object. LAYMRG Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from the drawing. LAYOFF Turns off the layer of a selected object. LAYON Turns on all layers in the drawing.
Create and Name Layers You can create and name a new layer for each conceptual grouping (such as walls or dimensions) and assign common properties to each layer. By organizing objects into layers, you can control the visibility and object properties of a large number of objects separately for each layer and make changes quickly. NOTE The number of layers that you can create in a drawing and the number of objects that you can create on each layer are practically unlimited.
Select a Layer to Draw On As you draw, newly created objects are placed on the current layer. The current layer may be the default layer (0) or a layer you create and name yourself. You switch from one layer to another by making a different layer current; any subsequent objects you create are associated with the new current layer and use its color, linetype, and other properties. You cannot make a layer the current layer if it is frozen or if it is an xref-dependent layer.
Layers that have objects assigned to them cannot be removed until those objects are reassigned to a different layer or are deleted. Layers 0 and DEFPOINTS and the current layer cannot be removed. 3 Click OK. To purge all unused layers 1 Click File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged (removed from the drawing). 2 To purge unreferenced layers, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced layers, select Layers.
PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. CLAYER Sets the current layer. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties You can change the name of a layer and any of its properties, including color and linetype, and you can reassign objects from one layer to another.
be undone with Layer Previous. You can use LAYERPMODE to suspend layer property tracking when you don't need it, such as when you run large scripts. There is a modest performance gain in turning off Layer Previous tracking. Layer Previous does not undo the following changes: ■ Renamed layers. If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer Previous restores the original properties but not the original layer name. ■ Deleted layers.
■ In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File to open additional linetype definition (LIN) files. Select one or more linetypes to load. Click OK to return to the Select Linetype dialog box. 4 Select the linetype you want to use. Click OK to return to the Layer Properties Manager. 5 Click OK. To rename a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select a layer. Click the name or press F2. 3 Enter a new name. 4 Click OK.
CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERP Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERPMODE Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
Override Layer Properties in Viewports You can display objects differently by setting property overrides for color, linetype, lineweight, transparency, and plot style and apply them to individual layout viewports. Using property overrides is an efficient way for displaying objects with different property settings in individual viewports without changing their ByLayer or ByBlock properties. For example, objects can be made to display more prominently by changing their color.
When a property override is set for a layer, a Viewport Overrides filter is automatically created in the Layer Properties Manager. If you do not want to display or plot property overrides, set the VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE system variable to 0. Objects will display and plot with their global layer properties. NOTE Property overrides can still be set even when VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE is set to 0. Property overrides that are on xref layers are not retained when the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 0.
Layers that are assigned property overrides are also identifiable outside of the Layer Properties Manager. Other areas of the user interface that indicate which layers are assigned property overrides are as follows: ■ Layers toolbar. A background color displays behind layer names for the current viewport. For color overrides, the override color is displayed instead of the global color. ■ Properties toolbar.
Identify Viewports with Layer Property Overrides Use the VPLAYEROVERRIDES system variable to check if the current viewport contains layer property overrides. When VPLAYEROVERRIDES is equal to 1, the viewport contains overrides. You can also use the Properties palette to determine if a viewport contains overrides. The Properties palette displays a Layer Property Overrides field. The value that displays is the same as the setting for VPLAYEROVERRIDES.
3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the property override on the layer you want to remove. 4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Property Override (Color, Linetype, Lineweight, Plot Style) ➤ In Current Viewport Only. To remove an override from a layer for all layout viewports 1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the property override on the layer to remove.
To check if the current layout viewport contains layer property overrides 1 Double-click within a viewport to make it current. 2 At the Command prompt, enter vplayeroverrides. If VPLAYEROVERRIDES displays 1, the selected viewport contains layer viewport overrides. If 0 is displayed, no overrides are found. To control the transparency of objects or layout viewports on a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
3 In the Layer States Manager, click New. 4 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a name for the new layer state, or select a name from the list. (Optional) Add a description. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Layer State Manager. Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERP Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings.
LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. VPLAYEROVERRIDES Indicates if there are any layers with viewport (VP) property overrides for the current layout viewport. VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE Controls whether layer property overrides for layout viewports are displayed and plotted.
■ Unreconciled New Layers. If new layers were added since the drawing was last opened, saved, reloaded, or plotted, displays a list of new unreconciled layers. See Reconcile New Layers on page 542 for more information. NOTE The default filters cannot be renamed, edited, or deleted. Once you have named and defined a layer filter, you can select it in the tree view to display the layers in the list view.
Layer property filters can be nested under other properties filters or under group filters. Define a Layer Group Filter A layer group filter includes only those layers that you explicitly assign to it. If the properties of the layers assigned to the filter change, the layers are still part of the filter. Layer group filters can be nested only under other layer group filters. TIP Layers from the layer list can be included in a filter by clicking and dragging the selected layers to the filter.
Character Definition ~ (tilde) Matches anything but the pattern; for example; ~*AB*matches all strings that don't contain AB [] Matches any one of the characters enclosed; for example, [AB]C matches AC and BC [~] Matches any character not enclosed; for example, [~AB]C matches XC but not AC [-] Specifies a range for a single character; for example, [A-G]C matches AC, BC, and so on to GC, but not HC ` (reverse quote) Reads the next character literally; for example, `~AB matches ~AB NOTE To filter
To filter the display of layers by layer property 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Property Filter button. 3 In the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, enter a name for the filter. 4 Under Filter Definition, set the layer properties that you want to use to define the filter. ■ To filter by name, use wild-card characters. ■ To filter by property, click in the column for the property you want.
To nest a layer filter under another layer filter 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager tree view, select a layer filter. ■ A new layer property filter can be nested under a group filter or another property filter. ■ A new layer group filter can be nested only under another group filter. 3 Right-click. Click New Properties Filter or New Group Filter.
Quick Reference CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. MAXSORT Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands.
Unreconciled New Layers filter is automatically created and activated in the Layer Properties Manager. Unreconciled layers become reconciled by right-clicking the layer and clicking the Reconcile Layer option. Once a layer has become reconciled, it is removed from the Unreconciled New Layers filter. After all new layers are reconciled, the Unreconciled New Layers filter is removed. NOTE You can reconcile multiple unreconciled layers at the same time.
It is important to be aware of new layers that have been added to a drawing or to an attached xref without your knowledge. You can avoid potential problems, such as plotting objects that were added to the drawing by the addition of a new layer. You can control when to evaluate a drawing for new layers. You can specify which commands, such as SAVE or PLOT, trigger the program to check the layer list and alert you of new layers. This can include new layers that have been added to attached xrefs.
The new layers are unreconciled because they have not yet been reviewed. The process of manually marking them as reconciled removes them from the Unreconciled New Layers list. (See Reconcile New Layers on page 542 for more information.) Until you reconcile the layers, the notification bubble will display each time the command that triggered the notification is used.
Opening Multiple Drawings When opening multiple drawings at the same time, an alert displays for each drawing that contains new layers. This behavior occurs if layer notification is turned on and the OPEN command is specified in the LAYERNOTIFY system variable for each drawing. To set new layer notification on and off 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, click Evaluate New Layers Added to Drawing.
LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. LAYEREVALCTL Controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list in Layer Properties Manager which is evaluated for new layers. LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found.
choose to restore only the Frozen/Thawed setting of the layers in a drawing, ignoring all other settings. When you restore that named layer state, all settings remain as they are currently set except whether each layer is frozen or thawed. Save Layer Property Override Settings When layers contain viewport property overrides, those settings are saved to a layer state when the viewport that contains overrides is active.
“Unsaved Layer State” is displayed instead of the name of the last restored layer state. Restore Property Override Settings When the Apply Properties as Viewport Overrides restore option is selected in the Layer States Manager, viewport overrides are restored to the viewport that is current at the time the layer state is restored.
layer state name is preceded by the xref drawing’s name and separated by a double underscore symbol. (Example: Xref Name__Layer State Name.) When the xref is bound to the host drawing, layer states are identifiable by $0$ that displays between the xref name and layer state name. (Example: Xref Name$0$Layer State Name.) Layer states from nested xrefs are also included. Layer states from xrefs are removed from the host drawing when the xref is detached or unloaded.
3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state that you want to add layers to. 4 Click Edit. 5 In the Edit Layer State dialog box, click Add. 6 In the Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box, select the layers you want to add. 7 Click OK. 8 Click OK to exit the Edit Layer State dialog box. 9 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. To delete layers from a layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
6 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a new name for the layer state. In the Description field, enter descriptive text about the layer settings. 7 Click OK. 8 (Optional) Click Delete to remove the legacy layer state. 9 Click Close. Description and material properties are saved with the updated layer state. To select a layer state to restore 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
drawing file, you can choose multiple layer states to import from the Select Layer States dialog box. When exporting layer states, they are created as LAS files. If the layer state is imported from a drawing and it contains a layer property, such as a linetype or plot style that is not loaded or available in the current drawing, that property is automatically imported from the source drawing.
To import saved layer settings from another drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, click Import. 4 In the Import Layer State dialog box, select a file name with a .dwg, .dws, or .dwt file name extension. Click Open. 5 In the Select Layer States dialog box, select the layer states to import. Click OK. 6 To restore the named layer state now, select it in the Layer States Manager.
5 Click Save to exit the dialog box. 6 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. Quick Reference LAYERSTATE Saves, restores, and manages named layer states. LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. Work with Colors Color helps to group objects visually. You can assign colors to objects by layer or individually.
® ■ DIC Color Guide ■ Colors from imported color books. ACI Colors ACI colors are the standard colors used in AutoCAD. Each color is identified by an ACI number, an integer from 1 through 255. Standard color names are available only for colors 1 through 7. The colors are assigned as follows: 1 Red, 2 Yellow, 3 Green, 4 Cyan, 5 Blue, 6 Magenta, 7 White/Black. True Colors True colors use 24-bit color definitions to display over 16 million colors.
that are assigned to objects are preserved in all current and legacy drawing files. Color book (.acb) files provide access through the Select Color dialog box to the names of all PANTONE Colors and color books. These .acb files are installed in the \Support\Color folder in the AutoCAD installation folder. To set an ACI color for all new objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color.
■ Select the RGB color model in the Color Model box. Specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes. 4 Click OK. The Color control displays the current color. To set a color from a color book for all new objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color. 2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click Select Color. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, Color Book tab, select a color book from the Color Book box.
■ Change the color assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's color is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the color of its layer. When you change the color assigned to a layer, all objects on that layer assigned the BYLAYER color are updated automatically. ■ Specify a color for an object to override the layer's color. You can specify the color of each object explicitly.
■ On the Color Books tab, select a color book from the Color Book box; select a color by navigating the color book (using the up and down arrows) and clicking on a color chip. Click OK. 4 Click OK to close each dialog box. To change the color of objects, overriding the layer's color 1 Select the objects whose color you want to change. 2 Click View tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Properties. Alternatively, you can right-click one of the objects and then, click Properties.
CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. COLOR Sets the color for new objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. CECOLOR Sets the color of new objects. Use Color Books When assigning colors to objects, you can choose colors from color books that are loaded on your system. You can choose from a wide range of custom colors when using color books. Color books include third-party or user-defined files that contain named color swatches.
through is not organized into pages, the colors are arranged into pages, with each page containing up to seven colors. To install a color book 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Color Book Locations. 3 Click Add to add a color book location. 4 Enter the new location in the blank path box. 5 Click OK. To search for color swatches within a color book 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color. 2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click Select Color.
4 Click the location name to edit the path. 5 Enter the new location in the path box. 6 Click OK. To define multiple folders for the color book path 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Color Book Locations. 3 Click Add to add a color book location. 4 Enter the new location in the blank path box. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. COLOR Sets the color for new objects.
Overview of Linetypes A linetype is a repeating pattern of dashes, dots, and blank spaces displayed in a line or a curve. You assign linetypes to objects either by layer or by specifying the linetype explicitly, independent of layers. In addition to choosing a linetype, you can set its scale to control the size of the dashes and spaces, and you can create your own custom linetypes. NOTE These linetypes should not be confused with the hardware linetypes provided by some plotters.
REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. Load Linetypes At the start of a project, you load the linetypes that are required for the project so that they are available when you need them.
You can hold down Ctrl to select several linetypes or SHIFT to select a range of linetypes. 4 Click OK. To list the linetypes loaded in the current drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 Click anywhere outside the box to close it. To list the linetypes in a linetype definition file 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype Manager dialog box, click Load. 3 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File.
To purge an unused linetype 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged. 2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes. ■ To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree view. Then select the linetypes to be purged. If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge.
MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Set the Current Linetype All objects are created using the current linetype. You can set the current linetype with the: ■ Linetype control on the Properties panel or toolbar ■ Linetype property on the Properties palette ■ Linetype Manager If the current linetype is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the linetype assigned to the current layer.
■ Select BYLAYER to draw new objects in the linetype assigned to the current layer. ■ Select BYBLOCK to draw new objects in the current linetype until they are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into a drawing, the objects in the block acquire the current linetype setting. 4 Click OK. NOTE The Linetype control displays the current linetype. If the linetype you want to use is already loaded, you can click the Linetype control and click the linetype to make it current.
You have three choices for changing the linetype of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different linetype. If an object's linetype is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it acquires its linetype from the new layer. ■ Change the linetype assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's linetype is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the linetype of its layer.
4 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To change the linetype of an object, overriding the layer's linetype 1 Select the objects whose linetype you want to change. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, click the Linetype control. 4 Choose the linetype that you want to assign to the objects. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties.
The Linetype Manager displays the Global Scale Factor and Current Object Scale. ■ The Global Scale Factor value controls the LTSCALE system variable, which changes the linetype scale globally for both new and existing objects. ■ The Current Object Scale value controls the CELTSCALE system variable, which sets the linetype scale for new objects. The CELTSCALE value is multiplied by the LTSCALE value to get the displayed linetype scale.
3 Enter a new value for Global Scale Factor. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. System Variables CELTSCALE Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. LTSCALE Sets the global linetype scale factor. PSLTSCALE Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports.
For polylines, you can specify whether a linetype pattern is centered on each segment or is continuous across vertices throughout the entire length of the polyline. You do this by setting the PLINEGEN system variable. To set the linetype display for all new polylines 1 At the Command prompt, enter plinegen. 2 Enter 1 to make the linetype pattern continue throughout the entire length of two-dimensional polylines, or enter 0 to center the linetype pattern on each segment.
Overview of Lineweights Lineweights are width values that are assigned to graphical objects as well as some types of text. Using lineweights, you can create heavy and thin lines to show cuts in sections, depth in elevations, dimension lines and tick marks, and differences in details. For example, by assigning varying lineweights to different layers, you can easily differentiate between new, existing, and demolition construction.
See also: ■ Draw Polylines on page 693 To assign width to polylines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point for the first segment in the polyline. 3 Enter w (width). 4 Enter a value for the width at the start of the line segment. 5 Enter a value for the width at the end of the line segment. 6 Specify the endpoint of the first segment of the polyline. 7 Enter w to specify different widths for the next segment, or press Enter to end the command.
Quick Reference LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.
layout, use LWEIGHT to set their display scale. Changing the display scale does not affect the lineweight plotting value. In model space, weighted lines that are joined form a beveled joint with no end caps. You can use plot styles to apply different joins and endcap styles to objects with lineweights. NOTE Different styles of endcaps and joins of objects with lineweight are displayed only in a full preview using PREVIEW or PLOT.
LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Set the Current Lineweight The current lineweight is the lineweight used for any objects you draw until you make another lineweight current. All objects are created using the current lineweight.
To make a lineweight current for creating objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight. 2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select a lineweight. 4 Click OK. NOTE To display the lineweight at its current setting, the Display Lineweight option must be selected in the Display Lineweight dialog box. Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties.
PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Change the Lineweight of an Object You can change the lineweight of an object by reassigning it to another layer, by changing the lineweight of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a lineweight for the object explicitly. You have three choices for changing the lineweight of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different lineweight.
Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed.
Display performance is improved when wide polylines and donuts, solid-filled polygons (two-dimensional solids), hatches, gradient fills, and text are displayed in simplified form. Simplified display also increases the speed of creating test plots. Turn Off Solid Fill When you turn off Fill mode, wide polylines, solid-filled polygons, gradient fill, and hatches are displayed in outline form.
Update the Display New objects automatically use the current settings for displays of solid fill and text. Except for lineweights, to update the display of existing objects using these settings, you must use REGEN. See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity on page 516 ■ Display Lineweights on page 577 ■ Use TrueType Fonts on page 1473 To turn the display of solid fill on or off 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select or clear Display Lineweight. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
Control the Transparency of Objects You can control the transparency level of objects and layers. Set the transparency level of selected objects or layers to enhance drawings or reduce the visibility of areas that are included for reference only. Transparency can be set to ByLayer, ByBlock, or to a specific value. no transparent objects selected objects 75% transparent IMPORTANT For perfomance reasons, plotting transparency is disabled by default.
Double clicking hatches or fills displays the Hatch Editor ribbon contextual tab, which contains a transparency control for these objects. Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. CETRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency level for new objects. TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed.
NOTE Overlapping objects cannot be controlled between model space and paper space. They can be controlled only within the same space. To change the draw order of overlapping objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Draw Order drop-down list. 2 From the draw order drop down list, click one of the options. 3 Select the object(s) whose draw order you want to modify and press Enter. 4 Select the reference object(s) and press Enter.
DRAWORDERCTL Controls the default display behavior of overlapping objects when they are created or edited. HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. SORTENTS Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations. Control the Display of Objects Control the display of objects by isolating or hiding a selection set. Use ISOLATEOBJECTS and HIDEOBJECTS to create a temporary drawing view with selected objects isolated or hidden.
3 To redisplay hidden objects, right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation. To keep objects hidden or isolated between drawing sessions 1 Before hiding or isolating objects, set OBJECTISOLATIONMODE to 1. 2 Hide or isolate objects in your drawing. When you save, close, and reopen your drawing, the selected objects remain hidden or isolated. Quick Reference HIDEOBJECTS Hides selected objects. ISOLATEOBJECTS Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden.
Use Precision Tools 17 You can use a variety of precision drawing tools to help you produce accurate drawings quickly and without performing tedious calculations. Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) The UCS is the active coordinate system that establishes the XY plane (work plane) and Z-axis direction for drawing and modeling.
Understand the World Coordinate System (WCS) The WCS is a fixed Cartesian coordinate system. Internally, all objects are defined by their WCS coordinates, and the WCS and the UCS are coincident in a new drawing. However, it is usually more convenient to create and edit objects based on the UCS, which can be customized to suit your needs. Understand the UCS Icon The UCS icon indicates the location and orientation of the current UCS. You can manipulate the UCS icon using grips.
Change the UCS in Paper Space You can define a new UCS in paper space just as you can in model space; however, the UCS in paper space is restricted to 2D manipulation. Although you can enter 3D coordinates in paper space, you cannot use 3D viewing commands such as PLAN and VPOINT.
UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. UCSNAME Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. UCSORG Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. UCSORTHO Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
The UCS origin (0,0,0) is redefined at the point you specify. TIP To place the origin with precision, use object snaps or grid snaps, or enter a specific X,Y,Z coordinate. To specify a new UCS with three points 1 Right-click the UCS icon, and click 3 Point. 2 Specify a new origin point. 3 Specify a point on the positive X axis of the new UCS. 4 Specify a point on the positive portion of the XY plane of the new UCS.
UCSMAN Manages UCS definitions. System Variables UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. UCSNAME Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. UCSORG Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. UCSORTHO Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
NOTE By default, the Coordinates panel is hidden in the Drafting & Annotation workspace. To display the Coordinates panel, click the View tab, then right-click and choose Show Panels, and then click Coordinates. In 3D workspaces, the Coordinates panel is on the Home tab. To save a UCS definition 1 Right-click the UCS icon, and click Named UCS ➤ Save. 2 Enter a name. You can use up to 255 characters, including letters, digits, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_).
To delete a UCS definition 1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named UCS. 2 In the UCS dialog box, Named UCSs tab, select the UCS definition you want to delete. 3 Press Delete. You cannot delete the current UCS or a UCS with the default name UNNAMED. Quick Reference Commands UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. UCSMAN Manages UCS definitions. UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon.
UCSORTHO Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored. UCSXDIR Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. UCSVP Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect the UCS of the current viewport. UCSYDIR Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space.
The second figure shows the change that occurs when the lower-left, or front, viewport is made current. The UCS in the isometric viewport is updated to reflect the UCS of the front viewport. In previous releases, the UCS was a global setting for all viewports in either model or paper space. If you want to restore the behavior of earlier releases, you can set the value of the UCSVP system variable to 0 in all active viewports. Quick Reference Commands UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
System Variables UCSNAME Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. UCSVP Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect the UCS of the current viewport. UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models With the dynamic UCS feature, you can temporarily and automatically align the XY plane of the UCS with a plane on a solid model while creating objects.
When you move the pointer completely over an edge as shown in the middle illustration, the cursor changes to show the direction of the dynamic UCS axes. You can then create objects on the angled face easily as shown in the illustration on the right. NOTE To display the XYZ labels on the cursor, right-click the DUCS button and click Display Crosshair Labels.
Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables OSOPTIONS Automatically suppresses object snaps on hatch objects and geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS. UCSDETECT Controls whether dynamic UCS acquisition is active or not. Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon The user coordinate system icon (UCS icon) helps you visualize the current orientation of the UCS.
Display and Hide the UCS Icon In some circumstances, you might need to hide the UCS icon. With the UCSICON command, you can turn off the UCS icon in a single viewport or all viewports. Each layout also provides a UCS icon in paper space. You can also hide the UCS icon based on the current visual style, and whether perspective is turned on. Three system variables are available: ■ Use UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING to hide the UCS icon when the current visual style is 2D Wireframe.
The UCS broken pencil icon replaces the 2D UCS icon when the viewing direction is in a plane parallel to the UCS XY plane. The broken pencil icon indicates that the edge of the XY plane is almost perpendicular to your viewing direction. This icon warns you not to use your pointing device to specify coordinates. When you use the pointing device to locate a point, it's normally placed on the XY plane.
Quick Reference Commands UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. VSCURRENT Sets the visual style in the current viewport. System Variables UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING Displays the UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is off and a 3D visual style is current. UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is on and a 3D visual style is current.
Cartesian and Polar Coordinates A Cartesian coordinate system has three axes, X, Y, and Z. When you enter coordinate values, you indicate a point's distance (in units) and its direction (+ or -) along the X, Y, and Z axes relative to the coordinate system origin (0,0,0). In 2D, you specify points on the XY plane, also called the work plane. The work plane is similar to a flat sheet of grid paper.
■ Enter 3D Coordinates on page 614 ■ Use Dynamic Input on page 619 To enter coordinates relative to the WCS ■ Precede coordinate values with an asterisk (*). Entering @*2,0,0 specifies a point two units in the X direction of the last point entered relative to the WCS. Entering @2,0,0 specifies a point two units in the X direction of the last point entered relative to the UCS. In practice, most coordinates are entered relative to the UCS rather than the WCS.
Quick Reference Commands ID Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line. LASTPOINT Stores the last point specified, expressed as UCS coordinates for the current space. Enter 2D Coordinates Absolute and relative 2D Cartesian and polar coordinates determine precise locations of objects in a drawing.
The following example draws a line beginning at an X value of -2, a Y value of 1, and an endpoint at 3,4. Enter the following in the tooltip: Command: line From point: #-2,1 To point: #3,4 The line is located as follows: Relative coordinates are based on the last point entered. Use relative coordinates when you know the location of a point in relation to the previous point. To specify relative coordinates, precede the coordinate values with an @ sign.
To enter absolute Cartesian coordinates (2D) ■ At a prompt for a point, enter coordinates in the tooltip using the following format: #x,y If dynamic input is turned off, enter coordinates on the command line using the following format: x,y To enter relative Cartesian coordinates (2D) ■ At a prompt for a point, enter coordinates using the following format: @x,y Quick Reference System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line.
for the angle. For example, entering 1<315 locates the same point as entering 1<-45. You can change the angle conventions for the current drawing with UNITS. Absolute polar coordinates are measured from the UCS origin (0,0), which is the intersection of the X and Y axes. Use absolute polar coordinates when you know the precise distance and angle coordinates of the point. With dynamic input, you can specify absolute coordinates with the # prefix.
The following example shows two lines drawn with relative polar coordinates. In each illustration, the line begins at the location labeled as the previous point.
System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line. Enter 3D Coordinates Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinates locate points when you are creating objects in 3D. Enter 3D Cartesian Coordinates 3D Cartesian coordinates specify a precise location by using three coordinate values: X, Y, and Z. Entering 3D Cartesian coordinate values (X,Y,Z) is similar to entering 2D coordinate values (X,Y).
Use Default Z Values When you enter coordinates in the format X,Y, the Z value is copied from the last point you entered. As a result, you can enter one location in the X,Y,Z format and then enter subsequent locations using the X,Y format with the Z value remaining constant. For example, if you enter the following coordinates for a line From point: 0,0,5 To point: 3,4 both endpoints of the line will have a Z value of 5. When you begin or open any drawing, the initial default value of Z is greater than 0.
Quick Reference Commands GRID Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport. SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. TABLET Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing tablet. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.
XY plane. Cylindrical coordinates define points by a distance in the XY plane from the UCS origin, an angle from the X axis in the XY plane, and a Z value. You specify a point using absolute cylindrical coordinates with the following syntax: X<[angle from X axis],Z NOTE For the following examples, it is assumed that dynamic input is turned off or that the coordinates are entered on the command line. With dynamic input, you specify absolute coordinates with the # prefix.
Quick Reference Commands UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line. Enter Spherical Coordinates 3D spherical coordinates specify a location by a distance from the origin of the current UCS, an angle from the X axis in the XY plane, and an angle from the XY plane. Spherical coordinate entry in 3D is similar to polar coordinate entry in 2D.
When you need to define a point based on a previous point, enter the relative spherical coordinate values by preceding them with the @ sign. To enter relative spherical coordinates ■ At a prompt for a point, enter the coordinate values using the following format: @x
When dynamic input is on, tooltips display information near the cursor that is dynamically updated as the cursor moves. When a command is active, the tooltips provide a place for user entry. After you type a value in an input field and press Tab, the field then displays a lock icon, and the cursor is constrained by the value that you entered. You can then enter a value for the second input field.
Use the pointer input settings to change the default format for coordinates and to control when pointer input tooltips are displayed. Dimensional Input When dimensional input is on, the tooltips display distance and angle values when a Command prompts for a second point. The values in the dimensional tooltips change as you move the cursor. Press Tab to move to the value you want to change. Dimensional input is available for ARC, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, LINE, and PLINE.
Use the dimensional input settings to display only the information you want to see. When you use grips to stretch objects or when you create new objects, dimensional input displays only acute angles, that is, all angles are displayed as 180 degrees or less. Thus, an angle of 270 degrees is displayed as 90 degrees regardless of the ANGDIR system variable setting (set in the Drawing Units dialog box).
■ If a down-arrow icon follows the prompt, press the DOWN ARROW key until a dot is displayed next to the option. Press Enter. ■ Press the UP ARROW key to access recent coordinates, or right-click and click Recent Input to access the coordinates from a shortcut menu. NOTE For dimensional input, after you type a value in an input field and press Tab, the field then displays a lock icon, and the cursor is constrained by the value that you entered.
3 In the Tooltip Appearance dialog box, under Color, click Model Color or Layout Color to display the Select Color dialog box, where you can specify a color for tooltips in the space you selected. 4 Under Size, move the slider to the right to make tooltips larger or to the left to make them smaller. The default value, 0, is in the middle. 5 Under Transparency, move the slider. The lower the setting, the more transparent the tooltip. A value of 100 sets the tooltip to opaque.
2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Dynamic Input tab, under Dimension Input, click Settings. 3 In the Dimension Input Settings dialog box, select Polar or Cartesian format as the default. 4 Under Visibility, select one of the following options: ■ Show Only 1 Dimension Input Field at a Time. Displays only the distance dimensional input tooltip when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. ■ Show 2 Dimension Input Fields at a Time.
DYNDIVIS Controls how many dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing. DYNMODE Turns Dynamic Input features on and off. DYNPICOORDS Controls whether pointer input uses relative or absolute format for coordinates. DYNPIFORMAT Controls whether pointer input uses polar or Cartesian format for coordinates. DYNPIVIS Controls when pointer input is displayed. DYNPROMPT Controls display of prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips.
™ an object snap location on an object. This feature, called AutoSnap , provides a visual clue that indicates which object snaps are in effect. For a list of object snaps, see OSNAP.
NOTE If you want object snaps to ignore hatch objects, set the OSOPTIONS system variable to 1. Use Object Snaps in 3D By default, the Z-value of an object snap location is determined by the object's location in space. However, if you work with object snaps on the plan view of a building or the top view of a part, a constant Z-value is more useful.
To turn running object snaps on and off temporarily, hold down the F3 key while you work. To set object snaps to ignore hatch objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter osoptions. 2 Enter 1. Quick Reference Commands APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OSNAP Sets running object snap modes. System Variables APBOX Turns the display of the AutoSnap aperture box on or off.
OSOPTIONS Automatically suppresses object snaps on hatch objects and geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS. Command Modifiers MTP (Command Modifier) Locates the midpoint between two points. The Object Snap Menu Specify an object snap quickly and conveniently from a shortcut menu. The object snap menu is displayed at your cursor location when you hold down Shift and click the right mouse button or the equivalent button on another pointing device.
Quick Reference Commands OSNAP Sets running object snap modes. Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) ™ Object snaps include a visual aid called AutoSnap to help you see and use object snaps more efficiently. AutoSnap displays a marker and a tooltip when you move your cursor over an object snap location. AutoSnap Tools AutoSnap consists of the following snap tools: ■ Marker. Displays the object snap location when the cursor moves over or near an object.
2 In the Options dialog box, Drafting tab, change settings as needed: ■ Marker. Turns the marker on or off. ■ Magnet. Turns the magnet on or off. ■ Display AutoSnap Tooltip. Turns tooltips on or off. ■ Display AutoSnap Aperture Box. Turns the target box on or off when you specify an object snap. This setting does not affect object snaps when you are not using AutoSnap. ■ 2D and 3D AutoSnap Marker Colors. Changes the color of the markers. ■ AutoSnap Marker Size. Adjusts the size of the marker.
Override Object Snap Settings While you work, you can turn running object snaps on and off temporarily by using an override key. Temporary override keys can also be used for other drawing aids; for example, Ortho mode and Polar mode. For example, if you have set running object snaps but you want to turn them off for one point, you can hold down F3. When you release this override key, running object snaps are restored. There are also temporary override keys for individual object snaps.
Temporary override keys are also available for the other drawing aids that you set in the Drafting Settings dialog box. See also: ■ “Adjust Grid and Grid Snap” ■ “Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode)” ■ “Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap” ■ “Use Dynamic Input” ■ Keyboard Shortcuts in the Customization Guide To temporarily override the running object snap settings ■ Hold down F3 while you work. When you release the key, the current running object snap settings are restored.
To change the keyboard response time for temporary override keys 1 In the Windows Control Panel, click Keyboard. 2 In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, on the Speed tab, drag the Repeat Rate slider to adjust the keyboard response time. Then click OK. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OSNAP Sets running object snap modes.
The grid is a rectangular pattern of dots or lines that extends over the area you specify as the grid limits. Using the grid is similar to placing a sheet of grid paper under a drawing. The grid helps you align objects and visualize the distances between them. The grid is not plotted. Snap mode restricts the movement of the crosshairs to intervals that you define. When Snap mode is on, the cursor seems to adhere, or "snap," to an invisible rectangular grid.
Control the Frequency of Major Grid Lines If the grid is displayed as lines rather than dots, darker lines called major grid lines display at intervals. When working in decimal units or with feet and inches, major grid lines are especially useful for measuring distances quickly. You can control the frequency of major grid lines in the Drafting Settings dialog box. To turn off the display of major grid lines, set the frequency of major grid lines to 1.
For example, if you zoom way out, the density of displayed grid lines reduces automatically. Conversely, if you zoom way in, additional grid lines display in the same proportion as the major grid lines. Change Grid and Snap Spacing As you work, you can turn Grid and Snap mode on and off, and you can change the grid and snap spacing. You can turn Snap mode on and off temporarily by using an override key. Snap spacing does not have to match grid spacing.
2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap and Grid tab, select Grid On to display the grid. 3 Under Snap Type, make sure Grid Snap and Rectangular Snap are selected. 4 For Grid X Spacing, enter the horizontal grid spacing in units. 5 To use the same value for vertical grid spacing, press Enter. Otherwise, enter a new value for Grid Y Spacing. 6 Click OK. To turn on Snap mode and set snap spacing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings.
To rotate the grid and snap angle and change the base point 1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Z. 2 Enter the rotation angle for the UCS. 3 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Origin. 4 Specify a new origin point for the UCS. 5 Click OK. To change the grid display between dots and lines 1 At the Command prompt, enter VSCURRENT. 2 Do one of the following: ■ To display the grid as dots, specify the 2D Wireframe option. ■ To display the grid as lines, specify any other option.
LIMITS Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or named layout. SHADEMODE Starts the VSCURRENT command. SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. System Variables GRIDDISPLAY Controls the display behavior and display limits of the grid. GRIDMODE Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off. GRIDMAJOR Controls the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. GRIDUNIT Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current viewport.
SNAPMODE Turns the Snap mode on and off. SNAPTYPE Sets the type of snap for the current viewport. SNAPUNIT Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. TEMPOVERRIDES Turns temporary override keys on and off. Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode) You can restrict cursor movement to horizontal and vertical for convenience and precision when creating and modifying objects. As you create or move objects, you can use Ortho mode to restrict the cursor to the horizontal or vertical axis.
See also: ■ Override Object Snap Settings on page 633 To turn on or turn off Ortho mode ■ On the status bar, click the Ortho button. To turn Ortho on or off temporarily, hold down the Shift key while you work. While you use the temporary override key, the direct distance entry method is not available. NOTE Turning on Ortho automatically turns off polar tracking. Quick Reference Commands ORTHO Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction.
Polar angles are relative to the orientation of the current user coordinate system (UCS) and the setting for the base angle convention in a drawing. The angle base direction is set in the Drawing Units dialog box (UNITS). Use PolarSnap™ to snap to specified distances along the alignment path. For example, in the following illustration you draw a two-unit line from point 1 to point 2, and then draw a two-unit line to point 3 at a 45-degree angle to the line.
The orientation of 0 depends on the angle you set in the Drawing Units dialog box. The direction of snap (clockwise or counterclockwise) depends on the units direction you specify when setting units of measurement. You can turn polar tracking on and off temporarily by using an override key. The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using the temporary override key for polar tracking.
To draw objects using polar tracking 1 Turn on polar tracking and start a drawing command, such as ARC, CIRCLE, or LINE. You can also use polar tracking with editing commands, such as COPY and MOVE. 2 As you move your cursor to specify points, notice the dotted polar tracking line that appears at the tracking angles you specified. Points you specify while the line is displayed conform to the polar tracking angle. To draw objects using polar distance 1 Turn on snap and polar tracking.
Quick Reference Commands DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. POLARANG Sets the polar angle increment.
Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle) You can specify an angle override that locks the cursor for the next point entered. To specify an angle override, enter a left angle bracket (<) followed by an angle whenever a command asks you to specify a point. The Command prompt sequence below shows a 30-degree override entered during a LINE command.
Example: Use of Coordinate Filters in 2D In the following illustration, the hole in the holding plate was centered in the rectangle by extracting the X,Y coordinates from the midpoints of the plate's horizontal and vertical line segments. Here is the Command prompt sequence: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: .
To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 2D 1 At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x or .y). For example, enter .x to specify the X value first. 2 To extract the first coordinate value, specify a point. For example, if you entered .x in step 1, the X value is extracted from this point. 3 To extract the next coordinate value, specify a different point. The new point location combines the coordinate values extracted from the points you specified in steps 2 and 3.
Quick Reference Commands Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) Combines X, Y, and Z values from different points to specify a single point. Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) You can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationship to other objects along specified directions called alignment paths. ™ AutoTrack helps you draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects.
Change Object Snap Tracking Settings By default, object snap tracking is set to orthogonal. Alignment paths are displayed at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees from acquired object points. However, you can use polar tracking angles instead. For object snap tracking, object points are automatically acquired. NOTE You can choose to acquire points only when you press Shift.
to display an alignment path, then enter a distance at the Command prompt. NOTE The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using the temporary override key for object snap tracking. ■ Use the Automatic and Shift to Acquire options set on the Drafting tab of the Options dialog box to manage point acquisition. Point acquisition is set to Automatic by default. When working in close quarters, press Shift to temporarily avoid acquiring a point.
Quick Reference Commands DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. POLARMODE Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking. TRACKPATH Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths.
To use tracking to specify a point 1 Start a command, such as the LINE command. 2 Hold down Shift and right-click in the drawing area. Click Tracking. 3 Specify a point. 4 Move the cursor directly up, down, left, or right until you see the rubber-band line. The direction of movement affects the tracking direction. Notice that if you move the cursor from left to right, you must then move it directly over the last point specified in order to move it up or down. 5 Specify a second point.
Both the CAL command and the QuickCalc calculator can be used transparently to calculate distances and points for commands that require input. For more information, see Use the QuickCalc Calculator on page 670. You can use direct distance entry to specify points for all commands requiring more than one point. When Ortho mode or polar tracking is on, this method is an efficient way to draw lines of specified length and direction, and to move or copy objects.
Offset from Temporary Reference Points You can establish a temporary reference point as a base point for offsetting subsequent points. The From command modifier establishes a temporary reference point as a base point for offsetting subsequent points. The From method does not constrain the cursor to orthogonal movement. The From method usually is used in combination with object snaps. To offset a point from a temporary reference point 1 At a prompt for a point, enter from.
You can measure or divide lines, arcs, splines, circles, ellipses, and polylines. With both methods, you can identify the intervals by inserting either a point or a block. By specifying points, you can use the Node object snap to align other objects at intervals on the measured or divided object. By specifying blocks, you can create precise geometric constructions or insert custom markers. The blocks can rotate at each insertion point.
System Variables PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Specify Measured Intervals on Objects You can mark off equal lengths from one end of a selected object. You can use MEASURE to mark an object at specified intervals. You can mark the intervals with either points or blocks. The last segment of a measured object may be shorter than the interval you specify. The starting point for measurements or divisions varies with the object type.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Measure. 3 Select a line, arc, spline, circle, ellipse, or polyline. 4 Enter b (Block). 5 Enter the name of the block you want to insert. 6 Enter y to align the blocks with the measured object. Enter n to use a rotation angle of 0 degrees. 7 Enter an interval length, or specify points to indicate a length. Blocks are inserted on the object at the specified intervals. Quick Reference Commands BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects.
You can create points or insert blocks on an object at a specific number of equal intervals. This operation does not actually break an object into individual objects; it only identifies the location of the divisions so that you can use them as geometric reference points. The starting point for measurements or divisions varies with the object type. For lines or open polylines, the starting point is the endpoint closest to the selection point. For closed polylines, it is the polyline start point.
5 Enter the name of the block you want to insert. 6 Enter y to align the blocks with the divided object. Enter n to use a rotation angle of 0 degrees. 7 Enter the number of segments you want. Quick Reference Commands BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. DIVIDE Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. WBLOCK Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.
Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations You can obtain information about the relation between two specified points or multiple points; for example, the distance between points or their angle in the XY plane.
To calculate the distance and angle between multiple points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance. 2 For the distance you want to calculate, specify a first and second point. 3 For the distance you want to calculate, specify the next point or points. 4 Press Enter. The distance displays at the Command prompt in the current units format. Quick Reference Commands DIST Measures the distance and angle between two points.
TIP A fast way to calculate an area bounded by several objects in 2D is to use the BOUNDARY command. With BOUNDARY, you can pick a point within the area to create a closed polyline or region. You can then use the Properties palette or the LIST command to find the area and perimeter of the polyline or region. Use Commands to Calculate Area With the MEASUREGEOM and AREA commands, you can specify a series of points or select an object to calculate area.
■ Open objects such as open spline curves and open polylines. Area and length display. Area is calculated as though a straight line connects the start point and endpoint. ■ AutoCAD 3D solids. Total 3D area for the object displays. Example: How Various Areas Are Calculated Combined Areas Calculate Combined Areas You can calculate the total area of multiple areas by specifying points or by selecting objects. For example, you can measure the total area of selected rooms in a floor plan.
Subtract Areas from Combined Areas You can subtract more than one area from a combined area as you calculate. For example, if you have calculated the area of a floor plan, you can subtract the area of a room. Example: Subtraction of Areas from a Calculation In the following example, the closed polyline represents a metal plate with two large holes. The area of the polyline is first calculated and then the area of each hole is subtracted.
Calculate Mass Properties With the MASSPROP command, you can analyze 3D solids and 2D regions for their mass properties including volume, area, moments of inertia, center of gravity, and so on. In addition, the result of the computations can be saved to a text file. See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) on page 733 ■ Overview of Object Properties on page 507 To calculate an area you define 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area.
3 Do one of the following: ■ Specify points to define the area you want to add. Press Enter. ■ Enter o (Object) and select the objects you want to add. Each new area and a running total of all areas displays in the current units format. 4 Press Enter twice to end the command. To subtract an area as you calculate 1 While a combined area displays, enter s (Subtract). 2 Do one of the following: ■ Specify points to define the area you want to subtract. Press Enter.
QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables AREA Stores the last area computed by the AREA command. PERIMETER Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command. Use a Calculator You can access a calculator function as you work with the program. You can use either the QuickCalc calculator interface or the CAL command at Command prompt transparently while a command is active or not.
With QuickCalc, you can ■ Perform mathematical and trigonometric calculations ■ Access and review previously entered calculations for re-evaluation ■ Use the calculator with the Properties palette to modify object properties ■ Convert units of measurement ■ Perform geometric calculations related to specific objects ■ Copy and paste values and expressions to and from the Properties palette and the Command prompt ■ Perform computations on mixed numbers (fractions), and feet and inches ■ Define,
Change QuickCalc Size and Appearance Click the More/Less button on the calculator and only the Input box and History area are displayed. You can use the expand/collapse arrows to open and close areas. You can also control the size, location, and appearance of QuickCalc. See Set Interface Options on page 149. Quick Reference Commands QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator.
ADCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. System Variables QCSTATE Indicates whether the QuickCalc calculator is open or closed. Access QuickCalc and Understand Its Behavior Use QuickCalc directly as you would with a desktop calculator, or use it transparently within a command or the Properties palette.
Use QuickCalc Transparently from Within a Command During a command, you can access QuickCalc transparently in the following ways: ■ Right-click to display the shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter quickcalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter qc. Calculations that you transfer to the Command prompt affect the drawing.
To use the QuickCalc calculator Do one of the following: ■ Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ QuickCalc. ■ Right-click the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc. To use the QuickCalc calculator within a command Do one of the following: ■ At the Command prompt, enter 'quickcalc or 'qc. ■ Right-click to display a shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc. To use the QuickCalc calculator with the Properties palette 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 2 Open the Properties palette.
Enter, Evaluate, and Retrieve Expressions Enter expressions in QuickCalc using standard mathematical rules of precedence; review and retrieve computations from the History area; and understand the rules for using imperial units: length, area, and volume.
Rules for Displaying and Handling Units QuickCalc adheres to the following rules: ■ Results of calculations are always expressed in decimal format unless a distance is entered in feet and inches ■ Angular values entered in the Input box are assumed to be degrees regardless of the settings in the Drawing Units dialog box. To specify radians, grads, and degrees, append an r, g, or d after the angle value. ■ Results of angular calculations are always expressed in degrees with full AutoCAD precision.
Convert Decimal Units into Imperial Units For distance measurements, enter an inches sign (") after the number in the results display. For example, if the computed distance is 15, enter " after the 15, press Enter or click = and the result displays in imperial units as 1'-3". For computed results, enter the initial values in feet (') and inches (") to display the results in feet and inches. For example: ■ 5 * 6 = 30 ■ 5" * 6 = 2'-6" ■ 5" * 6" = 30 sq. in. ■ 5" * 0'-6" = 0.208333333 sq. ft.
NOTE Only properties that are displayed with a white background can be changed. 4 Click the calculator icon. QuickCalc opens and displays the current value of the object in the Input box. 5 Perform a calculation on the displayed value and click the equal sign (=) button. The new value is displayed in the Input box. 6 Click Apply. NOTE The Apply button is only available for editable number-based properties. The calculator closes and the new value is displayed in the Properties palette.
To get the angle of a line defined by two points using QuickCalc 1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Angle of Line Defined by Two Points button uses the ang(p1,p2) function. On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Angle of Line Defined by Two Points button. QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify two points. 2 Enter the coordinate values for the first point and then the second point.
Convert Units of Measurement In the Units Conversion area of QuickCalc, you can obtain equivalent values for different units of measurement. Unit conversions are available for length, area, volume, and angular values. Based on which unit type you select, you can then select a list of units to convert from and a list of units to convert to. The Value to Convert box automatically displays the value from the Input box. You can also enter a different value.
3 On the Number Pad, click the equal (=) sign. The conversion is displayed in the Input box. To convert degrees to radians using QuickCalc 1 On the Number Pad, enter a value in degrees. 2 In the Scientific area, click the d2r button. 3 On the Number Pad, click the equal (=) sign. The conversion is displayed in the Input box. Quick Reference Commands QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. ADCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator.
Create New Calculator Variables You can create new calculator variables using the shortcut menus in the Variables area. When defining new calculator variables in the Variable Definition dialog box, the following rules apply: ■ Constants. Any expression entered in the Value or Expression text entry box is evaluated before the calculator variable is stored. Calculator variables that are defined as constants are available “globally.” You can access and use global constants in different drawings and sessions.
NOTE In QuickCalc, only constants can be directly referred to by their global variable names in the text or numeric entry boxes in windows and dialog boxes. Use Shortcut Functions Several sample calculator variables have been predefined and stored in the Shortcut Functions category. These are geometric expressions that combine CAL functions with the Endpoint Snap mode. The following table describes the predefined variables that are available in the Variables area of the calculator.
The variable is displayed in the Input box as part of your expression. To create a new variable in QuickCalc 1 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the New Variable button. 2 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Variable Type, select Constant or Function. 3 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Variable Properties Name, enter a name for the variable. Variable names cannot contain spaces or special characters.
To create a new global constant in the Input box of QuickCalc ■ In the Input box of QuickCalc, enter the following syntax: $variable_name=value. For example, you could center $Phi=1.618 NOTE Global variables are not case-sensitive. QuickCalc adds the global constant to the list of variables in the Variables area. To access a global constant from dialog box or window ■ In any text or numeric entry box, enter an expression using the syntax: =$variable_name followed by pressing the END key.
Use the Command Prompt Calculator By entering an expression in the Command prompt calculator, you can quickly solve a mathematical problem or locate points in your drawing. The CAL command runs the 3D calculator utility to evaluate vector expressions (combining points, vectors, and numbers) and real and integer expressions. The calculator performs standard mathematical functions. It also contains a set of specialized functions for calculations involving points, vectors, and AutoCAD geometry.
Calculating Points You can use CAL whenever you need to calculate a point or a number within a command. For example, you enter (mid+cen)/2 to specify a point halfway between the midpoint of a line and the center of a circle. The following example uses CAL as a construction tool. It locates a center point for a new circle, and then calculates one fifth of the radius of an existing circle.
Quick Reference Commands CAL Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions. System Variables CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.
690
Create Objects 18 You can create a range of objects, from simple lines and circles to spline curves, and ellipses. In general, you draw objects by specifying points with the pointing device or by entering coordinate values at the Command prompt. Draw Linear Objects A line, the most basic object, can be one segment or a series of connected segments. Draw Lines You can close a sequence of line segments so that the first and last segments are joined.
Use polyline objects instead of line objects if you want the segments to be connected as a single object. See also: ■ Enter Coordinates to Specify Points on page 606 ■ Use Object Snaps on page 626 ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap on page 635 ■ Draw Polylines on page 693 ■ Offset an Object on page 815 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 843 ■ Infer Geometric Constraints on page 885 To draw lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. 2 Specify the start point.
RAY Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity. XLINE Creates a line of infinite length. Draw Polylines A polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two.
Create Wide Polylines You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options. You can set the width of individual segments and make them taper gradually from one width to another. These options become available after you specify a starting point for the polyline. The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments you draw. Widths greater than zero produce wide lines, which are filled if Fill mode is on and outlined if Fill mode is off.
■ Infer Geometric Constraints on page 885 To draw a polyline with straight segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the first point of the polyline. 3 Specify the endpoint of the first polyline segment. 4 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To start a new polyline at the endpoint of the last polyline drawn, start the PLINE command again and press Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt.
5 Specify the ending width of the line segment using one of the following methods: ■ To create a line segment of equal width, press Enter. ■ To create a tapering line segment, enter a different width. 6 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. 7 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 8 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To create a boundary polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary.
Quick Reference Commands 3DPOLY Creates a 3D polyline. BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline.
PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Draw Rectangles and Polygons You can create rectangles and regular polygons quickly. Creating polygons is a simple way to draw equilateral triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, and so on. If necessary, you can use EXPLODE to convert the resulting polyline object into lines.
To draw a circumscribed polygon 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides. 3 Specify the center of the polygon (1). 4 Enter c to specify a polygon circumscribed about a circle. 5 Enter the radius length (2). To draw a polygon by specifying one edge 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides. 3 Enter e (Edge). 4 Specify the start point for one polygon segment. 5 Specify the endpoint of the polygon segment.
To draw a rectangle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle. 2 Specify the first corner of the rectangle. 3 Specify the other corner of the rectangle. Quick Reference Commands BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline. System Variables FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in.
SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. Draw Multiline Objects Multilines are composed of parallel lines, called elements. When you draw a multiline, you can use the STANDARD style, which has two elements, or specify a style that you created previously. You can also change the justification and scale of the multiline before you draw it.
Elements with a positive offset appear on one side of the middle of the multiline; elements with a negative offset appear on the other side of the middle of the multiline. See also: ■ Modify Multilines on page 860 To draw a multiline 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Multiline. 2 At the Command prompt, enter st to select a style. 3 To list available styles, enter the style name or enter ?. 4 To justify the multiline, enter j and select top, zero, or bottom justification.
2 In the Multiline Style dialog box, click New. 3 In the Create New Multiline Style dialog box, enter a name for the multiline style and select a multiline style from which to start. Click Continue. 4 In the New Multiline Style dialog box, select the parameters for the multiline style. You can also enter a description. Descriptions are optional and can be up to 255 characters, including spaces.
5 Click OK. 6 In the Multiline Style dialog box, click Save to save the multiline style to a file (the default is acad.mln). You can save multiline styles to the same file. If you create more than one multiline style, save the current style before creating a new one or you lose the changes to the first style. Quick Reference Commands OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. MLINE Creates multiple parallel lines. MLSTYLE Creates, modifies, and manages multiline styles.
Draw Freehand Sketches Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a digitizer. Draw freehand sketches with the SKETCH command. Freehand sketches comprise many line segments that are converted into a line, polyline, or spline. For Splines, you can determine how closely the spline’s curve fits to the freehand sketch. For any sketch type, set the minimum length (increment) of the line segments.
To draw freehand sketches 1 At the Command prompt, enter sketch and press Enter. 2 Press Enter again to accept the last saved type, increment, and tolerance values. 3 Click in the drawing area to begin sketching. 4 As you move the pointing device, freehand line segments of the specified length are drawn. SKETCH does not accept coordinate input. During the command, freehand lines are displayed in a different color.
Draw Arcs To create an arc, you can specify various combinations of center, endpoint, start point, radius, angle, chord length, and direction values. You can create arcs in several ways. With the exception of the first method, arcs are drawn counterclockwise from the start point to the endpoint. Draw Arcs by Specifying Three Points You can create an arc by specifying three points. In the following example, the start point of the arc snaps to the endpoint of a line.
Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, Angle You can create an arc using a start point, center, and an included angle. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The other end of the arc is determined by specifying an included angle that uses the center of the arc as the vertex. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point. Using different options, you can specify either the start point first or the center point first.
The length of the chord of the arc determines the included angle. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Angle You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and an included angle. The included angle between the endpoints of the arc determines the center and the radius of the arc. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Direction You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and a tangent direction at the start point.
Draw Contiguous Tangent Arcs and Lines Immediately after you create an arc, you can start a line that is tangent to the arc at an endpoint by starting the LINE command and pressing Enter at the Specify First Point prompt. You need to specify only the line length. Immediately after you create a line or an arc, you can start an arc that is tangent at an endpoint by starting the ARC command and pressing Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt. You need to specify only the endpoint of the new arc.
To continue an arc with a tangential line 1 Complete the arc. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. 3 Press Enter at the first prompt. 4 Enter the length of the line and press Enter. To continue an arc with a tangential arc 1 Complete the arc. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ Continue. 3 Specify the second endpoint of the tangent arc. Quick Reference Commands ARC Creates an arc. LINE Creates straight line segments. OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.
LASTANGLE Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space. WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth. Draw Circles To create circles, you can specify various combinations of center, radius, diameter, points on the circumference, and points on other objects. You can create circles in several ways. The default method is to specify the center and the radius. Three other ways to draw a circle are shown in the illustration.
To create a circle tangent at three points, set running object snaps (OSNAP) to Tangent and use the three-point method to create the circle. See also: ■ Use Object Snaps on page 626 ■ Draw Isometric Circles on page 2141 To draw a circle by specifying a center point and radius or diameter 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Radius. ■ Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Diameter. 2 Specify the center point.
3 Select the second object to draw the circle tangent to. 4 Specify the radius of the circle. Quick Reference Commands CIRCLE Creates a circle. OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. System Variables CIRCLERAD Sets the default circle radius. WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth. Draw Polyline Arcs A polyline is a connected sequence of line segments created as a single object.
■ Use closed polylines to create a polygon ■ Create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects Create Arc Polylines When you draw arc segments in a polyline, the first point of the arc is the endpoint of the previous segment. You can specify the angle, center point, direction, or radius of the arc. You can also complete the arc by specifying a second point and an endpoint. Create Closed Polylines You can draw a closed polyline to create a polygon.
Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects You can create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects that form a closed area. A polyline created using the boundary method is a separate object, distinct from the objects used to create it. You can edit it using the same methods used to edit other polylines. To expedite the boundary selection process in large or complex drawings, you can specify a group of boundary candidates, called a boundary set.
To draw a line and arc combination polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point of the polyline segment. 3 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. ■ Switch to Arc mode by entering a (Arc) at the Command prompt. ■ Return to Line mode by entering L (Line). 4 Specify additional polyline segments as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To create a wide polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline.
3 Under Boundary Set, do one of the following: ■ To create a boundary set from all objects visible in the current viewport, select Current Viewport in the list. Avoid this option for large, complex drawings. ■ To specify which objects to include in the boundary set, click New. Select the objects that you want to use to create the boundary. Choosing this option automatically selects the Existing Set option. 4 Click Pick Points. 5 Specify points within each area that you want to form a boundary polyline.
VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width.
To create a donut 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Donut. 2 Specify the inside diameter (1). 3 Specify the outside diameter (2). 4 Specify the center of the donut (3). 5 Specify the center point for another donut, or press Enter to complete the command. Quick Reference Commands DONUT Creates a filled circle or a wide ring. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. System Variables DONUTID Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.
Draw Ellipses The shape of an ellipse is determined by two axes that define its length and width. The longer axis is called the major axis, and the shorter one is the minor axis. The illustrations below show two different ellipses created by specifying axis and distance. The third point specifies only a distance and does not necessarily designate the axis endpoint. If you are drawing on isometric planes to simulate 3D, you can use ellipses to represent isometric circles viewed from an oblique angle.
3 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Axis, End. 4 Enter i (Isocircle). 5 Specify the center of the circle. 6 Specify the radius or diameter of the circle. To draw a true ellipse using endpoints and distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Axis, End. 2 Specify the first endpoint of the first axis (1). 3 Specify the second endpoint of the first axis (2).
The elliptical arc is drawn counterclockwise between the start point and endpoint. Quick Reference Commands ELLIPSE Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. System Variables ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. PELLIPSE Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE. Draw Splines A spline is a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of points that influence the shape of the curve.
BLEND was used to create splines between lines and arcs for a golf course design. The resulting splines are tangent to the selected lines and curves without changing the lengths of the selected objects. Splines are also used for creating solids and surfaces for 3D modeling. For more information, see Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 1030. Understand Control Vertices and Fit Points You can create or edit splines using either control vertices, or fit points.
IMPORTANT Switching the display from control vertices to fit points automatically changes the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using higher-degree equations will likely change shape as a result. Create Splines Using Control Vertices When you create splines using control vertices, the points you specify display temporary lines between them, forming a control polygon that determines the shape of the spline.
When the Tolerance value is set to 0, the spline passes directly through the fit points. With larger tolerance values, the spline passes near the fit points. Optionally, you can specify the tangent direction for the spline at each end. NOTE The fit point method always results in a degree 3 spline. Special Cases You can create a spline with a parabolic shape by specifying a degree 2 spline created with exactly 3 control vertices as shown on the left.
■ Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 1030 To draw a spline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline. 2 (Optional) Enter m (Method). Then enter either f (Fit Points) or cv (Control Vertices). 3 Specify the first point of the spline. 4 Specify the next point of the spline. Continue specifying points as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c (Close) to close the spline. To draw a spline tangent to and connecting two lines or curves 1 Click Modify tab ➤ Blend Curves.
CVHIDE Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves. CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
■ Height ■ Number of turns ■ Turn height ■ Twist direction If you specify the same value for both the base radius and the top radius, then a cylindrical helix is created. By default, the top radius is set to the same value as the base radius. You cannot specify 0 for both the base radius and top radius. If you specify different values for the top radius and the base radius, then a conical helix is created. If you specify a height value of 0, then a flat, 2D spiral is created.
Quick Reference Commands HELIX Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring. Draw Construction and Reference Geometry Construction lines and reference points are temporary objects you create to help you draw accurately. Draw Reference Points Point objects are useful as nodes or reference geometry for object snaps and relative offsets. You can set the style of the points and their size relative to the screen or in absolute units.
2 Specify the point location. You can snap to a point using the Node object snap. Quick Reference Commands DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. POINT Creates a point object. System Variables PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects.
default method for creating the line is the two-point method: you specify two points to define the orientation. The first point, the root, is the conceptual midpoint of the construction line, that is, the point snapped to by the Midpoint object snap. You can also create construction lines in several other ways. ■ Horizontal and Vertical. Create construction lines that pass through a point you specify and are parallel to the X or Y axis of the current UCS. ■ Angle.
To create a construction line by specifying two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Construction Line. 2 Specify a point to define the root of the construction line. 3 Specify a second point through which the construction line should pass. 4 Continue to specify construction lines as needed. All subsequent xlines pass through the first point specified. 5 Press Enter to end the command. To create a ray 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ray. 2 Specify a starting point for the ray.
Regions can be used for ■ Extracting design information, such as areas and centroids, using MASSPROP ■ Applying hatching and shading ■ Combining simple objects into more complex ones with Boolean operations. You can create regions from objects that form closed loops. Loops can be combinations of lines, polylines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, and splines that enclose an area.
Invalid Boundaries When a boundary cannot be determined, it might be because the specified internal point is not within a fully enclosed area. With the BOUNDARY command, red circles are displayed around unconnected endpoints of the boundary to identify gaps in the boundary. The red circles remain displayed even after you exit the command. They are removed when you specify a closed boundary, or by using REDRAW, REGEN, or REGENALL. To define regions 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Region.
To define regions by using boundaries 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary. 2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select Region. 3 Click Pick Points. 4 Specify a point in your drawing inside each closed area that you want to define as a region and press Enter. This point is known as the internal point. NOTE You can make a new boundary set to limit the objects used to determine the boundary. To combine regions by adding 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Union.
To combine regions by finding intersections 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect. 2 Select one region of the intersection. 3 Select another intersecting region. You can select regions in any order to find their intersection. 4 Continue selecting regions or press Enter to end the command. The command converts the selected regions to a new region defined by the intersection of the selected regions. Quick Reference Commands BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.
Create Revision Clouds Revision clouds are polylines that consist of sequential arcs. They are used to call attention to parts of a drawing during the review stage. If you review or redline drawings, you can increase your productivity by using the Revision Cloud feature to highlight your markups. REVCLOUD creates a polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud-shaped object. You can select a style for a revision cloud: Normal or Calligraphy.
The default minimum and maximum arc lengths are set to 0.5000 units. The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum arc length. 3 Guide the crosshairs along the cloud path. You can click pick points along the path if you want to vary the size of the arcs. 4 Press Enter at any time to stop drawing the revision cloud. To close the revision cloud, return to its starting point. To create revision clouds with a calligraphy pen style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud.
To change the default values for arc lengths in a revision cloud 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud. 2 At the Command prompt, specify a new minimum arc length and press Enter. 3 At the Command prompt, specify a new maximum arc length and press Enter. The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum arc length. 4 Press Enter to continue with the command or ESC to end the command.
Select and Modify Objects 19 You can select objects, view and edit object properties, and perform general and object-specific editing operations. Select Objects You have a wide range of options when you need to select objects for editing operations. Select Objects Individually At the Select Objects prompt, you can select one or more objects individually. Use the Pickbox Cursor When the square pickbox cursor is in position to select an object, the object is highlighted. Click to select the object.
If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by rolling over the object on top to highlight it, or you can press and hold Shift and then press the Spacebar. When the required object is highlighted, left-click to select it. If selection preview is turned off, hold down Shift and Spacebar at a Select Objects prompt while you left-click to cycle through the objects until the one you want is highlighted, and then press Enter . Press Esc to turn off cycling.
2 Keep clicking until the object you want is highlighted. 3 Press Enter to select the object. NOTE If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by rolling over the object on top to highlight it, and pressing and holding Shift and then pressing Spacebar continuously. When the required object is highlighted, left-click to select it. To remove selection from objects ■ Hold down Shift. Click the objects that you want removed from the selection set.
PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. Select Multiple Objects At the Select Objects prompt, you can select many objects at the same time. Specify a Rectangular Selection Area Specify opposite corners to define a rectangular area. The background inside the area changes color and becomes transparent.
With a window selection, usually the entire object must be contained in the rectangular selection area. However, if an object with a noncontinuous (dashed) linetype is only partially visible in the viewport and all the visible vectors of the linetype can be enclosed within the selection window, the entire object is selected. Specify an Irregularly Shaped Selection Area Specify points to define an irregularly shaped area.
You can also remove objects from the current selection set by holding down Shift and selecting them again, or by holding down Shift and then clicking and dragging window or crossing selections. You can add and remove objects repeatedly from the selection set. To see a list of options at the Select Objects prompt ■ Enter ? at the Select Objects prompt. To select objects within an irregularly shaped area 1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter wp (Window Polygon).
Quick Reference PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
use inquiry commands (such as LIST), use object snaps to specify points on objects on locked layers, and change the draw order of objects on locked layers. To help you differentiate between locked and unlocked layers, you can do the following: ■ Hover over an object to see whether a lock icon is displayed ■ Dim the objects on locked layers NOTE Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. To lock or unlock a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
LAYISO Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. LAYLCK Locks the layer of a selected object. LAYULK Unlocks the layer of a selected object. LAYLOCKFADECTL Controls the amount of fading for objects on locked layers. Select Objects by Properties Use object properties or object types to include objects in a selection set, or to exclude them.
® NOTE If an application such as AutoCAD Map 3D was used to add a feature classification to an object, and the associated classification (XML) file is present, you can select objects by classification property. Specifically, you can select a classification in the Object Type box and a property in the Properties box. See also: ■ Customize Object Selection on page 753 ■ Work with Layers on page 514 To create a selection set using Quick Select 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select.
6 Under Operator, select Greater Than. 7 Under Value, enter 1. 8 Under How to Apply, select Exclude from New Selection Set. 9 Click OK. All circles with a radius greater than 1 are removed from the selection set. To append objects to the selection set You can use Quick Select to append objects to a current selection set. In the following example, you keep the current selection set and append all objects in the drawing that contain hyperlinks whose names begin with bld1_.
The filter is applied so you can select, in this case, only lines in the drawing. If you select objects with a selection, the filter is applied to all objects in the selection area. To use a named filter 1 At the Select Object prompt, enter 'filter. (The apostrophe makes it a transparent command.) 2 In the Object Selection Filters dialog box, under Select Filter, select the filter you want to use. Click Apply. 3 Use a crossing window to specify objects for selection.
SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. SELECTSIMILAR Adds similar objects to the selection set based on selected objects. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
■ Whether selected objects are highlighted ■ How you define selection areas and how you create selection sets Select the Command First When you use an editing command, a Select Objects prompt is displayed and the crosshairs is replaced with a pickbox. You can respond to the Select Objects prompt in various ways: ■ Select objects one at a time. ■ Click an empty area. Drag the cursor to define a rectangular selection area. ■ Enter a selection option. Enter ? to display all selection options.
These selection previewing effects are turned on by default. You can turn them off with the SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable. When the PICKBOX system variable is set to 0, selection previewing of objects is not available. Control the Appearance of Selected Objects By default, selected objects are displayed with dashed lines. You can increase program performance by setting the HIGHLIGHT system variable to 0. Turning off selection highlighting does not affect grips on selected objects.
To change object selection settings 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, make changes to the Selection Preview and Selection Modes areas and the pickbox size. 3 Click OK. To turn on or turn off selection previewing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select or clear options as follows: ■ Select the When a Command Is Active option to display the check mark. ■ Select the When No Command Is Active option to display the check mark.
To exclude objects from selection previewing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings. 3 In the Visual Effect Settings dialog box, click Advanced Options. 4 In the Advanced Preview Options dialog box, select any of the following options to exclude objects from selection previewing: ■ Exclude Objects on Locked Layers ■ Xrefs ■ Tables ■ Groups ■ Multiline Text ■ Hatches 5 Click OK to exit each dialog box.
4 Click OK to exit each dialog box. Quick Reference FILTER Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. CROSSINGAREACOLOR Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips.
PREVIEWEFFECT Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects. PREVIEWFILTER Excludes specified object types from selection previewing. SELECTIONAREA Controls the display of effects for selection areas. SELECTIONAREAOPACITY Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. SELECTIONPREVIEW Controls the display of selection previewing. WINDOWAREACOLOR Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection.
In some ways, groups resemble blocks, which provide another method of combining objects into a named set. For example, groups are saved from session to session. However, you can edit individual objects in groups more easily than you can edit them in blocks, which must be exploded first. Unlike blocks, groups cannot be shared with other drawings. Quick Reference CLASSICGROUP Opens the legacy Object Grouping dialog box. GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.
Unnamed groups are not listed in the Object Grouping dialog box unless you select Include Unnamed. Named groups are not maintained when you use a drawing as an external reference or insert it as a block. However, you can bind and then explode the external reference or explode the block to make the group available as an unnamed group. NOTE Avoid creating large groups containing hundreds or thousands of objects. A large group significantly degrades the performance of this program.
Select Objects in Groups There are several methods for choosing a group, including selecting the group by name or selecting one of the members of the group. By default, groups are selectable; that is, selecting any member of a group selects all the objects in that group. You can then edit the group as a unit. Selecting an object that belongs to multiple groups selects all groups to which that object belongs. Turn off group selection to select grouped objects individually.
2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Group Name, click the group for which you want to change selectability. 3 Under Change Group, click Selectable. This changes whether objects within the group are either selectable as a group, subject to the PICKSTYLE system variable. If selectability is turned off, the objects in a group are selectable only as individual objects. At the top of the Object Grouping dialog box, under Selectable, each group displays its current status. 4 Click OK.
Edit Groups You can modify groups in a number of ways, including changing their membership, modifying their properties, revising the names and descriptions of groups, and removing them from the drawing. Edit Objects as a Group When group selection is turned on, you can move, copy, rotate, and modify groups just as you can modify individual objects. If you need to edit objects within a group, turn off group selection or use grips to edit individual objects.
To reorder group members 1 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Named Groups. 2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Change Group, click Re-Order. 3 In the Order Group dialog box, under Group Name, select the group to reorder. 4 To view the current order of this group, click Highlight. 5 In the Object Grouping dialog box, click Next or Previous to view the objects. Click OK when you have finished viewing the order of the objects.
3 At the prompt, enter rename. 4 Enter a new name. 5 Press Enter. The group is renamed. Quick Reference CLASSICGROUP Opens the legacy Object Grouping dialog box. GROUPEDIT Adds and removes objects from the selected group, or renames a selected group. UNGROUP Disassociates the objects from a group. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. Correct Mistakes You can backtrack your recent actions using one of several methods.
marked action. Use the Begin and End options of UNDO to define a set of actions to be treated as a group. You can also undo several actions at once with the Undo list on the Standard toolbar. Reverse the Effect of Undo You can reverse the effect of a single U or UNDO command by using REDO immediately after using U or UNDO. You can also redo several actions at once with the Redo list on the Standard toolbar. Erase Objects You can erase any object that you draw.
To redo a specific number of actions 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Redo list arrow. A list of undo actions that you can redo, starting with the most recent action, is displayed. 2 Drag to select the actions to redo. 3 Click to redo the selected actions. Quick Reference ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OOPS Restores erased objects. REDO Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U command. MREDO Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands.
Erase Objects There are many ways to delete objects from your drawing and clean up the display. Remove Unused Definitions, Styles, and Objects You can remove unused named and unnamed objects with PURGE. Some of the unnamed objects you can purge include block definitions, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles. With PURGE you can also remove zero-length geometry and empty text objects.
To delete duplicate objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects 2 At the Select Objects prompt, use a selection method to select objects. 3 Press Enter. The Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box is displayed. 4 Optional: ■ Specify a Tolerance value. ■ Select properties to ignore during object comparison. ■ Set additional options to optimize polyline segments, combine objects, or maintain associativity. 5 Click OK. Duplicate objects are deleted.
2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes. ■ To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree view. Then select the linetypes to be purged. If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge. 3 You are prompted to confirm each item in the list. If you do not want to confirm each purge, clear the Confirm Each Item to Be Purged option. 4 Click Purge.
OVERKILL Removes duplicate or overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines partially overlapping or contiguous ones. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. REDRAW Refreshes the display in the current viewport. REDRAWALL Refreshes the display in all viewports. REGEN Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport. UNDO Reverses the effect of commands.
Paste Objects Applications use different internal formats to store Clipboard information. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format that retains the most information is used. However, you can override this setting and convert pasted information to AutoCAD format. Because it is the easiest format to edit, the AutoCAD format is the preferred format for copying objects to and from AutoCAD.
To copy objects to the Clipboard 1 Select the objects you want to copy. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Copy Clip. You can also press Ctrl+C. To paste objects from the Clipboard ■ Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste. You can also press Ctrl+V. The objects currently on the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing. To convert pasted information to drawing file format 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste Special. 2 In the Paste Special dialog box, select Paste.
PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. PASTEORIG Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing using the original coordinates. PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. WMFIN Imports a Windows metafile. WMFOPTS Sets options for WMFIN. WMFOUT Saves objects to a Windows metafile. OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects.
Choose a Method to Modify Objects Access object editing options using the following methods: Methods Descriptions Command line Enter a command and then select the objects to modify. Alternatively, select the objects first and then enter a command. Shortcut menu Select and right-click an object to display a shortcut menu with relevant editing options. Double-click Double-click an object to display the Properties palette or, in some cases, a dialog box or editor that is specific to that type of object.
■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects on page 509 ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1966 ■ “Double Click Actions” in the Customization Guide Quick Reference CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. DBLCLKEDIT Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area.
Use Object Grips You can reshape, move, or manipulate objects in other ways using different types of grips and grip modes. Overview You can use grips in different ways: ■ Use grip modes. Select an object grip to work with the default grip mode—stretch—or press Enter or Spacebar to cycle through the additional grip modes—move, rotate, scale, and mirror. You can also right-click a selected grip to see all available options on a shortcut menu. ■ Use multi-functional grips.
Important Notes ■ Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. ■ When you select multiple objects that share coincident grips, you can edit these objects using grip modes; however, any object- or grip-specific options are not available. Tips for Stretching with Grips ■ When you select more than one grip on an object to stretch it, the shape of the object is kept intact between the selected grips.
■ Modify Leaders Using Grips on page 1449 ■ Modify Dimension Geometry on page 1593 ■ Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings on page 922 To turn on grips 1 At the Command prompt, enter options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select Show Grips. 3 Click OK. To edit objects using grips 1 Select the objects to edit. 2 Do one or more of the following: ■ Select and move grips to stretch the object.
Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. DYNINFOTIPS Controls whether tips are displayed for using Shift and Ctrl when editing with grips. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it.
Make Multiple Copies with Grips You can create multiple copies of objects as you modify them with any of the grip modes. For example, by using the Copy option, you can rotate the selected objects, leaving copies at each location you specify with the pointing device. You can also make multiple copies by holding down Ctrl as you select the first point. For example, with the Stretch grip mode, you can stretch an object, such as a line, and then copy it to any point in the drawing area.
Similarly, you can place multiple copies at angular intervals around a base grip with a rotation snap. The rotation snap is defined as the angle between an object and the next copy when you are using Rotate grip mode. Hold down Ctrl to use the rotation snap. To create copies in any grip mode 1 Select the objects to copy. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active.
To create an offset snap for multiple copies using grips 1 Select the objects to copy. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Move appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Enter c (Copy). 5 Move the cursor and click.
These copies are created at the same rotation snap angle as the first copy. 7 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc. To mirror objects and retain the originals using grips 1 Select the objects to mirror. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Mirror appears.
GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. Control Grips in Blocks You can specify whether a block displays a single grip or multiple grips. You can specify whether a selected block reference displays a single grip at its insertion point or displays multiple grips associated with the objects grouped within the block. See also: ■ Use Object Grips on page 778 ■ Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks on page 1011 To turn grips within blocks on or off 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. Move or Rotate Objects You can move objects to a different location, or change the orientation of objects by rotating them by an angle or to other objects.
Use a Stretch-Move You can also use STRETCH to move objects if all their endpoints lie entirely within the selection window. Turn on Ortho mode or polar tracking to move the objects at a specific angle. A practical example is moving a door in a wall. The door in the illustration is entirely within a crossing selection, while the wall lines are only partly within the crossing selection area. The result is that only the endpoints that lie within the crossing selection move.
■ Nudge objects with Snap mode turned on: Objects are moved in increments specified by the current snap spacing; movement is orthogonal to the X and Y axes of the current UCS and relative to the view direction. See also: ■ Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777 ■ Embed OLE Objects in Drawings on page 1830 To move an object using two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 2 Select the objects to move. 3 Specify a base point for the move. 4 Specify a second point.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Change Space. 3 Select one or more objects to move. 4 Press Enter. The object is moved to the new space, and is scaled appropriately to the new space. To move by stretching 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch. 2 Select the object by using crossing selection. The crossing selection must include at least one vertex or endpoint. Specify crossing selection by clicking, moving your pointing device from right to left, and clicking again.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STRETCH Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. System Variable SNAPUNIT Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. Command Modifiers Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor. Rotate Objects You can rotate objects in your drawing around a specified base point.
Rotate an Object to an Absolute Angle With the Reference option, you can rotate an object to align it to an absolute angle. For example, to rotate the part in the illustration so the diagonal edge rotates to 90 degrees, you select the objects to be rotated (1, 2), specify the base point (3), and enter the Reference option. For the reference angle, specify the two endpoints of the diagonal line (4, 5). For the new angle, enter 90.
To rotate an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate. 2 Select the object to rotate. 3 Specify the base point for the rotation. 4 Do one of the following: ■ Enter the angle of rotation. ■ Drag the object around its base point and specify a point location to which you want to rotate the object. ■ Enter c to create a copy of the selected objects. ■ Enter r to rotate the selected objects from a specified reference angle to an absolute angle.
2 Select the object to rotate (1). 3 Specify the start point and endpoint of the axis about which the objects are to be rotated (2 and 3). The positive axis direction is from the start point to the end point, and the rotation follows the right-hand rule (see “Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D” on page 15). 4 Specify the angle of rotation. Quick Reference Commands ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. ROTATE3D Moves objects about a 3D axis.
In 3D, use the 3DALIGN command to specify up to three points to define the source plane followed by up to three points to define the destination plane. ■ The first source point on an object, called the base point, is always moved to the first destination point. ■ Specifying a second point for either the source or the destination results in the selected objects being rotated. ■ A third point for either the source or the destination results in further rotation of the selected objects.
To align two objects in 3D 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Align. 2 Select the objects that you want to align. 3 Specify either one, two, or three source points and then the corresponding first, second, or third destination points. The first point is called the base point. The selected objects are moved from the source point to the destination point, and second and third points, if you specify them, rotate, and tilt the selected objects.
■ Enter Direct Distances on page 655 ■ Embed OLE Objects in Drawings on page 1830 ■ Array Objects on page 799 You can create duplicates of objects at a specified distance and direction from the originals. Use coordinates, grid snap, object snaps, and other tools to copy objects with precision. You can also use grips to move and copy objects quickly. Specify Distance with Two Points Copy an object using the distance and direction specified by a base point followed by a second point.
Create Multiple Copies With COPY, you can create multiple copies from the specified selection set and base point. The options include the following: ■ Create copies at specified locations or displacements ■ Automatically space a specified number of copies in a linear pattern. Move and Copy Objects by Dragging You can also select objects and drag them to a new location using the left mouse button over one of the selected objects; press Ctrl to make a copy.
To create an object based on a selected object 1 Select the object on which to base the new object. 2 Right-click and select Add Selected. 3 Follow the prompts to create an object similar to the selected object. Quick Reference Commands ADDSELECTED Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a selected object. COPY Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction. NCOPY Copies objects that are contained in an xref, block, or DGN underlay.
Control Array Associativity Associativity allows you to quickly propagate changes throughout an array by maintaining relationships between items. Arrays can be associative or non-associative. ■ Associative. Items are contained in a single array object, similar to a block. Edit the array object properties, such as the spacing or number of items. Override item properties or replace an item’s source objects. Edit an item’s source objects to change all items that reference those source objects.
Create Rectangular Arrays In rectangular arrays, items are distributed into any combination of rows, columns, and levels. A dynamic preview allows you to quickly derive the number and spacing of rows and columns. Add levels to make a 3D array. The number of rows and columns and the spacing between the rows and columns in the array increase or decrease as you move your cursor. By default, the array has a level of 1. You can rotate the array around the base point in the XY plane.
Quick Reference Commands 3DARRAY Maintains legacy behavior for creating nonassociative, 3D rectangular or polar arrays. ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state. ARRAYEDIT Edits associative array objects and their source objects. ARRAYPATH Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.
ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted. SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS.
■ Divide. The number of objects and the length of the path determine the spacing of the objects in the array. The objects are always spaced evenly along the entire length of the path. When the array is associative, the spacing between the objects automatically adjusts as the length of the path changes after it is created. To create a path array 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Path Array. 2 Select the objects to array and press Enter. 3 Select the path curve. A preview displays as you define the array.
Quick Reference Commands 3DARRAY Maintains legacy behavior for creating nonassociative, 3D rectangular or polar arrays. ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state. ARRAYEDIT Edits associative array objects and their source objects. ARRAYPATH Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.
ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted. SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS.
The direction in which the array is drawn depends on whether you enter a positive or negative value for the fill angle. For associative arrays, you can change the direction in the Properties palette. To create a polar array 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Polar Array. 2 Select the objects to array. 3 Do one of the following: ■ Specify a center point. ■ Specify a base point. ■ Enter a (Axis of rotation) and specify two points to define a custom axis of rotation.
ARRAYEDIT Edits associative array objects and their source objects. ARRAYPATH Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path. ARRAYPOLAR Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or axis of rotation. ARRAYRECT Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels. DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties.
SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. Edit Associative Arrays Modify associative arrays by editing the array properties, applying item overrides, replacing selected items, or editing source objects. Edit Array Properties To edit the array properties, use ARRAYEDIT, the Properties palette, or grips. The type of grips and dynamic menu options displayed depend on the type of array.
Apply Item Overrides Ctrl+click items in the array to erase, move, rotate, or scale the selected items without affecting the rest of the array. Reset the array to remove all item overrides. Replace Items Replace selected items with other objects. Any item overrides are maintained. You can also replace all items that reference the original source objects, rather than selecting individual items. Edit Source Objects To edit an item’s source objects, activate an editing state for a selected item.
all items referencing the same set of source objects. Save or discard your changes to exit the editing state. To modify the number of items in a rectangular array 1 Select the array. 2 Hover over the Corner grip to display the grip menu. The Corner grip is displayed on the first item in the last column of the rectangular array. 3 Click the Row and Column Count option. 4 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the number of rows and columns and then click.
2 Click the Angle Between grip. The Angle Between grip is displayed on the second item in the first row of the polar array. This grip is displayed only when there are three or more items in the array. 3 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the angle between the items and then click. Quick Reference Commands 3DARRAY Maintains legacy behavior for creating nonassociative, 3D rectangular or polar arrays. ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern.
UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
NOTE When changing the value of MaxArray, you must enter MaxArray with the capitalization shown. Quick Reference Commands 3DARRAY Maintains legacy behavior for creating nonassociative, 3D rectangular or polar arrays. ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state. ARRAYEDIT Edits associative array objects and their source objects.
System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted. SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS.
Use OFFSET to offset the following object types: ■ Lines ■ Arcs ■ Circles ■ Ellipses and elliptical arcs (resulting in an oval-shaped spline) ■ 2D polylines ■ Construction lines (xlines) and rays ■ Splines Special Cases for Offset Polylines and Splines 2D polylines are offset as individual line segments, resulting in either intersections or gaps between segments. To complete the offset, intersecting lines are trimmed and gaps are filled.
Splines are trimmed automatically when the offset distance is larger than can otherwise be accommodated. Offset the Edges of Faces on Solids and Surfaces The OFFSETEDGE command creates a closed polyline or a spline from the edges of a planar face on a 3D solid or surface. Splines result when one or more edge segments cannot be represented as lines, arcs, or a circle. For example ■ In the left illustration, the edge of the top surface of the solid was offset, resulting in the closed, yellow polyline shown.
To offset an object by specifying a distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset. 2 Specify the offset distance. You can enter a value or use the pointing device. 3 Select the object to offset. 4 Specify a point to indicate whether the object is to be offset inside or outside of the original object. 5 Select another object to offset, or press Enter to end the command. To offset an object through a point 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset. 2 Enter t (Through). 3 Select the object to offset.
Quick Reference Commands OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. OFFSETEDGE Creates a closed polyline or spline object that is offset at a specified distance from the edges of a selected planar face on a 3D solid or surface. System Variables OFFSETDIST Sets the default offset distance. OFFSETGAPTYPE Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when polylines are offset.
has the same alignment and justification as before the object was mirrored. If you do want text to be reversed, set the MIRRTEXT system variable to 1. MIRRTEXT affects text that is created with the TEXT, ATTDEF, or MTEXT commands; attribute definitions; and variable attributes. Text and constant attributes that are part of an inserted block are reversed when the block is mirrored regardless of the value of MIRRTEXT. MIRRHATCH affects hatch objects created with the GRADIENT or HATCH commands.
4 Specify the second point. 5 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to erase them. To mirror objects in 3D 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Mirror. 2 Select the object to mirror. 3 Specify three points to define a mirroring plane. 4 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to delete them. Quick Reference Commands MIRROR Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects. MIRROR3D Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane.
This means you can first create an object such as a line and then later adjust it to fit exactly between other objects. Objects you select as cutting edges or boundary edges are not required to intersect the object being trimmed. You can trim or extend an object to a projected edge or to an extrapolated intersection; that is, where the objects would intersect if they were extended.
The following example uses the fence selection method to select a series of objects for trimming. You can trim objects to their nearest intersection with other objects. Instead of selecting cutting edges, you press Enter. Then, when you select the objects to trim, the nearest displayed objects act as cutting edges. In this example, the walls are trimmed so that they intersect smoothly. NOTE You can extend objects without exiting the TRIM command.
Extending a spline preserves the shape of the original portion of the spline, but the extended portion is linear and tangent to the end of the original spline. NOTE You can trim objects without exiting the EXTEND command. Press and hold Shift while selecting the objects to be trimmed. Trim and Extend Wide Polylines 2D wide polylines trim and extend at their centerlines. The ends of wide polylines are always square.
Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the polyline. Trim or Extend in 3D You can trim or extend an object to any other object in 3D space, regardless of whether the objects are on the same plane or parallel to the cutting or boundary edges.
To extend objects in 3D wireframe models 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend . 2 Select the boundary edge for extending (1). 3 Enter e (Edge). 4 Enter e (Extend). 5 Enter p (Project). 6 Enter u (UCS). 7 Select the object to extend (2). To trim in 3D using the current view plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim 2 Select the cutting edge for trimming (1). 3 Enter p (Project). 4 Enter v (View). 5 Select the object to trim (2). 826 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects .
To trim objects in 3D wireframe models 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim . 2 Select the cutting edges to use for trimming (1). 3 Enter p (Project). 4 Enter n (None). 5 Select the object to trim (2 and 3). Quick Reference Commands BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points. EXTEND Extends objects to meet the edges of other objects. JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. LENGTHEN Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs.
System Variables EDGEMODE Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges. PROJMODE Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or extending. Resize or Reshape Objects You can resize objects to make them longer or shorter in only one direction or to make them proportionally larger or smaller. You can also stretch certain objects by moving an endpoint, vertex, or control point.
Stretch Objects With STRETCH, you relocate the endpoints of objects that lie across or within a crossing selection window. ■ Objects that are partially enclosed by a crossing window are stretched. ■ Objects that are completely enclosed within the crossing window, or that are selected individually, are moved rather than stretched. You stretch an object by specifying a base point and then a point of displacement. Use object snaps, grid snaps, and relative coordinate entry to stretch with precision.
Scale Objects Using a Reference Distance You can also scale by reference. Scaling by reference uses an existing distance as a basis for the new size. To scale by reference, specify the current distance and then the new desired size. For example, if one side of an object is 4.8 units long and you want to expand it to 7.5 units, use 4.8 as the reference length. You can use the Reference option to scale an entire drawing. For example, use this option when the original drawing units need to be changed.
3 Specify the base point. 4 Enter the scale factor or drag and click to specify a new scale. To scale an object by reference 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale. 2 Select the object to scale. 3 Select the base point. 4 Enter r (Reference). 5 Select the first and second reference points, or enter a value for the reference length. To change the length of an object by dragging 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen. 2 Enter dy (Dynamic Dragging mode). 3 Select the object you want to lengthen.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. SPLINEDIT Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a spline. STRETCH Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. System Variables PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.
■ Ellipses and elliptical arcs ■ Lines ■ Polylines ■ Rays ■ Splines ■ Xlines ■ 3D solids FILLET can be used to round all corners on a polyline using a single command. Also, you can use the Multiple option to fillet more than one set of objects without leaving the command. NOTE Filleting a hatch boundary that was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the hatch boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity is maintained.
Trim and Extend Filleted Objects You can use the Trim option to specify whether the selected objects are trimmed or extended to the endpoints of the resulting arc or left unchanged. Control the Location of the Fillet Depending on the locations you specify, more than one possible fillet can exist between the selected objects. Compare the selection locations and resulting fillets in the illustrations.
Fillet an Entire Polyline You can fillet an entire polyline or remove fillets from an entire polyline. If you set a nonzero fillet radius, FILLET inserts fillet arcs at the vertex of each polyline segment that is long enough to accommodate the fillet radius. If two linear segments in a polyline are separated by an arc segment between them, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a new arc segment of the current fillet radius. If you set the fillet radius to 0, no fillet arcs are inserted.
To set the fillet radius 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Enter r (Radius). 3 Enter the fillet radius 4 Select the objects to fillet. To fillet two line segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Select the first line. 3 Select the second line. To fillet without trimming 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 If necessary, enter t (Trim). Enter n (No Trim). 3 Select the objects to fillet. To fillet an entire polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
2 Enter m (Multiple). The main prompt is displayed. 3 Select the first line, or enter an option and complete the prompts for that option. Select the first line. 4 Select the second line. The main prompt is displayed again. 5 Select the first line for the next fillet, or press Enter or Esc to end the command. Quick Reference Commands FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. FILLETEDGE Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects.
You can chamfer ■ Lines ■ Polylines ■ Rays ■ Xlines ■ 3D solids CHAMFER can be used to bevel all corners of a polyline using a single command. NOTE Chamfering a hatch boundary that was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the hatch boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity is maintained. If both objects being chamfered are on the same layer, the chamfer line is created on that layer. Otherwise, the chamfer line is created on the current layer.
Trim and Extend Chamfered Objects By default, objects are trimmed when chamfered, but you can use the Trim option to specify that they remain untrimmed. Chamfer by Specify Length and Angle You can chamfer two objects by specifying where on the first selected object the chamfer line starts, and then the angle the chamfer line forms with this object. In this example, you chamfer two lines so that the chamfer line starts 1.
Chamfer an Entire Polyline When you chamfer an entire polyline, each intersection is chamfered. For best results, keep the first and second chamfer distances equal. In this example, the chamfer distances are set to equal values. When you chamfer an entire polyline, only the segments that are long enough to accommodate the chamfer distance are chamfered. The polyline in the following illustration has some segments too short to be chamfered.
To chamfer two nonparallel line segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Select the first line. 3 Select the second line. To chamfer by specifying chamfer length and angle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter a (Angle). 3 Enter the distance from the corner to be chamfered along the first line. 4 Enter the chamfer angle. 5 Select the first line. Then select the second line. To chamfer without trimming 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter t (Trim Control).
To chamfer multiple sets of objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter m (Multiple). The main prompt is displayed. 3 Select the first line, or enter an option and complete the prompts for that option and then select the first line. 4 Select the second line. The main prompt is displayed again. 5 Select the first line for the next chamfer, or press Enter or Esc to end the command. Quick Reference Commands CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects.
CHAMMODE Sets the input method for CHAMFER PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY TRIMMODE Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed. Break and Join Objects You can break an object into two objects with or without a gap between them. You can also join objects to create single object or multiple objects. Break Objects Use BREAK to create a gap in an object, resulting in two objects with a gap between them. BREAK is often used to create space for block or text.
■ Combining several long polylines in a topographic map. ■ Joining two splines, leaving a kink between them. In general cases, joining objects that touch end-to-end, but that are not in the same plane result in 3D polylines and splines.
Quick Reference Commands BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points. JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) You can convert a compound object, such as a polyline, dimension, hatch, or block reference, into individual elements. You can explode a compound object, such as a polyline, dimension, hatch, or block reference, to convert it into individual elements.
Explode External References An external reference (xref) is a drawing file linked (or attached) to another drawing. You cannot explode xrefs and their dependent blocks. To explode an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Explode. 2 Select the objects to be exploded. For most objects, exploding has no visible effect. Quick Reference Commands EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. XPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
■ Set a uniform width for the entire polyline or control the width of each segment ■ Create an approximation of a spline called a spline-fit polyline ■ Display noncontinuous linetypes with or without a dash before and after each vertex ■ Change the orientation of text in a polyline’s linetype by reversing its direction Modify Polylines with Grips NOTE For general information about working with grips, see Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777.
Option Animation Tangent Direction. Manipulate the tangent directions to redefine the shape of a curve-fit polyline. Modify a Segment Within a Polyline To select individual segments (or subobjects) of a polyline, press Ctrl while clicking the segments. You can use grips to modify the segments. You can use the Properties palette to change the width of individual segments; changing any other property affects the entire polyline even if only a segment is selected.
■ Overview of Constraints on page 865 ■ Trim or Extend Objects on page 821 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 843 To modify a polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline. 2 Select the polyline to modify. NOTE To select a single arc or line segment, press Ctrl while clicking the segment. 3 If the selected object is a spline, line, or an arc, the following prompt is displayed: Object selected is not a polyline.
■ Enter d (Decurve) to remove extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and to straighten all segments of the polyline. ■ Enter L (Ltype Gen) to generate the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the polyline. ■ Enter r (Reverse) to reverse the order of vertices of the polyline. ■ Enter u (Undo) to reverse actions back to the start of PEDIT. 5 Enter x (Exit) to end a command option. Press Enter to exit the PEDIT command.
The first vertex is marked with an X. Use the Next option to move the X to the vertex preceding the one that you want to delete. 4 Enter s (Straighten). 5 Use the Next option to move the X to the vertex immediately following the one that you want to delete. 6 Enter g (Go). The vertex on the polyline is deleted. The vertices on either side of the deleted vertex are joined by a straight polyline segment. 7 Enter x (Exit) to end editing vertices. 8 Press Enter to end the command.
JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. System Variables GRIPS Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
SURFV Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V isolines density on surface objects. Modify Splines See also: ■ Draw Splines on page 723 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 843 ■ Use Object Grips on page 778 ■ Edit NURBS Surfaces on page 1225 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves on page 1227 Several methods are available for editing splines and changing their underlying mathematical parameters.
To switch between displaying control vertices and displaying fit points, click the triangular grip. IMPORTANT Switching from displaying control vertices to fit points automatically changes the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using higher-degree equations will likely change shape as a result. In general, editing a spline with control vertices provides finer control over reshaping a small section of the curve than editing a spline with fit points.
Edit Splines with SPLINEDIT SPLINEDIT provides additional editing options, such as adding a kink to the spline, and joining a spline to another contiguous object, such as a line, arc, or other spline. As shown, objects are joined to splines with C0 continuity. Edit Splines with 3DEDITBAR 3DEDITBAR displays a gizmo that can move a portion of a spline proportionately, or change the direction and magnitude of the tangent at a specified base point on the spline.
TIP Not visible in the illustration is a blue axis arrow grip that points toward you. This axis is visible in other views such as a 3D isometric view, and can be used to modify the shape of a spline in 3D. Click the downward-pointing triangular grip to switch to the Move Tangent Direction option as illustrated below. Even though the axes of the gizmo change their location, the base point remains the same. With this option, moving the square grip changes the slope of the tangent at the base point.
For more information, see Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777. To convert a spline to a polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Spline. 2 Select the spline to convert. 3 Enter p to convert to Polyline. 4 Specify a precision value or press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference Commands 3DEDITBAR Reshapes splines and NURBS surfaces, including their tangency properties. CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.
JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that is defined by the vertices in a control frame. SPLINEDIT Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a spline. REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths.
You can use the Properties palette to change other helix properties, such as ■ Number of turns (Turns) ■ Turn height ■ Direction of the twist — clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW) With the Constrain property, you can specify that the Height, Turns, or Turn Height properties of the helix are constrained. The Constrain property affects how the helix changes when the Height, Turns, or Turn Height properties are changed either through the Properties palette or through grip editing.
Quick Reference Commands HELIX Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring. Modify Multilines Multiline objects are composed of 1 to 16 parallel lines, called elements. To modify multilines or their elements, you can use common multiline editing commands.
Edit Multiline Styles You can use MLSTYLE to edit multiline styles to change the properties of multiline elements or the end caps and background fill of subsequently created multilines. Multiline styles control the number of line elements in a multiline and the color, linetype, lineweight, and offset of each element. You can also modify the display of joints, end caps, and background fill.
NOTE If you trim or extend a multiline object, only the first boundary object encountered determines the shape of the end of the multiline. A multiline cannot have a complex boundary at its endpoint. See also: ■ Draw Multiline Objects on page 701 To delete a vertex from a multiline 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Multiline. 2 In the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box, select Delete Vertex. 3 In the drawing, specify the vertex to delete. Press Enter.
Quick Reference Commands MLEDIT Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices. MLSTYLE Creates, modifies, and manages multiline styles.
864
Add Constraints to Geometry 20 With parametric drawing, you can add constraints to geometry to ensure that the design conforms to specified requirements. Overview of Constraints Parametric drawing is a technology that is used for designing with constraints. Constraints are associations and restrictions applied to 2D geometry.
In the design phase of a project, constraints provide a way to enforce requirements when experimenting with different designs or when making changes. Changes made to objects can adjust other objects automatically, and restrict changes to distance and angle values.
Thus, there are two general methods for designing with constraints: ■ You can work in an underconstrained drawing and make changes as you go, using a combination of editing commands, grips, and adding or changing constraints. ■ You can create and fully constrain a drawing first, and then control the design exclusively by relaxing and replacing geometric constraints, and changing the values in dimensional constraints.
Remove or Relax Constraints There are two ways to cancel the effects of constraints when you need to make design changes: ■ Delete the constraints individually and later apply new constraints. While the cursor hovers over a geometric constraint icon, you can use the Delete key or the shortcut menu to delete the constraint. ■ Relax the constraints temporarily on selected objects to make the changes.
DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden.
NOTE The locked geometry is not associated to the other geometry without geometric constraints linked to it. The geometry is not fully constrained, however. Using grips, you can still change the radius of the arc, the diameter of the circle, the length of the horizontal line, and the length of the vertical lines. To specify these distances, you need to apply dimensional constraints. NOTE Constraints can be added to segments within a polyline as if they were separate objects.
GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. System Variables CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
When you apply a constraint, two things occur: ■ The object that you select adjusts automatically to conform to the specified constraint ■ By default, a gray constraint icon displays near the constrained object as shown in the previous illustration, and a small blue glyph displays with your cursor when you move it over a constrained object Once applied, constraints permit only those changes to the geometry that do not violate the constraints.
Specify Constraint Points With some constraints, you specify constraint points on objects instead of selecting the objects. This behavior is similar to that of object snaps, but the locations are limited to endpoints, midpoints, center points, and insertion points. For example, a coincident constraint can restrict the location of the endpoint of one line to the endpoint of another line. The following glyph is displayed on the object as you roll over the object.
A different set of constraint bar icons are displayed when a horizontal or vertical constraint is not parallel or perpendicular with the current UCS. Use Fix Constraints A fix constraint associates a constraint point on an object, or the object itself with a fixed location with respect to the World Coordinate System. It is often advisable to specify a fix constraint at an important geometric feature.
NOTE Fix constraint is not applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN. You must apply the constraint individually. Equal constraint applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN resizes the selected arcs to the same radius only. It is not applied to the arc length. To fully constrain the size and proportions of a design, you will later need to apply dimensional constraints. Remove Geometric Constraints A geometric constraint cannot be modified, but you can delete it and apply a different one.
GCCOINCIDENT Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve). GCCOLLINEAR Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line. GCCONCENTRIC Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point. GCEQUAL Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the same length. GCFIX Locks points and curves in position. GCHORIZONTAL Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system.
GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. System Variables CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
■ When you roll over an object that has geometric constraints applied to it, all constraint bars that are associated with the object are highlighted. These highlighting features simplify working with constraints especially when you have many constraints applied throughout a drawing. Control the Display of Constraint Bars Geometric constraints and constraint bars can be displayed or hidden, either individually or globally.
You can set the constraint bars to automatically and temporarily display when the constrained geometry is selected. When the geometry is no longer selected, the temporarily displayed constraint bars are hidden. Hiding geometric constraints is useful when you analyze a design and want to filter the display of geometric constraints. For example, you can choose to display the icons for Parallel constraints only. Next, you might choose to display the icons for Perpendicular constraints only.
To hide all geometric constraints ➤ Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Hide All. To change the constraint bar settings using the constraint bar shortcut menu 1 Select a constrained object. 2 Ensure that the constraint bar is visible for the selected object. 3 Right-click the constraint bar, and click Constraint Bar Settings. 4 In the Constraint Settings dialog box, on the Geometric tab, select or clear the appropriate check boxes.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied You can edit constrained geometric objects with grips, editing commands, or by relaxing or applying geometric constraints.
The CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE system variable determines the way an object behaves when constraints are applied or when grips are used to edit it. BEST PRACTICE You can limit unexpected changes by applying additional geometric or dimensional constraints. Common choices include coincident and fix constraints. Modify Constrained Objects with Editing Commands You can use editing commands such as MOVE, COPY, ROTATE, SCALE, and STRETCH to modify constrained geometry.
The grips are displayed in red to show that the object is selected. 3 Click the grip. 4 Press and release the Shift key. 5 Move the object. The object moves freely as it is no longer constrained. Constraint bars will no longer be displayed (if enabled) for the object, as the constraints are turned off. To delete a geometric constraint 1 Select a constrained object. 2 Ensure that the constraint bar is visible for the selected object. 3 Right-click the constraint bar. Click Delete.
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. System Varaibles CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
■ Symmetric ■ Concentric ■ Equal ■ Collinear Infer Constraints with Line and Polyline Certain object creation and editing commands can infer constraints regardless of the current object snap settings. LINE and PLINE commands infer coincident point-to-point constraints. The Close option infers a coincident constraint between the start point of the first line and the endpoint of the last line.
Infer Constraints with Move, Copy, and Stretch When moving, copying, or stretching with the Infer Constraints on, you can apply coincident, perpendicular, parallel, or tangent constraints between the object being edited and the object being snapped to if the base point of the edited object is a valid constraint point of that object. For example, if a line is stretched and snapped to an endpoint of another line, a coincident constraint is applied between the endpoints of the two lines.
FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. LINE Creates straight line segments. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline. System Variables CONSTRAINTINFER Controls whether the geometric constraints are inferred while drawing and editing geometry.
If you change the value of a dimensional constraint, all the constraints on the object are evaluated, and the objects that are affected are updated automatically. Also, constraints can be added directly to segments within a polyline as if they were separate objects. NOTE The number of decimal places displayed in dimensional constraints is controlled by the LUPREC and AUPREC system variables.
Define Variables and Equations With the Parameters Manager, you can define custom user variables that you can reference from within dimensional constraints and other user variables. The expressions that you define can include a variety of predefined functions and constants.
DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Apply Dimensional Constraints Dimensional constraints maintain specified distances and angles between geometric objects or points on objects.
Dynamic Constraints By default, dimensional constraints are dynamic. They are ideal for normal parametric drawing and design tasks.
You use reference parameters as a convenient way to display measurements that you would otherwise have to calculate. For example, the width in the illustration is constrained by the diameter constraint, dia1, and the linear constraint, d1. The reference parameter, d2, displays the total width but does not constrain it. The textual information in reference parameters is always displayed within parentheses.
Quick Reference Commands DCALIGNED Constrains the distance between two points on different objects. DCANGULAR Constrains the angle between line or polyline segments, the angle swept out by an arc or a polyline arc segment, or the angle between three points on objects. DCCONVERT Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. DCDIAMETER Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc. DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects.
DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints You can display or hide dynamic and annotational constraints within a drawing.
3 Press Enter. 4 Select one of following: ■ Show. Displays the dimensional constraints. ■ Hide. Hides the dimensional constraints. Quick Reference Commands DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
System Variables CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected.
■ Customize the Quick Properties palette to display several constraint properties You can reference other dimensional constraints by selecting them during an in-place editing operation. NOTE You cannot edit the Expression and Value properties for a reference parameter. Modify Dimensional Constraints Using Their Grips You can modify a constrained object either by using the triangular grips or the square grips on the associated dimensional constraint.
Dynamic dimensional constraints are more limited than annotational dimensional constraints in where the text can be located. NOTE Triangular grips are not available for dimensional constraints that reference other constraint variables in expressions. For information about temporarily relaxing constraints, see Overview of Constraints on page 865. See also: ■ Overview of Constraints on page 865 To grip-edit a dimensional constraint 1 Select a constrained object.
The constraint is relaxed for the object, and you should be able to move it. To edit the dimensions using the Parameters Manager palette 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the variable you want to edit. 3 Press Tab to navigate across the columns. 4 Change the values in the appropriate column. NOTE You can modify only the Name, Expression, and Description columns. 5 Press Enter.
-PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension object. System Variables CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
Overview of Formulas and Equations Formulas and equations can be represented either as expressions within dimensional constraint parameters or by defining user variables. For example, the following illustration represents a design that constrains a circle to the center of the rectangle with an area equal to that of the rectangle. The Length and Width dimensional constraint parameters are set to constants. The d1 and d2 constraints are simple expressions that reference the Length and Width.
Protect Expressions in Dynamic Constraints When a dynamic dimensional constraint references one or more parameters, the prefix fx: is added to the name of the constraint. This prefix is displayed only in the drawing. Its purpose is to help you avoid accidentally overwriting parameters and formulas when the dimension name format is set to Value or Name, which suppresses the display of the parameters and formulas.
Click a column heading to sort the list of parameters by name, expression, or value. ■ Use Operators in Expressions Dimensional constraint parameters and user variables support the following operators within expressions: Operator Description + Addition - Subtraction or unary negation % Floating point modulo * Multiplication / Division ^ Exponentiation () Parenthesis, expression delimiter .
Functions Supported in Expressions The following functions are available for use in expressions: Function Syntax Cosine cos(expression) Sine sin(expression) Tangent tan(expression) Arc cosine acos(expression) Arc sine asin(expression) Arc tangent atan(expression) Hyperbolic cosine cosh(expression) Hyperbolic sine sinh(expression) Hyperbolic tangent tanh(expression) Arc hyperbolic cosine acosh(expression) Arc hyperbolic sine asinh(expression) Arc hyperbolic tangent atanh(expression)
Function Syntax Absolute value abs(expression) Largest element in array max(expression1;expression2) Smallest element in array min(expression1;expression2) Degrees to radians d2r(expression) Radians to degrees r2d(expression) Logarithm, base e ln(expression) Logarithm, base 10 log(expression) Exponent, base e exp(expression) Exponent, base 10 exp10(expression) Power function pow(expression1;expression2) Random decimal, 0-1 Random In addition to these functions, the constants Pi and e
To include a function in an expression 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the Expression column of the variable to which you want to add the function. 3 Right-click the Expression column, and click Expressions. 4 Select the function to insert it in the Expression column. To modify a user parameter 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the columns of the variable you want to edit. 3 Change the values of the appropriate columns.
PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. -PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. Organize Parameters into Groups Organize dimensional and user-defined parameters into groups, and control whether they are displayed in the Parameters Manager list.
To create, modify, or delete a parameter group 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 In the Parameters Manager, you can do the following: ■ Create a parameter group. Click the Parameter Group button and specify a group name. ■ Rename a parameter group. Right-click the parameter group, choose Rename, and specify a new group name. ■ Delete a parameter group. Right-click the parameter group and choose Delete.
PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
Part 7: Define and Reference Blocks 913
914
Work with Blocks 21 A block is one or more objects combined to create a single object. Blocks help you reuse objects in the same drawing or in other drawings. Overview of Blocks How Blocks Are Stored and Referenced Every drawing file has a block definition table that stores all block definitions, which consist of all information associated with the block. It is these block definitions that are referenced when you insert blocks in your drawing.
When you insert a block you are inserting a block reference. The information is not copied from the block definition to the drawing area. Instead, a link is established between the block reference and the block definition. Therefore, if the block definition is changed, all references are updated automatically. Use PURGE to remove unused block definitions from a drawing. Blocks and Layers A block can be composed of objects drawn on several layers with various colors, linetypes, and lineweight properties.
Insert Blocks When you insert a block, you create a block reference and specify its location, scale, and rotation. Scale Block References You can specify the scale of a block reference using different X, Y, and Z values. A block that uses different drawing units than the units specified for the drawing is automatically scaled by a factor equivalent to the ratio between the two units.
Xrefs contained in a drawing you insert may not be displayed properly unless the xref was previously inserted or attached to the destination drawing. Insert Blocks from Tool Palettes You can insert blocks from tool palettes by dragging the block tool into the drawing or by clicking the block tool and then specifying an insertion point. You can choose to be prompted for a rotation angle (starting from 0) when you click and place the block.
from block library drawings. A block library drawing contains block definitions of symbols with similar functions. These block definitions are stored together in a single drawing file for easy accessibility and management. Insert Blocks with DesignCenter Use DesignCenter to insert blocks from the current drawing or from another drawing. Drag and drop the block names for quick placement. Double-click the block names to specify the precise location, rotation, and scale of the blocks.
4 If you want the objects in the block to be inserted as individual objects instead of as a single block, select Explode. 5 Click OK. To insert a drawing file as a block by dragging 1 From Windows Explorer or any folder, drag the drawing file icon into the drawing area. When you release the button, you are prompted for an insertion point. 2 Specify the insertion point and scale and rotation values.
4 Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to specify one or more of the following: ■ Insertion Point ■ Scale ■ Rotation 5 Click OK. 6 In the Properties palette, change the properties of the block (or dynamic block). Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. DIVIDE Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings A dynamic block reference can be changed in a drawing while you work. Overview of Dynamic Blocks Dynamic block references contain grips or custom properties that change the way the reference is displayed in the drawing after it is inserted. For example, a dynamic block reference of a door can change size after you insert the block reference into your drawing.
Some dynamic blocks are defined so that geometry within the block can only be edited to certain sizes specified in the block definition. When you use a grip to edit the block reference, tick marks are displayed at the locations of valid values for the block reference. If you change a block property value to a value other than one specified in the definition, the parameter will adjust to the closest valid value.
The following table shows the different types of custom grips that can be included in a dynamic block.
Work With Lookup Grips A block reference that contains a lookup grip allows you to specify a preset value that changes the way the block reference is displayed. The new size is displayed in the Properties palette under Custom. Control Visibility of Block References A block definition can contain a visibility state grip, which determines several graphical representations of the same block reference.
Reset a Block to Display Default Geometry When you reset a block reference, the block changes back to the default specified in the block definition. For example, you can make a block dynamic again if you non-uniformly scale or explode a dynamic block reference. Quick Reference RESETBLOCK Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition. GRIPDYNCOLOR Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks.
Quick Reference PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. Remove Block Definitions To reduce the size of a drawing, you can remove unused block definitions. You can remove a block reference from your drawing by erasing it; however, the block definition remains in the drawing's block definition table.
To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected. 5 Select more items to purge, or click Close. Quick Reference PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
Create and Modify Blocks 22 A block definition is a set of objects that are grouped together as one named object with a base point and unique properties. Define Blocks You create blocks by associating objects and giving them a name. Create Blocks Within a Drawing After you define a block in a drawing, you can insert a block reference in the drawing as many times as necessary. Use this method to create blocks quickly.
The illustration shows a typical sequence for creating a block definition within a drawing. You can also use the Block Editor to create blocks that are saved within a drawing. See also: ■ Overview of Blocks on page 915 ■ Overview of the Block Editor on page 968 To define a block for the current drawing 1 Create the objects you want to use in the block definition. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 3 In the Block Definition dialog box, enter a block name in the Name box.
this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the drawing. If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them. 5 Click Select Objects. 6 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the block definition. Press Enter to complete object selection. 7 In the Block Definition dialog box under Base Point, specify the block insertion point using one of these methods. ■ Click Pick Point to specify a point using the pointing device. ■ Enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point.
Create a New Drawing File You have two methods for creating drawing files: ■ Create and save a complete drawing file using SAVE or SAVEAS. ■ Create and save only selected objects from your current drawing to a new drawing using EXPORT or WBLOCK. With either method, you create an ordinary drawing file that can be inserted as a block into any other drawing file.
If you want the original objects used to create the new drawing to remain in your drawing, make sure the Delete From Drawing option is not selected. If this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the drawing. If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them. 4 Click Select Objects. 5 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the new drawing. Press Enter to complete object selection.
BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. OOPS Restores erased objects. WBLOCK Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.
■ Objects inherit color, linetype, and lineweight properties from the current color, linetype, and lineweight that you have set explicitly, that is, that you have set to override the color, linetype, or lineweight assigned to the current layer. If you have not explicitly set them, then these properties are inherited from the color, linetype, and lineweight assigned to the current layer.
LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Nest Blocks The only restriction on nested blocks is that you cannot insert blocks that reference themselves. You can apply geometric constraints and constraint parameters to nested objects in blocks. AutoCAD detects the nested entity or valid constraint point for the nested entity regardless of the nesting level of the object.
See also: ■ Overview of Blocks on page 915 ■ Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks on page 976 Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. Create Block Libraries A block library is a collection of block definitions stored in a single drawing file. You can use block libraries supplied by Autodesk or other vendors or create your own. You can organize a set of related block definitions by creating the blocks in the same drawing file.
To create a block library drawing 1 Begin a new drawing. 2 Define a block. 3 Repeat step 2 for as many related block definitions as you want to make. 4 Save the drawing using a name appropriate for a library drawing. These blocks can be inserted into any drawing using DesignCenter (ADCENTER). Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks You can use tool palettes to organize blocks that are stored in one drawing file or separate drawing files.
be displayed when the block is inserted into your drawing. In the example on the right, the line of symmetry has been converted to a dashed line that will not display when the block is inserted into a drawing. You can add construction geometry (BCONSTRUCTION command) to the selection sets of legacy actions. The construction geometry is not affected by the visibility states. It is filtered from the selection set in the BVSTATE command when you add or remove geometry from a visibility state.
Overview of Block Attributes An attribute is a label or tag that attaches data to a block. Examples of data that might be contained in an attribute are part numbers, prices, comments, and owners' names. The tag is equivalent to a column name in a database table. The following illustration shows a block with four attributes: type, manufacturer, model, and cost. The attributes in the illustration are single-line attributes.
■ Modify the Data in Block Attributes on page 956 ■ Scale Annotations on page 1324 Quick Reference ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. ATTDISP Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing. ATTEDIT Changes attribute information in a block. ATTIPEDIT Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames.
ATTREQ Controls whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks. Define Block Attributes The characteristics include the tag, which is a name that identifies the attribute, the prompt displayed when you insert the block, value information, text formatting, location within the block, and any optional modes (Invisible, Constant, Verify, Preset, Lock Position, and Multiple Lines).
■ When a drawing is saved to AutoCAD 2007 or earlier, a multiple-line attribute is converted to several single-line attributes, one for every line of text in the original multiple-line attribute. If the drawing file is opened in the current release, these single line attributes are automatically merged back into a multiple-line attribute.
When you open a block definition in the Block Editor, you can use the Attribute Order dialog box (BATTORDER command) to change the order in which you are prompted for attribute information when you insert the block reference. Use Attributes Without Attaching Them to Blocks Stand-alone attributes can also be created. Once attributes have been defined, and the drawing is saved, this drawing file can be inserted into another drawing. When the drawing is inserted, you are prompted for the attribute values.
To change the prompt order of attribute definitions 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, select a block attribute. 3 Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. 4 Click Attribute Order. 5 In the Attribute Order dialog box, select an attribute definition. 6 Click Move Up or Move Down to change the prompt order of the attribute definitions. 7 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the attribute definition list is in the desired order. 8 Click OK.
ATTIPE Controls the which Text Formatting toolbar is used with the in-place editor for modifying multiline attributes. ATTMULTI Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. Extract Data from Block Attributes Extracting attribute information is an easy way to produce a schedule or bill of materials directly from your drawing data. For example, a facilities drawing might contain blocks representing office equipment.
See also: ■ Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets on page 1969 Quick Reference DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file. DXEVAL Controls when data extraction tables are compared against the data source, and if the data is not current, displays an update notification.
Create an Attribute Extraction Template File Before you extract attribute information, you must create an ASCII template file to define the structure of the file that will contain the extracted attribute information. The template file contains information about the tag name, data type, field length, and number of decimal places associated with the information you want to extract. Each field in the template file extracts information from the block references in the drawing.
The illustration and table show an example of the type of information you're likely to extract, including block name, manufacturer, model number, and cost. Field (C)haracter or (N)umeric data Maximum field length Decimal places Block name C 040 000 Manufacturer C 006 000 Model C 015 000 Cost N 006 002 You can create any number of template files, depending on how you'll use the data. Each line of a template file specifies one field to be written in the attribute extraction file.
PRICE N009002 (Unit price, format nnnnnnnn.dd) NOTE The format code for a numeric field includes the decimal point in the total field width. For example, the minimum field width to accommodate the number 249.95 would be 6 and would be represented as N006002. Character fields do not use the last three digits of the format code.
By default, character fields are enclosed with single quotes (apostrophes). The default field delimiter is a comma. The following two template records can be used to override these defaults: C:QUOTE c (Character string delimiter) C:DELIM c (Field delimiter) The first nonblank character following the C:QUOTE or C:DELIM field name becomes the respective delimiter character.
For a nested block reference, the X,Y, Z coordinate values, scale factors, extrusion direction, and rotation angle reflect the actual location, size, orientation, and rotation of the nested block in the world coordinate system. In some complex cases, nested block references cannot be correctly represented with only two scale factors and a rotation angle, for example, if a nested block reference is rotated in 3D.
4 Specify the attribute template file to use by entering the file name or by choosing Template File and browsing. 5 Specify the output attribute information file by entering the file name or by choosing Output File and browsing. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference ATTEXT Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file. DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file.
the existing block definition, and all the references to that block in the drawing are immediately updated to reflect the new definition. To save time, you can insert and explode an instance of the original block and then use the resulting objects in creating the new block definition. Update a Block Definition That Originated from a Drawing File Block definitions created in your current drawing by inserting a drawing file are not updated automatically when the original drawing is modified.
See also: ■ Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) on page 939 ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions on page 974 To modify an existing block definition 1 Select the block to modify. 2 Right-click the block and click Properties on the shortcut menu. 3 In the Properties palette, select and modify X and Y position, scale, rotation values, or other properties. To update a block definition that originated from a drawing file 1 If DesignCenter is not already open, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter.
Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects.
Quick Reference ATTEDIT Changes attribute information in a block. ATTIPEDIT Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. ATTSYNC Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition. BATTMAN Manages the attributes for a selected block definition. EATTEDIT Edits attributes in a block reference. ATTIPE Controls the which Text Formatting toolbar is used with the in-place editor for modifying multiline attributes.
Changing the attribute properties of existing block references does not affect the values assigned to those blocks. For example, in a block containing an attribute whose tag is Cost and value is 19.99, the 19.99 value is unaffected if you change the tag from Cost to Unit Cost. Updating attributes with duplicate tag names can lead to unpredictable results. Use the Block Attribute Manager to find duplicate tags and change tag names.
Edit Attributes in a Block Reference You can select an attribute in a block reference and use the Properties palette to change its properties, or you can use the Enhanced Attribute Editor to modify all the attributes in a selected block reference. See also: ■ Define Block Attributes on page 942 ■ Modify a Block Definition on page 953 To edit attributes assigned to a block definition 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes.
To highlight duplicate attribute tags in a block 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Settings dialog box, select Emphasize Duplicate Tags. 4 Click OK. To change the prompt order for attribute values 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click Select Block and select a block in the drawing area.
To update existing block references with attributes you have modified 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click Select Block and select a block in the drawing area. 3 Click Sync to update attributes you have changed in all block references for the selected block. To update the attributes in block references for a selected block definition 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Synchronize Attributes.
■ Click OK to save your changes and close the Enhanced Attribute Editor. ■ Click Select Block to edit the attributes of a different block. If you made changes to the current block, but have not saved them, you are prompted to do so before selecting a new block. Quick Reference ATTIPEDIT Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. ATTSYNC Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition.
When you explode a block reference, the block reference is disassembled into its component objects; however, the block definition still exists in the drawing for insertion later. You can automatically explode block references as you insert them by selecting the Explode option in the Insert dialog box. To control properties while you explode an object 1 Enter xplode. 2 Select the objects to be exploded.
964
Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 23 Instead of being a fixed part of a drawing, a dynamic block reference can be changed or manipulated as you work in a drawing. Overview of Dynamic Blocks Dynamic block definitions allow you to edit a block reference outside of the Block Editor. They contain rules, or parameters, for how to change the appearance of the block reference when it is inserted in the drawing. A dynamic block reference inserts one block that can be edited in several different ways.
Add Actions and Parameters to Block Definitions In a block definition, actions and parameters provide rules for the behavior or a block once it is inserted into the drawing. Depending on the specified block geometry, or parameter, you can associate an action to that parameter. The parameter is represented as a grip in the drawing. When you edit the grip, the associated action determines what will change in the block reference.
Add actions. If you are working with action parameters on page 989, if necessary, add actions to define what ----will happen to the geometry when it is manipulated. Define custom properties. Add properties that determine how the block is ----- displayed in the drawing area. Custom properties affect grips, labels, and preset values for block geometry. Test the block. On the ribbon, in the Block Editor contextual tab, ----- Open/Save panel, click Test Block to test the block before you save it.
Overview of the Block Editor In the Block Editor, you can ■ Define a block ■ Add a geometric or dimensional constraint ■ Add an action parameter ■ Define attributes ■ Manage visibility states ■ Test and save the block definition UCS in the Block Editor Within the Block Editor, the origin of the UCS icon defines the base point for the block. You can change the base point for the block by moving the geometry relative to the origin of the UCS icon, or by adding a base point parameter.
■ Select if the drawing is the block definition you want to open. 3 Click OK. To create a new block definition in the Block Editor 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition. Click OK. 3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. NOTE This saves the block definition even if you have not added any objects in the Block Editor drawing area. 4 Click Close Block Editor.
To view properties of a block definition in the Block Editor 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select a block definition from the list. ■ Select if the drawing is the block definition you want to open. 3 Click OK. 4 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 5 In the Properties Palette window, under Block, view the properties of the block definition. Quick Reference BCLOSE Closes the Block Editor.
Similar to tool palettes, you can also use these palettes to add parameters and actions to your dynamic block definition. Change Properties of Tools In the Tool Properties dialog box, you can change the following properties of custom tools: ■ Tool description ■ Parameter type ■ Associated action(s) ■ Key point on the parameter to which the action is tied (if applicable) ■ Tool palette image NOTE You cannot drag parameters and actions from the Block Editor onto a regular tool palette.
To make a copy of a parameter set 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, Under Block To Create or Edit, select a name from the list and then, click OK. 3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring Palettes. 4 In the Block Authoring Palettes window, Parameters Sets tab, right-click a parameter set. Click Copy. 5 Right-click anywhere on the palette to which you want to add the parameter set (except on a parameter set). Click Paste.
Quick Reference BAUTHORPALETTE Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. BLOCKEDITOR Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open. Test Blocks Within the Block Editor Test your block definition before you save or exit the Block Editor.
Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Correct Errors in Action Parameters A yellow alert icon is displayed when ■ A parameter is not associated with an action ■ An action is not associated with a parameter or selection set To correct these errors, hover over the yellow alert icon until the tooltip displays a description of the problem. Then double-click the constraint and follow the prompts.
To save the current block definition as a new drawing file 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As. 3 In the Save Block As dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition. 4 Select the Save Block Definition to Drawing File check box. Click OK. 5 In the Browse For Drawing File dialog box, click Save. Quick Reference BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONTOOL Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. BSAVE Saves the current block definition. BSAVEAS Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. BVSTATE Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks You can add geometric and dimensional constraints to a dynamic block.
The above block definition contains both a linear constraint and a horizontal constraint parameter. The horizontal constraint parameter includes a grip, while the linear constraint does not. The horizontal constraint parameter is also dynamic, while the linear constraint is not.
BCONSTATUSMODE Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level. Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks You can control the geometry of constraint parameters with mathematical expressions. While you can insert both user variables and user parameters in the Block Editor, only user parameters are displayed as editable custom properties for a block reference. There are several types of user parameters.
Quick Reference BCPARAMETER Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional constraints to parameter constraints. BTABLE Displays a dialog box to define variations of a block. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. BCONSTATUSMODE Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level.
■ Show or Hide Information ■ Display Order ■ Description For more information on the Parameters Manager in the Block Editor, see Parameters Manager - Block Editor. To display or hide additional columns in the Parameters Manager ■ In the Parameters Manager, right-click a column header and select or de-select a column name.
A table can include any of the following parameters and properties: ■ Action parameters ■ User parameters ■ Constraint parameters ■ Attributes NOTE Only one table is allowed in the block definition. You can restrict the property set for block references to only values defined by one of the rows of the table. You can also change individual properties of the reference so that the property set no longer matches one of the defined rows.
4 In the Add Parameter Properties dialog box, under the Parameter Properties list, select the parameter properties you want to add to the block table. Hold Ctrl to select more than one property. 5 Click OK. To check for errors in a block properties table 1 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table. 2 In the Block Properties Table dialog box, click Audit.
Work with Fully Constrained Block Definitions You can identify fully constrained objects with the constrained status mode in the Block Editor. The BCONSTATUSMODE system variable allows you to switch between the constrained status modes. You can also use the ribbon to switch between modes while in the Block Editor. The constrained geometry is represented with different colors. For more information see the Block Editor Settings dialog box.
4 Click OK. Quick Reference BESETTINGS Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box. BCONSTATUSMODE Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level. Add Action Parameters to Dynamic Blocks You can add actions and parameters to dynamic blocks to determine how a block should behave when it is inserted into a drawing.
Hover the cursor over an action icon to display ■ The associated parameter ■ The associated selection set ■ Additional objects that belong to the action NOTE In order to use the BASSOCIATE command, you must first set BACTIONBARMODE to 0. Custom Tools You can create custom block authoring tools, which you access from the block authoring palettes. In order to preserve the default tools on the block authoring palettes, you should create a new palette for custom block authoring tools.
Dependencies When you select a parameter, grip, or action in the Block Editor, its associated objects are highlighted. This is called dependency highlighting. You can turn dependency highlighting on or off. The following example shows how dependency highlighting creates a halo effect for the associated parameter (labeled Distance) and action (labeled Stretch) when you select the custom grip in the Block Editor.
3 At the Command prompt, enter bactioncolor. 4 Enter one of the following values: ■ BYLAYER ■ BYBLOCK ■ An integer from 1 to 255. ■ A true color specified by three integers each ranging from 1 to 255 in the following format: RGB:000,000,000. 5 Press Enter. 6 At the Command prompt, enter regen to regenerate the drawing. Quick Reference BACTIONBAR Displays or hides action bars for a selection set of parameter objects. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BGRIPOBJCOLOR Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor. BGRIPOBJSIZE Sets the display size of custom grips in the Block Editor relative to the screen display. BPARAMETERCOLOR Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor. BPARAMETERFONT Sets the font used for parameters and actions in the Block Editor. BPARAMETERSIZE Sets the size of parameter text and features in the Block Editor relative to the screen display.
See also: ■ Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 1008 ■ Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 1003 ■ Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 946 ■ Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 947 Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. BSAVE Saves the current block definition.
When you move the grip in the example above, only the geometry in the selection set is stretched. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition.
Apply a Move Action to a Linear Parameter A move action associated with a linear parameter moves all objects in a selection set only in the direction of the linear parameter. The parameter key point is the location of the grip in the block reference. Apply a Move Action to a Polar Parameter A move action associated with a polar parameter moves all objects in a selection set in any direction.
Apply a Scale Action to a Linear Parameter A scale action applied to a linear parameter scales the selected objects in the direction of the parameter. Apply a Scale Action to a Polar Parameter A scale action applied to a polar parameter scales the selected objects by the specified distance and angle. While the resulting geometry behaves in the same way as a scale action applied to a linear parameter, the way the grips are manipulated is different in the Properties palette.
Stretch Actions Move and stretch objects a specified distance in a specified direction relative to the base point specified by the action. Apply a Stretch Action to a Point Parameter A stretch action applied to a point parameter moves and stretches selected objects a specified distance in any direction. Apply a Stretch Action to a Linear or Polar Parameter A stretch action applied to a linear parameter moves and stretches selected objects a specified distance in the direction of the parameter.
Polar Stretch Actions Rotate, move, and stretch objects a specified angle and distance. Apply a Polar Stretch Action to a Polar Parameter A polar stretch action can only be applied to a polar parameter. Like the stretch action, selected objects stretch when this action is applied. However, a polar stretch action also allows you to stretch the objects at any angle. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects.
BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Array Actions Copy and array objects in a rectangular pattern. Apply an Array Action to a Linear Parameter An array action applied to a linear parameter copies and arrays selected objects in a rectangular pattern along the parameter only.
BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Lookup Actions Lookup tables associate parameter values for the dynamic block reference with other specified data (for example, a model or part number). You can extract data from block references just as you would extract block attribute data.
To add values to the cells in each column, click a cell and enter a value. If you defined a value set for an input property (parameter) in the table, a drop-down list of available values will display. Make sure to follow the guidelines in Specify Values for Lookup Tables on page 998. Custom Values In a lookup table that does not use value sets, parameter values that do not match a row of input property values from the lookup table are assigned the lookup property value that corresponds to .
■ To specify a range, use brackets [ ] to specify that the range includes the values separated by a comma, or use parentheses ( ) to specify that the range does not include the values separated by a comma. ■ For a continuous range, use a pair of values separated by a comma, enclosed in brackets or parentheses. For example: [3,10] specifies any value between 3 and 10, including 3 and 10 (3,10) specifies any value between 3 and 10, not including 3 and 10.
7 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 8 If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To edit a lookup table while the action bars are displayed in the Block Editor 1 Hover the cursor over the lookup action icon. 2 Right-click and select Display Lookup Table. To display and add properties to a lookup table 1 In the Block Editor, double-click a lookup action in a dynamic block definition. 2 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, click Add Properties.
3 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, at the bottom of a Lookup Property column, do one of the following: ■ Click Read Only, and then select Allow Reverse Lookup from the list. ■ Click Allow Reverse Lookup, and then select Read Only from the list. NOTE You can only select Allow Reverse Lookup if you have entered data in the column. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
If the Chain Actions property for the point parameter is set to Yes, a change in the linear parameter will trigger the move action associated with the point parameter, just as if you edited the point parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the point parameter's associated move action is not triggered by the changes to the linear parameter. Thus, the circle doesn't move.
2 In the Block Editor, click Tools menu ➤ Properties. The Properties palette is displayed. 3 In the Block Editor, select a point, linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter. 4 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Chain Actions. 5 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. 6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
Assign Labels to Parameters When you select the dynamic block reference in a drawing, parameter labels are assigned to custom properties in the Properties palette. You can specify whether or not these custom properties are displayed for the block reference when it is selected in a drawing. These properties can also be extracted using the Attribute Extraction wizard. It is good practice to specify unique parameter labels within the block.
Property name ■ Angle Description ■ Distance Description ■ Flip Description ■ Description Associated parameter Defines a description that will further explain the purpose of the parameter. The text string will display in the tooltip when the mouse pointer hovers over the position name.
Property name Description Associated parameter ■ XY ■ Rotate ■ Flip ■ Visibility ■ Lookup See also: ■ Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks on page 978 ■ Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 1008 ■ Use Chained Actions on page 1001 ■ Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks on page 1011 ■ Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 946 To specify the display of custom properties in a dynamic block reference 1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed.
7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To specify that dynamic block reference can be exploded 1 Open a block definition in the Block Editor 2 In the Block Editor, make sure nothing is selected. 3 In the Properties palette, under Block, click Allow Exploding. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. 5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks A value set is a range or list of values specified for a parameter. These values can be displayed for the block reference as a drop-down list next to the parameter label under Custom in the Properties palette. When you define a value set for a parameter, the parameter is limited to these values when the block reference is manipulated in a drawing.
■ Dist Type ■ Hor Type ■ Ver Type 5 On the drop-down list, select List. 6 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click one of the following: ■ Ang Value List ■ Dist Value List ■ Hor Value List ■ Ver Value List 7 Click the [...] button. 8 In the Add Distance Value/Angle dialog box, enter one value or two or more values separated by commas, or to delete a value, select it from the list. 9 Click Add or Delete. 10 Click OK. 11 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
5 On the drop-down list, select Increment. 6 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click Dist Increment, Ang Increment, Hor Increment, or Ver Increment, and then enter an incremental value for the parameter. 7 Click Dist Minimum, Ang Minimum, Hor Minimum, or Ver Minimum, and then enter a minimum value for the parameter. 8 Click Dist Maximum, Ang Maximum, Hor Maximum, or Ver Maximum, and then enter a maximum value for the parameter. 9 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Specify Distance and Angle Values Action overrides are properties of actions that have no effect on the block reference until it is manipulated in a drawing.
Parameter Type Grip Type Actions You Can Associate with a Parameter Linear Linear Move, Scale, Stretch, Array Polar Standard Move, Scale, Stretch, Polar Stretch, Array, XY Standard Move, Scale, Stretch, Array Rotation Rotation Rotate Flip Flip Flip Alignment Alignment None (The action is implied and contained within the parameter.) Visibility Lookup None (The action is implied and controlled by visibility states.
NOTE Parameters that are not associated with an action do not display grips. If you specify that a parameter has 0 grips, you can still edit the dynamic block reference through the Properties palette (if the block is defined that way). If a dynamic block definition contains visibility states on page 1017 or a lookup table on page 997, you can define the block so that the only grip that is displayed is a lookup grip. When you click this grip on the block reference, a drop-down list is displayed.
Grip Type How the Grip Can Be Manipulated in a Drawing Associated Parameters Alignment Within a plane in any direction; when moved over an object, triggers the block reference to align with the object Alignment Lookup Click to display a list of items Visibility, Lookup Specify Tooltips on Grips Each of the dynamic block parameters has one or more description fields with the exception of the basepoint and alignment parameters.
block reference. When you insert the dynamic block reference in a drawing, you can use the Ctrl key to cycle through the available grips to select which grip will be the insertion point for the block. To specify the number of custom grips displayed for a parameter in a dynamic block 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, select a parameter.
To reset grips in a dynamic block definition to their default locations 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, at the Command prompt, enter bgripset. 3 Select the grip for which you want to reset the grip position(s). 4 At the Command prompt, enter reposition. 5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor.
3 In the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box, select a grip from the list, and click Move Up or Move Down. (A check mark in the Cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for the grip.) 4 Repeat step 2 until you are finished modifying the grip cycling order. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
After you combine the geometry in the Block Editor, you add a visibility parameter. You can then create and name a different visibility state for each weld symbol (for example, WLD1, WLD2, WLD3, and WLD4). In the following example, the WLD1 visibility state is displayed in the Block Editor. The geometry that displays in a dimmed state is invisible for the WLD1 visibility state. The Block Editor contextual tab displays the name of the current visibility state.
2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, click New. 4 In the New Visibility State dialog box, enter a name for the new visibility state. 5 Do one of the following: ■ Click Hide All Existing Objects in New State ■ Click Show All Existing Objects in New State ■ Click Leave Visibility of Existing Objects Unchanged in New State 6 Click OK. To make a visibility state current 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
To make objects visible or invisible in the current visibility state 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Visible. ■ Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Invisible. 3 In the drawing area, select the objects. Press Enter. 4 At the Command prompt, enter current. Press Enter. To make objects visible or invisible in all visibility states 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
To change the order of the visibility states list for a dynamic block reference 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state in the list. 4 Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order. 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the list of visibility states is in the desired order. 6 Click OK.
BVSHOW Makes objects visible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition. BVSTATE Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. BVMODE Controls how objects that are made invisible for the current visibility state are displayed in the Block Editor.
Part 8: Work with 3D Models 1023
1024
Create 3D Models 24 Use 3D models to help you visualize and test your designs. Overview of 3D Modeling AutoCAD 3D modeling allows you to create drawings using solid, surface, and mesh objects. Solid, surface, and mesh objects offer different functionality, that, when used together, offer a powerful suite of 3D modeling tools. For example, you can convert a primitive solid to a mesh to take advantage of mesh creasing and smoothing.
extrusion and use various sweeping operations to create solids from 2D curves and lines. Surface Modeling A surface model is a thin shell that does not have mass or volume. AutoCAD offers two types of surfaces: procedural and NURBS. Use prodecural surfaces to take advantage of associative modling, and use NURBS surfaces to take advantage of sculpting with control vertices.
Mesh Modeling A mesh model consists of vertices, edges, and faces that use polygonal representation (including triangles and quads) to define a 3D shape. Unlike solid models, mesh has no mass properties. However, as with 3D solids, you can create primitive mesh forms such as boxes, cones, and pyramids, starting in . You can modify mesh models in ways that are not available for 3D solids or surfaces. For example you can apply creases, splits, and increasing levels of smoothness.
■ Use the model to create an animation ■ Extract manufacturing data See also: ■ Enter 3D Coordinates on page 614 ■ Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 594 ■ Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models on page 601 Quick Reference Commands BOX Creates a 3D solid box. CONE Creates a 3D solid cone. CONVTOMESH Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects. CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.
LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. POLYSOLID Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid. PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. PYRAMID Creates a 3D solid pyramid. REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. SPHERE Creates a 3D solid sphere. SURFBLEND Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces.
UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. WEDGE Creates a 3D solid wedge. System Variables DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted. PSOLWIDTH Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. PSOLHEIGHT Controls the default height for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command.
See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding on page 1034 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping on page 1038 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting on page 1042 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving on page 1046 Create Surfaces or Solids With the Same Commands When you extrude, sweep, loft, and revolve curves, you can create both solids and surfaces. Open curves always create surfaces, but closed curves can create either solids or surfaces depending on the situation.
Geometry That Can Be Used As Profiles and Guide Curves The curves that you use as profile and guide curves when you extrude, sweep, loft, and revolve can be: ■ Open or closed ■ Planar or non-planar ■ Solid and surface edge subobjects ■ A single object (to extrude multiple lines, convert them to a single object with the JOIN command) ■ A single region (to extrude multiple regions, convert them to a single object with the REGION command) Example: Use Splines to Create 3D NURBS Surfaces Splines are o
Many of the same commands used with NURBS surfaces, can also be used with CV splines. These include: ■ CVADD ■ CVREMOVE ■ CVREBUILD ■ CVSHOW ■ CVHIDE For more information, see Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 1030. Create Associative Surfaces Surfaces can be associative while solids cannot.
Deleting the Curves that Generate the Solid or Surface The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the curves that generate an object are automatically deleted after the solid or surface is created. However, if surface associativity is on, the DELOBJ setting is ignored and the generating curves are not deleted. Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding Create a 3D solid or surface by stretching curves into 3D space. The EXTRUDE command creates a solid or surface that extends the shape of a curve.
Extruding is different from sweeping. When you extrude a profile along a path, the profile follows the shape of the path, even if the path does not intersect the profile. Sweeping usually provides greater control and better results. ■ Taper angle. Tapering the extrusion is useful for defining part that require a specific taper angle, such as a mold used to create metal products in a foundry. ■ Direction.
To extrude a NURBS surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Surface panel ➤ Extrude. 3 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude. 4 Specify the height. After the extrusion, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. To extrude a solid 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude. 2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude. 3 Specify the height.
Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping Create a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a profile along a path.
■ Base Point. Specify a base point on the profile to sweep along the profile. ■ Scale. Specify a value that will change the size of the object from the beginning of the sweep to the end. Enter a mathematical expression to constrain the object scaling. See Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1106. ■ Twist. By entering a twist angle, the object rotates along the length of the profile. Enter a mathematical expression to constrain the object ‘s twist angle.
■ Draw Splines on page 723 ■ Modify Splines on page 853 To create a solid by sweeping an object along a path 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Sweep. 2 Select objects to sweep. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select an object or edge subobject as a sweep path. After the sweep, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. To create a surface by sweeping an object along a path 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Sweep. 2 Select objects to sweep.
JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting Create a 3D solid or surface by lofting a profile through a set of two or more cross-section profiles. The cross-section profiles define the shape of the resulting solid object. Cross-section profiles can be open or closed curves. Open curves create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces. See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 1030.
■ Paths. Specify a path for the loft operation to obtain more control over the shape of the lofted object. For best results, start the path curve on the plane of the first cross section and end it on the plane of the last cross section. ■ Guide curves. Specify guide curves to match points on corresponding cross sections. This method prevents undesired results, such as wrinkles in the resulting 3D object.
To create a NURBS surface by lofting 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation. 2 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft. 3 In the drawing area, select cross-section profiles and press Enter. (Select them in the order in which you want the new 3D object to pass through the cross sections.) After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.
Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces.
To revolve objects about an axis to create a NURBS surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve. 2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to revolve. 3 To specify the axis of revolution, specify one of the following: ■ The start and endpoint. Click to points on the screen to set the axis orientation. The axis points must be on one side of the revolved object. The positive axis direction extends from the start point to the endpoint. ■ The X, Y, or Z axis. Enter x, y, or z. ■ An object.
Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create Solids Create 3D solids from primitives or by combining or extending existing objects.
About Solids Based on Other Objects You can also create 3D solids from 2D geometry or other 3D objects. The following methods are available: ■ Sweep. Extends a 2D object along a path. ■ Extrusion. Extends the shape of a 2D object in a perpendicular direction into 3D space. ■ Revolve. Sweeps a 2D object around an axis. ■ Loft. Extends the contours of a shape between one or more open or closed objects. ■ Slice. Divides a solid object into two separate 3D objects. ■ Sculpting Surfaces.
CONE Creates a 3D solid cone. CONVTOSOLID Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids. CONVTOSURFACE Converts objects to 3D surfaces. CYLINDER Creates a 3D solid cylinder. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. INTERSECT Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. TORUS Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid. UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. WEDGE Creates a 3D solid wedge. System Variables SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces.
The base of the box is always drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS (work plane). Box Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the boxes you create: ■ Create a cube. Use the Cube option of the BOX command to create a box with sides of equal length. ■ Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the rotation of the box in the XY plane. ■ Start from the center point.
3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the cube and a rotation angle. The length value sets both the width and height of the cube. Quick Reference Commands BOX Creates a 3D solid box. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Wedge Create a solid wedge with rectangular or cubical faces.
Wedge Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the wedges you create: ■ Create a wedge with sides of equal length. Use the Cube option of the WEDGE command. ■ Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the rotation of the wedge in the XY plane. ■ Start from the center point. Use the Center Point option to create a wedge using a specified center point.
Quick Reference Commands WEDGE Creates a 3D solid wedge. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Cone Create a pointed or frustum of a cone with a circular or elliptical base. By default, the base of the cone lies on the XY plane of the current UCS. The height of the cone is parallel to the Z axis.
The Frustum tool is also available from the Modeling tab of the tool palette. You can also use grips to modify the tip of a cone and convert it to a flat face. ■ Specify circumference and base plane. The 3P (Three Points) option of the CONE command defines the size and plane of the base of the cone anywhere in 3D space. ■ Define the angle of the taper. To create a conical solid that requires a specific angle to define its sides, draw a 2D circle.
5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cone. To create a frustum of a solid cone 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter t (Top radius). Specify the top radius. 5 Specify the height of the cone. To create a solid cone with the height and orientation specified by the axis endpoint 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone.
Create a Solid Cylinder Create a solid cylinder with a circular or elliptical base. By default, the base of the cylinder lies on the XY plane of the current UCS. The height of the cylinder is parallel to the Z axis. Cylinder Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the cylinders you create: ■ Set rotation. Use the Axis Endpoint option of the CYLINDER command to set the height and rotation of the cylinder.
4 Specify the height of the cylinder. To create a solid cylinder with an elliptical base 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder. 2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical). 3 Specify the start point of the first axis. 4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis. 5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cylinder. To create a solid cylinder with the height and rotation specified (axis endpoint) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder.
Create a Solid Sphere Create a solid sphere using one of several methods. When you start with the center point, the central axis of the sphere parallels the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Sphere Creation Options Use the following options to draw a sphere with the SPHERE command: ■ Specify three points to set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the sphere anywhere in 3D space.
2 At the Command prompt, enter 3p (Three Points). Specify the first point. 3 Specify the second point. 4 Specify the third point. Quick Reference Commands SPHERE Creates a 3D solid sphere. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Pyramid Create a solid pyramid with up to 32 sides.
Pyramid Creation Options Use the following options to control the size, shape, and rotation of the pyramids you create: ■ Set the number of sides. Use the Sides option of the PYRAMID command to set the number of sides for the pyramid. ■ Set the length of the edges. Use the Edges option to specify the dimension of the sides at the base. ■ Create a frustum of a pyramid. Use the Top Radius option to create a frustum, which tapers to a planar face.
To create a frustum of a solid pyramid 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Pyramid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to use. 3 Specify the center point of the base. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 5 Enter t (Top radius). Specify the radius of the planar face at the top of the pyramid. 6 Specify the height of the pyramid. Quick Reference Commands PYRAMID Creates a 3D solid pyramid.
default, a torus is drawn parallel to and is bisected by the XY plane of the current UCS. A torus can be self-intersecting. A self-intersecting torus has no center hole because the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus. Torus Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the tori you create. ■ Set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the torus anywhere in 3D space.
System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. To create a solid torus 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Torus. 2 Specify the center of the torus. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the path that is swept by the torus tube. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the tube. Create a Polysolid Use the same techniques you use to create polylines to create a polysolid object.
Polysolid Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and shape of the polysolids you create: ■ Create arced segments. Use the Arc option to add curved segments to the polysolid. The profile of a polysolid with curved segments remains perpendicular to the path. ■ Create a polysolid from a 2D object. Use the Object option to convert an object such as a polyline, circle, line, or arc to a polysolid.
5 Press Enter. To create a polysolid from an existing object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Polysolid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter o (Object). 3 Select a 2D object such as a line, polyline, arc, or circle. A 3D polysolid is created using the current height and width settings. The original 2D object is deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. Quick Reference Commands POLYSOLID Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid.
■ Convert mesh to 3D solids ■ Thicken surfaces to convert them to 3D solids mesh and polyline with thickness converted to optimized 3D solids The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the objects you select are automatically deleted when the 3D object is created. Convert Surfaces and Objects with Thickness to 3D Solids You can convert different types of objects into extruded 3D solids with the CONVTOSOLID command.
For example, if you convert a mesh box to a solid object, following options are available: ■ Smoothed and optimized. Coplanar faces are merged into a single face. The overall shape of some faces can change. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are rounded. (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 0) ■ Smoothed and not optimized. Each original mesh face is retained in the converted object. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are rounded. (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 1) ■ Faceted and optimized.
You cannot convert the following types of mesh objects to a 3D solid: ■ Mesh with gaps between faces. Gizmo editing can sometimes result in gaps, or holes between the faces. In some cases, you can close the gaps by smoothing the mesh object. ■ Mesh that has self-intersecting boundaries. If you have modified a mesh object so that one or more faces intersect faces in the same object, you cannot convert it to a 3D solid.
To convert objects with thickness to extruded solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Solid. 2 Select one or more of the following types of objects and press Enter: ■ Uniform-width polylines with thickness ■ Closed, 0-width polylines with thickness ■ Circles with thickness To convert one or more surfaces to solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Thicken. 2 Select the surfaces you want to thicken. Press Enter. 3 Specify a thickness for the solid. Press Enter.
■ Faceted, optimized. The resulting model is angular, with merged, planar faces (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 2). ■ Faceted, not optimized. The resulting model is angular, with the same number of faces as the original mesh object (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 3). 3 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Convert Mesh panel ➤ Convert to Solid. 4 Select a mesh object that has no gaps or intersecting faces. Quick Reference Commands CONVTOSOLID Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.
Create Composite Objects Create composite 3D objects by combining, subtracting, or finding the intersecting mass of two or more 3D solids, surfaces, or regions. Composite solids are created from two or more solids, surfaces, or regions through any of the following commands: UNION, SUBTRACT, and INTERSECT. 3D solids record a history of how they were created. This history allows you to see the original forms that make up composite solids.
that do not overlap and creates a composite solid from the common volume. Create Composites from Mixed Object Types In addition to creating composite objects from the same object types, you can also create composites from mixed surfaces and solids. ■ Mixed intersections. Combining a solid and a surface through intersection results in a surface. ■ Mixed subtractions. Subtracting a 3D solid from a surface results in a surface. However, you cannot subtract a surface from a 3D solid object.
To create a compound object from the intersection with other objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect. 2 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region to intersect. Press Enter. Quick Reference Commands INTERSECT Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions. SUBTRACT Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction. UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition.
Sliced 3D solids do not retain a history of the original forms that created them. However, they do retain the layer and color properties of the original objects. For a complete list of objects that can be used for a slice operation, see SLICE. See also: ■ Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models on page 1269 To slice solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice. 2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter. 3 Specify two points to define the cutting plane.
2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter. 3 At the Command prompt, enter s (Surface). 4 Press Enter. 5 Select a surface to use as the cutting plane. 6 Specify which side to retain, or enter b (both) to retain both sides. Quick Reference Commands SLICE Creates new 3D solids and surfaces by slicing, or dividing, existing objects. Check 3D Models for Interferences Find areas where 3D solids or surfaces intersect or overlap.
Methods for Checking Interference You can check interference using the following methods: ■ Define one selection set. Check the interference of all the 3D solids and surfaces in a single selection set. ■ Define two selection sets. Check the interference of the objects in the first set of objects against the objects in the second selection set. ■ Individually specify solids that are nested within blocks or xrefs.
Quick Reference Commands INTERFERE Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of selected 3D solids. System Variables INTERFERECOLOR Sets the color for interference objects. INTERFEREOBJVS Sets the visual style for interference objects. INTERFEREVPVS Specifies the visual style for the viewport during interference checking. Create Surfaces Create procedural surfaces and NURBS surfaces from curves or by combining or extending existing surfaces.
Choose a Surface Creation Method Create procedural and NURBS surfaces using the following methods: ■ Create surfaces from profiles on page 1030. Create surfaces from profile shapes composed of lines and curves with EXTRUDE, LOFT, PLANESURF, REVOLVE, SURFNETWORK, and SWEEP. ■ Create surfaces from other surfaces on page 1086. Blend, patch, extend, fillet, and offset surfaces to create new surfaces (SURFBLEND, SURFPATCH, SURFEXTEND, SURFFILLET and SURFOFFSET).
Understand Surface Continuity and Bulge Magnitude Surface continuity and bulge magnitude are properties that are frequently used when creating surfaces. When you create a new surface, you can specify the continuity and bulge magnitude with special grips. Continuity is a measure of how smoothly two curves or surfaces flow into each other. The type of continuity can be important if you need to export your surfaces to other applications. Continuity types include the following: ■ G0 (Position).
■ G1 (Tangency). Includes both positional and tangential continuity (G0 + G1). With tangentially continuous surfaces, the end tangents match at the common edges. The two surfaces appear to be traveling in the same direction at the join, but they may have very different apparent “speeds” (or rates of change in direction, also called curvature). ■ G2 (Curvature). Includes positional, tangential, and curvature continuity (G0 + G1+G2). The two surfaces share the same curvature.
■ Properties palette. Modifies properties for both the surface objects and their subobjects after they are created. For example, you can change the number of isolines in the U and V directions. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. ANALYSISZEBRA Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.
SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create Procedural Surfaces Create procedural surfaces by blending, patching, and offsetting existing surfaces or by converting 3D solids, meshes and other planar geometry. Create Surfaces from Other Surfaces There are many ways to create procedural surfaces from existing surfaces.
2 Click and drag an area onscreen. 3 Hold Shift and press the mouse wheel to orbit and inspect the planar surface. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Create Network Surfaces Create non-planar surfaces in the space between edge subobjects, splines and other 2D and 3D curves. Create non-planar, network surfaces with the SURFNETWORK command.
LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.
Blend a Surface Create a transition surface between two existing surfaces. Use SURFBLEND to create a new surface between existing surfaces and solids. When you blend surfaces together, specify the surface continuity and bulge magnitude for the start and end edges. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080 To create a blend surface between a surface and a solid 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Blend. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Edge.
SURFBLEND Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. CULLINGOBJ Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. CULLINGOBJSELECTION Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected.
Use SURFPATCH to create a surface inside a closed curve (such as a closed spline) that is another surface’s edge. You can also draw a guide curve to constrain the shape of the patch surface with the constrain geometry option. When you patch surfaces, specify the continuity and bulge magnitude. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080 To patch the top of a closed surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Patch. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Edge.
UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. CULLINGOBJ Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. CULLINGOBJSELECTION Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
Surface Offset Options When you offset a surface, you can do the following: ■ Change the offset direction with the Flip option ■ Offset in both directions to create two new surfaces ■ Create a solid between the offset surfaces ■ If you are offsetting more than one surface, you can specify whether the offset surfaces remain connected.
■ Enter an expression that will constrain the distance of the offset surface to the original surface. This option only appears if associativity is on. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 903. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080 To create a solid from an offset surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Offset. 2 In the drawing area, select a surface and press Enter. Arrows display to show the offset direction. 3 Enter s and press Enter.
LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces Convert 3D solids, meshes, and 2D geometry to procedural surfaces. Use CONVTOSURFACE to convert any of the following objects into surfaces: ■ 2D solids ■ Meshes ■ Regions ■ Open, zero-width polylines with thickness ■ Lines with thickness ■ Arcs with thickness ■ Planar 3D faces To convert one or more objects to surfaces 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Surface. 2 Select the objects you want to convert and press Enter.
■ Draw Splines on page 723 ■ Modify Splines on page 853 Create NURBS surfaces by enabling NURBS creation and using many of the same commands used to create procedural surfaces. You can also convert existing procedural surfaces into NURBS surfaces. NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines) surfaces are part of the suite of 3D modeling objects that AutoCAD offers (in addition to 3D solids, procedural surfaces, and meshes). NURBS surfaces are based on Bezier curves or splines.
To create a NURBS surface by lofting 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation already enabled). (if it is not 2 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft. 3 Select the cross section profiles and press Enter. Select them in the order in which you want the new 3D object to pass through them. After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.
NOTE To display the control vertices, click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Show CV. Quick Reference Commands CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
SURFEXTEND Lengthens a surface by a specified distance. SURFFILLET Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces. SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop.
and fit points. The fit points and control vertices offer different editing options such as knot parameterization and degree options. Moving Fit Points vs. Moving Control Vertices NURBS curves have both fit points and control vertices. The fit points lie on the line, and the control vertices lay outside the line. Use fit points to make a change to one small part of a curve; use control vertices to make changes that will affect the shape of the curve as a whole.
System Variables SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create Associative Surfaces Associative surfaces automatically adjust to changes made to other, related objects. When surface associativity is on, surfaces are created with a relationship to the surface or profiles that created them. Associativity allows you to: ■ Reshape the generating profiles to automatically reshape the surface.
Save time by planning your model ahead; you cannot go back and add associativity after the model has been created. Also, be careful not to accidentally break associativity by dragging objects away from the group. To create an associative surface ■ Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Surface Associativity. Any new procedural surfaces will be associative. NOTE NURBS creation overrides Surface Associativity. If Surface Associativity and NURBS Creation are both on, surface associativity will not work.
Quick Reference Commands BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces.
profile curve and not the surface or the edge subobject. See Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints on page 872. Use Mathematical Expressions to Derive Surface Properties Dimensional constraints are user-defined expressions that are applied in the Properties palette for that surface. For a complete list of operators and functions allowed in expressions, see Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager on page 905.
Type of Surface Surface properties that can be constrained. Revolve Surface Revolve Angle To create a parallel relationship between two surfaces 1 Enter dsettings and select the Selection Cycling tab. 2 Click Allow Selection Cycling to turn selection cycling on. 3 Enter geomconstraint. Enter pa to select the parallel option. 4 Select the first and second profile objects. Be careful not to select the surface or the edge subobject.
DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects.
System Variables CCONSTRAINTFORM Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
Create Meshes Create meshes from primitive forms or by filling between points on other objects. Overview of Creating Meshes Mesh tessellation provides enhanced capabilities for modeling object shapes in a more detailed way. Starting with , the default mesh object type can be smoothed, creased, split, and refined. Although you can continue to create the legacy polyface and polygon mesh types, you can obtain more predictable results by converting to the newer mesh object type.
you specify. Although you can continue to create legacy polygonal and polyface meshes, it is recommended that you convert to the enhanced mesh object type to obtain enhanced editing capabilities. About Tessellation Tessellation is a collection of planar shapes that tile a mesh object. The tessellation divisions, visible in unselected mesh objects, mark the edges of the editable mesh faces. (To see these divisions in the Hidden or Conceptual visual styles, VSEDGES must be set to 1.
While highly refined mesh gives you the ability to make detailed modifications, it also comes at a cost: it can decrease program performance. By maintaining maximum smoothness, face, and grid levels, you can help ensure that you do not create meshes that are too dense to modify effectively. (Use SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV, SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE, and SMOOTHMESHGRID.) Set Mesh Properties Before and After Creation You can set defaults that control a variety of mesh properties before and after you create the mesh objects.
See also: ■ Modify Mesh Objects on page 1238 To set the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxlev. 2 Enter a value from 1 to 255. (Use lower numbers to prevent extremely dense meshes that might affect program performance.) To set the maximum number of faces for mesh objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxface. 2 Enter a value from 1 to 16,000,000. To control the display of the mesh facet grid 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshgrid.
Quick Reference Commands 3DFACE Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space. 3DMESH Creates a free-form polygon mesh. EDGESURF Creates a mesh between four contiguous edges or curves. MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, which controls default settings for converting existing objects to mesh objects.
System Variables SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHGRID Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects. VSEDGES Controls the types of edges that are displayed in the viewport. Create 3D Mesh Primitives Create mesh boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, spheres, wedges, and tori.
You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default number of divisions for a mesh box. After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object can be modified. Mesh Box Creation Options The Box option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh boxes you create. ■ Create a cube. Use the Cube option to create a mesh box with sides of equal length. ■ Specify rotation.
To create a mesh box based on a center point, corner of base, and height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box. 2 At the Command prompt, enter c (Center). Specify the center point of the base. 3 To set the location of the corner of the base, use one of the following methods: ■ To set the length and width simultaneously: Specify the location of one corner of the base. ■ To set the length and width separately: At the Command prompt, enter l (Length) and specify the length.
System Variables DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of a mesh box along the Z axis. DIVMESHBOXLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh box along the X axis. DIVMESHBOXWIDTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.
After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object can be modified. Mesh Cone Creation Options The Cone option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh cones you create. ■ Set the height and orientation. Use the Axis Endpoint option when you want to reorient the cone by placing the tip or axis endpoint anywhere in 3D space. ■ Create a frustum of a cone.
3 Specify the start point of first axis. 4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis. 5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cone. To create a frustum of a mesh cone 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter t (Top radius). Specify the top radius. 5 Specify the height of the cone.
MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHCONEAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base. DIVMESHCONEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cone base. DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the point or top of the mesh cone.
■ DIVMESHCYLBASE ■ DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default number of divisions for a mesh cylinder. After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object can be modified. Mesh Cylinder Creation Options The Cylinder option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh cylinders you create. ■ Set rotation.
To create a mesh cylinder with an elliptical base 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder. 2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical). 3 Specify the start point of the first axis. 4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis. 5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cylinder. To create a mesh cylinder with the height and rotation specified (axis endpoint) 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder.
System Variables DIVMESHCYLAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder base. DIVMESHCYLBASE Sets the number of radial subdivisions from the center of the mesh cylinder base to its perimeter. DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh cylinder. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.
After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object can be modified. Mesh Pyramid Creation Options The Pyramid option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh pyramids you create. ■ Set the number of sides. Use the Sides option to set the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. ■ Set the length of the edges. Use the Edges option to specify the dimension of the sides at the base. ■ Create a frustum of a pyramid.
To create a mesh pyramid 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Pyramid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to use. 3 Specify the center point of the base. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 5 Specify the height of the pyramid. To create a frustum of a mesh pyramid 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Pyramid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to use. 3 Specify the center point of the base.
System Variables DIVMESHPYRBASE Sets the number of radial subdivisions between the center of the mesh pyramid base and its perimeter. DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh pyramid. DIVMESHPYRLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions along each dimension of a mesh pyramid base. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.
After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object can be modified. Mesh Sphere Creation Options The Sphere option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh spheres you create. ■ Specify three points to set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the sphere anywhere in 3D space. The three points also define the plane of the circumference.
Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS Sets the number of radial subdivisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh sphere. DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh sphere.
The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions for each dimension of a new mesh wedge: ■ DIVMESHWEDGEBASE ■ DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT ■ DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH ■ DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE ■ DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default number of divisions for a mesh wedge. After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object can be modified.
2 Specify the first corner of the base. 3 At the Command prompt, enter l (Length). Specify the length of the base. 4 Specify the width of the base. 5 Specify the height of the wedge. To create a mesh wedge based on a center point, corner of base, and height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge. 2 At the Command prompt, enter c (Center). Specify the center point of the base.
Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHWEDGEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the midpoint of the perimeter of triangular dimension of the mesh wedge.
A mesh torus has two radius values. One value defines the tube. The other value defines the path, which is equivalent to the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube. By default, a torus is drawn parallel to and is bisected by the XY plane of the current UCS. A mesh torus can be self-intersecting. A self-intersecting mesh torus has no center hole because the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus.
possible to the tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level of smoothness. To create a mesh torus 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Torus. 2 Specify the center of the torus. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the overall path that is swept by the torus tube. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the tube.
Construct Meshes from Other Objects Create mesh forms by filling the space between other objects such as lines and arcs. You can use a variety of methods to create mesh objects whose edges are defined by other objects. The MESHTYPE system variable controls whether the new objects are valid mesh objects, or whether they are created using legacy polyface or polygon geometry. You can control whether the mesh is displayed as a wireframe, hidden, or conceptual image by changing the visual style (VISUALSTYLES).
■ Revolved mesh. REVSURF creates a mesh that approximates a surface of revolution by rotating a profile about a specified axis. A profile can consist of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, splines, closed polylines, polygons, closed splines, and donuts. ■ Edge-defined mesh. EDGESURF creates a mesh approximating a Coons surface patch mesh from four adjoining edges.
You can specify any two points on closed curves to complete the operation. For open curves, construction of the ruled mesh is based on the locations of the specified points on the curves. Create a Tabulated Mesh With the TABSURF command, you can create a mesh that represents a general tabulated surface defined by a path curve and a direction vector. The path curve can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, 2D polyline, 3D polyline, or spline.
Create a Revolved Mesh Use the REVSURF command to create a revolved mesh by rotating a profile of the object about an axis. REVSURF is useful for mesh forms with rotational symmetry. The profile is called a path curve. It can consist of any combination of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, splines, closed polylines, polygons, closed splines, or donuts.
To create a ruled mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Ruled Surface. 2 Select an object to act as the first defining curve. 3 Select a second object as the second defining curve. Mesh segments are drawn between the defining curves. The number of segments equals the value set for SURFTAB1. 4 Erase the original curves if necessary. To create a tabulated mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Tabulated Surface. 2 Specify an object to define the overall shape of the tabulated surface (the path curve).
its last vertex. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution determines the M direction of the mesh. 4 Specify the start angle. If you specify a nonzero start angle, the mesh is generated at a position offset from the path curve by that angle. 5 Specify the included angle. The included angle specifies how far the mesh extends around the axis of revolution. 6 Erase the original objects if necessary.
TABSURF Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables FACETRATIO Controls the aspect ratio of faceting for cylindrical and conic solids. MESHTYPE Controls the type of mesh that is created by REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF and EDGESURF. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. PFACEVMAX Sets the maximum number of vertices per face.
Create Meshes by Conversion Convert solids, surfaces, and legacy mesh types to mesh objects. You can use the MESHSMOOTH command to convert certain objects to mesh. Convert 3D solids, surfaces, and legacy mesh objects to the enhanced mesh object in order to take advantage of capabilities such as smoothing, refinement, creasing, and splitting. Object Types That Can Be Converted You obtain the most predictable results when you convert primitive solid objects to mesh.
■ FACETERMESHTYPE ■ FACETERMINUGRID ■ FACETERMINVGRID ■ FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE ■ FACETERSMOOTHLEV Settings can also be changed using the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. For example, if the smooth mesh optimized mesh type (FACETERMESHTYPE system variable) results in incorrect conversions, you can set the tessellation shape to be Triangle or Mostly Quads.
See also: ■ Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh To convert objects to mesh using defaults 1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth Object. 2 Select an object such as a 3D solid or surface. (For a list of eligible objects, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) The objects are converted to mesh using the settings in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. To modify conversion settings as you convert objects to mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ dialog box launcher.
Quick Reference Commands MESHOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, which controls default settings for converting existing objects to mesh objects. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. MESHSMOOTH Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects. System Variables FACETERDEVNORMAL Sets the maximum angle between the surface normal and contiguous mesh faces.
FACETERMINUGRID Sets the minimum number of U grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. FACETERMINVGRID Sets the minimum number of V grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE Specifies whether smoothness settings for objects that are converted to mesh are derived from the Mesh Tessellation Options or the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. FACETERSMOOTHLEV Sets the default level of smoothness for objects that are converted to mesh.
Create a Rectangular Mesh With the 3DMESH command, you can create polygon meshes that are open in both the M and N directions (like the X and Y axes of an XY plane). In most cases, you can use 3DMESH in conjunction with scripts or AutoLISP routines when you know the mesh points. As you create the mesh, you specify the size of the mesh in the M and N directions. The total number of vertices you specify for the mesh is equal to the M value times the N value.
You can close the meshes with PEDIT. You can use 3DMESH to construct irregular meshes. Example: In the following example of text at the Command prompt, you enter the coordinate values for each vertex to create the mesh in the illustration.
the polyface mesh, you can set specific edges to be invisible, assign them to layers, or give them colors. To make the edge invisible, enter the vertex number as a negative value. For instance, to make the edge between vertices 5 and 7 invisible in the following illustration, you enter the following: Face 3, vertex 3: -7 In the illustration, face 1 is defined by vertices 1, 5, 6, and 2. Face 2 is defined by vertices 1, 4, 3, and 2.
To view the objects you are creating with the 3D command more clearly, set a viewing direction with 3DORBIT, DVIEW, or VPOINT. To create a rectangular mesh 1 At the Command prompt, enter 3dmesh. 2 Specify the M size, using an integer from 2 through 256. 3 Specify the N size, using an integer from 2 through 256. 4 Specify the vertex points as prompted. The number of vertices equals the M value times the N value. Specifying the last vertex point completes the mesh.
Quick Reference Commands 3DFACE Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space. 3DMESH Creates a free-form polygon mesh. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PFACE Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex. System Variables PFACEVMAX Sets the maximum number of vertices per face. Create Wireframe Models A wireframe model is an edge or skeletal representation of a real-world 3D object using lines and curves.
Wireframe models consist only of points, lines, and curves that describe the edges of the object. Because each object that makes up a wireframe model must be independently drawn and positioned, this type of modeling can be the most time-consuming.
selected objects or subobjects. The extracted edges form a duplicate wireframe composed of 2D objects such as lines, circles, and 3D polylines. ■ Enter 3D coordinates that define the X, Y, and Z location of the object. ■ Set the default work plane (the XY plane of the UCS) on which to draw the object. ■ Move or copy the object to its proper 3D location after you create it. Wireframe modeling is a skill that requires practice and experience.
3 Enter .xy and then enter @ at the Of prompt. This operation extracts the X and Y coordinate values from the first point. 4 Enter 0 to specify the Z value. The X and Y values extracted from the first point are combined with a new Z value (0) to finish the definition of the second point. 5 Press Enter to end the command. To create wireframe geometry by extracting edges 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Extract Edges.
System Variables ELEVATION Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS. FACETRES Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. ISOLINES Specifies the number of contour lines displayed on the curved surfaces of 3D solids. Add 3D Thickness to Objects Use the thickness property to give objects a 3D appearance. The 3D thickness of an object is the distance that object is extended, or thickened, above or below its location in space.
■ Polylines (including spline-fit polylines, rectangles, polygons, boundaries, and donuts) ■ Text (only if created as a single-line text object using an SHX font) ■ Traces ■ Points Modifying the thickness property of other types of objects does not affect their appearance. You can set the default thickness property for new objects you create by setting the THICKNESS system variable. For existing objects, change the thickness property on the Properties palette.
Quick Reference Commands ELEV Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. THICKEN Converts a surface into a 3D solid with a specified thickness. System Variables BACKZ Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. FRONTZ Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. THICKNESS Sets the current 3D thickness.
Modify 3D Models 25 Change a 3D solid, surface or mesh with grips and gizmos, editing commands, properties, and by modifying its component subojects. Overview of Modifying 3D Objects 3D modeling tools range from entering precise measurements in the Properties palette, to more free-form methods such as grip and gizmo editing. Some methods are specific to 3D solids, surfaces or meshes. Other methods are shared.
Similarly, you can convert mesh to 3D solids and surfaces to accomplish some composite object modeling tasks that are available only for those objects. Conversion is often offered as a choice when you start activities that are available only for solids and surfaces. View Your Model from All Angles When you work with any 3D object, you can easily make changes that are not accurately reflected in the current view.
conform to your expectations, make sure you understand and use the following: ■ Manipulate the 3D workplane (UCS). To understand how your model is projected in 3D space, learn how to use the X, Y, and Z axes. For more information, see Overview of Coordinate Entry. ■ Rotate the view to display the model from different viewpoints. Several navigation tools, including 3D Orbit and the ViewCube tool, are available to help you rotate around your workspace.
By default, gizmos are displayed automatically when you select an object or subobject in a view that has a 3D visual style. Because they constrain modifications along specific planes or axes, gizmos help ensure more predictable results. You can specify which gizmos are displayed when an object is selected, or you can suppress their display. Quick Reference Commands 3DMOVE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
GTAUTO Controls whether 3D gizmos are automatically displayed when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. GTDEFAULT Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. GTLOCATION Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style.
For best results, use object snaps to locate the grip center box. Switch Between the Gizmos Whenever you select an object in a 3D view, the default gizmo is displayed. You can select a different default on the ribbon, or change the value of the the DEFAULTGIZMO system variable. You can also suppress the display of gizmos when objects are selected. After the gizmo is active, you can also switch to a different type of gizmo.
3DSCALE command automatically when the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command is started in a 3D view. This system variable is turned off by default. ■ Active status of subobject grips. If you select a subobject on page 2321, the GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable sets whether the subobject grips are active immediately. Setting subobject grips to be active upon selection helps you modify groups of mesh subobjects without selecting them again.
2 Hover the cursor over an axis handle on the gizmo until it turns yellow and the axis vector displays. Then click the axis handle. 3 Press the Spacebar to cycle through the gizmo types until the correct gizmo is displayed. When you change gizmos this way, the movement remains constrained to the selected axis. NOTE You cannot use the Spacebar to change the type of gizmo when the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALE command is active.
GTDEFAULT Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. GTLOCATION Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. Move 3D Objects Move a selection set of objects and subobjects freely or constrain the movement to an axis or plane.
As you drag the cursor, movement of the selected objects and subobjects is constrained to the highlighted axis. You can click or enter a value to specify the distance of the move from the base point. If you enter a value, the movement direction of the object follows the initial direction of the cursor movement. Constrain the Movement to a Plane You can use the Move gizmo to constrain the movement to a plane. Each plane is identified by a rectangle that extends from the respective axis handles.
To move objects in 3D space along a specified axis 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to move using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. NOTE If a subobject filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl to select a subobject. To select the entire object, turn off the filter. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter.
■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. NOTE If a subobject filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl to select a subobject. To select the entire object, turn off the filter. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected objects. 4 Move the cursor over the planar rectangle that intersects the axis handles that define the plane of constraint. When the rectangle turns yellow, click it.
You then rotate the objects freely by dragging outside the gizmo. You can also specify an axis about which to constrain the rotation. If you want to realign the center of rotation, you can relocate the gizmo by using the Relocate Gizmo option on the shortcut menu. Constrain the Rotation to an Axis You can constrain the rotation to a specified axis. As you move the cursor over the rotation paths on the 3D rotate gizmo, a vector line representing the axis of rotation is displayed.
To rotate objects in 3D space along a specified axis 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to rotate using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The rotate gizmo is displayed attached to the cursor. 4 Click to place the rotate gizmo, specifying the base point for the move.
NOTE Non-uniform scaling (along an axis or a plane) is only available for meshes, it is not available for solids and surfaces. Scale a 3D Object Along an Axis Constrain mesh object scaling to a specified axis. As you move the cursor over the axes on the 3D Scale gizmo, a vector line representing the axis of scale is displayed. Specify an axis of scale by clicking the axis when it turns yellow. When you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are resized along the specified axis.
As you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are scaled only along the highlighted plane. Click or enter a value to specify the scale from the selected base point. Scale a 3D Object Uniformly Scale solid, surface, and mesh objects uniformly along all axes. As you move the cursor toward the center point of the gizmo, a highlighted triangular area indicates that you can click to scale the selected objects and subobjects along all three axes.
To scale a 3D object along a specified plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify ➤ Scale Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to scale using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The Scale gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects. 4 Specify a base point for the scale.
Quick Reference Commands 3DSCALE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects. System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces Use grips to change the shape and size of solids and surfaces. Use 3D Subobject Grips Select faces, edges, and vertices on 3D objects. A subobject is a face, edge or vertex of a solid, surface, or mesh object.
to select subobjects at the selection prompts of the MOVE, ROTATE, SCALE, and ERASE commands. You can remove an item from the selection set by pressing and holding Shift and selecting it again. Select Subobjects on Composite 3D Solids Press and hold Ctrl to select faces, edges, and vertices on composite solids. If the History property of the composite solid is set to Record (On), the first “pick” might select the history subobject.
To remove a subobject from a selection set ■ Press and hold Ctrl+Shift. Click a selected face, edge, or vertex. The grip, if displayed, changes from red to blue. NOTE If a subobject selection filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl before clicking a face, edge, or vertex. To select a face, edge, or vertex on the history form of a composite solid 1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Edge, Vertex, or Face. 2 On the history form, click a face, edge, or vertex.
SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. System Variables GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when subobjects are selected.
For best results, make sure that Selection Cycling is turned on in the Selection Cycling Tab (Draft Settings Dialog Box). Turn on the Subobject Selection Filter Selecting a specific type of subobject can be difficult on complex objects, such as meshes. You can limit the selection to a face, edge, vertex, or history subobject by setting a subobject selection filter. When a subobject selection filter is on, you do not need to press and hold Ctrl to select the face, edge, or vertex of a 3D model.
Face filtering is on Shift + F4 History subobject filtering is on Shift + F5 Subobject filtering is off Shift + F1 To cycle through and select subobjects that are overlapping 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you press the Spacebar to cycle through the subobjects that are both visible and hidden. 2 If the subobject that you want to select is not highlighted during the cycle, move the cursor and repeat. 3 When the subobject is highlighted, release the Spacebar and click. The subobject is selected.
SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. System Variables CULLINGOBJ Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. CULLINGOBJSELECTION Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces Use grips to change the size and shape of some individual solids and surfaces. The method you use to manipulate the 3D solid or surface depends on the type of object and the method used to create it. NOTE For mesh objects, only the center grip is displayed. However you can edit mesh objects with the 3D Move, Rotate, or Scale gizmos.
Swept Solids and Surfaces Swept solids and surfaces display grips on the swept profile as well as on the sweep path. You can drag these grips to modify the solid or surface. When you click and drag a grip on the profile, the changes are constrained to the plane of the profile curve.
Revolved Solids and Surfaces Revolved solids and surfaces display grips on the revolved profile at the start of the revolved solid or surface. You can use these grips to modify the profile of the solid of surface. A grip is also displayed at the axis of revolution endpoint. You can relocate the axis of revolution by dragging the grip to another location.
System Variables GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when subobjects are selected.
Several results are possible when you modify a solid or surface. When you move, rotate, or scale subobjects, you can press Ctrl one or more times as you drag to cycle through modification options. The following illustration shows the modification options for moving a face. Move, Rotate, and Scale Subobjects on Composite Solids When you modify composite solids, the effect of the edits depends on the current setting of the History property.
■ In most cases, you can move, rotate, and scale both planar and non-planar faces. ■ You can only modify an edge that is a straight line and that has at least one planar adjacent face. The planes of the adjacent planar faces are adjusted to contain the modified edge. ■ You cannot move, rotate, or scale edges (or their vertices) that are imprinted inside faces. ■ You can only modify a vertex if it has at least one planar adjacent face.
3DSCALE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. Modify Faces on 3D Objects Modify individual faces on 3D objects using a variety of methods. Move, Rotate, and Scale Faces on 3D Solids and Surfaces You can select and modify faces of 3D solids and surfaces.
If you move, rotate, or scale a face on a 3D solid primitive, the solid primitive’s history is removed. The solid is no longer a true primitive and cannot be manipulated using grips or the Properties palette. Face Modification Options As you drag a face, press Ctrl to cycle through modification options. ■ Extend Adjacent Faces. When you move or rotate a face without pressing Ctrl, the shape and size of the face is maintained. However, the planes of adjacent faces might change. ■ Move Face.
TIP Rather than pressing Ctrl to cycle through face modification options, hover over a face grip to display the grip multi-functional menu. Quick Reference Commands MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. System Variables GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
Delete a Face If you specify two points, the first point is used as a base point and a single copy is placed relative to the base point. If you specify a single point and press Enter, the original selection point is used as a base point. The next point is the point of displacement. If a face is surrounded by coplanar faces, you can delete it using the following methods: ■ Select the face and press Delete. ■ Select the face and enter erase. ■ Use the Delete option of the SOLIDEDIT command.
NOTE Use EXTRUDE to extrude a copied face. To delete a face on a solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Face Editing drop-down ➤ Delete Faces. 2 Select the face to delete. (It must be surrounded by faces that share the same plane.) 3 Select additional faces or press Enter to delete. 4 Press Enter to complete the command. To change the color of a face on a solid object 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you click a face on a 3D solid. 2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object.
Move, Rotate, and Scale Edges Move, rotate, and scale the edges on 3D solids and surfaces using grips, gizmos, and commands. cubes with edges moved, rotated, and scaled You can use MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE to modify edges on 3D solids and surfaces just as you can for any other object. Press and hold Ctrl to select the edge. If you move, rotate, or scale an edge on a 3D solid primitive, the history of the solid primitive is removed.
■ Extend Adjacent Faces. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge without pressing Ctrl, the shared length of the edge and its vertices is maintained. However, the planes of the adjacent faces adjacent might be changed. ■ Move Edge. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge and press and release Ctrl once while dragging, the edge is modified without its vertices. The surfaces of the adjacent faces are maintained, but the length of the modified edge might change. ■ Allow Triangulation.
Fillet and Chamfer 3D Solids Round, fillet, or bevel the edges of 3D solids using FILLETEDGE and CHAMFEREDGE. Use the fillet and chamfer grips to modify the fillet radius or the chamfer distance. The default fillet radius is set by the FILLETRAD3D system variable. TIP Use the Chain option of FILLETEDGE to limit selection to tangent edges. Color Edges You can modify the color of an edge on a 3D object by selecting the edge and changing the Color property in the Properties palette.
■ Use Gizmos to Modify Objects on page 1161 ■ Modify Objects on page 775 ■ Move or Rotate Objects on page 787 ■ Resize or Reshape Objects on page 828 ■ Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1238 To fillet a solid object 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Fillet Edge. 2 Select the edge of the solid to fillet. 3 Specify the fillet radius. 4 Select additional edges or press Enter to fillet. To chamfer a 3D solid object 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Chamfer Edge.
6 To complete the chamfer, press Enter. To modify a fillet or chamfer on a 3D solid 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you select a fillet or chamfer on a 3D solid. 2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, modify the properties of the fillet or chamfer. To change the color of an edge on a solid object 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you click an edge on a 3D solid.
Quick Reference Commands EDGE Changes the visibility of 3D face edges. CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects. CHAMFEREDGE Bevels the edges of 3D solids and surfaces. FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. FILLETEDGE Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point.
PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY Controls the transparency of the preview generated while using SURFBLEND, SURFPATCH, SURFFILLET, FILLETEDGE, CHAMFEREDGE, and LOFT. Modify Vertices on 3D Objects You can select and modify 3D object vertices. Move, rotate, scale, or drag the vertices of 3D solids and surfaces. wedge with two vertices moved You can modify the form of a 3D solid or surface by modifying one or more vertices. Use grips and gizmos, or run the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command.
■ Move Vertex. When you move a vertex and press and release Ctrl once, adjacent planar faces might be adjusted. ■ Allow Triangulation. When you move a vertex without pressing Ctrl, some adjacent planar faces may be triangulated (divided into two or more planar triangular faces). If you press and release Ctrl a second time, the modification returns to the first option, as if you had not pressed Ctrl.
2 Click a vertex on a 3D object. 3 Drag the vertex to the required location. To delete a vertex on a 3D object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Vertex. 2 Click a vertex that connects collinear edges are parallel and do not lie on any other edges. 3 Press Delete. Quick Reference Commands MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling.
Display Original Forms of Composite Solids By default, 3D composite objects retain a history that displays an editable image of their original component forms. Retain the History of the Composite Components After you create a composite object, you can modify the shape of the new object by modifying a highlighted wireframe image of its original components. If the Show History property is Yes (On), wireframes of the original forms—including forms that have been removed—are displayed in a dimmed state.
Removing a composite history is useful when you work with complex composite solids. After you create the initial complex form, set History to None (Off) to remove the history. Then reset the value to Record (On). With this process, you can create a complex composite object, and then reset it to serve as a base form for additional composite operations.
3 On the Properties palette, Solid History area, under History, select Record. Quick Reference Commands BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. System Variables SHOWHIST Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing. SOLIDHIST Controls whether new composite solids retain a history of their original components.
If the selected individual form does not contain its history, you can move, rotate, scale, or delete the form. Modify Complex Composites A composite object might be made up of other composite objects. You can select the history images of composite objects by holding down the Ctrl key as you click the forms. (For best results, set the subobject selection filter to Solid History.
■ Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1238 To select an individual solid that is part of a composite solid ■ Press Ctrl + click an individual solid that is part of a composite solid. To separate a 3D solid composite into individual solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing drop-down ➤ Separate. 2 Select the 3D solid object. NOTE This operation only applies to non-intersecting objects that have been combined by union. 3 Press Enter to complete the command.
Continuously tangent faces are treated as a single face when they are offset. To create a 3D solid shell 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing drop-down ➤ Shell. 2 Select the 3D solid object. 3 Select one or more faces to be excluded from shelling. 4 Press Enter. 5 Specify the shell offset value. A positive offset value creates a shell wall in a positive direction from the face. A negative value creates a shell wall in a negative direction from the face.
You can remove redundant edges or vertices that share the same surface or vertex definition. This operation merges adjacent faces and deletes all redundant edges, including imprinted and unused edges. True 3D solid objects have properties, volume, and mass, that are not shared by objects created with thickness or closed surfaces. You can check whether an object is a valid 3D solid by verifying whether it is listed as “3D Solid” on the Properties palette.
Quick Reference Commands SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. System Variables SOLIDCHECK Turns 3D solid validation on and off for the current session. Press or Pull Bounded Areas Create a positive or negative extrusion in the shape of a bounded area. Press in or pull out bounded, or closed, areas to create 3D holes and positive extrusions.
In combination with imprinted faces, you can form complex shapes using press or pull operations to create extrusions and notches. Methods for Press and Pull Modifications With the PRESSPULL command, you specify the area to be extruded, and then move the cursor or enter a value to specify the length of the extrusion. The result is a single 3D solid object, often with a composite shape. You can also press Ctrl+Shift+E to initiate a press or pull operation.
PRESSPULL Presses or pulls bounded areas. System Variables IMPLIEDFACE Controls the detection of implied faces. Add Facets to Faces on Solids and Surfaces Subdivide faces into additional facets on 3D solids and surfaces by imprinting other objects, such as arcs and circles on them. With the IMPRINT command, you can add a new facet to a 3D solid by imprinting a coplanar object that overlaps a face. Imprinting provides additional edges that you can use to reshape the 3D object.
■ You might be unable to move, rotate, or scale some subobjects. ■ Imprinted edges and faces might be lost when some subobjects are moved, rotated, or scaled. Subobjects with editing limitations include ■ Faces with imprinted edges or faces ■ Edges or vertices with adjacent faces that contain imprinted edges or faces To imprint a 3D solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Edge Editing drop-down ➤ Imprint. 2 Select the 3D solid object.
Modify Solid Objects by Changing Properties By changing settings in the Properties palette, you can modify basic size, height, and shape characteristics of primitive solids. For example, to change a four-sided pyramid that ends in a point to an eight-sided pyramid that ends in a planar surface (pyramid frustum), update the Top Radius and Sides properties.
Surfaces include the following information in the Properties palette: ■ Basic geometric information - Contains information such as radius for fillet surfaces, offset distance for offset surfaces, and taper angle for extruded surfaces. You can also enter mathematical expressions to control some of these properties. ■ Maintain Associativity - Displays whether surface is associative or not. Use this property to turn associativity off.
■ Crease Type. Specifies the presence of a crease (or sharpened edge) and the effect of smoothing. Smoothing does not affect a crease with a value of Always. A crease set to By Level retains its sharpness until the mesh object is smoothed to the specified crease level. ■ Crease Level. When a crease is set to By Level, indicates the smoothing level at which the crease starts to lose its sharpness.
try assigning a material that has the same ambient and diffuse color. For more information see Create New Materials on page 2209. See also: ■ Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1202 To modify the contour of a lofted solid or surface by changing the surface normal settings (Properties palette) 1 In a drawing, select a lofted solid or surface that was created with cross sections. 2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object.
Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables FILLETRAD Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects. FILLETRAD3D Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects. LOFTANG1 Sets the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. LOFTANG2 Sets the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. LOFTMAG1 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation.
When your surface design is complete, use the surface analysis tools to ensure the quality of your model and to rebuild it if necessary.
■ Edit NURBS Surfaces Trim and Untrim Surfaces Trim and untrim surfaces to meet the edges of other objects. An important step in the surface modeling workflow is trimming surfaces. You can trim a surface where it meets an intersecting object or you can project geometry onto a surface as a trimming edge. When a surface is trimmed, the removed surface areas can be replaced with SURFUNTRIM.
NOTE SURFUNTRIM does not restore areas removed by the SURFAUTOTRIM system variable and PROJECTGEOMETRY. It only restores areas trimmed with SURFTRIM. The Properties palette indicates if the surface contains any trimmed edges. Projecting Geometry onto Surfaces, Solids, and Regions Similar to projecting a movie onto a screen, you can project geometry onto 3D solids, surfaces, and regions from different directions to create trimming edges.
To untrim a surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Untrim. 2 Select a visible part of the surface and press Enter. The trimmed areas are replaced. NOTE When you trim a surface multiple times, you may lose some of the original trimming edges. In this case, some untrim actions may not be possible if the trimming edge has been lost. To automatically trim areas to projected curves 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Project Geometry panel ➤ Auto Trim. 2 Click Surface tab ➤ Project Geometry panel ➤ Project to View.
SURFTRIM Trims portions of a surface where it meets another surface or type of geometry. SURFUNTRIM Replaces surface areas removed by the SURFTRIM command. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them.
To create a new surface by extending a surface 1 Select a surface. 2 Right-click and select Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Geometry, change the desired settings. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SURFEXTEND Lengthens a surface by a specified distance. Fillet a Surface Create a new transition surface that fillets an area between two existing surfaces or regions.
Quick Reference Commands SURFFILLET Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables FILLETRAD3D Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects. PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY Controls the transparency of the preview generated while using SURFBLEND, SURFPATCH, SURFFILLET, FILLETEDGE, CHAMFEREDGE, and LOFT. Edit NURBS Surfaces Change the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves by using the 3D Edit Bar or by editing control vertices.
Use CVSHOW to display the control vertices for both NURBS surfaces and curves. Drag the control vertices to reshape the curve or surface; you can also add or delete control vertices in both the U and V directions. The typical surface modeling workflow is to: ■ Create a model that combines 3D solids, surfaces, and mesh objects. ■ Convert the model to procedural surfaces to take advantage of associative modeling.
CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. CVADD Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines. CVHIDE Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREBUILD Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREMOVE Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves. System Variables SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces.
Quick Reference Commands CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. CVADD Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines. CVHIDE Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREBUILD Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREMOVE Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves.
■ Curvature Analysis on page 1235 - Evaluates areas of high and low surface curvature by displaying a color gradient. ■ Draft Analysis on page 1236 - Evaluates whether a model has adequate draft between a part and its mold.
NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D. Quick Reference Commands ANALYSISCURVATURE Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its curvature. ANALYSISDRAFT Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is adequate space between a part and its mold. ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. ANALYSISZEBRA Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity.
System Variables VSACURVATUREHIGH Sets the value at which a surface displays as green during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSACURVATURELOW Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSACURVATURETYPE Controls which type of curvature analysis is used with the (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT).
Analyze Surface Continuity with Zebra Analysis The zebra analysis tool projects stripes onto a surface so that you can inspect the continuity between surfaces. Surface continuity is a measure of how smoothly two surfaces flow into each other. A car hood, for example, can be composed of multiple small surfaces that appear to be one because of the smoothness of the surface continuity. NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D.
■ G2 Curvature. The position, tangency, and curvature of the surface edges is the same. This indicates G2 (G0 + G1 + G2 or position + tangency + curvature). The stripes line up, but they do not veer away from each other at sharp curves (because they share the same curvature). This distinction is subtle and a little harder to discern from G1 continuity. To analyze surface continuity 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Zebra. 2 Select a surface and press Enter. The zebra stripes display.
To turn off the zebra display 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 Click the Clear Zebra Analysis button. The zebra stripes disappear. To change the zebra analysis options 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 In the Zebra tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the desired options and click OK. Quick Reference Commands ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.
VSAZEBRASIZE Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). VSAZEBRATYPE Sets the type of zebra display when using zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Analyze the Curvature of a NURBS Surface Displays a color gradient onto surfaces to evaluate areas of high, low and Gaussian curvature. The color gradient allows you to visualize Gaussian, minimum, maximum, and mean U and V surface curvature.
The curvature coloring disappears. To change the curvature analysis options 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 In the Curvature tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the desired options and click OK. Quick Reference Commands ANALYSISCURVATURE Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its curvature. ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.
If you are creating shapes or parts that need to be molded, the draft analysis tool evaluates if their is adequate draft between a part and its mold (based on the pull direction). NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D. To analyze the draft of a model 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Draft. 2 Select a model and press Enter. The draft analysis colors display. To turn off the draft color display 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options.
ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. System Variables VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT). VSADRAFTANGLELOW Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT). Modify Mesh Objects Model mesh objects by changing smoothing levels, refining specific areas, or adding creases.
NOTE The capabilities described in this section apply only to mesh objects created in and later. They cannot be used with legacy polyface or polygon mesh. About Mesh Faces Mesh objects are composed of faces and facets.
Faces are non-overlapping units that—along with their edges and vertices—form the basic editable units of a mesh object. When you move, rotate, and scale individual mesh faces, surrounding faces are stretched and deformed in order to avoid introducing gaps. When gaps occur, you can often close them by smoothing the object or refining individual faces. About Mesh Facets Mesh faces have underlying structures, known as facets. The density of the facet grid corresponds to the smoothness of the mesh.
also resets the lowest level of smoothness that can be applied to the object (MESHREFINE). ■ Refine a face. Restrict the refinement to a specific mesh face. This method avoids resetting the smoothness baseline. ■ Crease an edge. Remove the smoothness from specified edges. You can also remove an existing crease (MESHCREASE). ■ Split or merge faces. Divide an existing face into separate components along a specified path. Merge two or more faces to create a single face (MESHSPLIT MESHMERGE).
Because dense meshes can be difficult to work with, you can change settings to improve the display and behavior of grips. ■ Set the subobject selection filter to select only faces, edges, or vertices: Set the DEFAULTGIZMO system variable or use the shortcut menu. ■ Set whether a grip on a face, edge, or vertex is active immediately when you select the subobject: Set the GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable.
MESHSPIN Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces. MESHSPLIT Splits a mesh face into two faces. MESHUNCREASE Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices. System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when subobjects are selected. VSLIGHTINGQUALITY Sets the lighting quality in the current viewport.
Increase or Decrease Smoothness As you work, you can increase and decrease the level of smoothness. The differences are apparent both in the wireframe and conceptual visual styles and in the rendered output.
The lowest level of smoothness, or baseline, is 0. By default, Level 0 has no smoothness. You can increase the smoothness of any mesh object up to the current limits. However, you cannot decrease the smoothness of a mesh object whose level of smoothness is zero. If you have added creases to a mesh object, the effect of smoothing differs, depending on the crease setting. The effect of creases added to mesh that has no smoothness (Level 0) is not apparent until the mesh is smoothed.
Dense meshes can result in subobjects that are difficult to select and edit. They can also affect performance. Therefore you might want to set limits that prevent the mesh from becoming too dense. ■ Maximum level of smoothness at which a grid is displayed (SMOOTHMESHGRID). Displays the effects of modeling without the complexity of the underlying facet grid. The default smoothness level is 3. The tessellation display becomes increasingly dense until the maximum level is exceeded.
To control the display of the mesh facet grid 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshgrid. 2 Enter one of the following values: ■ 0 suppresses the display of the underlying mesh facet grid. ■ 1 displays the mesh facet grid only when the object has a level of smoothness of 0 or 1. ■ 2 and higher sets the highest level of smoothness at which the facet grid is displayed. To set the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxlev.
System Variables SMOOTHMESHGRID Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects. Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects Refine a mesh object or subobject to convert underlying facets to editable faces. You can refine any mesh that has a level of smoothness of 1 or higher.
Refine a Mesh Face You can refine an entire mesh object as shown in the previous illustration, or select a specific face to refine. A refined face is subdivided into four faces and the surrounding faces are deformed slightly to accommodate the change. Refining a mesh face does not affect the overall smoothing level of the mesh object. Unlike a refined mesh object, refined faces can be refined again immediately. With mesh face refinement, you can target smaller areas for detailed modeling.
If a crease is applied before an object is smoothed or refined, the effect is not apparent until after the object is smoothed or refined. To refine a mesh object 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Refine Mesh. 2 Select the mesh object that you want to refine. (The object must have a smoothness level of 1 or higher.) The underlying mesh facets are converted to faces and the level of smoothness for the object is set to 0. Higher levels of smoothness result in a higher number of faces.
Add Creases to Different Subobjects The result of creasing differs, depending on what type of subobject you select. ■ Edge. The selected edge is sharpened. The adjacent faces are deformed to accommodate the new crease angle. ■ Face. The selected face is flattened and all edges that bound that face are sharpened. Adjacent faces are deformed to accommodate the new shape of the face. ■ Vertex. The point of the vertex and all intersecting edges are sharpened.
To add creases to a mesh object 1 (Optional) Specify the type of subobject to crease: right-click in the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face, Vertex, or Edge. 2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Add Crease. 3 Select the mesh edges, faces, or vertices to crease. (If you have set a subobject selection filter, only one type of subobject can be selected.) To remove a subobject from the selection set, Shift+click the subobject.
To remove an existing mesh crease 1 (Optional) Specify the type of subobject to modify: right-click in the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face, Vertex, or Edge. 2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Remove Crease. 3 Press Ctrl+click the mesh subobjects to be modified and press Enter. You can also use window selection to specify multiple subobjects. Quick Reference Commands MESHCREASE Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects.
Because you specify the start point and end point of the split, this method also gives you control over the shape of the two new faces. Use the Vertex option to snap automatically to the vertices of the face. If you plan to split a face to create—and then spin the edge of—two triangular faces (MESHSPIN), use the Vertex option to ensure precision. Extrude Mesh Faces You can add definition to a 3D object by extruding a mesh face. Extruding other types of objects creates a separate 3D solid object.
You cannot create joined extrusions for mesh faces in which only the vertices are shared. For more information about extrusion, see Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding on page 1034. Reconfigure Adjacent Mesh Faces You can extend your editing options by reconfiguring adjacent faces. Several options are available: ■ Merge adjacent faces. Combine adjacent faces to form a single face. Merging works best with faces that are on the same plane.
■ Spin edges of triangular faces. Rotate an edge that is shared by two triangular faces. The shared edge spins to extend from the opposite vertices. This activity works best when the adjoined triangles form a rectangular, not a triangular, shape. See also: ■ Tips for Working with Mesh on page 1261 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding on page 1034 To split a mesh face 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Split Face. 2 Click the mesh face that you want to split.
3 Click one or more mesh faces and press Enter. 4 Specify the amount of extrusion using one of the following methods: ■ (Single face extrusion only) Press Enter to set the extrusion dynamically. ■ Enter a value to indicate the height or depth of the extrusion and press Enter. The selected face is extruded. To merge mesh faces 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Merge Face. 2 On a mesh object, select two or more mesh faces and press Enter. The selected faces are combined to form a single face.
The edge shared by the original triangles rotates, or spins, to connect two different vertices. Quick Reference Commands MESHCOLLAPSE Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges. MESHEXTRUDE Extends a mesh face into 3D space. MESHMERGE Merges adjacent faces into a single face. MESHSMOOTHLESS Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. MESHSMOOTHMORE Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. MESHSPIN Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces.
■ Deleting an edge removes each adjacent face. ■ Deleting a vertex removes all faces that are shared by the vertex. If removal of a mesh face creates a gap, the mesh object is not “watertight.” It can be converted to a surface object, but not to a 3D solid object. Close Gaps in Mesh Objects If a mesh object is not watertight due to gaps, or holes, in the mesh, you can make it watertight by closing the holes. The cap, or new face, spans the boundary formed by the mesh edges that you specify (MESHCAP).
This process works best when all edges are on the same plane. The edges you select as boundaries cannot be shared by two faces. For example, you cannot close the center hole in a mesh torus. NOTE You can sometimes close gaps in mesh by smoothing the object, by using MESHCOLLAPSE, or by splitting adjacent faces (MESHSPLIT).
2 Select contiguous edges to serve as the boundary for the mesh face that will span the gap. Quick Reference Commands ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. MESHCAP Creates a mesh face that connects open edges. Tips for Working with Mesh Learn some best practices for working with mesh models. Mesh, with its enhanced modeling capabilities, offers a way to create more fluid, free-form designs. Keep these tips in mind as you work. Model mesh before you smooth it.
You can quickly switch between the levels of smoothness in the Properties palette to get a preview of how your activities affect the smoothed object. Refine or split a face instead of refining the entire object. Refinement is a powerful way to subdivide faces. However, by increasing the number of faces, you add to the overall complexity of the model. In addition, refining an entire mesh object resets the base level of smoothness to 0. This change can result in a dense grid that can no longer be simplified.
extruded faces on mesh torus, creased and not creased Creasing set to Always retains its sharpness after smoothing. If you set a crease value, the creased edge becomes smoother at the equivalent level of smoothness. Use gizmos to model faces, edges, and vertices. 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos can be used to modify entire mesh objects, or specific subobjects. For example, you can rotate and scale an individual face using the 3D Move, Rotate, and Scale gizmos.
Use subobject selection filters to narrow the available selection candidates. In a smoothed mesh, trying to select a specific subject can be difficult unless you turn on subobject selection (shortcut menu). By specifying that the selection set is limited to faces, edges, vertices, or even solid history subobjects, you can restrict which subobject type is available for selection.
mesh faces extended using 3D Move gizmo Mesh extrusion, however, inserts additional faces to close the gap between the extruded face and its original surface. With mesh extrusion, you can set whether adjacent faces are extruded as a unit (joined) or separately (unjoined). mesh faces extruded, then smoothed If you are working on an object that has not been smoothed, try smoothing it periodically to see how the extrusion is affected by smoothing. Convert between mesh and 3D solids or surfaces.
Keep in mind that not all conversions retain complete fidelity to the shape of the original object. Avoid switching between object types more than once, if possible. If you notice that the conversion modifies the shape of the object in an unacceptable way, undo the conversion and try again with different settings. The Mesh Tessellation Options Dialog Box (MESHOPTIONS) controls the smoothness and shape of the faces for 3D solids or surfaces that are converted to mesh.
mesh wedge with front faces dragged past the back faces Mesh objects that cannot be converted to solids can often be converted to surfaces instead. Avoid merging faces that wrap a corner When you merge faces, you can create a mesh configuration in which the merged face wraps a corner. If a resulting face has a vertex that has two edges and two faces, you cannot convert the mesh to a smooth 3D solid object.
One way to resolve this problem is to convert the mesh to a faceted solid instead of a smooth solid. You might also be able to repair the problem by splitting the adjacent faces, starting at the shared vertex (MESHSPLIT). Modify 3D Solids and Surfaces Using Inventor Fusion Open and modify 3D solids and surfaces directly in Autodesk Inventor Fusion, a 3D direct manipulation modeler. ® Inventor Fusion provides direct modeling capabilities for rapid design changes without limits.
Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models 26 Create cross sections, cutting planes, flattened views, and 2D drawings of 3D objects. Create Drawings from 3D Models Create drawings from a variety of 3D models. Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models Create associative drawings in layouts from AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor 3D models. Workflow for Creating Associative Drawings from 3D Models You can generate drawings from 3D models, which are associative to the model they were generated from.
The basic building block of a drawing is a drawing view. A drawing view is a rectangular object that contains a 2D projection of the 3D model. The VIEWBASE and VIEWPROJ commands generate drawing views from the 3D model. The border of the drawing view is visible only when you create the view or when you move the cursor over it. Although the view border resides on the current layer, it does not print.
Once a base view is placed in a layout, you generate projected views from it. Unlike a base view, projected views are not directly derived off the 3D model. Instead, they are derived from a base view (or another projected view that already exists in a layout). The projected views maintain a parent-child relationship with the view it was generated from. Most settings of a child view are derived from the parent. If necessary, you can create more than one base view in a layout.
When the source 3D models change, drawing views derived from that model become out-of date. AutoCAD highlights out-of-date drawing views by displaying red markers on the corners of the view border. To synchronize an out-of-date view with its source 3d model, update the view. You can use the EXPORTLAYOUT command to export a layout containing drawing views to the model space of a new drawing.
VIEWPROJ Creates one or more projected views from an existing drawing view. Set Defaults for Drawing Views from 3D Models Customize the default settings for drawing views. To ensure that drawing views follow the correct drafting standards, you customize the default settings using the Drafting Standards dialog box. The settings you specify impact all new drawing views you create. They have no effect on any existing drawing view. The Drafting Standards dialog box displays when you run the VIEWSTD command.
angle corresponding to the drafting standard the drawing must comply with. ■ The preview type The preview is a temporary graphic that is displayed with the cursor at the time you place a view in the drawing area. Shaded previews provide visual feedback to enable you to select the desired model orientation during view creation. However, for large models shaded previews can take time to generate. For such cases you can change the temporary graphic to a bounding box, instead of using a shaded preview.
2 In the Drafting Standards dialog box, in the Thread style section, click the desired thread style. 3 Click OK. To specify the preview style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Dialog Box Launcher. 2 In the Drafting Standards dialog box, from the Preview type list, select the desired preview style. 3 If you selected Shaded, from the Shaded view quality list, select the desired resolution. NOTE Resolutions above 150 DPI may not be achievable for larger models.
■ A scaled preview of the model appears on the cross hairs. ■ The command line prompts you to place the base view in model space. All the options that are available on the Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon tab are available on the command line as well. The purpose of the command line is to assist you when the ribbon is turned off. However, if the ribbon is turned on, we recommend that you use the ribbon.
To create a base view from model space solids and surfaces 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Base View NOTE ■ You can use this command only from a layout tab. ■ If the layout tab contains a viewport, we recommend that you delete it before you invoke this command. 2 In the Orientation panel of the Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon tab, select the orientation for the base view. 3 In the Appearance panel of the Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon tab, specify the scale and view style.
options during file open improves performance of large assemblies. This is because the command can load only the data necessary for your selection. Like AutoCAD named views, Inventor models contain named view representations. However, unlike AutoCAD, Inventor models have several types of view representations, which you can mix and match. While creating base views, you must specify which of these view representations you are creating the base view for.
Level of detail A named representation saved in an Inventor assembly file, where unneeded components are suppressed or replaced with a single part representation in order to simplify the model. When you create a base view, you must specify which level of detail representation you are creating it from. Weldment states A weldment is an inseparable assembly formed by welding together two or more pieces. Inventor models can show the weldment in different states.
An iAssembly factory is family of assemblies, derived off a single model, by varying a set of unique identifiers. For example, a family of flywheels with varying number of shoes. An iPart factory is a family of parts, derived off a single model by varying parameters such as size or material. For example, a family of screws of varying lengths and diameter. When creating a base view, you must specify which member of the family you are creating the base view for.
Presentation view A presentation view is an exploded view of an assembly, created to demonstrate how parts in an assembly interact and fit together. When you create a base view, you must specify which presentation view you are creating it for. NOTE Presentation views are available only if the model you are using is a presentation (*.ipn) file. To create a base view from an Inventor model 1 Verify that model space is empty. 2 Click the layout tab you intend to create the drawing in.
4 In the Select File dialog box, select the model to generate the base view from and click Open. 5 In the Representation panel, select the view representations you want to show in the base view. NOTE Only the view representations used by the model you selected are available on the ribbon. For example, if you selected an assembly, the Weldment, Member, Sheet Metal and Presentation View representations are disabled.
relation to the parent view. The preview updates dynamically, to reflect the orientation, as you move the cursor. After you place a projected view in the drawing area, the command prompts repeat. Hence, you can place multiple projected views within the same command session. You exit the command by selecting the Exit command line option. To create projected views 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Projected View. 2 Click the view you want to use as the parent view.
Update Drawing Views when Source 3D Models Change Workflow to make out-of-date drawings current. While you work on a drawing containing drawing views, the program periodically checks whether the referenced 3D source model has changed. If the source has changed, a balloon message displays next to the drawing views status bar icon in the lower right of the application window. Click the link in the balloon message to update all out-of-date views.
You can also choose the “fixed” option, which forces unchanged model geometry to remain in the location it was prior to the update operation. Often, this is preferred as less shift occurs. If you update a view after you have added dimensions to the view geometry, dimensions are likely to become disassociated. You are then prompted to step through the affected dimensions and attach the extension-line origin points of each disassociated dimension to the corresponding geometry.
Quick Reference Commands DIMREASSOCIATE Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects. VIEWUPDATE Updates drawing views that have become out-of-date because the source model has changed. Edit Existing Drawing Views Perform a variety of edit operations on drawing views. Edit Drawing View Properties Edit properties such as scale, view options, and view representation, which control the appearance of drawing views.
In general, the options in the Representation Panel of the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon tab are available only for base views. The Appearance panel is available for both base views and projected views. When a model is large or complex, applying a property can take time. If you turn Defer Updates, property changes are not applied immediately. Instead, they are applied only when you click OK, or turn off Defer Updates.
Move, Rotate, or Erase drawing views Move drawing views to a different location on a layout, rotate the view geometry, or delete drawing views. Move Drawing Views You can use the MOVE command to move drawing views. Orthogonal views are constrained to be aligned to their parent views, while isometric views are not. Consequently, if you move a parent view, all orthographic child views also move with it to maintain alignment.
If required, you can display the grip menu of a view and select Break Alignment to remove the alignment constraint. A child view that you moved in this manner can be realigned by using the Repair Alignment option in the grip menu of the view. Rotate Drawing Views You can use the ROTATE command to rotate drawing views. If you select dimensions as part of the selection set, they too are rotated. When you do not include dimensions within the selection set, only aligned dimensions rotate with the view.
Rotating a view breaks all alignment constraints it has with other views. Erase Drawing Views You can erase a drawing view using the ERASE command. If you erase a parent view, its child views are not erased. The child views automatically assume the role of a parent view. Although child views become parent views, they do not become base views. Therefore, the "View type" property within the Properties palette continues to display the "Projected" value.
To rotate a drawing view 1 Click the view you want to rotate. A grip appears at the center of the view. 2 Move the cursor over the grip. A menu is displayed. 3 Click Rotate. 4 Move the preview to the desired location and click to place the view, or specify the rotation angle and press ENTER. To remove the alignment constraint on a child view 1 Click the view you want to remove the constraint from. A grip appears at the center of the view. 2 Move the cursor over the grip. A menu is displayed.
ROTATE Updates drawing views that have become out-of-date because the source model has changed. Change Layer Properties of View Geometry Change the appearance of view geometry and comply with company layer naming standards. When you create a drawing view, the program draws view geometry on pre determined layers, depending on what the geometry represents. For example, a groove on the front side of a part is drawn on a layer named “visible” in the front view.
Entity Represented by Geo- Layer drawn on metry Model Source Inventor Model Space Tangent Edge (Hidden) Hidden Narrow Yes Yes Tangent Edge (Visible) Visible Narrow Yes Yes Thread Ends (Visible) Visible Yes No Thread Ends (Hidden) Hidden Yes No Thread Lines (Visible) Visible Narrow Yes No Thread Lines (Hidden) Hidden Yes No Thread Lines (Visible) Hidden Narrow Yes No View Edge (Hidden) Hidden Yes Yes View Edge (Visible) Visible Yes Yes In the view options dialog box, yo
If your company conventions require you to stick to specific layer names, you can rename the layers, after they are created. Subsequent views that you create use the renamed layers. See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity on page 516 Quick Reference Commands LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. VIEWEDIT Edits an existing drawing view. VIEWSETPROJ Specifies the active project file for drawings containing drawing views from Inventor models.
message so that you are aware that the drawing views do not show the latest changes made to the source. To ensure that the drawing views show the latest changes, use Autodesk Inventor to update the out-of-date Inventor model. Unresolved Inventor File References When files referenced by an Inventor model are not found automatically, drawing views derived from this model are said to contain unresolved file references. A drawing view can contain unresolved file references for any of the following reasons.
■ Parasolid (up to V23) ■ JT (7.0; 8.0; 8.1; 8.2; 9.0-9.5) ■ NX ■ SolidWorks (2003 - 2010) After you import the 3D model, the model is available as an AutoCAD 3D model, in model space. Thereafter you generate drawings for the 3D model using the workflow for AutoCAD 3D models on page 1269. Imported models are not associative with the source 3D model. Hence, drawings created in this manner do not update when the source 3D model changes.
Set the Cross-Section with the Section Plane Indicator Section objects have a transparent section plane indicator that acts as a cutting plane. This plane can be moved through a 3D model that is composed of 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to obtain different section views. Store Properties in Section Lines The section plane contains a section line that stores section object properties. You can create multiple section objects to store different properties.
Save and Share Section Images After you create a sectional view, you can generate an accurate 2D or 3D block from the 3D model. These blocks can be analyzed or checked for clearances and interference conditions. They can also be dimensioned, or used as wireframe or rendered illustrations in documentation and presentation drawings. You can also save each section object as a tool on the tool palette. That way, you can avoid resetting properties each time you create a section object.
With the SECTIONPLANE command, you create a section object that acts as a cutting plane through solids, surfaces, meshes, or regions. Then turn on live sectioning to move the section object through the 3D model to reveal its inner details in real time. You can align a section object using several methods. Align the Section Plane to a 3D Face One way to set the section plane is to click the face of an existing 3D object.
Section object with jogged segment Create Orthographic Sections You can align section objects to a specified orthographic orientation of the current UCS, such as front, back, bottom, top, left, or right. Orthographic section planes are placed so that they pass through the center of the 3D extents of all 3D objects in the drawing. Create a Region to Represent the Cross Section With the SECTION command, you can create a 2D region object that represents a planar cross section through a 3D solid object.
Define the plane of the cross section using one of the following methods: ■ Specify three points ■ Specify a 2D object such as a circle, ellipse, arc, spline, or polyline ■ Specify a view ■ Specify the Z axis ■ Specify the XY, YZ, or ZX plane The new region that represents the cross-sectional plane is placed on the current layer. NOTE Before you apply hatching to the cross-sectional cutting plane, align the UCS with the cutting plane.
To create a section object by specifying two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane. 2 Specify the first point of the section object. 3 Specify the endpoint. The section object is created between the two points. Live sectioning is turned off. To create a section object with jogged segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane. 2 At the Command prompt, enter d (Draw Section). 3 Specify the start point of the section object.
3 Specify three points to define the cross-sectional plane. Quick Reference Commands SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTION Uses the intersection of a plane and solids, surfaces, or mesh to create a region. Modify a Section View After you create a section, adjust its display or modify its shape and location to change the represented section view. Add Jogs to a Section Add jogs, or angular segments, to existing section lines.
You cannot add jogs to the side or back lines of the section object. After adding jogs, you can reposition and resize the jogged sections by dragging the section object grips. To add jogs to a section 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Jog. 2 On a section object, select the section line. 3 Move the cursor over the section line. 4 Select a point on the section line where you want to place a jog that is perpendicular to the selected segment. To create additional jogs, repeat the steps.
You can use live sectioning to analyze a model by moving the section object through the object. For example, sliding the section object through an engine assembly helps you visualize its internal components. You can use this method to create a cross section view that you can save or reuse. Turn on and Use Live Sectioning Live sectioning works with 3D objects and regions in model space.
A drawing can contain multiple section objects. However, live sectioning can only be active for one section object at a time. Suppose that your model has two sections objects: Section A and Section B. If Section A has live sectioning turned on and you activate live sectioning for Section B, live sectioning for Section A is automatically turned off. Turning off a section object layer does not turn off live sectioning. However, freezing the layer turns off live sectioning.
Grips allow you to adjust the location, length, width, and height of the cutting area. ■ Base grip. Acts as the basepoint for moving, scaling, and rotating the section object. It is always adjacent to the Menu grip. ■ Second grip. Rotates the section object around the base grip. ■ Menu grip. Displays a menu of section object states, which control the display of visual information about the cutting plane. ■ Direction grip. Controls the viewing direction of the 2D section.
Depending on the current section plane state, different grips are displayed. 2 Hover over the grip with the cursor until it turns red. Then drag the grip to a new location. 3 To adjust the height, width, or depth of a section plane, click the Menu grip and select Section Volume or Section Boundary. Quick Reference Commands SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. System Variables GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.
■ Section Volume. A 3D box shows the extents of the cutting plane in all directions. You can switch between object states by clicking the Menu grip that is displayed when you select the section object. Set Section Object Properties Section objects have properties like other AutoCAD objects. Properties are stored in the section line and can be accessed in the Properties palette. For each section object, you can change the name, layer, and linetype.
3 In the Plane Color box, select a color. The section plane indicator is updated in the viewport. To change the height of the section plane indicator 1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, under Geometry, in the Top Plane box, change the value. This value changes the distance from the section line to the upper edge of the section plane. 3 In the Bottom Plane box, enter a value.
Associate Section Objects with Named Views Associate section objects with named views. When you activate a named view that has an associated section object, live sectioning is turned on for that section object. For a 3D model with multiple section objects, you might want to associate a particular section object to a view. Later, you can restore a saved sectional view and activate live sectioning for the associated section object.
VIEW Save and Publish Section Objects Save a section object as a block or tool, or publish it. Save Sections as Blocks, Drawings, or Tools Save the representation of the cross-sectional area where a section object intersects a 3D model as a block. Save Sections as Blocks or Drawings You can save the section objects you create as blocks. Working from the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box, you can choose the type of block that is created.
To publish or render a cutaway of the 3D model, select the 3D Section option. 3D section geometry consists of mostly 3D solids and surfaces. However, profile outlines and hatch patterns consist of 2D lines. The display properties of 2D section/elevation blocks and 3D section blocks are controlled in the Section Settings dialog box. When you create section blocks, you have the following choices for how they are handled: ■ Insert the section blocks.
See also: ■ Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images on page 62 To save and insert a 2D or 3D section as a block 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Create Block. 2 Select the section object. 3 In the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box, click 2D Section/Elevation or 3D Section. 4 In the expanded dialog box, select Include All Objects. 5 Under Destination, click Insert as New Block. 6 Click Create. 7 In the drawing area, specify an insertion point for the new block.
7 In the New Layer Name dialog box, specify how the descriptive text will look: ■ Under Added Text Type, specify whether you want the descriptive text to be a prefix or a suffix. ■ Under Text Added to the Existing Layer Name, enter descriptive text to be added to the layer name. Click OK. 8 In the Section Settings dialog box, click OK. 9 In the Generate Section / Elevation dialog box, click Create. To save a section object tool as a tool palette tool 1 On a section object, select the section line.
Publish Section Objects Control the visibility of section objects when you render, plot, or view them in the DWF file viewer. Render Section Objects With live sectioning turned on, all lines on a section object are rendered as 2D lines. The section plane indicator is rendered as a transparent material. Its degree of transparency is controlled in the Properties palette. If you want to render a 3D cutaway, save the cutaway section as a 3D block and render the block reference.
PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PUBLISH RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model. SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks. Create a Flattened View Create a flattened view of the 3D solids and regions in the current view.
The flatshot process works only in model space. Start by setting up the view you want, including orthographic or parallel views. All 3D objects in the model space viewport are captured. Therefore, be sure to place the objects you do not want captured on layers that are turned off or frozen. As you create the block, you can control how hidden lines are displayed by adjusting the Foreground and Obscured Lines settings in the Flatshot dialog box.
To create a flattened drawing view of a 3D model 1 Set up the view of the 3D model. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Flatshot. 3 In the Flatshot dialog box, under Destination, click one of the options. 4 Change the color and linetype settings for Foreground and Obscured lines. 5 Click Create. 6 Specify an insertion point on the screen to place the block. Adjust the basepoint, scale, and rotation if necessary.
1320
Part 9: Annotate Drawings 1321
1322
Work with Annotations 27 When you annotate your drawings, you can use certain tools and properties to make working with annotations easier. Overview of Annotations Annotations are notes or other types of explanatory symbols or objects that are commonly used to add information to your drawing.
■ Blocks ■ Attributes Quick Reference Commands ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.
Overview of Scaling Annotations Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called Annotative on page 2289. This property allows you to automate the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. Instead of creating multiple annotations at different sizes and on separate layers, you can turn on the annotative property by object or by style, and set the annotation scale for model or layout viewports.
Workflow for Annotating Drawings The following steps represent a typical workflow for annotating a drawing so that your annotations will scale automatically. 1 Create annotative styles on page 1334. 2 In model space, set the annotation scale to the scale at which the annotations will be plotted or displayed on page 1327. 3 Create annotative objects using annotative styles on page 1334. If one or more annotative objects needs to be displayed at an additional scale, follow these steps.
System Variables ANNOAUTOSCALE Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the annotation scale is changed. CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. CANNOSCALEVALUE Returns the value of the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Set Annotation Scale Annotation scale on page 2289 is a setting that is saved with model space, layout viewports, and model views.
Use the CANNOSCALE system variable to set a default annotation scale setting. You can reset the list of annotative scales in a drawing to the default list of either metric or imperial scales defined in the registry with the Default Scale dialog box.
CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. CANNOSCALEVALUE Returns the value of the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Create Annotative Objects Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called Annotative on page 2289.
Many of the dialog boxes used to create these objects contain an Annotative check box where you can make the object annotative. You can also change existing objects to be annotative by changing the annotative property in the Properties palette. When you hover the cursor over an annotative object that supports one annotation scale, the cursor displays a more than one annotation scale, it displays a 1330 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations icon. When the object supports icon.
Text, dimension, and multileader styles can also be annotative. Annotative styles create annotative objects. Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects When working with annotative on page 2289 objects, this option allows you to maintain visual fidelity for these objects when they are viewed in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier releases. Visual fidelity is controlled by the SAVEFIDELITY system variable. If you work primarily in model space, it is recommended that you turn off visual fidelity (set SAVEFIDELITY to 0).
when working with a drawing created in AutoCAD 2008 and later releases in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier releases. When this option is not selected, a single model space representation is displayed on the Model layout. More annotation objects may be displayed on the Model layout depending on the ANNOALLVISIBLE setting. Also, more objects may be displayed in paper space viewports at different sizes than in AutoCAD 2008 and later releases.
Work with Annotative Styles You can minimize the steps to annotate a drawing by using annotative styles. Annotative text, dimension, and multileader styles create annotative on page 2289 objects. The dialog boxes used to define these objects contain an Annotative check box where you can make the styles annotative. Annotative styles display a special palette. icon before their names in dialog boxes and the Properties You should specify the Paper Text Height value for any annotative text styles you create.
that of the new style. If the style does not have a fixed height (the Text Height value is 0), the paper height of the object is calculated based on the object’s current height and the annotation scale.
Quick Reference Commands ANNOUPDATE Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their styles. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Create Annotative Text Use annotative on page 2289 text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the text on the paper.
■ Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1356 To create a new annotative text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, click New. 3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a new style name. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Text Style dialog box, under Size, select Annotative. 6 In the Paper Text Height box, enter the height of the text as it will display on paper. 7 Click Apply. 8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 9 Click Close.
To create annotative single-line text 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style. NOTE A annotative. icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is 3 Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Single Line Text. 6 Specify the insertion point for the first character. 7 Specify a text rotation angle. 8 Enter the text.
To change existing multiline text to annotative or non-annotative 1 Double-click a multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed. button on the toolbar to change existing 2 Click the Annotative multiline text to annotative or non-annotative. When the Annotative button is depressed, the text is annotative. When the button is not depressed, the text is non-annotative. 3 Click OK to save the changes.
7 Click Close. 8 In the drawing, select all the text objects (text and mtext) that you want to update. 9 At the command prompt, enter annoupdate. To change the height of annotative text as it will display on the paper 1 In the drawing, select a text object. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Paper Text Height, enter a new value. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
If you associate a dimension to an annotative object, the associativity of the dimension is lost. You can also change an existing non-annotative dimension to annotative by changing the dimension’s Annotative property to Yes (On). NOTE When the current dimension style is annotative, the value of DIMSCALE is automatically set to zero, and does not affect the dimension scale. You can also create annotative tolerances.
6 In the New Dimension Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the dimension style. 7 Click OK. 8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension style. 9 Click Close. To change an existing dimension style to annotative 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style. NOTE A icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is already annotative.
one first. For information on creating an annotative dimension style see, To create a new annotative dimension style on page 1340. 3 Click Set Current. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension drop-down list ➤ select a dimension type, or at the Command prompt, enter a dimension command. If the Select Annotation Scale dialog box is displayed, select the default scale you want to use for the new dimension object and click OK. 6 Place the dimension in the drawing area.
NOTE A icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is already annotative. 3 Click Modify. 4 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, select Annotative. 5 Click OK. 6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension style. 7 Click Close. 8 In the drawing, select all the dimensions that you want to update. 9 At the command prompt, enter annoupdate.
System Variables DIMANNO Creates a single-line text object. Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders Leaders and multileaders on page 2309 are used to add call outs to your drawings. You can create annotative on page 2289 leaders through an annotative dimension style and multileaders through an annotative multileader style. When you create a leader, you create two separate objects: the leader and the text, block, or tolerance associated with the leader.
5 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the multileader style. 6 Click OK. 7 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the multileader style. 8 Click Close. To change an existing multileader style to annotative 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style.
3 Click Set Current. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader. 6 Choose a point for the leader head. 7 Choose the last point for the leader. 8 Specify the text width. 9 Enter text. 10 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To change an existing leader or multileader to annotative or non-annotative 1 Select a leader or multileader in a drawing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative.
Annotative on page 2289 block definitions create annotative block references. Annotative block references and attributes initially support the current annotation scale at the time they are inserted. You should insert annotative block references with a unit factor of 1. You cannot change the Annotative property of individual block references. To set an annotative block’s paper size, you should define the block in paper space or on the Model layout with the annotation scale on page 2289 set to 1:1.
You can set the orientation of annotative blocks to match the orientation of the paper. For more information about setting the orientation of annotative objects, see Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1356. You can use the ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable to specify whether or not the entire drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing. The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only if the drawing contains annotative objects.
2 In the Block Definition dialog box, Name box, click the arrow and select the name of the block you want to update to be annotative. 3 Under Behavior, select Annotative. 4 Click OK. The existing block references in the drawing are now annotative. To create an annotative attribute definition 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes. 2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, set the Attribute Modes and enter Tag information, Insertion Point and Text Settings.
Create Annotative Hatches Use an annotative hatch to symbolically represent material such as sand, concrete, steel, earth, etc. An annotative on page 2289 hatch is defined at a paper size. You can create individual annotative hatch objects as well as annotative hatch patterns. The hatch pattern definitions stored in the acad.pat file contain information that indicates whether the pattern is annotative or non-annotative.
2 At the command prompt, enter settings. 3 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Select Objects. 4 Specify the object or objects you want to hatch. 5 Under Options, select Annotative. 6 Click OK. To change an existing hatch object to annotative 1 In model space, at the command prompt, enter cannoscale. 2 Enter the scale set for the viewport in which the hatch is displayed. 3 In the drawing, select the hatch. 4 In the Properties palette, under Pattern, click Annotative.
Annotation visibility is turned on by default. When annotation visibility is turned on, all annotative objects are displayed. When annotation visibility is turned off , only annotative objects for the current scale are displayed. In general, you should turn off annotation visibility, except when inspecting a drawing created by another person or when adding scales to existing annotative objects. Annotation visibility is also controlled by the ANNOALLVISIBLE system variable.
Quick Reference System Variables ANNOALLVISIBLE Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected.
Use the ANNORESET command to reset the location of all scale representations for an annotative object to that of the current scale representation. To add the current annotation scale to an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In a drawing, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. To delete the current annotation scale from an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales.
To automatically update annotative objects to support the current annotation scale ■ On the drawing or application status bar, click the button displays as so it . To add an annotation scale to an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In the drawing area, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. 4 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, click Add. 5 In the Add Scales to Object dialog box, select one or more scales to add to the objects.
Quick Reference Commands ANNORESET Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected annotative objects. OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. System Variables SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected.
Annotative attributes in blocks match the paper orientation of the block. See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1469 ■ Create Annotative Text on page 1335 ■ Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 1346 ■ Create Annotative Hatches on page 1350 To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style. NOTE A annotative.
4 Click Apply. 5 Click Close. To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative block definition 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Block Definition dialog box, under Name, select a block. 3 Under Behavior, select Annotative. 4 Under Behavior, select Match Block Orientation to Layout. 5 Click Close. To match the layout’s orientation for an existing annotative text object 1 In the drawing, select an annotative text object. 2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 28 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills on page 1359 Specify Hatch and Fill Areas on page 1367 Control the Appearance of Hatches on page 1372 Modify Hatches and Fills on page 1389 Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects on page 1395 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Hatches and fills do not have to be bounded. In the following illustration, the concrete hatches are bounded, while the earth hatches are unbounded.
By default, bounded hatches are associative, which means that the hatch object is associated with the hatch boundary objects, and changes to the boundary objects are automatically applied to the hatch. To maintain associativity, the boundary objects must continue to completely enclose the hatch. The alignment and orientation of a hatch pattern is determined by the current location and orientation of the user coordinate system, in addition to controls in the user interface.
To drag hatch patterns into your drawing 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Design Center. NOTE This procedure describes how to use DesignCenter to drag hatch patterns into your drawing. You can also drag hatch patterns from a tool palette. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Search. 3 In the Search dialog box, do the following: ■ From the Look For drop-down list, select Hatch Pattern Files. ■ From the In drop-down list, select the drive where the program is installed.
NOTE If the hatch pattern scale is too large or small, an error message is displayed. You can adjust the scale for any hatch pattern by selecting it to display the Hatch Editor tab. If the ribbon is closed, use the Properties palette or HATCHEDIT. To hatch or fill areas (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, select one of the options from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern or fill.
5 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, make adjustments, if necessary. To access additional options, click the More Options button at the bottom-right of the dialog box. 6 (Optional) From the Draw Order drop-down list, choose one of the options. You can change the draw order of the hatch so that the hatch is displayed either behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other objects. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch.
GRADIENT Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
GFNAME Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill. GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative. HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR Controls the background color for hatch patterns. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills.
HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
Hatch associativity is turned on by default and is controlled by the HPASSOC system variable. You can also control hatch associativity using the following tools in the user interface: ■ Hatch and Gradient dialog box ■ Hatch Edit dialog box ■ Hatch panel on the ribbon ■ Properties palette Nonassociative hatches are not updated when their original boundary is changed. Hatch Enclosed Areas Within Boundaries Enclosed areas within hatch boundaries are called islands.
Using the same pick point, the results of the options are compared below. NOTE Text objects are treated as islands. If island detection is turned on, the result always leaves a rectangular space around the text. Include Objects in a Boundary Set When hatching a small area in a large, complex drawing, you can save time by selecting a smaller set of objects in the drawing to be used in determining the hatch boundary.
The red circles remain displayed after you exit HATCH. They are removed when you specify another internal point for the hatch, or when you use REDRAW, REGEN, or REGENALL. To hatch an area whose boundary is not quite closed, do one of the following: ■ Locate the gaps and modify the boundary objects so they form a closed boundary. ■ Set the HPGAPTOL system variable to a value large enough to bridge the gaps. HPGAPTOL applies only to gaps between geometric objects that would meet if extended.
To define a boundary set in a complex drawing (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click the More Options button at the bottom-right. 3 Under Boundary Set, click New. 4 Select the objects to be considered for the hatch and press Enter. Selecting the objects with a crossing window is often the best method. 5 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch.
HPGAPTOL Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. HPQUICKPREVIEW Controls whether a hatch preview is displayed when specifying a hatch area. HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview is automatically cancelled.
■ Gradient fill. Fill an enclosed area with a color gradient. A gradient fill can be displayed as a tint (a color mixed with white), a shade (a color mixed with black), or a smooth transition between two colors. Gradients that mimic colors displayed on a cylinder, a sphere, or other shapes are available. NOTE You cannot use plot styles to control the plotted color of gradient fills.
To create a hatch with a predefined hatch pattern (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, click Predefined from the Type drop-down list. 3 Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. 4 (Optional) Select a color override from the Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed. 5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points.
5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands GRADIENT Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects.
GFCLR2 Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill. GFCLRLUM Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill. GFCLRSTATE Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors. GFNAME Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill. GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills.
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview is automatically cancelled. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
See also: ■ Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation on page 1391 To specify the alignment of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern. 4 On the Origin panel, click Set Origin, and specify a point in the drawing. The hatch pattern will be aligned to this point. 5 On the Properties panel, specify a hatch angle.
8 Click OK to apply the hatch. Alternatively, you can control the origin and rotation of a hatch pattern by changing the origin and rotation of the user coordinate system (UCS) before you create the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns The scale of hatch patterns can be set individually, or it can be set automatically based on the scale of each layout viewport.
To set the scale of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern. 4 On the Properties panel, enter a hatch pattern scale. 5 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch. 6 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command.
MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPMAXAREAS Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during zoom operations.
Hatch objects have an additional capability that is not available with other types of objects. You can specify which layer, color, and transparency settings will be automatically applied to each new hatch object, regardless of the current property settings. This can save you time. For example, you can specify that all new hatch objects are automatically created on a specified layer regardless of the current layer setting.
6 Click OK to apply the hatch. All new hatch objects will use this transparency value instead of the current transparency value used by all other objects. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
To hide a hatch's boundary objects, assign the boundary objects to a different layer than the hatch object, and then turn off or freeze the layer of the boundary objects. This method maintains hatch associativity. See also: ■ Reshape a Hatch or Fill on page 1392 To create an unbounded hatch 1 At the Command prompt, enter -hatch. 2 Enter p to specify Properties. 3 Enter the name of the pattern. For example, enter earth to specify the EARTH pattern. 4 Specify the scale and angle for the hatch pattern.
HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. HPCOLOR Sets a default color for new hatches. HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPDOUBLE Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns. HPMAXAREAS Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during zoom operations.
HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Control the Draw Order of Hatches and Fills Specify the draw order for a hatch object to control whether it is displayed behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other objects. This behavior is controlled by the HPDRAWORDER system variable.
The following tools are available for modifying hatch properties: ■ Hatch panel controls. Display on the ribbon by selecting a hatch object. ■ Hatch Edit dialog box. Access the dialog box with HATCHEDIT. ■ Properties palette. ■ Hatch shortcut menu. Access the menu by right-clicking a hatch object. ■ Hatch dynamic menu. Access the menu by hovering over the control grip on a selected hatch. ■ Command line. Enter -HATCHEDIT.
System Variables HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation Shift, scale, or rotate hatch patterns to align them with existing objects. To shift a hatch pattern, relocate the origin point of the hatch object.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. Reshape a Hatch or Fill Reshape an associative hatch by modifying the boundary objects. Reshape a nonassociative hatch by modifying the hatch object.
You can also change the hatch object by editing the grips of the associated boundary objects. To easily select all of the objects in a complex boundary, use the Display Boundary Objects option. If the boundary object is a polyline or spline, multi-functional grips are displayed. For more information, see Use Object Grips on page 778. Modify the Extents of Non-associative Hatches and Fills When you select a non-associative hatch, multi-functional grips are displayed on the hatch.
Quick Reference Commands EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. TRIM Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects. System Variables GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. Re-create the Boundary of a Hatch or Fill Create a new boundary object for a non-associative or an unbounded hatch or fill. Use the Recreate Boundary option to generate a closed polyline or a region object around a selected hatch or fill.
To re-create the boundary object of a hatch or fill (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Modify Hatch command from a menu or toolbar, or enter hatchedit at the Command prompt. 2 Select the hatch object. 3 In the Hatch Edit dialog box, under Boundaries, click Recreate Boundary. 4 Specify the type of object to create as the new boundary. 5 Specify whether to associate the boundary with the hatch object. 6 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
A wipeout object covers existing objects with a blank area to make room for notes or to mask details. This area is defined by the wipeout frame, which you can turn on for editing, and turn off for plotting. Use the WIPEOUT command both for creating a wipeout object, and for controlling whether wipeout frames are displayed or hidden in the drawing. If a polyline is used to create a wipeout object, the polyline must be closed, contain line segments only, and have zero width.
To turn all wipeout frames on or off 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Markup panel ➤ Wipeout. 2 At the prompt, enter f (Frames). 3 Enter on or off, and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands WIPEOUT Creates a wipeout object, and controls whether wipeout frames are displayed in the drawing.
1398
Notes and Labels 29 You can create and modify several types of text, including text with leaders. You can control most text style settings by defining text styles. Overview of Notes and Labels You can create text in various ways. For short, simple entries, use single-line text. For longer entries with internal formatting, use multiline text (mtext).
You can enter an angle value or use your pointing device. 5 Enter the text. At the end of each line, press ENTER. Enter more text as needed. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to that point, and you can continue typing.
■ To select a word, double-click the word. ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not modified during creation.
SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders. Create Text You can create text using several methods, depending on your needs. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 1458 Overview of Creating Text The text you add to your drawings conveys a variety of information.
Regardless of the number of lines, each set of paragraphs created in a single editing session forms a single object, which you can move, rotate, erase, copy, mirror, or scale. There are more editing options for multiline text than there are for single-line text. For example, you can apply underlining, fonts, color, and text height changes to individual characters, words, or phrases within a paragraph. Annotative Text Use annotative on page 2289 text for notes and labels in your drawing.
NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or specify a point, a new text object is created. 6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command.
8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not modified during creation. ■ To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics, or to create underlined or overlined text for any font, click the corresponding button on the ribbon.
TEXTED Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style.
Align Single-Line Text As you create text, you can align it. That is, you can justify it with one of the alignment options shown in the following illustrations. Left alignment is the default. To left-align text, do not enter an option at the Justify prompt. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 1458 To create single-line text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text.
2 Specify the insertion point for the first character. If you press ENTER, the program locates the new text immediately below the last text object you created, if any. 3 Specify the height of the text. This prompt is displayed only if text height is set to 0 in the current text style. A rubber-band line is attached from the text insertion point to the cursor. Click to set the height of the text to the length of the rubber-band line. 4 Specify a text rotation angle.
3 Enter an alignment option. For example, enter br to align text at its bottom-right corner. 4 Continue creating text. Quick Reference Commands QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Create Multiline Text A multiline text (mtext) object includes one or more paragraphs of text that can be manipulated as a single object. Overview of Multiline Text You can create a multiline text (mtext) object by entering or importing text.
Text Style Most characteristics of the text are controlled by the text style, which sets the default font and other options, such as line spacing, justification, and color. You can use the current text style or select a new one. The STANDARD text style is the default. Within the multiline text object, you can override the current text style by applying formatting such as underlining, boldface, and different fonts to individual characters.
5 If you want to use a text style other than the default, on the ribbon, click the Annotate tab, Text panel. Select the desired text style from the drop-down list. 6 Enter text. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it.
To insert symbols or special characters in multiline text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 On either the ribbon contextual tab or expanded toolbar, click Symbol. 3 Click one of the options on the menu, or click Other to display the Character Map dialog box. To access the Character Map dialog box, you must have charmap.exe ® ® installed.
The value is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object. A factor of 1.5 (the default) extends the background by 0.5 times the text height. 5 Under Fill Color, do one of the following: ■ Select the Use Drawing Background Color option. ■ Select a color for the background, or click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box. 6 Click OK to return to the editor.
QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. MTEXTFIXED Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in a specified text editor. MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar.
Justify Multiline Text Justification of multiline text objects controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text insertion point. Justification controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text insertion point. Text is left-justified and right-justified with respect to the boundary rectangle that defines the text width. Text flows from the insertion point, which can be at the middle, the top, or the bottom of the resulting text object.
2 Select the multiline text object. 3 On the Properties palette, select one of the Justification options. 4 Click outside the Properties palette. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Format Characters Within Multiline Text You can override the text style and apply different formatting to individual words and characters within multiline text. The format changes affect only the text you select; the current text style is not changed.
2 Select the text you want to format: ■ To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over the characters. ■ To select a word, double-click the word. ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 3 On either the ribbon contextual tab or toolbar, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box.
Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style.
■ A space after the punctuation is created by pressing Tab. ■ The text following the space is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter. NOTE If you do not want list formatting applied to all text that fits the criteria, clear the Allow Bullets and Lists option. (Right-click in the In-Place Text Editor, click Bullets and Lists ➤ Allow Bullets and Lists.) When Allow Bullets and Lists is not checked, you cannot create new formatted lists in the multiline text object.
The following characters can be used as punctuation after the number or letter when you type a list but cannot be used as bullets: Character Description .
5 On the expanded toolbar, click Numbering, Bullets, or Uppercase Letters. ■ Numbering. Uses numbers with periods for the items in a list. ■ Bullets. Uses a bullet or other character for the items in a list. ■ Uppercase Letters. Uses uppercase letters with periods for the items in a list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double letters. To use lowercase letters, right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Lettered ➤ Lowercase.
5 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To create a lettered or numbered list in multiline text as you type 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object.
To create a bulleted list in multiline text as you type 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 In the Options panel, click the Options icon. 4 Click Bullets and Lists. Verify that Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists are selected (tick mark). 5 Start a line of text by entering \U+2022 (the Unicode string for a bullet) or by selecting a bullet character or another symbol.
To move a list item in multiline text down a level 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Place the cursor at the beginning of a list item and press TAB. The item moves down one level and begins a nested list. 3 Press ENTER to start the next item at the same level, or press SHIFT+TAB to move the item up a level.
■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To convert the lists in a multiline text object to plain text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists. Remove the check mark next to Allow Bullets and Lists. The plain text lists retain their bullets, numbers, or letters.
Indent Multiline Text and Use Tabs You can control how paragraphs are indented in a multiline text (mtext) object. The ruler in the In-Place Text Editor shows the settings for the current paragraph. Tabs and indents that you set before you start to enter text apply to the whole multiline text object. To apply different tabs and indents to individual paragraphs, click in a single paragraph or select multiple paragraphs and then change the settings.
4 Slide the bottom indent marker to where you want the other lines of the paragraphs to start. This step indents turnover lines in paragraphs that are more than one line long. 5 To change the indentation, select the paragraphs you want to change, click the ruler to set new tab stops, if needed, and move the indent markers. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor.
Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text Line spacing for multiline text is the distance between the baseline (bottom) of one line of text and the baseline of the next line of text. The line space factor applies to the entire multiline text object, not to selected lines. You can set the spacing increment to a multiple of single line spacing, or as an absolute distance. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters.
■ Line Space Distance. Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. Valid values must be between 0.0833 and 1.3333. NOTE After you exit the Properties palette, the value of the other line spacing option is updated to correspond with the line spacing value that you entered. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables TSPACEFAC Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text height.
You use special characters to indicate how selected text should be stacked. ■ Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line. ■ Pound sign (#) stacks text diagonally, separated by a diagonal line. ■ Carat (^) creates a tolerance stack, which is stacked vertically and not separated by a line. To stack characters manually within the In-Place Text Editor, select the text to be formatted, including the special stacking character, and right-click. From the shortcut menu, click Stack.
See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1469 ■ Use an Alternate Text Editor on page 1497 To create stacked text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab or In-Place Text Editor, set text style and other multiline text properties as needed.
To change stack properties 1 Double-click the multiline text object you want to edit. 2 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (Formatting tab drop-down) or In-Place Text Editor, select the stacked text. 3 Right-click in the editor. Click Properties. 4 In the Stack Properties dialog box, change settings as needed. 5 To set properties for automatic stacking, click Autostack. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar.
System Variables TSTACKALIGN Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text. TSTACKSIZE Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected text's current height. Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text You can create and edit multiple columns using the In-Place Text Editor column options and column grips. Multiple columns can be created and edited with the In-Place Text Editor and through grip editing.
height of the column is fixed. To delete the break, highlight it and delete or or use the Backspace key right after the break. Editing Columns in the Properties Palette You will be able to select Static or Dynamic columns, turn off columns and change column and gutter width through the Properties palette. Changing column width in the palette will exhibit results similar to changing width using grips. The palette is the only place that you can also change gutter setting.
The following illustration demonstrates how grips are used with Static Columns.
NOTE In general, grips only update the mtext object after the mouse button is released. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. System Variables MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object.
Import Text from External Files You can insert TXT or RTF text files created in word processors into your drawing by either importing the text or dragging a file icon from Windows Explorer. Importing TXT or RTF files from other sources gives you the most flexibility. For example, you can create a text file of standard notes that you include in drawings. The imported text becomes a multiline text object, which you can edit and reformat. Text imported from a TXT file inherits the current text style.
6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press Ctrl+Enter. To insert a text file using the drag-and-drop method 1 Open Windows Explorer, but make sure it does not fill the screen. 2 Display the folder that contains the TXT or RTF file you want. 3 Drag the TXT or RTF file icon onto the drawing. TXT files are inserted as multiline text objects using the current text style.
When associative dimensioning is turned on and object snaps are used to locate the leader arrowhead, the leader is associated with the object to which the arrowhead is attached. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead is relocated, and the landing stretches accordingly. NOTE The leader object should not be confused with the leader line that is automatically generated as part of a dimension line. To create a leader with straight lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader.
Quick Reference Commands LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. MLEADER Creates a multileader object. QLEADER Creates a leader and leader annotation. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders.
A multileader object, or mleader, comprises a leader and a note. It can be created arrowhead first, tail first, or content first. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that style Multileader objects can contain multiple leader lines, each of which can have one or more segments, so that one note can point to multiple objects in your drawing. You can modify the properties of leader segment in the Properties palette.
Multileader objects can be sorted evenly along a specified line. Using MLEADERALIGN, selected multileaders can be aligned and evenly spaced as specified. Associate Leaders with Objects When associative dimensioning is turned on (DIMASSOC system variable), the leader arrowhead can be associated with a location on an object using an object snap. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches, but the multiline text remains in place.
5 Enter s to specify straight leaders. 6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head. 7 Click an end point for the leader. 8 Enter your MTEXT content. 9 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To create a leader attached to block content at an angle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style.
2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options. 3 Enter l to specify leaders. 4 Enter t to specify the leader type. 5 Enter p to specify a spline leader. 6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head. 7 Click the end point for the leader. 8 Enter your MTEXT content. 9 In the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To edit leader text 1 Double-click the text you want to edit. If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab is displayed.
To remove leaders from an annotation 1 Select the multileader. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Hover over a leader endpoint grip, and choose Remove Leader from the grip menu. ■ On the Multileader toolbar, click Remove Leader, and then select the leaders you want to remove. Press ENTER. To align and space leaders 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Align. 2 Select the multileaders to be aligned. Press ENTER. 3 Specify a starting point in the drawing to begin the alignment.
To create a landing line with multiple segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New to create a new multileader style. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style. 4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the Leader Structure tab. 5 In the Constraints group box, select the Maximum Leader Points check box.
MLEADERCOLLECT Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns, and displays the result with a single leader. MLEADEREDIT Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads.
MLEADERSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Modify Leaders Using Grips You can make many leader edits directly using multi-functional grips. You can add and remove leaders, add and remove vertices, lengthen or move the landing line, or move the leader text. Hover over a grip to access the option you want. ■ ■ ■ From the Landing grip, you can choose: ■ Stretch to move the leader landing. ■ Lengthen Landing to extend the Landing line.
See also: ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips on page 1449 To modify leaders using grips 1 Select the multileader you want to modify. 2 Hover over a leader endpoint grip, a vertex grip, or the landing grip. 3 Click the option you want. 4 Click to specify a location for the action you’re performing. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MLEADER Creates a multileader object.
System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders.
NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in multileader objects. Once a multileader style has been defined, you can set it as the current multileader style to be used when the MLEADER command is invoked. To define a leader style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style.
7 On the Content tab, specify either text or block content for the multileader. If the multileader object will contain text content, then select or clear the following options: ■ Default Text. Sets default text for the multileader content. A field can be inserted here. ■ Text Style. Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text styles are displayed. ■ Text Angle. Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text. ■ Text Color.
Quick Reference Commands MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. System Variables CMLEADERSTYLE Sets the name of the current multileader style. Add Content to a Leader Leaders can contain multiline text or blocks to label parts of your drawing. Leaders Containing Multiline Text Leaders can contain multiline text as content. Text can be inserted by default when creating a leader style. Text style, color, height, and alignment can be applied and modified in leader annotations.
Bottom of top line Underline top line Middle of text Middle of bottom line Bottom of bottom line Underline bottom line Underline all text Leaders Containing Blocks Multileaders can contain blocks as content by applying a multileader style that references a block in your drawing.
NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in multileader objects. Blocks can be connected to a multileader by attaching the landing to a selected insertion point on the block. You can also connect a multileader to a center point on the selected block. You can create annotative multileaders with blocks as content. The block content will be scaled according to the specified scale representation. Any attributes within the block content will not change with the scale representation.
QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
Use Fields in Text A field is updatable text that is set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. Insert Fields A field is text that contains instructions to display data that you expect to change during the life cycle of the drawing. When a field is updated, the latest data is displayed. For example, the value of the FileName field is the name of the file.
Edit a Field A field is part of a text object and it can be edited from a text editor. The easiest way to edit a field is to double click the text object that contains the field and then, to display the Field dialog box, double click the field. These operations are available on the shortcut menus as well. If you no longer want to update a field, you can preserve the value that is currently displayed by converting the field to text.
2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click. Click Insert Field. 3 In the Field dialog box, select All or select a category. 4 In the Field Names list, select a field. The current value of the field is displayed in a shaded text box to the right of Field Category. 5 Select a format and any other option. 6 Click OK to insert the field. The field displays its current value when you move to the next cell.
3 Under Attribute, in the Tag box, enter a name for the field. 4 To the right of the Value box, click the Insert Field button. 5 In the Field dialog box, under Field Category, select SheetSet. 6 In the Field Names list, select SheetSetPlaceholder. 7 In Placeholder Type, select the type of field that you want. Temporary Value previews the placeholder field. 8 In Format, select a capitalization style for the placeholder field. When the field is updated, the same style is used for the value of the field.
4 Enter a conversion factor to apply to the current value. For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 0.03937. 5 Enter any text that you want to precede or follow the field value. For example, enter mm for millimeters. 6 Select a decimal separator. Select None or Comma to group thousands. 7 Select an option for suppressing zeros: ■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal field values. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. ■ Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal field values.
Quick Reference Commands FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Update Fields When a field is updated, it displays the latest value. You can update fields individually or update all fields in one or more selected text objects. You can also set fields to be updated automatically when the drawing is opened, saved, plotted, regenerated, or sent through ETRANSMIT. Settings on the User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box) control whether fields are updated automatically or on demand (FIELDEVAL system variable).
For compatibility with previous releases, contextual fields in blocks and xrefs are not updated when you insert them in a drawing; instead, the field displays the last cached value. Therefore, if you want to use a contextual field within a block, for example, a title block, you must insert the field as an attribute. For example, a title block can use the CurrentSheetNumber field as an attribute.
To update multiple fields manually 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Update Fields . 2 At the Select Objects prompt, select the objects that contain the fields you want to update and press ENTER. All of the fields in the selected objects are updated. To update fields automatically 1 At the Command prompt, enter fieldeval.
FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Use Hyperlinks in Fields The Hyperlink field assigns a hyperlink to any piece of text. The hyperlink works the same way as a hyperlink attached to an object. When the cursor pauses over the text, a hyperlink cursor is displayed, along with a tooltip that describes the hyperlink. Hold down the Ctrl key and click to follow the link. NOTE The Hyperlink field uses an absolute path to a file; the HYPERLINK command can create a hyperlink with a relative path.
7 (Optional) In Text to Display, select the default text that is displayed, and enter the link text that you want to appear in the mtext object. 8 Click OK to close each dialog box. 9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. The hyperlink is displayed in the mtext object with the link text that you entered. Use CTRL+click to jump to the hyperlinked location.
TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. System Variables CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated.
Create and Modify Text Styles Except for the default STANDARD text style, you must create any text style that you want to use. Text style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). If you don't enter a text style name, the text styles are automatically named Stylen, where n is a number that starts at 1. You can modify an existing text style in the Text Style dialog box by changing the settings.
Formatting Retained? Underlining Yes Annotative Text Styles Use annotative on page 2289 text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the text on the paper. For more information about creating and working with an annotative text, see Create Annotative Text on page 1335.
TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Assign Text Fonts You can assign a text font as part of the text style definition. Several factors depend on the type of text you are working with. Overview of Assigning Text Fonts Fonts define the shapes of the text characters that make up each character set. You can use TrueType fonts in addition to compiled SHX fonts.
Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. Use TrueType Fonts Several factors affect the display of TrueType fonts in a drawing. TrueType fonts always appear filled in your drawing; however, when you plot, the TEXTFILL system variable controls whether the fonts are filled.
5 To update text of the current style in the drawing, click Apply. 6 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.
Asian Big Font SHX Files Asian alphabets contain thousands of non-ASCII characters. To support such text, the program provides a special type of shape definition known as a Big Font file. You can set a style to use both regular and Big Font files. Asian Language Big Fonts Included in the Product Font File Name Description @extfont2.shx Japanese vertical font (a few characters are rotated to work correctly in vertical text) bigfont.shx Japanese font, subset of characters chineset.
Specifying fonts and Big Fonts at the Command prompt Enter this ... To specify this ... ,[big font name] Only a Big Font (normal font unchanged) [font name] Only a normal font (Big Font, if any, removed) ENTER (null response) No change NOTE Long file names that contain commas as font file names are not accepted. The comma is interpreted as a separator for an SHX font-Big Font pair.
Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Substitute Fonts A font used in a drawing but that is not currently available on your system is automatically substituted with another font. The program accommodates a font that is not currently on your system by substituting another font. Specify an Alternate Font If your drawing specifies a font that is not currently on your system, the font designated as your alternate font is automatically substituted. By default, the simplex.
Each line in the font mapping file contains the name of a font file (with no file extension or path) followed by a semicolon (;) and the name of the substitute font file. The substitute file name includes a file extension such as .ttf. A font mapping file is an ordinary ASCII text file with a .fmp extension. The default font mapping file is acad.fmp. You can change the font assignments in a font mapping file using any ASCII text editor.
3 Double-click Font Mapping File. The acad.fmp file is specified by default. 4 To change the font mapping file, double-click the arrow line to open the Select a File dialog box. Select a file and click Open. Click OK. 5 At the Command prompt, enter regen to convert existing text using the new font mappings. To specify a default alternate font 1 At the Command prompt, enter fontalt. 2 Enter the name of the font file you want to use as the alternative.
If you specify a fixed height as part of a text style, the Height prompt is bypassed when you create single-line text. When the height is set to 0 in the text style, you are prompted for the height each time you create single-line text. Set the value to 0 if you want to specify the height as you create text.
System Variables TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Set Text Obliquing Angle The obliquing angle determines the forward or backward slant of the text. The angle represents the offset from 90 degrees. Entering a value between -85 and 85 makes the text oblique. A positive obliquing angle slants text to the right. A negative obliquing angle slants text to the left.
5 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Set Horizontal or Vertical Text Orientation Text can be vertical or horizontal. Text can have a vertical orientation only if the associated font supports dual orientation. Lines of text are oriented to be vertical or horizontal. Text can have a vertical orientation only if the associated font supports dual orientation. You can create more than one line of vertical text.
■ TrueType fonts. You still select fonts starting with the @ sign, but now the text is automatically rotated 270 degrees. (In AutoCAD 2005 and earlier releases, you had to manually rotate this text.) Vertical cursor movement is now supported for vertical text. To set vertical orientation in a text style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a text style from the Style Name list. 3 Under Effects, select Vertical.
Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
The effect of a command depends on which grip you choose. To edit single-line text 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit. 2 Select a single-line text object. 3 In the in-place editor, enter the new text. 4 Press ENTER. 5 Select another text object to edit, or press ENTER to end the command. To modify properties of single-line text objects 1 Select a single-line text object. 2 Right-click the selected object. Click Properties.
TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables TEXTED Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Change Multiline Text You can change the location and content of multiline text objects with the Properties palette, the In-Place Text Editor, and grips.
Change Text Location You can use many of the common modifying commands and grips to move multiline text objects. A multiline text object has grips at the four corners of the text boundary and, in some cases, at the justification point. Commands such as DIMLINEAR or LEADER create multiline text automatically without requiring that a bounding box be specified; these objects have only a single grip at the justification point.
■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. MTEDIT Edits multiline text. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables CENTERMT Controls how grips stretch multiline text that is centered horizontally.
TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Find and Replace Text You can easily find and replace text with the FIND command To search for and replace text, use FIND. Replacement is based on text content only; character formatting and text properties are not changed.
Character Definition ` (Reverse quote) Reads the next character literally; for example, `~AB matches ~AB To search for drawing files that contain a specific word or phrase, use the Search tool in Microsoft® Windows® . You can use the Search tool to find all textual data except text in tables and fields, and xrefs within drawing files. To find specified text in a drawing 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text. 2 In Find What, enter the text you want to find.
5 In Replace With, enter the text with which you want to replace the found text. 6 Click Find. 7 Use one of the following options to view the results of your search: ■ To list all results in a table, click the List Results check box. ■ To zoom to and highlight each result individually, leave the List Results check box unchecked. 8 Use one of the following methods to replace text: ■ To replace only the found instance of the text string, click Replace.
Convert Text Height Between Model Space and Paper Space The SPACETRANS command calculates equivalent lengths between model space units and paper space units. By using SPACETRANS transparently, you can provide commands with distance or length values relative to another space. For example, you may want to create a text object in model space that matches the height of other text in a layout. From model space, you could enter Command: text Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: 1,3 Specify height <0.
Quick Reference Commands JUSTIFYTEXT Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SCALETEXT Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations. SPACETRANS Calculates equivalent model space and paper space lengths in a layout. Check Spelling You can check the spelling of all text as it is entered in your drawing.
Check Spelling As You Type By default, you can check spelling as you enter text in the In-Place Text Editor. Any word you enter is checked for spelling errors when it is completed. A word is considered completed when one of the following actions are taken: ■ Pressing Spacebar or Enter ■ Moving the cursor to another position within the In-Place Text Editor. Misspelled words are underlined with a red dotted line Any word not found in the current dictionary is underlined as misspelled.
Create and Edit Custom Dictionaries A custom dictionary is a list of spelling exceptions that you have identified. The files that contain them have a .cus file extension. You can use any ASCII text editor to add or delete words, or combine several dictionaries. To check spelling 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 Click an option of where you want to check. Click Start. If no misspelled words are found, a message is displayed.
■ To leave a word unchanged, click Ignore or Ignore All. ■ To leave a word unchanged and add it to the dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. 6 Repeat step 5 for each misspelled word. Click Close to exit. To switch dictionaries while checking spelling 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Dictionaries. 3 Do one of the following: ■ To change the main dictionary, select a dictionary from the Current Main Dictionary list.
Quick Reference Commands SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. System Variables DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. Use an Alternate Text Editor The default text editor is either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (if the ribbon is active) or the In-Place Text Editor (if the ribbon is not active), but you can elect to use any alternate editor that saves files in ASCII format.
Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor If you use an alternate text editor, you apply formatting by entering format codes. You can underline text, add a line over text, and create stacked text. You can also change color, font, and text height.
Format codes for paragraphs Format code Purpose Enter this … \{...\} Inserts an opening and closing brace Autodesk \{AutoCAD\} \Cvalue; Changes to the specified color Autodesk \C2;AutoCAD \File name; Changes to the specified font file Autodesk \Ftimes; AutoCAD \Hvalue; Changes to the text height specified in drawing units Autodesk \H2;AutoCAD \Hvaluex; Changes the text height to a multiple of the current text height Autodesk \H3x;AutoCAD \S...^...
Format codes for paragraphs Format code Purpose Enter this … \A Sets the alignment value; valid values: 0, 1, 2 (bottom, center, top) \A1;1\S1/2 \P Ends paragraph Autodesk\PAutoCAD To produce this … Braces can be nested up to eight levels deep. You can also use control codes to add special characters, such as tolerance or dimensioning symbols. See MTEXT. Example: Formatting Text in an Alternate Text Editor This example describes how the text in the following illustration was created.
To specify an alternate text editor 1 At the Command prompt, enter mtexted. 2 At the prompt do one of the following: ■ Enter the path and name of the executable file for the ASCII text editor that you want to use to create or edit multiline text. ■ Enter internal to restore the text editor. To create multiline text in an alternate text editor 1 To specify a text editor, at the Command prompt, enter mtexted. Then enter the path of the editor you want to use.
1502
Tables 30 A table is a rectangular array of cells that contain annotation, primarily text but also blocks. Tables appear in many different forms on many of the sheets that make up drawing sets. In the AEC industry, tables are often referred to as “schedules” and contain information about the materials needed for the construction of the building being designed. In the manufacturing industry, they are often referred to as “BOM” (bills of materials).
When you change the height or width of the table, only the row on page 2317 or column on page 2294 adjacent to the grip you have selected will change. The table will maintain its height or width. To change the size of the table proportionally to the size of the row or column you are editing, press Ctrl while using a column grip. Break Tables into Multiple Parts A table with a large amount of data can be broken into primary and secondary table fragments.
To select more than one cell, click and drag over several cells. You can also hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all the cells between them. When you click inside a table cell when the ribbon is active, the Table ribbon contextual tab is displayed. If the ribbon is not active, the Table toolbar is displayed.
To set a new background color, select a table, right-click, and click Table Indicator Color on the shortcut menu. The text color, size, and style and the line color are controlled by the settings for column heads in the current table style. See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables on page 1514 To create a tool from a table in the current drawing 1 In the current drawing, select the table.
SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated.
You can bring data from Microsoft Excel into a table in the following three ways: ■ As formulas with supported data formats attached. ■ As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (supported data formats not attached). ■ As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (with data formats attached). A table that contains data links displays indicators around linked cells. If you hover your mouse cursor over the data link, information about the data link is displayed.
By default, a data link is locked from editing to prevent undesired changes to the linked spreadsheet. You can lock cells from data changes, format changes, or both. To unlock a data link, click Locking on either the Table ribbon contextual tab or the Table toolbar. See also: ■ Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets on page 1969 To link to a table in an external spreadsheet 1 In your table, select the table cells to link. 2 On either the Table ribbon contextual tab or Table toolbar, click Link Cell.
■ Select Link to Range. Enter a valid range from the Excel spreadsheet (for example, A1:D17). Click OK. 7 Select the new data link in the Data Link Manager tree view. Click OK. To remove a link to an external spreadsheet 1 Click inside a cell within the data linked table to select the cell. 2 Right-click and click Data Links ➤ Detach Data Link. To set up a named range in Microsoft Excel 1 In Microsoft Excel, open the workbook or spreadsheet that you want to access.
Work with Table Styles The appearance of the table is controlled by its table style. You can use the default table style, STANDARD, or create your own table styles. When you create a new table style, you can specify a starting table. A starting table is a table in your drawing that is used as an example for formatting the new table style. Once a table is selected, you can specify the structure and contents to copy from that table to the table style.
To define or modify a cell style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Table Style. 2 Select the table style that contains the cell style you want to modify, or click New to create a new table style. 3 In the Table Style dialog box, in the Cell Styles drop-down list, select a cell style to modify, or create a new cell style by clicking the button to the right of the drop-down list. 4 Click OK. To create a table style from an existing table 1 Click a gridline to select the table.
Quick Reference FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
Add Text and Blocks to Tables Table cell data can include text and multiple blocks. When a table is created, the first cell is highlighted, and you can begin entering text. The row height of the cell increases to accommodate the number of lines of text. To move to the next cell, press Tab, or use the arrow keys to move left, right, up, and down. You can quickly edit cell text by double-clicking in a selected cell or start entering text to replace the current content of a cell.
To define or modify data formats 1 In a table, click the table cells where you want to redefine data and formatting. 2 On the Table toolbar, click Data Format. 3 Choose a data type, format, and other options for the selected table cells. 4 Enter data in the selected table cells. The data type and format you chose determines how the data is displayed. 5 Click OK. To change the properties of cells in a table 1 Click inside the table cell you want to change.
Hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all the cells between them. 2 On the Table toolbar, click Cell Borders. 3 In the Cell Border Properties dialog box, select a lineweight, linetype and color. To specify a double line border, select Double Line. Use BYBLOCK to set the border properties to match the settings in the table style that has been applied to the table.
3 In the Field dialog box, select a category in the Field Category list to display the field names in that category. 4 Select a field. 5 Select the format or other options available for that field. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Use Formulas in Table Cells Table cells can contain formulas that do calculations using the values in other table cells.
Copy a Formula When you copy a formula to another cell in the table, the range changes to reflect the new location. For example, if the formula in A10 sums A1 through A9, when you copy it to B10, the range of cells changes so that it sums B1 through B9. If you don't want a cell address to change when you copy and paste the formula, add a dollar sign ($) to the column or row part of the address. For example, if you enter $A10, the column stays the same and the row changes.
5 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside the editor. To manually enter a formula in a table cell 1 Double-click inside a table cell. The In-place Text Editor opens. 2 Enter a formula (a function or an arithmetic expression), as in the following examples: ■ =sum(a1:a25,b1). Sums the values in the first 25 rows of column A and the first row in column B. ■ =average(a100:d100). Calculates the average of the values in the first 4 columns in row 100. ■ =count(a1:m500).
To insert a Formula field in a table cell 1 Click inside the table cell. 2 On the Table toolbar, click Insert Field. 3 In the Field dialog box, Field Category list, select Objects. 4 In Field Names, select Formula. 5 To enter a formula, do one of the following: ■ Click Average, Sum, or Count. The Field dialog box closes temporarily. To specify a range, click inside the first and the last cell. The result is appended to the formula. ■ Click Cell. The Field dialog box closes temporarily.
Quick Reference FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style.
Dimensions and Tolerances 31 You can add measurements to your drawing with several dimensioning commands. Use dimension styles to format dimensions quickly and maintain industry or project dimensioning standards. Understand Basic Concepts of Dimensioning You can create several types of dimensions, and you can control their appearance by setting up dimension styles or by editing individual dimensions. Overview of Dimensioning Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing.
NOTE To simplify drawing organization and dimension scaling, it is recommended that you create dimensions on layouts rather than in model space. To create a dimension 1 Create a layer designated for dimensions and make it the current layer. 2 Near the bottom-left corner of the application window, click a layout tab. 3 Click Dimension menu. Click a dimension option. 4 Follow the Command prompts. Quick Reference Commands DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension. DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension.
DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. DIMBREAK Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension. DIMJOGGED Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs. DIMBREAK Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate dimensions. DIMRADIUS Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc. DIMREASSOCIATE Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.
System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. Parts of a Dimension Here is a list of the parts of a dimension along with their descriptions. Dimensions have several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines, arrowheads, and extension lines. Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value. The text can also include prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Associative Dimensions Dimensions can be associative, nonassociative, or exploded. Associative dimensions adjust to changes in the geometric objects that they measure. Dimension associativity defines the relationship between geometric objects and the dimensions that give their distance and angles. There are three types of associativity between geometric objects and dimensions. ■ Associative dimensions.
A dimension is considered associative even if only one end of the dimension is associated with a geometric object. The DIMREASSOCIATE command displays the associative and non-associative elements of a dimension. You can also use the Quick Select dialog box to filter the selection of associative or non-associative dimensions.
■ Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats on page 1960 To change the dimension associativity default 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Associative Dimensioning, select or clear Make New Dimensions Associative. 3 Do either or both of the following: ■ Click Apply to record the current Options settings in the system registry. ■ Click OK to record the current Options settings in the system registry and close the Options dialog box.
System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. Use Dimension Styles You can control the appearance of dimensions by changing settings. For convenience and to help maintain dimensioning standards, you can store these settings in dimension styles. Overview of Dimension Styles A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that controls the appearance of dimensions, such as arrowhead style, text location, and lateral tolerances.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style from which you want to create a substyle. Click New. 3 In the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, select the type of dimension that will apply to the substyle from the Use For list. Click Continue. 4 In the New Dimension Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the dimension substyle. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles.
For example, if the drawing file baseplat.dwg has a dimension style called FRACTIONAL-1, and you attach baseplat.dwg as an xref to a new drawing, then the xref dimension style is displayed in the Styles list of the Dimension Style Manager as Xref:”baseplat.dwg”, and FRACTIONAL-1 appears under the drawing name. Externally referenced dimension styles can be examined, but they cannot be modified or made current.
To compare dimension styles 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style to compare from the Styles list. 3 Click Compare. The dimension style is compared to the current dimension style. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Control Dimension Geometry You can control the appearance of dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks.
■ Control the distance by which the dimension line extends beyond the extension lines for architectural tick (oblique stroke) arrowheads To modify the display of dimension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, change the settings under Dimension Lines as needed. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
System Variables DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLTYPE Sets the linetype of the dimension line.
You can ■ Specify color and lineweight for visual effect and plotting ■ Suppress one or both extension lines if they are unnecessary, or if there is not enough space ■ Specify how far beyond from the dimension line the extension line extends (overshoot) ■ Control the extension origin offset, the distance between the extension line origin, and the start of the extension line ■ Specify a fixed length for extension lines, as measured from the dimension line toward the extension line origin ■ Specify
Fixed-Length Extension Lines You can specify a dimension style that sets the total length for extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin point. The extension line offset distance from the origin will never be less than the value specified by the DIMEXO system variable. See also: ■ Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines on page 1578 To modify the display of extension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, under Extension Lines, change the settings as needed. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMCLRE Assigns colors to extension lines, center marks, and centerlines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads.
DIMLWE Assigns lineweight to extension lines. DIMSE1 Suppresses display of the first extension line. DIMSE2 Suppresses display of the second extension line. Control Dimension Arrowheads You can control the arrowhead symbols in dimensions and leaders including their type, size, and visibility. You can choose from many standard types of arrowheads, or you can create your own arrowheads.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Arrowheads, select the arrowhead type for the first end of the dimension line. The second arrowhead is automatically set to the same type. 4 To set the second end of the dimension line to a different arrowhead type, select an arrowhead type from the Second list. 5 In the Size box, enter a size for the arrowhead. 6 Click OK. 7 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
Customize Arrowheads You can create your own custom arrowheads. Arrowheads are stored as block definitions. To use your own arrowhead, provide the name of an existing block definition. For information about creating blocks, see Create Blocks Within a Drawing on page 929. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders. Arrowhead sizing relies on the overall dimension scale factor. When you create a dimension, the block is inserted where the arrowheads would normally go.
5 To choose a different custom arrowhead for the second arrowhead, repeat steps 3 and 4, choosing User Arrow from the Second arrowhead list (optional). 6 Click OK. 7 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. WBLOCK Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file. System Variables DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads.
DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMSAH Controls the display of dimension line arrowhead blocks. DIMTSZ Specifies the size of oblique strokes drawn instead of arrowheads for linear, radius, and diameter dimensioning. Control Dimension Text You can control the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, and leader lines relative to the dimension and extension lines.
If there is no room for text between the extension lines, you can have a leader line created automatically. This is useful in cases where text outside the extension lines would interfere with other geometry, for example, in continued dimensions. Whether text is drawn to the right or the left of the leader is controlled by the horizontal justification setting in the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab. Also, you can fit text and arrowheads by changing their size.
To place text within extension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Fit Options, select an option. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. If there is enough room, text is fit between extension lines. To force an internal line and choose a fit option 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMATFIT Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. DIMJUST Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text. DIMLWD Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. Control the Location of Dimension Text You can locate dimension text manually and specify its alignment and orientation. The program comes with several justification settings that facilitate compliance with international standards, or you can choose your own location for the text. Many of the settings are interdependent. Example images in the Dimension Style Manager are updated dynamically to illustrate how text appears as you change the settings.
The default alignment is horizontal dimension text, even for vertical dimensions. Position Dimension Text Horizontally The position of the text along the dimension line in relation to the extension lines is referred to as text placement. To place text yourself when you create a dimension, use the Place Text Manually option on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab.
dimension. This option provides flexibility and is especially useful when space is limited. However, the horizontal alignment options provide better accuracy and consistency between dimensions. Position Dimension Text Vertically The position of the text relative to the dimension line is referred to as vertical text placement. Text can be placed above or below or centered within the dimension line. In the ANSI standards, centered text usually splits the dimension line.
To place text at the second extension line 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text Placement, select Over Ext Line 2 from the Horizontal list box. The example area reflects your selection. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To place dimension text manually 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. System Variables DIMJUST Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text. DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
Control the Appearance of Dimension Text You can include prefixes, suffixes, and user-supplied text in dimensions. You can also control the text style and formatting used in dimension text. The program supports a mixture of user-supplied text, prefixes and suffixes supplied by the dimension style, and generated measurements. For example, you could add a diameter symbol as a prefix to a measurement or add the abbreviation for a unit, such as mm, as a suffix.
Example: User Text in Dimensions In this example, the primary dimension measurement is 5.08, and the alternate dimension measurement is 2.00. The primary units have the suffix H7/h6, and the alternate units have the suffix inches. At the text prompt, while creating the dimension, you enter the following format string: <> H7/h6\XSee Note 26\P[ ] The angle brackets represent the primary units, and the square brackets represent the alternate units. The \X separates text above the dimension line from text below
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMCLRT Assigns colors to dimension text. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMTFAC Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT. DIMTFILL Controls the background of dimension text. DIMTFILLCLR Sets the color for the text background in dimensions.
Control the Display of Dimension Units The numeric values of dimensions can be displayed as a single measurement or in two measurement systems. In either case, you can control details of how the numeric values are presented. The settings for primary units control the display of the dimension values, including the unit format, the numeric precision, and the decimal separator style. For example, you can enter the diameter symbol as a prefix, as shown in the illustration.
To add and format primary units 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear or Angular Dimensions, select a unit format and precision value for the primary units. 4 Under Linear Dimensions, enter any prefix and suffix for the displayed dimension. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
■ Enter any prefix and suffix for the displayed dimension, including a space character if you want a gap between the dimension and the prefix or suffix. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMALT Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions. DIMALTD Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units. DIMALTF Controls the multiplier for alternate units.
DIMAUNIT Sets the units format for angular dimensions. DIMDEC Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a dimension. DIMDSEP Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use when creating dimensions whose unit format is decimal. DIMLFAC Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. DIMPOST Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement.
To round off dimension values 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear Dimensions, enter the round-off value. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMRND Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value.
number of inches is indicated as zero, no matter which option you select. Thus, the dimension 4'-3/4" becomes 4'-0 3/4".
To display dimension value in sub units 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab or Alternate Units tab, under Zero Suppression, select Leading. ■ Sub-units factor: Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to display the dimension distance in a sub unit, for distances less than one unit.
DIMZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. Display Lateral Tolerances Lateral tolerances are values indicating the amount a measured distance can vary. You can control whether lateral tolerances are displayed and you can choose from several styles of lateral tolerances. A lateral tolerance specifies the amount by which a dimension can vary. By specifying tolerances in manufacturing, you can control the degree of accuracy needed for a feature.
Format Lateral Tolerances You can control the vertical placement of tolerance values relative to the main dimension text. Tolerances can align with the top, middle, or bottom of the dimension text. Along with vertical placement of tolerance values, you can also control the horizontal alignment of the upper and lower tolerance values. The upper and lower tolerance values can be aligned using either the operational symbols or decimal separators.
See also: ■ Add Geometric Tolerances on page 1621 To specify methods for lateral tolerances 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Tolerances tab, under Tolerance Format, select a method from the Method list, and then do one of the following: ■ If you select Limits, enter upper and lower tolerance deviation in the Upper Value and Lower Value boxes.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMALTTD Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. DIMALTTZ Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLIM Generates dimension limits as the default text.
DIMTZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values. Control the Display of Fractions You can control the format of the fraction displayed in dimensions. You can set the fraction format in dimensions using the DIMFRAC system variable when the DIMLUNIT system variable is set to 4 (architecture) or 5 (fractional). The following illustration shows the different fraction formats available. These settings are available on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMFRAC Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4 (Architectural) or 5 (Fractional). DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. Set the Scale for Dimensions You can specify the size of dimensions in your drawing. How you set dimension size depends on the method you use to lay out and plot drawings.
■ Dimension in model space for plotting in paper space. This was the preferred method for complex, multiple-view drawings prior to AutoCAD 2002. Use this method when the dimensions in a drawing need to be referenced by other drawings (xrefs) or when creating isometric dimensions in 3D isometric views. To prevent the dimensions in one layout viewport from being displayed in other layout viewports, create a dimensioning layer for each layout viewport that is frozen in all other layout viewports.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To set the dimension scale for model space dimensions in layouts 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, select Scale Dimension to Layout (Paper space). 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
DIMLFAC Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Create Dimensions You can create all of the standard types of dimensions. Create Linear Dimensions You can create linear dimensions with horizontal, vertical, and aligned dimension lines. These linear dimensions can also be stacked, or they can be created end to end.
As you create linear dimensions, you can modify the content of the text, the angle of the text, or the angle of the dimension line. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines.
DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. System Variables DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions You can create dimensions using only the horizontal or vertical components of the locations or objects that you specify.
3 Before specifying the dimension line location, you can override the dimension direction and edit the text, the text angle, or the dimension line angle: ■ To rotate the extension lines, enter r (Rotated). Then enter the dimension line angle. ■ To edit the text, enter m (multiline text). In the In-place Text Editor, revise the text. Click OK. Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value calculated by the program.
To create an aligned dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Aligned. 2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension, or specify the first and second extension line origins. 3 Before specifying the dimension line location, you can edit the text or change the text angle. Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value calculated by the program. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value.
System Variables DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions Baseline dimensions are multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline. Continued dimensions are multiple dimensions placed end to end. You must create a linear, aligned, or angular dimension before you create baseline or continued dimensions. You create baseline dimensions incrementally from the most recently created dimension in the current session.
The program automatically places the second dimension line at the distance specified by the Baseline Spacing option in the Dimension Style Manager, Lines tab. 3 Use an object snap to specify the next extension line origin. 4 Continue to select extension line origins as required. 5 Press Enter twice to end the command. To create a continued linear dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Continue.
Create Rotated Dimensions In rotated dimensions, the dimension line is placed at an angle to the extension line origins. The illustration shows an example of a rotated dimension. In the example, the angle specified for dimension rotation is equal to the angle of the slot. To create a rotated dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Linear. 2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension or specify the first and second extension line origins. 3 To rotate the dimension line, enter r (Rotated).
Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines You can create dimensions with extension lines that are not perpendicular to their dimension lines. Extension lines are created perpendicular to the dimension line. However, if the extension lines conflict with other objects in a drawing, you can change their angle after the dimension has been drawn. New dimensions are not affected when you make an existing dimension oblique. To make extension lines oblique 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Oblique..
Create Radial Dimensions Radial dimensions measure the radii and diameters of arcs and circles with optional centerlines or a center mark. There are two types of radial dimensions: ■ DIMRADIUS measures the radius of an arc or circle, and displays the dimension text with the letter R in front of it. ■ DIMDIAMETER measures the diameter of an arc or circle, and displays the dimension text with the diameter symbol in front of it.
The DIMSE1 system variable controls whether or not a radial or diametric dimension will be drawn with an extension line when it is positioned off the end of an arc. When the display of the arc extension line is not suppressed, a gap between the arc and arc extension line is made. The size of the gap drawn is controlled with the DIMEXO system variable.
The size of the centerline is the length of the centerline segment that extends outside the circle or arc. It is also the size of the gap between the center mark and the start of the centerline. The size of the center mark is the distance from the center of the circle or arc to the end of the center mark.
Once a jogged radius dimension is created, you can modify the jog and the center location override by ■ Using grips to move the features ■ Changing the locations of the features with the Properties palette ■ Using STRETCH NOTE Jogged radius dimensions can be viewed but not edited in versions previous to AutoCAD 2006. Also, if you make dramatic changes to the associated geometry, you may get unpredictable results for the jogged radius dimension.
removes the dimension value. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To edit the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle). 4 Specify the leader line location. To create a jogged radius dimension 1 Click Dimension menu ➤ Jogged. 2 Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment. 3 Specify a point for the dimension origin (the center location override). 4 Specify a point for the dimension line angle and the dimension text location.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Center Marks, click Line. 4 In the Size box, enter the length of the centerline overshoot. Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Center Mark. 7 Select an arc or a circle. To change the display arc extension line for radial or diametric dimensions 1 Select the radial or diametric dimension for which you want to suppress the arc extension line.
DIMSTYLE Stores the name of the current dimension style. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. System Variables DIMATFIT Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. DIMCEN Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands. DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points.
DIMTOFL Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside. DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines. DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. Create Angular Dimensions Angular dimensions measure the angle between two lines or three points. To measure the angle between two radii of a circle, you select the circle and specify the angle endpoints.
The location that you specify for the dimension line arc determines the quadrant of the dimensioned angle. Dimension to a Quadrant Angular dimensions can measure a specific quadrant that is formed when dimensioning the angle between of the endpoints of a line or arc, center point of a circle, or two vertices. As an angular dimension is being created, there are four possible angles that can be measured. By specifying a quadrant it allows you to ensure that the correct angle is dimensioned.
3 Enter options as needed: ■ To edit the dimension text content, enter t (Text) or m (multiline text). Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the calculated dimension value. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To edit the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle). ■ To confine the dimension to a quadrant, enter q (Quadrant) and specify the quadrant to measure. 4 Specify the dimension line arc location.
Create Ordinate Dimensions Ordinate dimensions measure the perpendicular distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum. Ordinate dimensions consist of an X or Y value with a leader line. X-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance of a feature from the datum along the X axis. Y-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance along the Y axis.
Locate the Leader After you specify the feature location, you are prompted for the leader endpoint. By default, the leader endpoint that you specify automatically determines whether an X- or a Y-datum ordinate dimension is created. For example, you can create an X-datum ordinate dimension by specifying a location for the leader endpoint that is closer to vertical than horizontal. After creating an ordinate dimension, you can easily relocate the dimension leader and text using grip editing.
Quick Reference Commands DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate dimensions. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. Create Arc Length Dimensions Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc segment. Typical uses of arc length dimensions include measuring the travel distance around a cam or indicating the length of a cable.
NOTE Orthogonal extension lines are displayed only when the included angle of the arc is less than 90 degrees. To create an arc length dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Arc Length. 2 Select an arc or polyline arc segment. 3 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects.
Overview of Modifying Dimensions After you place a dimension, there are times when you need to modify the information that the dimension represents. You can add a jog line to a linear dimension to indicate that the dimension value does not represent the actual dimensioned value or add an inspection dimension to represent how often a dimension value of a manufactured part should be checked. At times you might want to modify a dimension to simply improve readability.
In other circumstances, a dimension may become partially associated. For example, if a linear dimension is associated with the endpoints of two geometric objects and one of the objects is erased, the remaining association is preserved. The disassociated end of the linear dimension may then be associated with another geometric object using DIMREASSOCIATE. NOTE The Command prompt displays a warning message if a dimension is disassociated.
If no angle vertex is shown, definition points are placed at the ends of the lines that form the angle. In the two-line angular example, a definition point is placed at the center point of the dimensioned arc. NOTE Definition points are drawn on a special layer named DEFPOINTS, which is not plotted. Use Dimension Line Grips Hover over the grip on the endpoint of a dimension line to quickly access the following functionality: ■ Stretch.
■ Continue dimension. Invokes the DIMCONTINUE command. ■ Baseline dimension. Invokes the DIMBASELINE command. ■ Flip arrow. Flips the direction of the dimension arrowhead. Modify Exploded Dimensions You can edit exploded dimensions as you would any other objects because an exploded dimension is a collection of separate objects: lines, 2D solids, and text. Occasionally you may need to explode a dimension to make changes such as creating a break in a dimension line or extension line.
System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. Change Dimension Associativity You may need to change the associativity of dimensions in several circumstances including adding associativity to dimensions created in previous releases. You may need to change the associativity of dimensions in several circumstances such as the following: ■ Redefine the associativity of dimensions in drawings that have been edited significantly.
specify the new association for the extension-line origin point or press Enter to skip to the next extension-line origin point. NOTE The marker disappears if you pan or zoom. Change Non-associative Dimensions to Associative You can change all the non-associative dimensions in a drawing to associative. Select all non-associative dimensions, and then use DIMREASSOCIATE to step through the dimensions, associating each one with locations on geometric objects.
2 Select one or more dimensions to disassociate and press Enter when you finish. Quick Reference Commands DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions. DIMREASSOCIATE Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects. DIMREGEN Updates the locations of all associative dimensions. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded.
When you rotate or replace dimension text, you specify the change first, for example, rotating the text to be at an angle. When you move dimension text, you select a single dimension to move. You can move dimension text to the left, right, or center along the dimension line or to any position inside or outside the extension lines. A quick and simple way to do this is by using grips.
■ If the text is positioned away from the dimension line, with or without a leader, Stretch moves the text without moving the dimension line. ■ Move with Dim Line. Positions text on the dimension line, and moves the dimension line farther away or closer to the object being dimensioned (no additional prompts). ■ Move Text Only. Positions the dimension text without moving the dimension line. ■ Move with Leader. Positions the dimension text with a leader line to the dimension line. ■ Above Dim Line.
To replace existing dimension text with new text 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit. 2 Select the dimension text you want to edit. 3 In the In-Place Text Editor, enter the new dimension text. Click OK. To move text to the left side of the dimension line 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Left Justify. 2 Select the dimension. The dimension text is left-justified along the dimension line inside the extension lines.
4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMCLRT Assigns colors to dimension text.
DIMTMOVE Sets dimension text movement rules. DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines. DIMTVP Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. Dimension Jog Jog lines are used to represent a dimension value that does not display the actual measurement in a linear dimension.
To add a jog to a linear dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line. 2 Select a linear dimension. 3 Specify a point on the dimension line to place the jog. To add a jog to a linear dimension based on the midpoint of the selected dimension line 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line. 2 Select a linear dimension. 3 Press Enter to position the jog at the midpoint of the selected dimension line.
To modify the height of a jog using the Properties palette 1 With no command active, select the linear dimension with the jog whose height you want to change. 2 Right-click over the drawing window. Click Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Lines & Arrows. 4 Select Jog Height Factor, and enter a new height for the jog. 5 Click outside the Properties palette. Press Esc. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension.
Convert Dimensions into Inspection Dimensions Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range. When working with parts that need to met a specific tolerance or dimension value before installing them into the final assembled product, you can use an inspection dimension to specify how often the part should be tested.
To create an inspection dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect. 2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions. The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select dimensions. 3 Select the dimension you want to make an inspection dimension. Press Enter to return to the dialog box. 4 Under the Shape section, specify the frame type. 5 Under the Label/Inspection rate section, specify the desired options.
2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions. The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select dimensions. 3 Select the dimension you want to remove the inspection dimension from. Press Enter to return to the dialog box. 4 Click Remove Inspection. 5 Click OK. To modify an inspection dimension using the Properties palette 1 With no command active, select the inspection dimension you want to modify. 2 Right-click over the drawing window. Click Properties.
You can add dimension breaks to the following dimension and leader objects: ■ Linear dimensions, including aligned and rotated ■ Angular dimensions, including 2- and 3-point ■ Radial dimensions, including radius, diameter, and jogged ■ Arc length dimensions ■ Ordinate dimensions ■ Multileaders that use straight-line leaders The following dimension and leader objects do not support dimension breaks: ■ Multileaders that use spline leaders ■ Leaders created with the LEADER command The following
Dimension Break Exceptions Condition Description mask option. If the intersecting point of an object and the dimension are at the arrowhead or dimension text, the break will not be displayed until the intersecting object, or dimension or multileader are moved. No break on transspatial dimensions Automatic breaks are not supported for objects and dimensions or multileaders that are in different spaces.
Automatic Dimension Breaks To create dimension breaks automatically, you select a dimension or multileader, and then use the Auto option of the DIMBREAK command. Automatic dimension breaks are updated any time the dimension or multileader, or intersecting objects are modified. Dimension Break Gap Size You control the size of dimension breaks on the New/Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab.
To create a single dimension break based on an intersecting object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Select an object that intersects the dimension or multileader. Press Enter. To create a manual dimension break 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Enter m (Manual) and press Enter. 4 Specify the first point on the dimension, extension, or leader line for the dimension break.
To remove all dimension breaks from multiple dimensions or multileaders 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Enter m (Multiple), and press Enter. 3 Select the dimensions or multileaders from which to remove the dimension breaks, and press Enter. 4 Enter r (Remove), and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands DIMBREAK Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles.
be linear or angular, of the same type (rotated or aligned), parallel or concentric to one another, and on the extension lines of each other. You can also align linear and angular dimensions by using a spacing value of 0. The following illustration shows parallel linear dimensions that are not equally spaced and then those that are equally spaced after using the DIMSPACE command. To equally space parallel linear and angular dimensions automatically 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space.
To align parallel linear and angular dimensions 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space. 2 Select the dimension that you want to use as the base dimension when equally spacing dimensions. 3 Select the next dimension to align. 4 Continue to select dimensions and then press Enter. 5 Enter 0 and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension.
System Variables DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions You can modify existing dimensions by applying a different dimension style. If you make changes to a dimension style, you can choose whether to update the dimensions associated with that dimension style. When you create a dimension, the current dimension style is associated with that dimension.
Alternate ■ On the Styles toolbar, click the arrow in the Dimension Styles control and select a dimension style. Quick Reference Commands DIMOVERRIDE Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines.
if you choose Override in the Dimension Style Manager, and change the color of extension lines on the Override Current Style dialog box, Lines tab, the current dimension style remains unchanged. However, the new value for color is stored in the DIMCLRE system variable. The next dimension you create will have extension lines in the new color. You can save the dimension style overrides as a new dimension style.
3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, make changes to the dimension style by clicking the appropriate tab. 4 Click OK to return to the Dimension Style Manager. The dimension style overrides are listed below the style they modify in the dimension style name list. 5 Click Close. To apply dimension style overrides 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, click Override. 3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, enter the style overrides. Click OK.
Add Geometric Tolerances You can add geometric tolerances that show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. Overview of Geometric Tolerances Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. You add geometric tolerances in feature control frames. These frames contain all the tolerance information for a single dimension.
You can also create annotative on page 2289 tolerances. For more information about creating and working with an annotative tolerances, see Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances on page 1339. See also: ■ Scale Annotations on page 1324 ■ Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances on page 1339 To create geometric tolerances 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Tolerance. 2 In the Geometric Tolerance dialog box, click the first square under Sym and select a symbol to insert.
3 Specify the second point of the leader. 4 Press Enter twice to display the Annotation options. 5 Enter t (Tolerance), and create a feature control frame. The feature control frame is attached to the endpoint of the leader. Quick Reference Commands LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Material Conditions Material conditions apply to features that can vary in size.
Quick Reference Commands LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Datum Reference Frames The tolerance values in the feature control frame are followed by up to three optional datum reference letters and their modifying symbols. A datum is a theoretically exact point, axis, or plane from which you make measurements and verify dimensions.
TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Projected Tolerance Zones Projected tolerances are used to make the tolerance more specific. Projected tolerances are specified in addition to positional tolerances to make the tolerance more specific. For example, projected tolerances control the perpendicularity tolerance zone of an embedded part. The symbol for projected tolerance ( ) is preceded by a height value, which specifies the minimum projected tolerance zone.
tolerance to each feature within the pattern. The individual feature tolerance is more restrictive than the pattern tolerance. In the following illustration, the point where datums A and B intersect is called the datum axis, the point from which the position of the pattern is calculated. A composite tolerance could specify both the diameter of the pattern of holes and the diameter of each individual hole, as in the following illustration.
Part 10: Plot and Publish Drawings 1627
1628
Specify Settings for Plotting and Publishing 32 Before you plot or publish a drawing, you must specify the settings that determine the output. To save time, you can store these settings with the drawing as a named page setup. Save Plot Settings as Named Page Setups If you want to plot the same layout more than one way, or if you want to specify the same output options for several layouts, use named page setups.
In addition, the page setup also includes many other settings and options such as ■ The orientation of the plot, portrait or landscape ■ The plot scale ■ Whether lineweights should be plotted ■ The shading style By default, the first time you access a layout, it becomes initialized, and a default page setup is assigned to it. Default page setups are assigned names such as *model*, *layout1*, *layout2*, and so on.
3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, modify the required settings. Click OK. 6 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. To apply a layout's named page setup to another layout 1 Click the layout tab to which you want to apply another layout's page setup settings. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
Reuse Named Page Setups You can save plot device and other page setup settings as named page setups that can be modified and imported into other drawings. Named page setups are saved in the current drawing file and can be imported into other drawing files and applied to other layouts. If you want to plot the same layout more than one way, or if you want to specify the same output options for several layouts, use named page setups.
2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, under Page Setups, select a named page setup from the list. NOTE A page setup that is not named is shown in the Page Setup Manager with an asterisk on either side of its layout name. An unnamed page setup does not have the same functionality as a named page setup. For example, if you set an unnamed page setup as the current page setup for another layout, the values are applied to the layout.
To import named page setups from another drawing 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 2 In the Page Setup Manager, click Import. 3 In the Select Page Setup From File dialog box, select a drawing file from which you want to import one or more named page setups. Click Import. 4 In the Import Page Setups dialog box, select one or more page setups to import. Click OK.
3 Click Close. To rename a page setup 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 2 In the Page Setup Manager, under Page Setups, right-click the named page setup you want to rename. Click Rename. NOTE A page setup that is not named is shown in the Page Setup Manager with an asterisk on either side of its layout name. An unnamed page setup does not have the same functionality as a named page setup.
Select a Printer or Plotter for a Layout To print a layout, select a printing or plotting device in the Page Setup dialog box. You can also view details about the name and location of the device, and change the device's configuration. The printer or plotter you select in the Page Setup dialog box determines the printable area of the layout. This printable area is indicated by the dashed line in the layout.
5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, click Properties. 6 In the Plotter Configuration Editor, change the required settings. Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup dialog box, click OK. 8 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PSETUPIN Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout.
See also: ■ “Control PC3 File Device and Document Settings” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide To set the paper size for a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to set the paper size. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Paper Size, select a paper size from the list. Click OK. 6 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close.
5 Under Custom Paper Sizes, click Add. 6 In the Custom Paper Size wizard, Begin page, select Start from Scratch. Click Next. 7 On the Media Bounds page, in the Units list, select either Inches or Millimeters for paper size. When a nondimensional raster image, such as BMP or TIFF, is plotted, the size of the plot is specified in pixels, not inches or millimeters. 8 In the Width and Length lists, specify the paper width and length. Click Next.
4 Select Custom Paper Sizes. 5 Under Custom Paper Sizes, click Add. 6 In the Custom Paper Size wizard, Begin page, select Use Existing. 7 In the list of existing standard paper sizes, select a paper size on which to base the custom paper size you are creating. 8 Follow the instructions in To add a custom paper size from scratch to continue through the Custom Paper Size wizard. The new paper size is a user-defined size, not a standard size. 9 Click Finish to exit the Custom Paper Size wizard.
4 Click Custom Paper Sizes. 5 Under Custom Paper Sizes, select a paper size from the list. 6 Click Delete. To modify a standard paper size 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plotter Manager. 2 In the Plotter Manager, double-click the Plotter Configuration (PC3) file you want to edit. 3 In the Plotter Configuration Editor, Device and Document Settings tab, double-click User-Defined Paper Sizes & Calibration to display the calibration and paper size settings. 4 Select Modify Standard Paper Sizes.
Determine the Drawing Orientation of a Layout You can specify the orientation of the drawing on the paper using the Landscape and Portrait settings. Landscape orients the drawing on the paper so that the long edge of the paper is horizontal, and Portrait orients the paper so that the short edge is horizontal. Changing the orientation creates the effect of rotating the paper underneath the drawing..
Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Set the Plot Area of a Layout You can specify the plot area to determine what will be included in the plot. When you prepare to plot from model space or a layout, you can specify the plot area to determine what will be included in the plot. When you create a new layout, the default Plot Area option is Layout.
5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Plot Area, select one of the following options: ■ Layout. Prints all objects within the printable area of the paper. This option is only available from a layout tab. ■ Limits. Prints or plots the current grid limits. This option is only available from the Model tab. ■ Extents. Plots all objects in the drawing. ■ Display. Plots all objects displayed in the drawing area. ■ View. Prints or plots a saved view. Select a named view from the list provided. ■ Window.
You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y Offset boxes. However, this may result in the plot area being clipped. If you choose to plot an area other than the entire layout, you can also center the plot on the sheet of paper. To adjust the plot offset of a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to adjust the plot offset. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. System Variables PLOTOFFSET Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper. Set the Plot Scale for a Layout When you plot a drawing layout, you can either specify a precise scale for the layout or fit the image to the paper. Normally, you plot a layout at a 1:1 scale. To specify a different scale for the layout, set the plot scale for the layout in the Page Setup or the Plot dialog box.
The default scale when plotting a layout is 1:1. To set a custom plot scale, enter values in the Inches or Millimeters box and the Units box. The type of unit is determined by the paper size, but you can change it in the list box. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. To set the Fit to Paper option when plotting 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to set the plot scale to Fit to Paper. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
SCALELISTEDIT Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. Set the Lineweight Scale for a Layout You can scale lineweights proportionately in a layout with the plot scale. Typically, lineweights specify the line width of plotted objects and are plotted with the line width size regardless of the plot scale. Most often, you use the default plot scale of 1:1 when plotting a layout.
Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Select a Plot Style Table for a Layout A plot style table is a collection of plot styles assigned to a layout or model space. A plot style is an object property, similar to linetype and color. Therefore, it can be assigned to an object or a layer and they control an object's plotted properties.
7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. To create a new plot style table for a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to create a new plot style table. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, Under Plot Style Table, select New from the list.
To display plot styles in a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to display plot styles. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Plot Style Table, select the Display Plot Styles option. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close.
Shaded Viewport Plotting Options With shaded plotting options, you can choose whether to plot a set of shaded objects using the As Displayed, Wireframe, Hidden, or Rendered option. Shaded viewport plotting options apply to all objects in viewports and model space. If you use the Shaded or Rendered options, plot style tables included in the page setup do not affect plots. If you use the Render option, two-dimensional wireframe objects, such as lines, arcs, and text, are not plotted.
3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Plot Options, select the required settings. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
■ A location for the viewport configuration in the layout You can edit the information entered in the wizard later. Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manger. click Modify. In the Page Setup Manager, To create a layout using the wizard 1 Click Insert menu ➤ Layout ➤ Layout Wizard. 2 On each page of the Create Layout wizard, select the appropriate settings for the new layout. When finished, the new layout will be the current layout tab.
■ Plot Scale ■ Plot Origin ■ Plot Offset In addition, a PC2 file contains any resolution information that has been modified by a plotter calibration. Pen assignment information can also be imported and saved in a plot style table using the Add Plot Style Table wizard. To import plotting device and pen settings information, you can use the Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard to choose a PCP or PC2 file whose settings you want to import.
See also: ■ Reuse Named Page Setups on page 1632 To apply a named page setup to a sheet created from scratch 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Open Sheet Set dialog box, select a sheet set. Click Open. 3 In the Sheet Set Manager, right click in the Sheets area. Click New Sheet. 4 In the New Sheet dialog box, enter a number and sheet title. Click OK. 5 In the Sheet Set Manager, under Sheets, double-click the new sheet. 6 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager.
1658
Print or Plot Drawings 33 Once you have completed a drawing, you can use a number of methods to output the drawing. You can plot the drawing on paper or create a file for use with another application. In either case, you select the plot settings. Overview of Plotting Understanding terms and concepts that relate to plotting makes your first plotting experience in the program easier. Am I Printing or Plotting? The terms printing and plotting can be used interchangeably for CAD output.
Layouts A layout represents a drawing sheet, and typically includes ■ A drawing border and title block ■ One or more layout viewports that display views of model space ■ General notes, labels, and possibly dimensions ■ Tables and schedules Usually a drawing file contains only one layout, but you can create as many layouts as you need. The first time you display a layout, it is initialized and a default page setup is assigned to it.
one type to the other. You can also change the type of plot style table a drawing uses once it has been set. For color-dependent plot style tables, an object's color determines how it is plotted. These plot style table files have .ctb extensions. You cannot assign color-dependent plot styles directly to objects. Instead, to control how an object is plotted, you change its color. For example, all objects assigned the color red in a drawing are plotted the same way.
2 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, select a plotter from the Name list. 3 Under Paper Size, select a paper size from the Paper Size box. 4 (Optional) Under Number of Copies, enter the number of copies to plot. 5 Under Plot Area, specify the portion of your drawing to plot. 6 Under Plot Scale, select a scale from the Scale box. 7 For more options, click the More Options button. 8 (Optional) Under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments), select a plot style table from the Name box.
To plot at the command prompt instead of in a dialog box, use -PLOT. To turn background plotting on or off 1 Click Application menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Plot and Publish tab, under Background Processing Options, select or clear the Enable Background Plot When Plotting option. 3 Click OK. NOTE When you plot in the background, you can return immediately to your drawing.
Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PCINWIZARD Displays a wizard to import PCP and PC2 configuration file plot settings into the Model or current named (paper space) layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTSTAMP Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file.
When you select a page setup in the Plot dialog box, the settings from the page setup are added to the Plot dialog box. You can choose to plot with those settings, or change any of the settings individually and then plot. Any settings you specify in the Plot dialog box can be saved as a new named page setup by clicking the Add button in the Page Setup area.
2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 3 In the Plot dialog box, under Page Setups, select a page setup or specify settings individually. 4 Click Apply to Layout. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration.
2 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, select a plotter from the Name list. If you have already selected a paper size and it is not supported by the plotter you have chosen, you are warned that a paper size supported by the plotter will be used. Click OK if the warning is displayed. 3 Once you have selected a plotter, you can continue to select a paper size, or if the paper size is correct, click OK to plot the drawing.
■ View. Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command. You can select a named view from the list provided. If there are no saved views in the drawing, this option is unavailable. ■ Window. Plots any portion of the drawing you specify. Click the Window button to use a pointing device to specify opposite corners of the area to be plotted, or enter coordinate values. To set the drawing area as you plot 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot.
You can also set the default page size used to create new layouts for most plotters by editing the PC3 file associated with that plotter. For Windows system printers, you can use this technique to specify different default page sizes for Windows and for this program. NOTE If the PAPERUPDATE system variable is set to 0, you are prompted if the layout's existing paper size is not supported by the plotter you have selected.
4 In Page Setup Manager, click Close. The layout reflects the changes. To set the default paper size for a plotter 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, select a plotter from the Name list. 3 Click Properties. The Plotter Configuration Editor is displayed. 4 To specify a default paper size, use one of the following methods: ■ For a non-system plotter, under Media, select Source and Size.
4 Set a new paper size using one of the following methods: ■ To add a custom paper size, click Add and follow the steps in the Custom Paper Size wizard. You specify the size of the paper, the printable area, and a name for the new paper size. ■ To edit an existing paper size, under Custom Paper Sizes, select the paper size and click Edit. The Custom Paper Size wizard opens. Change any of the paper size settings. 5 Click OK.
Position the Drawing on the Paper There are several ways to position a drawing on the paper. You can specify the printable area, set the position of the plot, and set the orientation. Specify the Printable Area The printable area is displayed by a dashed border in a layout. The plotter and paper size you select determine the printable area.
PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration. Set the Position of the Plot The printable area of a drawing sheet is defined by the selected printer or plotter, but you can change the position of plot relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper.
Set Drawing Orientation The drawing orientation determines whether the position of the plotted drawing is landscape (the longer edge of the drawing is horizontal) or portrait (the longer edge of the drawing is vertical). This is based on the size of paper selected. You can also choose to plot upside down. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
in your drawing represents a millimeter. When you plot the drawing, you either specify a precise scale or fit the image to the paper. Most final drawings are plotted at a precise scale. The method used to set the plot scale depends on whether you plot model space or a layout: ■ From model space, you can establish the scale in the Plot dialog box. This scale represents a ratio of plotted units to the world-size units you used to draw the model. ■ In a layout, you work with two scales.
When you plot a perspective view from model space, the view is scaled to fit the paper even when you enter a scale. When you select the Fit to Paper option, the text boxes change to reflect the ratio of plotted units to drawing units. This scale is updated whenever you change the paper size, plotter, plot origin, orientation, or size of the plotted area in the Plot dialog box. NOTE This option is not available when the Plot Area is set to Layout.
3 Click OK to plot the drawing. NOTE This option is not available when the Plot Area is set to Layout. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. SCALELISTEDIT Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. Set Shaded Viewport Options You can choose among several options for plotting shaded and rendered viewports.
NOTE If hardware acceleration is turned off, or it is turned on but does not support all of the available hardware effects, it is possible to plot a drawing that contains shaded viewports with unsupported hardware effects by the graphics card through software emulation. To enable software emulation enter 3dconfig, and click Manual Tune. In the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box, click Emulate unsupported hardware effects in software when plotting.
Specifically, you can choose from the following options: ■ As Displayed. Plots the design as it is displayed; all the shading is preserved. ■ Wireframe. Displays lines and curves to represent object boundaries. ■ Hidden. Suppresses the plotting of objects that are located behind other objects. ■ Visual Styles. Plots the design as it appears in the visual style you select. ■ Rendered.
Quick Reference Commands 3DCONFIG Sets options that affect 3D display performance. GRAPHICSCONFIG Sets options for 3D display performance. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. SHADEMODE Starts the VSCURRENT command. VSCURRENT Sets the visual style in the current viewport. Specify a Resolution Level for Shaded Plotting You can set the resolution of shaded plots for either greater speed or higher fidelity.
If you want to enter a custom dpi, select Custom and specify a dpi in the DPI box. 3 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Set Options for Plotted Objects In the Plot, and the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can choose from options that affect how objects are plotted. ■ Shaded Viewport Plotting. Specifies shaded plotting options: As Displayed, Wireframe, or Hidden. The effect of this setting is reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
■ Hide Paperspace Objects. Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects in the layout viewport. The effect of this setting is reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout. ■ Plot Stamp On. Turns on plot stamps and places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and can add it to a log file.
To remove hidden lines when plotting from a layout tab 1 Select a layout viewport. 2 Double-click the viewport border to display the Properties palette. 3 On the Properties palette, click Shade Plot. 4 In the Shade Plot drop-down list, select Hidden. 5 Click OK to plot the drawing. To plot lineweights 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Plot Options, select Plot Object Lineweights. You can change this option only if the Plot with Plot Styles option is cleared.
To plot transparency Plot Transparency applies to wireframe and hidden plots only. Other visual styles, such as Realistic, Conceptual, or Shaded will always plot with transparency. 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Plot Options, select Plot Transparency. 3 Click OK to plot the drawing. WARNING Enabling this option may reduce plot performance, even if your drawing does not contain transparent objects.
3 Click OK to plot the drawing. Quick Reference Commands LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTSTAMP Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects.
■ Pen number ■ Virtual pen ■ Screening ■ Linetype ■ Lineweight ■ Transparency ■ Line end style ■ Line join style ■ Fill style Using plot styles gives you great flexibility because you can set them to override other object properties or turn off the override as needed. Groups of plot styles are saved in either of two types of plot style tables: color-dependent (CTB) or named (STB). Color-dependent plot style tables set style based on the color of the object.
PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. System Variables CPLOTSTYLE Controls the current plot style for new objects. DEFLPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for all layers in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or for Layer 0 when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
table can contain as many or as few plot styles as required. Named plot styles can be assigned to objects or layers, just like any other property. To set a plot style table type for new drawings 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Plot and Publish tab, click the Plot Style Table Settings button. 3 In the Plot Style Table Settings dialog box, select Use Color-dependent Plot Styles or Use Named Plot Styles. 4 (Optional) In the Default Style Table box, select a default plot style table.
When you convert a drawing from using named plot style tables to using color-dependent plot style tables, the plot style names assigned to the objects in the drawing are lost. In addition to changing which type of plot style table a drawing uses, you can use CONVERTCTB to convert color-dependent plot style tables to named plot style tables. You cannot, however, convert a named plot style table to a color-dependent plot style table.
NOTE Be sure to use the Plot Style Table Editor to change the names of the plot styles in their new plot style table to be more meaningful before using the plot style table with any drawings. Quick Reference Commands CONVERTCTB Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB). CONVERTPSTYLES Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup. 3 In Page Setup Manager, click Modify. 4 Under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments), select a plot style table from the list. 5 In the Question dialog box, click Yes or No to indicate whether the selection should be applied to the current tab only or to all layouts. This option is available only for the Model tab. 6 To preview the effects of the plot style table in the layout, select Display Plot Styles. This option is available only for layouts. 7 Click OK.
Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. Manage Plot Style Tables You can use the Plot Style Manager to add, delete, rename, copy, and edit plot style tables. Color-dependent (CTB) and named (STB) plot style tables are stored in the Plot Styles folder by default. This folder is also known as the Plot Style Manager. You can use the Plot Style Manager to add, delete, rename, copy, and edit plot style tables.
8 Click Finish. The new plot style table is available in both the Plot and the Page Setup dialog boxes for all drawings using color-dependent plot style tables. To rename a plot style table 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Right-click the plot style whose name you want to change. Click Rename. 3 Enter the new file name. Be sure to add the same file extension (.ctb or .stb). When finished, press ENTER.
Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Use Color-Dependent Plot Style Tables By using color-dependent plot styles to control how objects are plotted, you ensure that all objects that share the same color are plotted the same way. When a drawing uses color-dependent plot style tables, you cannot assign a plot style to individual objects or layers.
Table Description screening 50%.ctb Uses 50% ink for all colors screening 25%.ctb Uses 25% ink for all colors NOTE You can assign a color-dependent plot style table to a layout only if the drawing has been set to use color-dependent plot style tables. See also: ■ Assign Plot Style Tables to Layouts on page 1690 Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables.
C. In a layout that uses Style1, any objects that use plot style C are listed as having a missing plot style. Objects that are assigned plot style C in this layout are plotted using their default settings. To change an object's plot style You can change an object's plot style only if the drawing uses named plot style tables. If the drawing uses color-dependent plot style tables, change the object's color to alter its plotted appearance. 1 Select one or more objects whose plot style you want to change.
4 To select a plot style from a different plot style table, select an active plot style table from the Active Plot Style Tables list. The list of plot styles changes to those in the selected plot style table. 5 To edit the selected plot style table, click Editor. Change settings as necessary and click Save & Close. 6 Click OK. You can change a layer's plot style only if the drawing uses named plot style tables.
Quick Reference Commands LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. PLOTSTYLE Controls the named plot styles that are attached to the current layout and can be assigned to objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Manage Named Plot Styles You can add, delete, rename, and copy plot styles in a named plot style table using the Plot Style Table Editor. The Plot Style Table Editor is also used to change plot style settings for both named and color-dependent plot style tables.
6 Click Save & Close. NOTE You cannot edit the NORMAL plot style. To copy a named plot style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the STB file you want to edit. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, right-click the plot style that you want to copy. Click Copy. 4 Right-click a plot style. Click Paste. If you want to position the new plot style in the list, right-click the plot style that should precede the new plot style.
To rename a named plot style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the STB file that contains the plot style you want to rename. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, right-click the plot style whose name you want to change. Click Rename. 4 Enter the new name for the plot style. 5 Click Save & Close. NOTE You cannot rename the NORMAL style. You cannot rename plot styles in a color-dependent plot style table.
STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Use Predefined Named Plot Style Tables One additional named plot style table is installed for you to use beyond the default plot style table. All named plot style tables have an .stb extension. ■ acad.stb: Default plot style table ■ Monochrome.stb: All colors plot as black ■ None: No plot style table applied NOTE Named plot style tables are available only if the drawing has been set to use named plot style tables.
each color when opening pre- AutoCAD 2000 drawings. This enables you to simulate the way drawings were plotted in previous versions. While the color mapping table exists, you cannot add, delete, or rename plot styles in that plot style table. If you delete the mapping table, the plot style table becomes an ordinary plot style table and is no longer useful for applying plot styles to old drawings. It continues to be useful for new drawings.
Overview of Plot Style Settings You can open the Plot Style Table Editor by double-clicking a CTB or STB file in the Plotter Manager. The Plot Style Table Editor displays the plot styles contained in the specified plot style table. The General tab lists general information about the table. The Table View and Form View tabs provide two ways to modify plot style settings. In general, the Table View tab is convenient if you have a small number of plot styles.
Assign Plot Style Colors The default setting for plot style color is Use Object Color. With this setting, the object retains its layer or individually set color. If you assign a plot style color, the color overrides the object's color at plot time. You can specify one of 255 ACI colors, a true color, or a color book color. The plotter must be configured for True Color if you want to plot True Color plot styles.
To assign a plot style color 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Right-click a CTB or STB file. Click Open. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Table View tab, click the Color field for the plot style you want to change. 4 On the Color drop-down list, click the color you want to use or click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box and do one of the following: ■ On the Index tab, click a color or enter the ACI color number (1-255) or name in the Color box. Click OK.
To enable or disable dithering 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the plot style table that you want to modify. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select the plot style you want to change and select Dither. 4 Select On or Off. 5 When finished, click Save & Close. You can edit properties for multiple plot styles while in the Plot Style Table Editor. To enable or disable conversion to grayscale 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the plot style table that you want to modify.
Assign Pens to Plot Styles The Use Assigned Pen Number setting in the Plot Style Table Editor specifies which physical pen to use for each plot style. The physical pens in the plotter are described in the plotter's configuration (PC3) file. If you use a pen plotter, you must provide information about the color, speed, and width of each pen in the Physical Pen Configuration section of the Plotter Configuration Editor.
When you create a plot style table, it is important to remember that it can be used with many different plotters and that the plotter and mode determine what parts of the plot style table are enabled. ■ When using a pen plotter with user assigned pens, the virtual pen number and any color assignments are ignored. ■ When using a pen plotter with automatically assigned pens, pens are selected based on entity color and entity lineweight. Virtual pen numbers are ignored.
Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype Both lineweight and linetype can be set as an object property or controlled when plotted by using a plot style. Lineweight or linetype settings in the plot style override the object's lineweight or linetype at plot time.
To set the plotted lineweight 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the plot style table that you want to modify. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select the plot style you want to change. 4 Click the Lineweight arrow and select a lineweight from the list. To specify that the object's lineweight should be used select Use Object Lineweight. 5 Click Save & Close. You can edit properties for multiple plot styles while in the Plot Style Table Editor.
3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, General tab, select Apply Global Scale Factor to Non-ISO Linetypes. This option scales linetypes and fill patterns according to a value that you specify. 4 In the Scale Factor box, enter a scale factor to apply. 5 Click Save & Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables.
■ Bevel ■ Round ■ Diamond The default setting for Line Join Style is Use Object Join Style, which is rounded. Assign a line join style in a plot style to override the object's default line join style at plot time. To assign a line end or line join style 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Right-click a CTB or STB file. Click Open. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Table View tab, click the Line End Style or Line Join Style field for the plot style you want to change.
■ Horizontal Bars ■ Slant Left ■ Slant Right ■ Square ■ Dots ■ Vertical Bar The default setting for Fill Style is Use Object Fill Style. Assign a fill style in a plot style to override the object's fill style at plot time. You can apply a global scale factor to non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns in plot styles. See also: ■ Modify Hatches and Fills on page 1389 To assign a fill style 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Right-click a CTB or STB file. Click Open.
Preview a Plot It is good practice to generate a preview of the plotted drawing before sending the drawing to the printer or plotter. Generating a preview saves time and material. You can preview the drawing from the Plot dialog box. The preview shows exactly how the drawing will look when plotted, including lineweights, fill patterns, and plot style options.
3 Right-click to display a shortcut menu with the following options: Plot, Pan, Zoom, Zoom Window, or Zoom Original (to zoom to the original preview magnification). 4 Press ESC to exit the preview and return to the Plot dialog box. 5 If necessary, make additional adjustments to the plot settings and preview the plotted drawing again. 6 Once the settings are correct, click OK to plot the drawing. Quick Reference Commands PAN Moves the view planar to the screen.
Plot DWF Files You can create DWF files (a 2D vector file) to publish your drawings on the web or across an intranet. You can use the program to create DWF files. A DWF file is a 2D vector file that you can use to publish your drawing on the World Wide Web or an intranet network. Each DWF file can contain one or more drawing sheets. ® DWF files can be opened, viewed, and plotted by anyone using Autodesk Design Review. With the DWF file viewer, you can also view DWF files in ® Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.
Plot DWFx Files You can create DWFx files (DWF and XPS) to publish your drawings on the web or across an intranet. You can use the DWFx ePlot (XPS Compatible) plot configuration file to plot to a DWFx file. Each DWFx file can contain one or more drawing sheets. DWFx files can be opened, viewed, and plotted by anyone using the following applications: ■ With Internet Explorer, you can view and print the 2D geometry of DWFx files.
Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Plot to DXB File Formats DXB (drawing interchange binary) file formats are supported using the DXB non-system file driver. This is commonly used to “flatten” 3D drawings to 2D. The output is compatible with the DXBIN command and with the ADI DXB driver delivered with earlier releases. The DXB driver shares these limitations of the ADI driver: ■ The driver produces 16-bit integer DXB files containing only vectors.
6 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the DXB file. 7 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Plot to Raster File Formats The nonsystem raster driver supports several raster file formats, including Windows BMP, CALS, TIFF, PNG, TGA, PCX, and JPEG. The raster driver is most commonly used to plot to files for desktop publishing.
See also: ■ “Configure for File Output” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide To create a raster file 1 Make sure you have configured a plotter driver for raster file output. (See Configure for File Output in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.) 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 3 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, in the Name box, select a raster format configuration from the list. 4 Select plot settings for the raster file as needed. 5 Click OK.
System Variables RASTERDPI Controls paper size and plot scaling when changing from dimensional to dimensionless output devices, or vice versa. Plot Adobe PDF Files Using the DWG to PDF driver, you can create Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) files from drawings. The Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) is a standard for electronic information exchange. PDF files can be easily distributed for viewing and printing in the Adobe Reader available from the Adobe web site without cost.
To plot a PDF file 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, in the Name box, select the DWG to PDF.pc3 configuration from the Name list. 3 Select plot settings for the PDF file as needed. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the PDF file. 6 Click Save. To plot a PDF file in landscape orientation 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot.
Plot Adobe PostScript Files Using the Adobe PostScript driver, you can use DWGs with an array of page layout programs and archive tools such as the Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF). You can use the non-system PostScript driver to plot drawings to PostScript printers and PostScript files. Use the PS file format for printers and the EPS file format for files. If you plot to a hardware port, PS output is automatic.
To plot a PostScript file 1 Make sure you have configured a plotter driver for PostScript file output. (See “Configure for File Output” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.) 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 3 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, in the Name box, select a PostScript format configuration. 4 Select plot settings for the PostScript file as needed. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the PostScript file. 7 Click Save.
NOTE You must use the correct plotter configuration for the output device in order to produce a valid PLT file. 3 If the Plot to File option is available and is not selected, select it. 4 Select plot settings for the plot file as needed. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the plot file. 7 Click Save. To create a batch file for plot spooling Plot files are meant to be used with spooling software or to be given to a service bureau for output.
where MySpooler.bat is the name of the batch file you created and MyDrawing.plt is the name of the plot file. The PLT file is copied to the output device and the drawing is created. Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
Publish Drawings 34 Publishing provides a streamlined alternative to plotting multiple drawings. You can easily publish an entire sheet set from the Sheet Set Manager as a set of paper drawings or as a single, electronic, multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. Publishing an electronic drawing set as a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file saves time and increases productivity by providing accurate, compressed representations of drawings in a file that's easy to distribute and view.
■ A single, multi-sheet DWF or DWFx file containing both 2D and 3D content ■ A single, multi-sheet PDF file containing 2D content ■ Multiple single-sheet DWF or DWFx files containing both 2D and 3D content ■ Multiple single-sheet PDF files containing 2D content Using 3D DWF publishing, you can create and publish DWF files of your three-dimensional models and view them with Autodesk Design Review. For more on publishing 3D DWF files, refer to 3D DWF Publishing on page 1758.
over the plotter icon on the right side of the status bar. You can also view details about all completed jobs that you have plotted or published from the current session.
To turn background publishing on or off using the publish dialog box 1 Click Output tab ➤ Publish panel ➤ Publish. 2 In the Publish Controls group, select or clear Publish in background. Quick Reference 3DDWF Creates a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file of your 3D model and displays it in the DWF Viewer. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout.
FTP sites, project websites, or CD. You can save a description of a drawing set that has been assembled to publish in a Drawing Set Descriptions (DSD) file. NOTE You must remove the drawing sheets that you don't want to become a part of the drawing set. Layouts must be initialized before they can be published. (A layout is initialized if its paper size is defined in the page setup to any size other than 0 x 0.) To create a drawing set for publishing 1 Open a drawing.
NOTE To include the model when you add sheets to a drawing set, ensure the Include Model When Adding Sheets option is selected in the shortcut menu. ■ Remove sheets. To remove sheets from the list, select one or more sheets in the list. Click the Remove Sheets button. To remove all sheets, right-click the selection. Click Remove All. ■ Reorder sheets. To reorder the sheets up or down one position in the list, select a sheet. Click either the Move Sheet Up or Move Sheet Down button.
To copy sheets in a drawing set for publishing 1 Click Output tab ➤ Publish panel ➤ Publish. 2 In the Publish dialog box, ensure the sheets that you want to copy are listed. 3 Right-click the selection. Click Copy Selected Sheets. The copied drawing sheets are added and highlighted at the end of the sheet list. When a sheet is copied, its name is created by the addition of -copy(n) at the end of the original sheet name.
3 Right-click one of the selected layout tabs. Click Publish Selected Layouts. 4 In the Publish dialog box, change any settings for the selected layouts. 5 Click Publish. Quick Reference 3DDWF Creates a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file of your 3D model and displays it in the DWF Viewer. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.
2 In the Publish dialog box, the drawing layouts are shown in the Sheets List. To create the drawing set, modify the list of drawing sheets by doing any of the following as needed: ■ Add sheets. To add sheets from other drawings, click the Add Sheets button (or drag drawings from the desktop). In the Select Drawings dialog box, select drawings. Click Select to add them to the list of sheets in the Publish dialog box. All of the layouts in a drawing become individual sheets in the list of drawing sheets.
Page Setups dialog box, select a drawing with one or more page setups. Click Import. In the Page Setup list, select a named page setup. NOTE Change the page setup for each layout depending on your desired output. Model space page setups can only be applied to model space sheets; paper space page setups can only be applied to paper space sheets. ■ Copy sheets. To copy one or more drawing sheets, select the sheets in the list and right-click. Click Copy Selected Sheets.
3 In the Publish dialog box, select Plotter, PDF, DWF, or DWFx from the Publish To: drop-down list and click Publish. Quick Reference PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.
it to a website. Using Autodesk Design Review, you can view or plot only the layouts you need. You can use the default plotter driver as installed, or you can modify configuration settings such as color depth, display resolution, file compression, font handling, and other options. Once you modify the original plotter configuration file, all future plotting and publishing of DWF, DWFx, or PDF files will be affected.
can be plotted if you select an override page setup for it in the Publish dialog box from the page setup drop-down list under Page Setups in the sheet list. NOTE To include the model space when you add sheets to a drawing set, select — Include Model When Adding Sheets option in the shortcut menu or Model Tab in the Include when adding sheets group. ■ Remove sheets. To remove sheets from the list, select one or more sheets, and then click the Remove Sheets button. To remove all sheets, right-click.
3 When your list of drawing sheets is assembled and configured the way you want for your drawing set, click the Save Sheet List button. NOTE Ensure that you have saved your drawing before you click the Save Sheet List button. 4 In the Save List As dialog box, in the File Name box, enter a name for the list. Click Save. The drawing set list is saved as a drawing set descriptions (DSD) file. 5 In the Publish dialog box, under Publish To, click DWF Format, and select DWF File or DWFx File. Click Publish.
NOTE You can publish only 2D DWF or 2D DWFx files using the shortcut menu in Windows Explorer. 3 Right-click the selection. Click Publish DWF. The Specify DWF File dialog box appears in a temporary AutoCAD session. 4 Specify Files of type as either *.dwfx or *.dwf. 5 Type a file name, or select a file.
Password = Disabled Layer information = Don’t include Block information = Don’t include 6 AutoCAD launches your default mail application with the newly created DWF or DWFx as an attachment. Quick Reference PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.
When you open the Publish dialog box from the Sheet Set Manager, the Publish dialog box automatically lists the sheets you selected in the sheet set. You can then modify the sheet set for publishing. NOTE You can specify that sheets are sent to the plotter in reverse order. This option is available from the Publish dialog box and from the Sheet Set Manager.
To publish a sheet set to a DWFx file 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, under Sheets, select a sheet set, subset, or sheet. 3 In the upper-right corner of the Sheet Set Manager, click the Publish button. NOTE Sheet sets cannot contain 3D DWF (or 3D DWFx) entries. 4 Click Publish to DWFx from the flyout menu. If you have background publishing enabled, the animated plotter icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the publish job is in progress.
6 In the Page Setup dialog box, set the desired page setup options. Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. 8 In the Sheet Set Manager, right-click the sheet set to publish. Click Publish ➤ Publish Using Page Setup Override. Click the page setup you created. The PDF file is plotted to the directory listed in the Plot and Publish Details (VIEWPLOTDETAILS) dialog box. TIP Publishing performance can be improved by disabling background publishing.
3 In the upper-right corner of the Sheet Set Manager, click the Publish button. 4 Click Publish to DWFx from the flyout menu. NOTE If you have background publishing enabled, the animated plotter icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the publish job is in progress. Right-click this icon for options to view the DWFx file or to view information about the publish job.
3 In the upper-right corner of the Sheet Set Manager, click the Publish button. Click Publish To Plotter. NOTE If you have background publishing enabled, the animated plotter icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the publish job is in progress. Right-click this icon for options to view the DWF file or to view information about the publish job. To publish sheets in a sheet set using a page setup from the page setup overrides file 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager.
2 In the upper-right corner of the Sheet Set Manager, click the Publish button. Click Include Plot Stamp. A plot stamp will be included on all published sheets. NOTE To change the plot stamp settings, click the Publish button. Click Plot Stamp Settings. To publish sheets in a sheet set in reverse order 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, under Sheets, select the name of a sheet set or a subset.
4 Click OK. To modify the sheet set for publishing using the publish dialog box 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, under Sheets, select the node or name of a sheet set, subset, or an individual sheet. 3 In the upper-right corner of the Sheet Set Manager, click the Publish button. Click Publish Dialog Box. The Publish dialog box is displayed and lists the sheets you selected in the Sheet Set Manager.
PUBLISHCOLLATE Controls whether plotting a sheet set, multi-sheet plot file, or plot spool file can be interrupted by other plot jobs. Republish a Drawing Set You can easily republish lists of drawing sheets that you previously saved in the Drawing Set Descriptions (DSD) file format. After drawings have been updated, you may want to republish a drawing set for viewing or plotting.
6 If you have background publishing enabled, you can view information about the processed publish job. Right-click the plotter icon on the right side of the status bar. Click View Plot and Publish Details. The information in the Plot and Publish Details dialog box is also saved to the plot and publish log file. Quick Reference PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.
For product information and a download link for the Autodesk Design Review, refer to the Products page on the Autodesk website. See also: ■ Review and Markup Files with Design Review on page 2119 To view a 2D DWFx in Internet Explorer 7 ■ Click and drag the DWFx file to the Internet Explorer 7 window. ■ Click OK at the Internet Explorer dialog box. A new window displays the contents of the DWFx file. NOTE If you have a pop-up blocker, select “Allow Blocked Content”, and click Yes when prompted.
Set Publish Options Set options for publishing, such as output file location, multi-sheet name options, password protection, and whether or not to include layer information. You can also decide what types of information to reveal in your published DWF, DWFx, and PDF files and whether to publish drawings automatically.
3 In the General DWF Options pane, under DWF Type, select Multi-sheet DWF from the drop-down list. 4 In the Multi-sheet DWF Options, select Prompt for Name to be prompted for a file name every time you publish a DWF file. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Publish dialog box, contine with publishing tasks, and then close the dialog box.
The Publish Options dialog box appears. 3 In the DWF Data Options pane, under Block Information, click to display the drop-down list, and select Include. 4 Under DWF Data Options, Block Template File, click to display the drop-down list, and select Create. The Publish Block Template dialog box opens with the Block Source Drawing area displaying the current drawing. NOTE The working set of drawings for this list is completely independent of the drawings to include in the Publish operation.
NOTE If you select a block on the block list and clear the check marks of all its properties, only the name of the block is published to the resultant DWF or DWFx file; no property information is included. 8 Click Save to name and save the block template file. Click OK. The new block template file is now available under DWF Data Options in the Publish Block Template dialog box. 9 In the Publish dialog box, contine with publishing tasks, and then close the dialog box.
8 Under Block Data to Publish, Properties of Selected Blocks, Check Properties to Publish, select or clear the properties you want to include in your published DWF or DWFx files. This list displays the union of the properties of all selected blocks. NOTE If you select a block from the block list and clear the check marks of all its properties, only the name of the block is published to the resultant DWF or DWFx file; no property information is included. 9 Click Save. Click OK.
Publish 3D DWF Files You can create and publish DWF or DWFx files of your 3D models and view them with Autodesk Design Review. You can generate DWF or DWFx files of your 3D models with nearly the same visual fidelity as your original DWG files. You can create a single or multi-sheet DWF or DWFx file with 2D and 3D model space objects. To access single sheet 3D DWF publishing, use the 3DDWF, EXPORT. To access multi-sheet publishing with 2D and 3D model space objects use the PUBLISH command.
NOTE Because the DWF Viewer and the rendering engine are different, you may encounter some deviation in how the texture maps appear in the DWF Viewer. Increase the Smoothness of 3D DWF or 3D DWFx Models The smoothness of 3D DWF or 3D DWFx models is improved by changing the value of the 3DDWFPREC system variable. The setting for 3DDWFPREC ranges from 1 to 6. Higher settings greatly improve the appearance of objects in the DWF Viewer.
Unsupported Content Details Block attributes Font types (Various) See the “Supported Text Fonts” table Gradient fills (Hatches) Hidden edges Hyperlinks Images Layer information Lights and Shadows Material components Mtext (partial) Named views and cameras OLE objects Rays and X-lines Section clipping and XClipping Text thickness Visual styles 1760 | Chapter 34 Publish Drawings ■ Bump, Opacity, and Specular texture maps ■ Procedural materials (for example, wood & marble) ■ Reflection and refracti
Supported Text Fonts Many text fonts are not supported when you publish a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file. The following table lists the fonts that are published.
To publish a single 3D DWF file 1 Click Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ 3D DWF. 2 In the Export Data dialog box, specify a name and location of the DWF file. Click Save. By default, all model space objects are published to the 3D DWF file and, if your drawing contains xrefs, the Group By Xref Hierarchy option is active. 3 (Optional) Click Yes to open the Autodesk Design Review and view the published 3D DWF file.
3 If necessary, select 3D DWF (*.dwf) from the Files Of Type list. Click Save. By default, all model space objects are exported to the 3D DWF file and if your drawing contains xrefs, the Group By Xref Hierarchy option is active. 4 (Optional) Click Yes to open the Autodesk Design Review and view the published 3D DWF file. To export a 3D DWFx file 1 Click Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ 3D DWF. 2 In the Export Data dialog box, specify the name and location of the DWFx file. 3 Select 3D DWFx (*.
5 Click Publish Options. In General DWF Options, set the DWF Type to Multi-sheet DWF. 6 Select the Publish Output options. NOTE The Precision Override setting does not affect models sheets that are converted to 3D DWF. 7 In 3D DWF options group, click Yes to publish materials. Click OK. 8 Click Publish. To publish multiple 3D or combined 2D and 3D DWFx files 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Batch Plot.
To publish selected objects in your model to a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file 1 Click Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ 3D DWF. 2 In the Export Data dialog box, specify a name and location for the DWF or DWFx file. 3 Click the Tools button at the upper right. 4 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 5 In the 3D DWF Publish dialog box, Objects To Publish, click Selected Model Space Objects and then click the Select Objects button. 6 In the model, select the objects that you want to publish.
Quick Reference 3DDWF Creates a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file of your 3D model and displays it in the DWF Viewer. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters. 3DDWFPREC Controls the precision of 3D DWF or 3D DWFx publishing. PUBLISHALLSHEETS Specifies whether to load the contents of the active document or of all open documents in the Publish dialog box.
How to Create and Obtain Physical Models The following diagram illustrates, from begining to end, the basic steps of creating and obtaining a physical model: Prepare your 3D model To ensure successful printing of your 3D model, you may need to make some adjustments to your drawing. Select the 3D solids you want to print You must select the 3D solids you want to print. Only the 3D solids you select are printed, even if there are others in your drawing.
5 In the selected DWG file, select the solids or watertight meshes you wish to print. Press Enter. In the Send to 3D Print Service Dialog Box, under Output Preview, selected solids and watertight meshes display. 6 In the Send to 3D Print Service dialog box, under Output Dimensions, specify output dimensions, including scale and bounding box length, width, and height. Click OK. NOTE If you modify output dimensions, the output preview remains unchanged. 7 Save your prepared drawing as an STL file.
Part 11: Share Data Between Files 1769
1770
Reference Other Drawing Files 35 Attached xrefs are linked to, but not actually inserted in, another drawing. Therefore, with xrefs you can build drawings without significantly increasing the drawing file size. See also: ■ Overview of Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) By using referenced drawings, you can ■ Coordinate your work with the work of others by referencing other drawings in your drawing to keep up with the changes being made by other designers.
See also: ■ DesignCenter on page 84 Quick Reference Commands ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. BASE Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing. EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE Closes the External References palette. REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition.
XCLIP Crops the display of a selected external reference or block reference to a specified boundary. XREF Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command. System Variables BINDTYPE Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs or editing xrefs in place. ERSTATE Indicates whether the External References palette is open or closed. INDEXCTL Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files.
XLOADPATH Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files. XREFNOTIFY Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs. Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings You can perform several operations on referenced drawing files (xrefs). Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) You can insert any drawing file as an external reference or xref in the current drawing. When you attach a drawing file as an xref, you link that referenced drawing to the current drawing.
NOTE When using the External References palette, it is recommended that you turn on the Auto-hide feature or anchor the palette. The palette will then hide automatically when you specify the insertion point of the external reference. Receive Notification of Attached Xrefs An xref icon is displayed in the lower-right corner of the application window (the status bar tray) when xrefs are attached to the drawing.
Control the Properties of Referenced Layers You can control the visibility, color, linetype, and other properties of an xref's layers and make these changes temporary or permanent. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 0, these changes apply only to the current drawing session. They are discarded when you end the drawing session, or when you reload or detach the xref. You can also control the fade display of the DWG xref. The XDWGFADECTL system variable defines the fade percentage for all DWG xrefs.
See also: ■ Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings on page 1780 ■ Clip External References and Blocks on page 1793 ■ Set Paths to Referenced Drawings on page 1782 ■ DesignCenter on page 84 ■ Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows on page 175 To attach an xref 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach. 2 In the Select Reference File dialog box, select one or more files you want to attach and then click Open.
7 Click OK. You can also attach an xref by dragging or by clicking Attach as Xref on the shortcut menu. 8 Click OK. To view referenced files by type in the External References palette 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Dialog box launcher. 2 In the External References palette, in the File References pane, click the List View button. 3 Click the Icon column. The attached referenced files are sorted by type in the list view.
XATTACH Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref). XREF Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command. System Variables ERHIGHLIGHT Controls whether reference names or reference objects are highlighted when their counterparts are selected in the External References palette or in the drawing window. ERSTATE Indicates whether the External References palette is open or closed. INDEXCTL Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files.
XREFNOTIFY Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs. Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings Attached DWG references (xrefs) can be nested: that is, you can attach an xref that contains another xref. Xrefs can be nested within other xrefs: that is, you can attach an xref that contains another xref. You can attach as many copies of an xref as you want, and each copy can have a different position, scale, and rotation. In the following illustration, master.dwg references a.dwg and b.dwg. Drawing a.
NOTE When using the parametric drawing feature, you can only constrain objects in the drawing to the insertion point of an Xref, and not its nested objects. Relative Saved Paths and Nested Xrefs The saved path for an xref can be a full path, a relative (partially specified) path, or no path. For a nested xref, a relative path always references the location of its immediate host and not necessarily the currently open drawing. See also: ■ To overlay an xref 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. System Variables XREFTYPE Controls the default reference type when attaching or overlaying an external reference. Set Paths to Referenced Drawings You can view and edit the file name and path used when locating a particular drawing reference (xref). Use this option if the referenced file has been moved to a different folder or renamed since it was first attached.
.\path From the folder of the host drawing, follow the specified path ..\path From the folder of the host drawing, move up one folder level and follow the specified path ..\..\path From the folder of the host drawing, move up two folder levels and follow the specified path NOTE If a drawing that contains referenced files is moved or saved to a different path, to a different local hard drive, or to a different network server, you must edit any relative paths to accommodate the host drawing's new location or
PROJECTNAME value set and a corresponding entry exists in the registry, the program searches for the file along the project search paths. If the xref still is not located, the program search path is searched again. You can add, remove, or modify the project names that exist in the registry. The folder search paths beneath the project name can also be added, removed, or modified. The search paths beneath the project name can be added, removed, or modified in the same manner as the project name.
3 Under Found At, do one of the following: ■ Edit the xref path directly. ■ Click within the edit box, and then click the Browse button (...) that appears. Select the xref in its new path. 4 Click OK. The program reloads the xref and then regenerates the drawing with the xref in place. To display the currently defined project names 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, double-click Project Files Search Path.
To modify a project name 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, select a project name. Enter a new name. 3 Click OK (or Apply). You can also modify a project name by selecting the name in the project folder and pressing F2. To add a search path 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, select a project name. Click Add. 3 Add a new search path beneath the project name by entering a new path, or click Browse and select a new path.
2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, double-click Project Files Search Path. 3 Select a Project name. Click Set Current. 4 Click OK (or Apply). You can also set a project current by entering projectname at the Command prompt and then entering the name of the project. To clear the current project 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Project Files Search Path. 3 Click Clear Current. This clears the setting for the current drawing. 4 Click OK (or Apply).
To detach an xref 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ External References . 2 In the External Reference palette, select a DWG reference. 3 Right-click the selected DWG reference and select Detach from the shortcut menu. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. Update and Archive Referenced Drawings You can update referenced drawings (xrefs) to make sure that they are current, and you can choose how xrefs are treated when a drawing is archived.
Whenever you modify and save an externally referenced drawing in a network environment, other people can access your changes immediately by reloading the xrefs in their open drawings. Receive Notification of Changed Xrefs When you attach xrefs to a drawing, the program periodically checks whether the referenced files have changed since the last time the xrefs were loaded or reloaded. The XREFNOTIFY system variable controls xref notification.
To update an attached xref 1 Click Insert menu ➤ External References. 2 In the External References palette, select the reference name that you want to reload. 3 Right-click, and click Reload. NOTE If the drawing you selected has been changed since you opened your drawing, the xref is reloaded. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE Closes the External References palette.
XEDIT Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. XLOADPATH Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files. XREFNOTIFY Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs.
NOTE You cannot bind xrefs that contain proxy objects. For more information, see Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1966. To bind an xref to the current drawing 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Dialog box launcher. 2 In the External References palette, select the reference name that you want to bind. 3 Right-click, and click Bind. 4 In the Bind Xrefs dialog box, select one of the following options: ■ Bind converts the objects in the xref into a block reference.
XEDIT Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. Clip External References and Blocks You can specify clipping boundaries to display a limited portion of an external reference drawing or block reference. You can clip external references such as DGN, DWF, IMAGE, PDF underlays, or block references.
Clipping results can be turned on or off using the clipping commands. This controls whether the clipped area is hidden or displayed. Control the visibility of clipping boundaries. You can control the display of the clipping boundary with a clipping frame. The clipping system variable for XREF, PDF, DGN, DWG, and IMAGE underlays are XCLIPFRAME, PDFFRAME, DGNFRAME, DWGFRAME, and IMAGEFRAME respectively.
Resize Clipping Boundaries If you want to change the shape or size of a clipping boundary for external references and block references, you can use grips to edit the vertices just as you edit any object with grips. In case of rectangular grip editing, you can maintain the closed four-sided rectangle or square shape of the rectangular clipping boundary because two vertices of the same side of the rectangular clipping boundary are edited together.
5 (Optional) Use the Invert Clip option to change the area to be hidden from outside to inside the clipping boundary. The xref is clipped based on the area that you specified. NOTE You can use DGNCLIP, DWFCLIP, PDFCLIP, or IMAGECLIP to clip their corresponding xref attachments: DGNATTACH, DWFATTACH, PDFATTACH, or IMAGEATTACH. To invert a clipped reference 1 Select the external reference or block reference to be clipped. 2 Set XCLIPFRAME, DWFFRAME, DGNFRAME, IMAGEFRAME, or PDFFRAME to 1.
System Variables DGNFRAME Determines whether DGN underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. DWFFRAME Determines whether DWF or DWFx underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. FRAMESELECTION Controls whether the frame of an image, underlay, or clipped xref can be selected. IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. XCLIPFRAME Determines whether xref clipping boundaries are visible or plotted in the current drawing.
See also: ■ Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks with Nesting, OLE, or Attributes on page 1806 ■ Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks on page 1799 To edit an xref in a separate window 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ External References Palette. 2 In the External References palette, select the xref that you want to edit. 3 Right-click, and click Open. 4 The source file for the selected xrefs opens in a new window, where you can edit, save, and close the drawing.
Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks You can modify external references and redefine block definitions from within the current drawing by using in-place reference editing. Both blocks and xrefs are considered references. By editing the reference in place, you can modify the reference within the visual context of your current drawing. Often, a drawing contains one or more xrefs as well as multiple block references.
NOTE Objects outside the working set are not faded during in-place reference editing unless VSCURRENT is set to a value of 2D wireframe. Use the Refedit Ribbon Contextual Tab If you select nested objects to edit when the ribbon is active, the Edit Reference ribbon contextual tab is displayed. Using the buttons on the Edit Reference ribbon contextual tab, you can add objects to or remove objects from the working set, and you can discard or save back changes to the reference.
■ Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks with Nesting, OLE, or Attributes on page 1806 To edit an xref or block reference in place 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Edit Reference. 2 From within the current drawing, select the reference that you would like to edit. If the object you select in the reference belongs to any nested references, all the references available for selection are displayed in the Reference Edit dialog box.
REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing. REFSET Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. SHADEMODE System Variables BINDTYPE Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs or editing xrefs in place. REFEDITNAME Displays the name of the reference being edited. XEDIT Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing.
When a reference object is part of the working set, you can select the object for editing even if it is drawn on a locked layer in the reference file. You can unlock the object's layer and make changes to the object. Changes made to the object can be saved, but the layer state remains the same in the reference file, whether it is locked or unlocked. An object that is removed from the working set is added to the host drawing and removed from the reference when changes are saved back.
To remove objects from the working set 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Xref And Block In-Place Editing ➤ Remove from Working Set. 2 Select the objects you want to remove. You can also set PICKFIRST to 1 and create a selection set before using the Remove option. REFSET can be used only with objects in the space (paper space or model space) in which REFEDIT is initiated. Quick Reference Commands REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition.
discard the changes, the working set is deleted and the block reference returns to its original state. Similarly, while editing an xref in place, you can save back or discard changes. Objects in the working set that inherit properties not originally defined in the xref retain those new properties. For example, an xref contains layers A, B, and C, and the drawing that references it contains layer D.
NOTE Alternatively, click the Save Back Changes to Reference button on either the Edit Reference ribbon contextual tab or the Refedit toolbar. To discard all changes from edited xrefs and blocks ■ On either the Edit Reference ribbon contextual tab or the Refedit toolbar, click the Discard Changes to Reference button. Quick Reference Commands REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition.
If a block reference with attributes is selected for editing, you can choose to display the attribute definitions in the reference and make them available for editing. The attributes are made invisible and the attribute definitions are available for editing along with the selected reference geometry. When changes are saved back to the block reference, the attributes of the original reference remain unchanged.
Resolve Referenced Drawing Errors If a referenced drawing cannot be loaded when you open a drawing, an error message is displayed. Resolve Missing External References If a referenced drawing cannot be located when you open a drawing, several options available to you. The program stores the folder path of the referenced drawing.
This search order helps ensure that revisions made to the xref are reflected in the current drawing, and also makes it possible for the xref to be found if its folder path has changed. See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments on page 1788 To change an xref path 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ External References Palette. 2 In the External References palette, select the external reference. 3 Under Found At, do one of the following: ■ Edit the xref path directly. ■ Click the [...
If a circular reference is encountered while loading a drawing, an error message is displayed and the circular reference for the current session is broken. For example, if you have the circular reference A>B>C>A, and you open a.dwg, the program detects and breaks the circularity between c.dwg and a.dwg. The following error message is displayed: Breaking circular reference from C to current drawing. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette.
To avoid the restrictions on xref-dependent named objects, you can bind them to your current drawing. Binding makes the xref-dependent named objects that you select become a permanent part of your current drawing. When xref-dependent named objects are merged into a drawing through binding, you can use them the same way you use the drawing's own named objects.
4 Click Rename To. Click OK. Quick Reference Commands RENAME Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles. XBIND Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing. System Variables BINDTYPE Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs or editing xrefs in place. Track External Reference Operations (Log File) You can maintain a record of actions while attaching, detaching, and reloading xrefs, and while loading a drawing containing xrefs.
Example: A Sample Title Section from an Xref Log File This title section contains the name of the current drawing, the date and time, and the operation being performed. ============================= Drawing: detail Date/Time: 09/28/99 10:45:20 Operation: Attach Xref ============================= During a detaching or reloading operation, the program includes the nesting level of all affected xrefs immediately following the title section.
The log file lists the definition (symbol) table affected and the name of the definition added, along with a status message. ============================== Drawing: test Date/Time: 12/18/99 14:06:34 Operation: Attach Xref ============================= Attach Xref STAIR: \ACAD\DWGS\STAIR.dwg Searching in ACAD search path Update block symbol table: Appending symbol: STAIR|BOLT Appending symbol: STAIR|BOLT-HALF ... block update complete.
System Variables XREFCTL Controls whether external reference log (XLG) files are created. Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings There are several features that can improve performance when dealing with large referenced drawings. Overview of Demand Loading The program uses demand loading and saving drawings with internal indexes to increase performance with large referenced drawings that have been clipped, or that have many objects on frozen layers.
Unload Xrefs in Large Drawings When a referenced drawing (xref) is unloaded from the current drawing, the drawing opens much faster and uses less memory. The xref definition is unloaded from the drawing file, but the internal pointer to the referenced drawing remains. The xref is not displayed, and nongraphical object information does not appear in the drawing. However, you can restore all the information by reloading the xref.
To realize the maximum benefits of demand loading, you need to save the referenced drawings with layer and spatial indexes. The performance benefits of demand loading are most noticeable when you do one of the following: ■ Clip the xref with the program to display a small fraction of it. A spatial index is saved in the externally referenced drawing. ■ Freeze several layers of the xref. The externally referenced drawing is saved with a layer index.
3 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. System Variables INDEXCTL Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes To receive the maximum benefit of demand loading, it is recommended that you save any drawings that are used as xrefs with layer and spatial indexes.
To save a drawing with layer and spatial indexes 1 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Save Drawing As dialog box, click Tools ➤ Options. 3 In the Saveas Options dialog box, under Index Type, select Layer, Spatial, or Layer & Spatial. Click OK. NOTE If you are saving a partially open drawing that does not already contain layer and spatial indexes, this option is disabled. 4 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette.
TREEMAX Limits memory consumption during drawing regeneration by limiting the number of nodes in the spatial index (oct-tree). XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Set Paths for Temporary Xref File Copies When you turn on demand loading with copy, you can control where copies of externally referenced drawings are to be placed.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables XLOADPATH Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files.
1822
Link and Embed Data (OLE) 36 Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a Windows feature that combines data from different applications into one document. For example, you can create an Adobe PageMaker layout that contains an AutoCAD drawing, or you can create an AutoCAD drawing that contains all or part of a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Overview of Object Linking and Embedding Object linking and embedding is a way to use information from one application in another application.
Link Objects A linked object is a reference to information in another document. Link objects when you want to use the same information in more than one document. Then, if you change the original information, you need to update only the links in order to update the document containing the OLE objects. You can also set links to be updated automatically. When you link a drawing, you need to maintain access to the source application and the linked document.
You can also adjust OLE plot quality in the Plotter Configuration Editor. The Graphics option displays a Raster Graphics dialog box with a slider that controls OLE plot quality. NOTE Nested OLE objects may cause problems. For example, an Excel spreadsheet embedded in a Word document may fail to plot. Also, an OLE object that is not in the current view plane is not plotted, but the frame is plotted based on the setting of the OLEFRAME system variable.
OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. System Variables OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects. Import OLE Objects You can import information into a drawing from other applications that support OLE. Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Use one of the following methods to insert information from another application as an OLE object: ■ Copy or cut information from an existing file and paste it into the drawing.
Quick Reference Commands INSERTOBJ Inserts a linked or embedded object. OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. OLESCALE Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. System Variables MSOLESCALE Controls the size of an OLE object with text that is pasted into model space.
Reconnect Links Because a link references the location of the linked document, you need to reconnect the link if the document changes location or is renamed. Break Links Breaking a link does not remove the inserted information from the drawing. Instead, it removes the connection to the linked document. You can break a link when you no longer need to update the information. To link objects in a drawing 1 Start the source application and open a document.
To update links manually 1 Click Edit menu ➤ OLE Links. 2 In the Links dialog box, select the links you want to update. 3 Click Update Now. 4 Click Close. NOTE If you want to select the links from the drawing area rather than from a list in the Links dialog box, select the OLE objects before step 1. To reconnect a link to an OLE object 1 In the drawing, select the OLE object whose link you want to change. 2 Click Edit menu ➤ OLE Links. 3 In the Links dialog box, click Change Source.
OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. OLESCALE Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. System Variables OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects.
To embed an OLE object in a drawing 1 Open the document in the source application. 2 Copy the information you want to embed to the Clipboard. 3 Open the drawing. 4 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste. 5 Click OK. To create an object in another application and embed it in a drawing 1 Open the drawing. 2 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object. 3 In the Insert Object dialog box, under Object Type, select Create New. 4 Under Object Type, select an application. Click OK.
3 Click OK to apply changes. To scale text in an OLE object according to its font 1 Select an OLE object. 2 Right-click. Click Text Size. 3 In the OLE Text Size dialog box, select a font. The OLE Text Font list contains all of the fonts that appear in the selected OLE object. 4 Select a point size. The OLE Point Size list contains all of the sizes for the selected font. 5 In Text Height, enter a value in drawing units. This value is the height for text in the selected font and point size.
PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. System Variables OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. Export OLE Objects from Drawings You can link or embed a view of a drawing in another application that supports OLE.
To embed objects in another document 1 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 2 In the drawing area, select the objects that you want to embed and then press ENTER. The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. 3 Start the destination application, and open a new or existing document. 4 Paste the Clipboard contents into the document, following the destination application's instructions for embedding the Clipboard contents.
INSERTOBJ Inserts a linked or embedded object. OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. System Variables WMFBKGND Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. WMFFOREGND Controls the assignment of the foreground color when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. Edit OLE Objects in Drawings You can edit a linked or embedded OLE object in a drawing by double-clicking the object to open the source application.
Edit OLE Objects When AutoCAD Is the Source Application The document that contains a linked drawing stores the drawing's file location. You can edit a linked drawing either from the destination application or in the source program. The program must be loaded or accessible on the system along with the document you are editing. An AutoCAD drawing that is embedded in a document can be edited only from within the destination application. Double-click the OLE object to start the program.
How the link is updated depends on the destination application. Some applications support automatic updating of links; others require manual updating of links. To edit embedded objects 1 Open the document that contains the embedded AutoCAD objects (for example, a Microsoft Word file). 2 Double-click the embedded objects to start the program and display the objects. 3 Modify the objects as necessary. 4 To save changes to the embedded objects, click File menu ➤ Update.
■ 2 Frame is displayed but is not plotted. The frame must be displayed in order for grips to be visible. Quick Reference Commands COPYCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. CUTCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing. ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. U Reverses the most recent operation.
Work with Data in Other Formats 37 You can work with many different types of files, including files created with other applications and files created in earlier releases of the program. You can also specify search paths for drawing and support files. Convert Drawing File Formats You can convert AutoCAD-based drawing files to other AutoCAD drawing formats. Choose the file format, conversion options, and the type of output you want.
overwriting the originals or packaged together in a file folder, compressed in a self-extracting EXE file, or compressed in a ZIP file in a different location. Specify the Output of the Conversion The conversion setup controls the output for the converted drawing files.
3 In the Select File dialog box, navigate to the folder of the drawing file that you want to convert. 4 Click the drawing file name and click Open. 5 (Recommended) In the DWG Convert dialog box, click Conversion Setups. In the Conversion Setups dialog box, create a new conversion setup, modify an existing conversion setup, or select a previously created conversion setup. Click Close. 6 In the DWG Convert dialog box, click Convert.
Associativity in Dimensions Associative dimensions created in AutoCAD 2002-based products or later generally maintain their associativity when converted to a previous release and then reopened in the current release of an AutoCAD-based product.
Layer Property Overrides If you convert an AutoCAD 2008-based drawing containing layer property overrides, the overrides are not visible in previous releases. The property override settings are retained when the drawing is saved in a previous release, and are visible again when the drawing is opened in an AutoCAD 2008-based product.
Multiline text with new formatting that is edited and saved in previous releases loses the new formatting when reopened in AutoCAD 2008-based products. Tables and Data Extraction Editing AutoCAD 2008 tables in previous releases removes AutoCAD 2008 table formatting. Also, AutoCAD 2008 table cells with long block and text strings may extend outside of cell borders when opened in previous releases.
There is a conversion process required for drawings with lighting prior to AutoCAD 2007. AutoCAD-based products include a system variable, 3DCONVERSIONMODE, to automatically convert drawings with lighting from previous versions to the AutoCAD 2007 and AutoCAD 2008 lighting format. Other lighting fidelity issues include ■ Lights in blocks. Lights in blocks created in AutoCAD 2008 do not always display in AutoCAD 2007. ■ Texture illumination.
Converting a drawing to AutoCAD 2000 format is subject to the following limitations: ■ File size can increase. ■ Encryption and digital signatures are not preserved. Converting a drawing in AutoCAD Release 14/AutoCAD LT 98/AutoCAD LT 97 format is subject to the following limitations: ■ Hyperlinks are converted to AutoCAD Release 14 attached URLs. ■ Database links and freestanding labels are converted to AutoCAD Release 14 links and displayable attributes.
If you convert drawings using the same settings each time, then you can simply modify the Standard conversion setup to your requirements, and you do not need to save additional ones. To specify an existing conversion setup 1 Click Application button ➤ Save As ➤ DWG Convert. 2 In the DWG Convert dialog box, under Select a Conversion Setup, click the conversion setup that you want to use.
Save Lists of Files for Batch Conversions For repetitive conversions, the drawing files that you select for conversion can be saved to a list, called a batch control list. Batch control lists are saved as BCL files that can also be opened and viewed in a text editor such as Notepad. Once you add several drawing files to the current list, you can remove any of them from the list by clearing its check box.
Quick Reference DWGCONVERT Converts drawing format version for selected drawing files. Import Other File Formats You can import files, other than DWG files, that were created with other applications into your drawings. Import Autodesk 3ds MAX Files ® ® You can import a 3DS file created with Autodesk 3ds MAX . Geometry and rendering data from 3ds MAX are imported, which includes meshes, materials, mappings, lights, and cameras.
Quick Reference Commands 3DSIN Imports a 3D Studio (3DS) file. IMPORT Imports files of different formats into the current drawing. Import FBX Files FBX files allow you to import and export 3D objects, 2D objects with thickness, lights, cameras, and materials from one Autodesk program to another. The FBX file format is an open framework for 3D data transfer that creates a high level of interoperability among Autodesk programs.
To import an FBX file 1 In AutoCAD, click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import. 2 In the Import File dialog box, select the FBX file type, select the FBX file, and click Open. The FBX Import Options dialog box displays. 3 Specify the items to be imported, the assigned layer for the objects, and the conversion units. Importing the FBX file as a block allows you to modify it. 4 Click Ok to import the as specified.
Create Point Cloud Files AutoCAD can create 3D point clouds from the following point cloud data file types: ■ FLS ■ FWS ■ LAS ■ XYB Index a file of one of these types to create either an ISD or PCG file in AutoCAD. Work While Indexing a Point Cloud Data File You can continue to use AutoCAD while your point cloud data file is being indexed. To view the status of indexing, hover the pointing device over the icon in the drawing status bar.
Quick Reference POINTCLOUD Provides options to create and attach an indexed point cloud file. POINTCLOUDINDEX Creates an indexed point cloud (PCG or ISD) file from a scan file. Attach a Point Cloud to a Drawing When you attach a point cloud file to a drawing, you can specify whether it is locked for editing. Insert Point Clouds with Geographic Data If geographic location information exists in both the current drawing and the point cloud file, then you can insert the file based on that data.
POINTCLOUDAUTOUPDATE Controls whether a point cloud is regenerated automatically after manipulation, panning, zooming, or orbiting. POINTCLOUDDENSITY Controls the number of points displayed at once for all point clouds in the drawing view. POINTCLOUDLOCK Controls whether an attached point cloud can be manipulated, moved, or rotated. POINTCLOUDRTDENSITY Improves performance by degrading the number of points displayed in the drawing view zooming, panning, or orbiting in real time.
Edit a Point Cloud Use the following commands to modify a point cloud: ■ BLOCK ■ COPY ■ COPYCLIP ■ CUTCLIP ■ ERASE ■ MOVE ■ PASTECLIP ■ ROTATE ■ SCALE ■ STRETCH NOTE The MIRROR3D command copies and moves a point cloud, but does not mirror it. You cannot explode a point cloud. Snap to Points on a Point Cloud The Node object snap allows you to snap to individual points on a point cloud. The Insertion object snap allows you to snap to the insertion point of the point cloud.
POINTCLOUDLOCK Controls whether an attached point cloud can be manipulated, moved, or rotated. POINTCLOUDRTDENSITY Improves performance by degrading the number of points displayed in the drawing view zooming, panning, or orbiting in real time. Import ACIS SAT Files You can import geometry objects stored in SA (ASCII) files using the ASCISIN command. ACISIN converts the model to a body object or to 3D solids and regions if the body is a true solid or a true region.
To open a DXF file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Select File dialog box, in the Files of type box, select DXF (*.dxf). 3 Find and select the DXF file you want to import, or enter the name of the DXF file at File Name. 4 Click Open. To open a DXB file 1 Click Insert ➤ Drawing Exchange Binary. 2 In the Select DXB File dialog box, find and select the DXB file you want to import. 3 Click Open. Quick Reference Commands DXBIN Imports an AutoCAD DXB (drawing interchange binary) file.
need to import mapping data created with MicroStation into a site plan created with an AutoCAD-based product. The DGN data can serve as an accurate reference for creating the site plan. NOTE DGNIMPORT is not limited to files with *.dgn extensions. It supports all DGN files, even those that do not have a .dgn extension. Understand the Limitations The DGN import and export capabilities are designed to provide a fundamental exchange of information between MicroStation V7/V8 DGN files and AutoCAD DWG files.
See the DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table for specific details about unit conversions when importing MicroStation objects.
Import DGN Settings In the Import DGN Settings dialog box, if you select “Import into Current Drawing” and select the “Translate References to Blocks or Xrefs” option in the External DGN references section, all referenced DGN files are converted to block references. If you do not select “Import into Current Drawing” and select the “Translate References to Blocks or Xrefs” option, then all referenced DGN files are converted to DWG external references.
5 In the Import DGN Settings dialog box, select a design model from the list and specify the desired import options. 6 Click OK. To create a new DGN mapping setup 1 In Import (or Export) DGN Settings dialog box, click Mapping Setups. The DGN Mapping Setups dialog box is displayed. 2 Click New. The New Mapping Setup dialog box is displayed. 3 Under New DGN mapping setup name, enter a mapping setup name. 4 Under Based On, select a mapping setup. If there is no existing mapping setup, the default is Standard.
NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. 2 Click Modify. The Modify DGN Mapping Setup: dialog box is displayed. 3 Specify property mapping for DGN Import (or Export). 4 Click Ok. You can also right-click the mapping setup name from the mapping setup list, click Modify and then continue with step 3. To delete a DGN mapping setup 1 In the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box , select the mapping setup you want to delete.
NOTE Duplicate properties will be ignored. To add properties from a drawing file 1 In the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box , click Modify. NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. 2 In the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box, click Add Properties from Drawing File button. 3 The Add Properties from Drawing File dialog box is displayed. Select a drawing file and click Open.
DGNMAPPINGPATH Specifies the location of the dgnsetups.ini file where DGN mapping setups are stored. Import IGES Files You can import an IGES (*.igs or *.iges) file into a DWG file. Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES ) is a neutral file format designed to transfer 2D and 3D drawing data between dissimilar CAD systems. The IGES standard defines two file formats: fixed-length ASCII, which stores information in 80-character records, and compressed ASCII.
Recommendations Inspect the conversion tables of the IGES translators of both the source CAD program and AutoCAD. Get to know what entities are supported. Restructure the drawing to minimize the usage of objects that require compromises and substitutions. See the conversion table for IGESIMPORT for specific details of the scope of the IGES translator. To import an IGES file 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import. 2 In the Import File dialog box, in the Files of type box, select (*.igs, *.iges).
Import STEP Files You can import STEP (*.stp, *.ste, or *.step) files and insert them in the current drawing. Standard for the Exchange of Product model data (STEP) is an ISO standard for computer interpretable product manufacturing data representation (CAD data as well as meta data) and exchange. STEP is often used for exchanging 3D model data between dissimilar CAD systems. The IMPORT command supports STEP versions AP214 and AP203E2.
Import status bar icon while import is in progress, a tooltip displays the current status. Once processing is complete, a notification bubble is displayed on the import status bar icon. If you click the link in the notification bubble, the imported content is inserted in the current drawing. If you close the notification bubble before you insert the imported content, you can insert it later by right-clicking the import status bar icon and choosing "Insert" from the menu.
Import Pro/ENGINEER Files You can import models created in Pro/ENGINEER® and insert them in the current drawing. The following Pro/ENGINEER file types can be imported using the IMPORT command: ■ *.prt* (part) (up to version 4.0) ■ *.asm* (assembly) (up to version 4.0) ■ *.g (Granite) (up to version 5.0) ■ *.neu* (Neutral) The following data types are translated: ■ Surfaces ■ Solids ■ Multi Solids ■ Wire Geometry (2D & 3D) All geometry is created on layer 0.
over the Import status bar icon while import is in progress, a tooltip displays the current status. Once processing is complete, a notification bubble is displayed on the import status bar icon. If you click the link in the notification bubble, the imported content is inserted in the current drawing. If you close the notification bubble before you insert the imported content, you can insert it later by right-clicking the import status bar icon and choosing "Insert" from the menu.
Import Rhino Files You can import Rhinoceros®(Rhino) models and insert them in the current drawing. Rhinoceros (Rhino) is a stand-alone, commercial non-uniform rational basis spline (NURBS) based 3-D modeling tool. The Rhino file format (*.3dm) is often used for the exchange of NURBS geometry between 3D CAD systems. You can use the IMPORT command to import a *.3dm file and insert the surfaces into the current drawing. All geometry is created on layer 0.
Import is performed as a background process. A notification bubble is displayed when the command is done. ■ Click the file name in the notification bubble. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. TIP If you accidentally close the notification bubble, right-click the import icon on the status bar, and click Insert. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands IMPORT Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.
in turn is referenced from model space. Assemblies are formed by nesting "part" blocks. CATIA V4 models can contain components that are set to be invisible/hidden. However, once imported, all geometry is visible, regardless of their visibility state in CATIA V4. A CATIA V4 *.exp file can contain more than one model. However, you can import only one model per IMPORT session. Hence, when IMPORT detects multiple models, it prompts you to specify which model to import.
before you insert the imported content, you can insert it later by right-clicking the import status bar icon and choosing "Insert" from the menu. When IMPORT produces a single block, the INSUNITS property on the block is set to match the source file’s linear units. When IMPORT produces multiple blocks, the INSUNITS property on the block corresponding to the top level assembly is set to match the source file’s linear units. To import a CATIA V4 file 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import.
4 Click Open. Import is performed as a background process. A notification bubble is displayed when the command is done. ■ Click the file name in the notification bubble. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. TIP If you accidentally close the notification bubble, right-click the import icon on the status bar, and click Insert. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands IMPORT Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.
■ Wire Geometry (2D & 3D) All geometry is created on layer 0. The original colors for all 2D and 3D wire geometry are preserved. They do not acquire the color from layer 0 (color is not ByLayer). Importing part files produces blocks that have the same name as the source file. If the file name contains invalid characters, in the corresponding block they are replaced by the underscore (_) character. The INSUNITS property on the block is set to match the source file’s linear units.
3 Find and select the file you want to import, or enter the name of the file at File Name. 4 Click Open. Import is performed as a background process. A notification bubble is displayed when the command is done. ■ Click the file name in the notification bubble. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. TIP If you accidentally close the notification bubble, right-click the import icon on the status bar, and click Insert. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. 5 Click OK.
All geometry is created on layer 0. The original colors for all 2D and 3D wire geometry are preserved. They do not acquire the color from layer 0 (color is not ByLayer). All geometry is created on layer 0. The original colors for all 2D and 3D wire geometry are preserved. They do not acquire the color from layer 0 (color is not ByLayer). IMPORT maps all assembly structures to blocks and block references.
4 Click Open. Import is performed as a background process. A notification bubble is displayed when the command is done. ■ Click the file name in the notification bubble. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. TIP If you accidentally close the notification bubble, right-click the import icon on the status bar, and click Insert. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands IMPORT Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.
All geometry is created on layer 0. The original colors for all 2D and 3D wire geometry are preserved. They do not acquire the color from layer 0 (color is not ByLayer). All geometry is created on layer 0. The original colors for all 2D and 3D wire geometry are preserved. They do not acquire the color from layer 0 (color is not ByLayer). IMPORT maps all assembly structures to blocks and block references.
3 Find and select the file you want to import, or enter the name of the file at File Name. 4 Click Open. Import is performed as a background process. A notification bubble is displayed when the command is done. ■ Click the file name in the notification bubble. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. TIP If you accidentally close the notification bubble, right-click the import icon on the status bar, and click Insert. The imported file is inserted in the current drawing. 5 Click OK.
All geometry is created on layer 0. The original colors for all 2D and 3D wire geometry are preserved. They do not acquire the color from layer 0 (color is not ByLayer). IMPORT maps all assembly structures to blocks and block references. Individual parts in an input Parasolid file is mapped to a block, which in turn is referenced from model space. Assemblies are formed by nesting "part" blocks. The name of the block is the same as the name of the corresponding Parasolid component.
Import is performed as a background process. A notification bubble is displayed when the command is done. ■ Click the file name in the notification bubble. The imported Parasolid data is inserted in the current drawing. TIP If you accidentally close the notification bubble, right-click the import icon on the status bar, and click Insert. The imported Parasolid file is inserted in the current drawing. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands IMPORT Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.
2 In the Import WMF dialog box, select the WMF file you want to open. Click Open. 3 Specify an insertion point for the WMF file. 4 To specify the scaling, use one of the following methods: ■ To specify an imaginary box whose dimensions correspond to the scale factor, enter c (Corner) at the Command prompt. Specify the opposite corner above and to the right of the insertion point to avoid inserting a mirror image. ■ To specify 3D scale factors, enter xyz.
WMFIN Imports a Windows metafile. WMFOPTS Sets options for WMFIN. Attach Files as Underlays You can display DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN files as underlays in your drawing. Overview of Underlays You can underlay and snap to 2D geometry stored in DWF, DWFx, DGN, and PDF files. Underlays are similar to attached raster images in that they provide visual content but also support object snapping and clipping. Unlike external references, underlays cannot be bound to the drawing.
■ DGN - Bentley System’s Microstation format. DGN support is limited to V7/V8 DGN files and 2D objects. The 2D objects are imported or attached with full (X, Y, Z) coordinate information, as was present in the original file. If the file contains 3D solids, surfaces, or other 3D objects, a warning is displayed. This content is not supported in this file.
See also: ■ For information on identifying referenced underlays, see Highlight External References in a Drawing in Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings on page 1774. Attach PDF Files There are a few things specific to PDF files that you do not have to consider with DWF or DGN files. PDF files with more than one page are attached one page at a time (as opposed to one sheet at a time for DWF files or one model at a time for DGN files).
For example, drawing A includes a DWF underlay showing some mechanical details. You need the content of drawing A attached to your current drawing, drawing B. If you attach drawing A as an external reference to drawing B, the DWF underlay that was already attached to drawing A is also be present. All of the property settings made to the underlay in the external reference, such as clipping boundaries, appear as they do in the parent drawing.
To attach a PDF underlay 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach. 2 In the Select Reference File dialog box, select the PDF file you want to attach. 3 Click Open. 4 In the Attach PDF Underlay dialog box, select one page, or use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple pages. 5 Use one of the following methods to specify the insertion point, scale, or rotation of the underlay file: ■ Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to attach the underlay at the location, scale, or angle you want.
Quick Reference Commands ATTACH Inserts an external reference, raster image, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN files) in the current drawing. DGNATTACH Insert a DGN file as an underlay into the current drawing. DWFATTACH Insert a DWF or DWFx file as an underlay into the current drawing. EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file. NCOPY Copies objects that are contained in an xref, block, or DGN underlay.
The table below explains many of the different terms that are used in MicroStation and provides a reference to the term that is used in AutoCAD when possible. MicroStation to AutoCAD Terms MicroStation Term AutoCAD Term Notes AccuSnap Osnap Drafting tool for automatic snaps. ACS UCS Coordinate system acronyms.
MicroStation to AutoCAD Terms MicroStation Term AutoCAD Term Notes ■ MicroStation’s “Fit View” tool fits only visible geometry. ■ “Zoom Extents” area includes layers that have display turned off. Handles Grips Vertices on geometry that can be selected and manipulated. Key-in Command Line Place for entering commands/variables manually. Levels Layers Organizational structure used to control the appearance of objects in a drawing.
MicroStation to AutoCAD Terms MicroStation Term AutoCAD Term Notes have references with Live Nesting or No Nesting. References with No Nesting are translated as overlays in AutoCAD-based products. MicroStation V7 does not support nested references. Seed file Template drawing file Files are used as a starting point for newly created files and store commonly used settings.
Quick Reference Commands DGNADJUST Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DGN underlay. DGNATTACH Insert a DGN file as an underlay into the current drawing. DGNCLIP Crops the display of a selected DGN underlay to a specified boundary. DGNEXPORT Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing. DGNIMPORT Imports the data from a DGN file into a new DWG file or the current DWG file, depending on the DGNIMPORTMODE system variable.
DGNOSNAP Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in DGN underlays that are attached to the drawing. Detach Underlay Files Underlays that are no longer needed can be detached from a drawing file. When you detach an underlay, all instances of the underlay are removed from the drawing, and the linking path to the file is removed. To hide the display of an underlay temporarily, you can unload it rather than detach it. This action preserves the underlay location for reloading later.
Unload Underlay Files To improve performance, you can unload underlays from a drawing file. When you do not need an underlay in the current drawing session, you can improve performance by temporarily unloading it. Unloaded underlays are not displayed or plotted. Unloading an underlay does not remove its link. If you do not have sufficient memory to open multiple underlays in a drawing, underlays are automatically unloaded. To unload or reload an underlay 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference ➤ .
Use the DWFLAYERS, PDFLAYERS, DGNLAYERS, or ULAYERS command or right-click a selected underlay and click Layers on the shortcut menu. NOTE If the Underlay Layers dialog box is empty, there are no layers in the underlay. You can use the Properties palette to determine whether any layers are turned off in an underlay. ■ If no layers are turned off, the Layer Display Override property is set to None. ■ If at least one layer is turned off, the Layer Display Override property is set to Applied.
■ If it is a PDF underlay, click PDF Layers. ■ If it is a DGN underlay, click DGN Layers. 3 In the Underlay Layers dialog box, click the light bulb icon for the layer name that you want to turn on or off. You can use CTRL or SHIFT when you click to select several layers. 4 Click Apply to save your changes, or click OK to save and close. Quick Reference Commands DGNLAYERS Controls the display of layers in a DGN underlay. DWFLAYERS Controls the display of layers in a DWF or DWFx underlay.
Use Grips with Underlays While underlay behavior generally mimics raster image behavior, one exception is the way that grips work. In this case, the behavior more closely parallels block behavior. Normally, an underlay displays only a base grip. You can use a base grip to reposition an underlay in a drawing. If you create a clipping boundary, additional grips display for each corner of the boundary. See Clip Underlays on page 1903. The grip for the base point is the lower-left corner of the underlay.
Quick Reference Commands DWFATTACH Insert a DWF or DWFx file as an underlay into the current drawing. DGNATTACH Insert a DGN file as an underlay into the current drawing. PDFATTACH Insert a PDF file as an underlay into the current drawing. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Use Object Snaps with Underlays Use object snaps to draw or edit objects relative to a precise location.
architectural plans, the PDF is a raster image, not a vector-based image. Therefore, object snapping does not work. Also, geometry from PDF’s that were created outside of AutoCAD may contain nonstandard snapping points, such as circles with no center points. Use the DWFOSNAP, PDFOSNAP, DGNOSNAP, and UOSNAP system variables to turn object snapping on and off. Object snapping can also be turned on and off from a shortcut menu. Select an underlay and right-click to display the object snap menu option.
Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the Background You can modify the contrast, fade, and monochrome settings of an underlay. Also, so that the underlay is visible, you can adjust the underlay colors based on the AutoCAD background colors. Adjusting these settings does not alter the original file and does not affect other instances of the underlay in the drawing. You can change the contrast, fade, monochrome, and colors in the Properties palette when an underlay is selected.
To use the DWFADJUST command to adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DWF underlay 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Adjust. 2 Select the DWF underlay to adjust. 3 On the Enter DWF Underlay Options menu, select one of the following: ■ Select Fade and enter a fade value. ■ Select Contrast and enter a contrast value. ■ Select Monochrome and set monochrome to Yes or No. The appearance of the DWF underlay is updated after you enter the new value and the command is completed.
3 On the Enter DGN Underlay Options menu, select one of the following: ■ Select Fade and enter a fade value. ■ Select Contrast and enter a contrast value. ■ Select Monochrome and set monochrome to Yes or No. The appearance of the PDF underlay is updated after you enter the new value and the command is completed. Quick Reference Commands DWFADJUST Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DWF or DWFx underlay.
When the clipping boundary is no longer needed, you can delete the clipped boundary from the underlay and the underlay is displayed with its original boundary. You can also invert the area to be hidden inside or outside the clipping boundary. With grips located at the midpoint on the first edge of the clipping boundary, you can invert the display of the clipped reference inside or outside the boundary. You can control the way clipping boundaries and grips display with the clipping frame system variables.
See also: ■ Clip External References and Blocks on page 1793 ■ Clip Raster Images on page 1924 To clip an underlay 1 Click the bounding box of an underlay to select it. 2 Click Contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create Clipping Boundary. 3 At the command prompt, Enter s (Select Polyline), p (Polygonal), r (Rectangular), or i (Invert Clip) and then, draw the specified boundary on the underlay.
If you are drawing a polygonal boundary, you are prompted to specify consecutive vertices. To finish drawing a polygon, press Enter or right-click anywhere in the drawing area. To edit the existing boundary on a clipped underlay 1 Select a clipped underlay. 2 Click one of the corner grips and drag it to a new location. 3 Click again to set the corner grip.
PDFCLIP Crops the display of a selected PDF underlay to a specified boundary. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Hide and Show Underlay Frames You can display and plot a border around the underlay or the clipping boundary. A frame is a visual border that shows the extents of the underlay, or the clipped boundary of the underlay. When underlay frames are hidden, clipped underlays are still displayed to their specified boundary limits; only the boundary is affected.
The foreground example shows the underlay with a visible frame. To hide and show underlay frames Do the following: 1 To hide frames, click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Frame Settings drop-down ➤ Hide Frames 2 To display and plot frames, click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Frame Settings drop-down ➤ Display And Plot Frames. 3 To display frames without plot, click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Frame Settings drop-down ➤ Display But Don’t Plot Frames.
Manage and Publish Drawings Containing Underlays You can view and manipulate underlays and change paths to underlays in the External References palette. View Underlay Information You can view file-specific information about the underlays that are attached to a drawing in the External References palette. You can also load and unload underlays and perform other operations there. In the External References palette, you can view underlay information either as a list or as a tree.
The following information is displayed in the list view: ■ Name of DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN file ■ Status (loaded, unloaded, or not found) ■ File size ■ File type ■ Date and time file was last saved ■ Name of the saved path If the program cannot find an underlay, its status is listed as Not Found. If the underlay is unreferenced, no instances are attached for the underlay. If the underlay is not loaded, its status is Unloaded.
To display a list of the underlays attached to a drawing 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference ➤ . 2 In the External References palette, click the List View button. To display underlay names and their nesting levels within xrefs and blocks 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference ➤ . 2 In the External References palette, click the Tree View button. To display underlay layer override status 1 Select the underlay of which you want to view the layer override status. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
Change File Paths of Underlays You can change the file path to a referenced DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN file or search for an underlay when it is reported as not found. When you open a drawing with an attached DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN file, the path of the selected underlay is displayed in the External References palette under Found At in the Detail list. The displayed path is the actual path where the source file was found. The path where the source file was originally attached is displayed under Saved Path.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables DGNMAPPINGPATH Specifies the location of the dgnsetups.ini file where DGN mapping setups are stored. Publish, Save, and eTransmit Drawings Containing Underlays When you eTransmit a file, DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays are tracked and managed.
AutoCAD 2009, AutoCAD 2008 will only recognize the underlay if it is a V8 MicroStation file. eTransmit Underlay attachments are tracked and managed when you use eTransmit in the same way you track and manage raster image attachments. Quick Reference Commands DGNEXPORT Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. EXPORTDWF Creates a DWF file and allows you to set individual page setup overrides on a sheet by sheet basis.
System Variables EXPORTEPLOTFORMAT Sets the default electronic file output type: PDF, DWF, or DWFx. EXPORTMODELSPACE Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from Model space EXPORTPAGESETUP Specifies whether to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file with the current page setup. Reference Manager and Underlays With the Reference Manager, you can view DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays that are attached to a DWG file and edit the paths of the attachments.
To check underlays with the Reference Manager 1 Click Start menu (Windows) ➤ All Programs (Programs) ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD 2012 ➤ Reference Manager. 2 In the Reference Manager, click the Add Drawings button. 3 In the Add Drawings dialog box, select a drawing and then click Open. Attach Raster Image Files You can view and manipulate raster images and associated file paths in drawings. You can add raster images to your vector-based drawings, and then view and plot the resulting file.
document management, engineering, mapping, and geographic information systems (GIS). Images can be bitonal, 8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color. Images with 16-bit color depth are not supported. Several image file formats support images with transparent pixels. When image transparency is set to on, the program recognizes those transparent pixels and allows graphics in the drawing area to “show through” those pixels. (In bitonal images, background pixels are treated as transparent.
Supported image file formats Type Description and versions File extension JPEG2000 Wavelet-based compression standard created by the Joint Photographics Expert Group .jp2, .j2k JFIF or JPEG Joint Photographics Expert Group .jpg, .jpeg MrSID Multiresolution Seamless Image Database .sid NITF National Imagery Transmission Format .nitf NOTE NITF files containing elevation data require AutoCAD Raster Design OpenEXR Industrial Light & Magic High-Dynamic Range image .
IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file. Attach, Scale, and Detach Raster Images You can add or remove references to raster images within drawing files, or you can change their relative size. Attach Raster Images You can attach a reference to a raster image file to a drawing file using a linked image path. The image file can be accessed from the Internet. Images can be referenced and placed in drawing files, but like external references (xrefs), they are not actually part of the drawing file.
what custom cabinets will look like has the manufacturer create a rendered image of the cabinets, post it to a website, and then attach the image to the drawing file as a URL; any design changes can be updated immediately. For more information, see Reference Other Drawing Files on page 1771. To attach an image 1 Click Insert tab ➤ References panel ➤ Attach. 2 In the Select Image File dialog box, select a file name from the list or enter the name of the image file in the File Name box. Click Open.
Quick Reference Commands IMAGE Displays the External References palette. IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file. Scale Raster Images You can control the size of a raster image in a drawing to match the scale of the drawing. You can specify the raster image scale factor when you attach the image so that the scale of the geometry in the image matches the scale of the geometry in the drawing. The default image scale factor is 1, and the default unit for all images is “Unitless.
3 In the Image dialog box, use one of the following methods to specify insertion point, scale, or rotation: ■ Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to insert the image at the location, scale, or angle you want. ■ Clear Specify On-Screen and enter values under Insertion Point, Scale, or Rotation. To view the unit of measurement for the image, click Details. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands IMAGE Displays the External References palette. IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. Modify Raster Images and Image Boundaries You can control the clipping boundaries and image display properties of a raster image. Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries You can control whether the clipping boundaries of a raster image are displayed or hidden in a drawing. You can hide image boundaries. Hiding the image boundary prevents the boundary from being plotted or displayed.
Quick Reference Commands IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. System Variables FRAMESELECTION Controls whether the frame of an image, underlay, or clipped xref can be selected. Clip Raster Images You can clip and display specific portions of a raster image in a drawing with a clipping boundary. With a clipping boundary, only the parts of the image that you want visible are displayed.
With IMAGEFRAME system variable, you can control the visibility of the clipping boundary. See also: ■ Clip External References and Blocks on page 1793 ■ Clip Underlays on page 1903 To clip an image 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Clip ➤ Image. 2 Select the image to clip by selecting the image boundary. 3 At the Command prompt, Enter n (New Boundary). 4 Enter p (Polygonal) or r (Rectangular), and then draw the boundary on the image.
To change the boundary of a clipped image 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Clip ➤ Image. 2 Select the image to clip by selecting the image boundary. 3 Enter n (New Boundary). 4 Enter n (No) or y (Yes) to delete the old boundary. 5 Enter p (Polygonal) or r (Rectangular), and then draw the new boundary on the image. If you are drawing a polygonal boundary, you are prompted to specify consecutive vertices. To finish drawing a polygon, press Enter or right-click anywhere in the drawing area.
System Variables IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade You can change several display properties of raster images in a drawing for easier viewing or special effects. You can adjust brightness, contrast, and fade for the display of an image as well as for plotted output without affecting the original raster image file and without affecting other instances of the image in the drawing.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Modify Color and Transparency for Bitonal Raster Images Bitonal images are images that consist only of a foreground color and a background color. You can change the foreground color and turn the transparency of the background color on and off. Bitonal raster images are images consisting only of a foreground color and a background color. When you attach a bitonal image, the foreground pixels in the image inherit the current settings for color.
Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. TRANSPARENCY Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque. Manage Raster Images You can view and manipulate raster images and change paths to image files using the External References palette. View Raster Image Information You can view file-specific information about the raster images that are attached to a drawing.
level within referenced drawings and blocks. The status, size, and other information is displayed below in the Details pane. In either view, you can display information about an image; attach or detach the image; unload or reload the image; and browse for and save a new search path. Use the List View The list view displays the images and any other external references attached to the current drawing, but it does not specify the number of instances. It is the default view.
View Image File Details In the lower panes of the External References palette, you can preview a selected image or view image file details, including ■ Image name ■ Saved path ■ Active path (where the image is found) ■ File creation date ■ File size ■ File type ■ Color ■ Color depth ■ Image size (pixel width and height, resolution and default size) View Image Information in the Text Window You can view image information at the Command prompt.
3 If the View Pane is not open, click the Preview button. The file preview is displayed. 4 To view file details, click the Details button. The file details (image size) are displayed. To preview an image that has not been attached 1 Click Insert menu ➤ Raster Image Referencemage. 2 In the Select Image File dialog box, select an image file to display a preview. If a preview of the image is not displayed, click Show Preview. 3 Click Open. 4 In the Image dialog box, click Details.
Assign Descriptive Names to Raster Images When the name of a raster image file is not sufficient to identify an image, you can add a descriptive name using the External Reference palette. Image names are not necessarily the same as image file names. When you attach an image to a drawing, the program uses the file name without the file extension as the image name. Image names are stored in a symbol table; thus you can change the image name without affecting the name of the file.
To locate the image file, the program searches the following paths and folders in the following order: ■ Path specified when the image was attached ■ Folder containing the current drawing file ■ Project search paths specified on the Files tab of the Options dialog box ■ Support search paths specified on the Files tab of the Options dialog box ■ Start In folder specified in the program shortcut If you open a drawing that contains an image that is not in the saved path location or in any of the defi
System Variables PROJECTNAME Assigns a project name to the current drawing. Tune Raster Image Performance You can reduce the demands on system performance when manipulating large or many small raster images. Load and Unload Raster Images You can improve performance by unloading images when you do not need them in the current drawing session. Unloaded images are not displayed or plotted; only the image boundary is displayed. Unloading an image does not alter its link.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images To increase the display speed of images, you can change image display quality, hide images not currently needed, use image tiling, or suppress image selection highlighting. To increase the display speed of images, you can change image display quality from the default high quality to draft quality.
■ True Color (24 or 32 bits per pixel) You can save tiled TIFF images with most image scanning tools. The image tiles should be no smaller than 64 x 64 pixels and no larger than 512 x 512 pixels. Additional file readers that support other tiled formats, such as CALS Type II, are available from third-party developers.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables IMAGEHLT Controls whether the entire raster image or only the raster image frame is highlighted. Export Drawings to Other File Formats If you need to use the information from a drawing file in another application, you can convert it to a specific format by exporting it. Export DWF and DWFx Files Sets of drawings are the primary deliverable for most design groups.
To export multiple layouts to a DWF or DWFx file 1 Hold the Shift key down and click to select the layout tabs. 2 Right click and select Publish Selected Layouts. 3 In the Publish dialog box, select DWF or DWFx from the Publish To: drop-down list and click Publish. Quick Reference Commands DGNEXPORT Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format.
System Variables DWFFORMAT Sets the default format to DWF or DWFx for output in specific commands. EXPORTEPLOTFORMAT Sets the default electronic file output type: PDF, DWF, or DWFx. EXPORTMODELSPACE Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from Model space EXPORTPAGESETUP Specifies whether to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file with the current page setup. Export PDF Files You can export a drawing as a PDF file to facilitate sharing information with other design groups.
3 In the Publish dialog box, select PDF from the Publish To: drop-down list and click Publish. Quick Reference Commands EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. EXPORTPDF Creates a PDF filewhere you can set individual page setup overrides on a sheet-by-sheet basis. EXPORTSETTINGS Adjusts the page setup and drawing selection when exporting to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.
program that accepts DXF files, you can share a drawing by saving it as a DXF file. You can control floating-point precision of the DXF format up to 16 decimal places and save the drawing in either ASCII or binary format. ASCII format results in a text file that you can read and edit; binary format results in a significantly smaller file that is faster to work with. If you do not want to save the entire drawing, you can choose to export selected objects only.
The FBX file format is an open framework for 3D data transfer that creates a high level of interoperability among Autodesk programs. For example, in Autodesk 3ds Max, you can export a file as an FBX file, and then open that file in AutoCAD to view and edit the objects, lights, cameras, and materials. Likewise, in AutoCAD, you can export a drawing as an FBX file, and then view and edit that file in 3ds Max.
Quick Reference Command FBXEXPORT Creates an Autodesk® FBX file containing selected objects in the current drawing. Export MicroStation DGN Files You can export DWG files created by AutoCAD-based products to the MicroStation® DGN drawing file format. The export process translates basic DWG file data into the corresponding DGN file data.
■ Some data cannot be translated completely. For example, product-specific features such as dynamic blocks, can be represented visually but not behaviorally. ■ Nested references are not merged into the host DGN file when exporting a DWG file with nested references as V7 DGN. The nested reference is not displayed in the host DGN file but the reference chain still exists.
When exporting DWG data to DGN files, you need to specify the conversion units of the DGN seed file (master units or sub-units) correctly based on the drawing units of the DWG file. For example, if the DWG file you are exporting to DGN is drawn in inches, and the DGN seed file you are exporting to has master units set to feet and sub-units set to inches, you need to select sub-units in the Export DGN dialog box.
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES ) is a neutral file format designed to transfer 2D and 3D drawing data between dissimilar CAD systems. The IGES standard defines two file formats: fixed-length ASCII, which stores information in 80-character records, and compressed ASCII. The IGESEXPORT and EXPORT commands support only the fixed-length format. After you start the IGESEXPORT command, you specify the name of the IGES file to create. Thereafter you select what objects to export.
To export selected objects to an IGES file 1 Click Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ Export. 2 In the IGES Export Data dialog box, in the Files of type box, select IGES (*.igs, *.iges). 3 In the File Name box, specify the name of the IGES file. 4 Click Save. 5 Select the objects to export and press ENTER to begin the export process. When export is finished, a notification bubble is displayed. Quick Reference Commands IGESEXPORT Saves selected objects in the current drawing to a new IGES (*.igs, *.iges) file.
Quick Reference Commands EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. WMFOUT Saves objects to a Windows metafile. System Variables WMFBKGND Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. Export Raster Files You can create a device-independent raster image of the objects in your drawing. Several commands can be used to export objects into device-independent raster images in the bitmap, JPEG, TIFF, and PNG formats.
2 In the Create Raster File dialog box, select a folder and enter a file name. Click Save. The .jpg extension is appended to the file name. 3 Select the objects you want to save. To create a TIFF file (TIF) 1 At the Command prompt, enter tifout. 2 In the Create Raster File dialog box, select a folder and enter a file name. Click Save. The .tif extension is appended to the file name. 3 Select the objects you want to save.
TIFOUT Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format. Export PostScript Files You can convert a drawing file to a PostScript file, a format that is used by many desktop publishing applications. The PostScript file format type is used by many desktop publishing applications. Its high-resolution print capabilities make it preferable to raster formats, such as GIF, PCX, and TIFF. By converting the drawing to a PostScript format, you can also use PostScript fonts.
To export a drawing to an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file 1 Click Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ Export. 2 In the Export Data dialog box, specify a location and file name for the EPS file. 3 Under Files of type, select Encapsulated PS (*.eps) 4 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Export ACIS SAT Files You can export certain object types to an ACIS file in ASCII (SAT) format.
Quick Reference Commands ACISOUT Exports a body object, solid, or region to an ACIS file. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. System Variables ACISOUTVER Controls the ACIS version of SAT files created using the ACISOUT command. Export Stereolithography STL Files You can export 3D solid objects in the STL file format compatible with stereolithography or 3D printing.
To export 3D solids to an STL file 1 Click Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ Export. 2 In the Export Data dialog box, enter a file name. 3 Under Files of type, select Lithography (*.stl). Click Save. 4 Select one or more solid objects. All objects must be entirely within the positive XYZ octant of the world coordinate system (WCS). That is, their X, Y, and Z coordinates must be greater than zero. The file extension .stl is automatically appended to the file name.
Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects in Previous Releases You can specify that annotative on page 2289 objects maintain visual fidelity when they are viewed in AutoCAD 2007 (and earlier releases) with the SAVEFIDELITY system variable. If you work primarily in model space, it is recommended that you turn off visual fidelity (set SAVEFIDELITY to 0).
If a viewport containing layer property overrides is deleted when the drawing is opened in a previous release, the override settings are not retained and are not available when the drawing is opened in AutoCAD 2008. When the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 0 when the drawing is opened in a previous release, xref layers containing viewport property overrides are not retained. If you open an AutoCAD 2008 drawing in a previous release, property overrides may display in a thumbnail image.
The following mtext formatting features have no visual fidelity in previous releases: ■ Paragraphs with justified alignment ■ Paragraphs with distributed alignment ■ Fields that wrap across columns ■ Fields that wrap across lines that have new paragraph alignments ■ Paragraphs with non-default alignments in mtext without left object-level justification The following mtext formatting features have some visual fidelity in previous releases (when it’s possible to add white spaces or replace text with
the AutoCAD 2008 format. However, there are some fidelity issues when saving back to previous versions of AutoCAD. ■ Procedural maps Checker, Noise, Speckle, Tiles, and Waves are not available in AutoCAD 2007 (and previous releases.) They do not appear when an AutoCAD 2008 drawing is opened in AutoCAD 2007. Marble and Wood are available but the material mayshow some variation. ■ The behavior of the Opacity map channel under the Realistic material type has been corrected in AutoCAD 2008.
■ Ground Shadows. The intensity of ground shadows in AutoCAD 2008 depends on the brightness of the light and angle of incidence. Multiple-Language Support in Previous Releases Drawing properties in AutoCAD 2008 are saved with Unicode characters. For instance, if you save the latest format drawing containing multiple language drawing properties to a 2004-format drawing, the drawing properties are converted to the native characters of the current Windows language.
To save drawings with visual fidelity for annotative objects 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, under File Save, select Maintain Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects. 3 Click OK. Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats You can save a drawing in a format compatible with previous versions of the product. You can save a drawing created with the current release of the program in a format compatible with previous versions.
is removed, two line objects result and the associated dimension applies to only one of the line objects. Dimension associativity is not maintained when a drawing is saved as an AutoCAD R12/LT 2 DXF file and then reopened in the current release. Save Drawings with Large Objects Drawings saved to a legacy drawing file format (AutoCAD 2007 or earlier) do not support objects greater than 256MB.
■ All solids, bodies, regions, ellipses, leaders, multilines, rays, tolerances, and xlines are converted to lines, arcs, and circles as appropriate. ■ Groups, complex linetypes, OLE objects, and preview images are not displayed. ■ Many objects are lost if you save a drawing as Release 12 and open it in Release 2000/LT 2000 or later. ■ Multiple layouts and layout names are lost. Only the Model tab and the current layout tab are saved.
SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT AutoCAD LT offers full compatibility when working with AutoCAD drawings. However, you should understand how AutoCAD LT handles AutoCAD-only features. Work with Fields In AutoCAD, you can insert LispVariables fields, which are not available in AutoCAD LT.
Work with Constraints Some of the drawings that you work with will contain design requirements enforced within the drawing itself through the use of constraints. Using constraints, you can enforce requirements while experimenting with different designs. A constrained object will move in a predictable manner when edited or moved. A single variable change can cause all related objects to change automatically, enabling you to run through design iterations simply and effectively.
When you place your cursor over a constrained object, you will see a glyph denoting the object is constrained. With AutoCAD LT, you can do the following: ■ View drawings containing constraints created using AutoCAD. ■ View and edit the geometric and dimensional constraints. NOTE You cannot create constraints within AutoCAD LT. Work with Dynamic Blocks In AutoCAD, you can add new constraint parameters to a dynamic block in the Block Editor.
POINTCLOUDAUTOUPDATE Controls whether a point cloud is regenerated automatically after manipulation, panning, zooming, or orbiting. POINTCLOUDDENSITY Controls the number of points displayed at once for all point clouds in the drawing view. POINTCLOUDRTDENSITY Improves performance by degrading the number of points displayed in the drawing view zooming, panning, or orbiting in real time. Work with Custom and Proxy Objects Custom objects provide additional capabilities to the program and related products.
When you open a drawing, you might see a Proxy Information dialog box. The dialog box tells you the total number of proxy objects in the drawing (both graphical and nongraphical) and the name of the missing application and provides additional information about the proxy object type and display state. You can use the dialog box to control the display of proxy objects.
Quick Reference Commands EXPORTTOAUTOCAD Creates a new DWG file with all AEC objects exploded. System Variables PROXYGRAPHICS Specifies whether images of proxy objects are saved in the drawing. PROXYNOTICE Displays a notice when a proxy is created. PROXYSHOW Controls the display of proxy objects in a drawing. PROXYWEBSEARCH Specifies how the program checks for object enablers.
Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets 38 You can extract property data from objects in drawings and export the output to a table or to an external file. Overview of Data Extraction You can extract information from objects, such as block attributes and drawing properties, to create a schedule, a parts list, or a bill of materials. For example, let’s say you have a residential construction project and you need to create a door installation schedule to place in the drawing.
for supplier and cost in the spreadsheet and combine them with the other data in the data extraction. The columns in the Excel spreadsheet will be added to the columns on the Refine Data page in the Data Extraction wizard. All the columns except for Cost were added to the extracted data columns. Excel columns are designated with a symbol in the column label.
The table inserted in the drawing contains columns from both the extracted data and from the Excel spreadsheet. When a drawing from which property data was extracted has changed, you can be notified that the data extraction table is no longer current. For example, if some doors in the drawing were resized or removed, you can choose to be notified that the data extraction table needs to be updated.
The first time you extract data, you are prompted to save the data extraction settings in a data extraction (DXE) file. Later, if you need to edit the data extraction, you select the DXE file, which contains all the settings (data source, selected objects and their properties, output format and table style) that you used to create the extraction.
4 On the Define Data Source page, specify the drawings or folders from which to extract data. Click Next. 5 On the Select Objects page, select the objects from which to extract data. Click Next. 6 On the Select Properties page, select the properties from which to extract data. Click Next. 7 On the Refine Data page, organize the columns if necessary. Click Next. 8 On the Choose Output page, click Insert Data Extraction Table into Drawing to create a data extraction table. Click Next.
Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file. System Variables ERHIGHLIGHT Controls whether reference names or reference objects are highlighted when their counterparts are selected in the External References palette or in the drawing window.
Select the Source for a Data Extraction You can extract data from individual objects in a drawing, and all objects in a single drawing, multiple drawings, or folders. If you select a drawing, all objects in a drawing are extracted, even those that are not visible. If you have specific objects in a drawing that you want to extract data from, you can create an object selection set.
The name of a drawing that was added to the folder after the data extraction was performed is listed in the New Drawings Found dialog box. Using wildcard characters (* and ?) as a search filter, data is extracted from only those drawings that match the search criteria. For example, if a folder contains an entire drawing set for a project, but you want only those drawings that contain piping data, use wild-card characters to find only those drawings. For example, *Pipe*.dwg.
2 In the Data Extraction wizard, on the Define Data Source page, click Add Folder. 3 In the Add Folder Options dialog box, clear Automatically Include New Drawings Added in This Folder to the Data Extraction. 4 To monitor subfolders, click Include Subfolders. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file.
The Select Properties page in the Data Extraction wizard displays a list of properties in columns from the selected objects from the Select Objects page. This is where you make a final selection of the properties from which data will be extracted and output to a columnar format. Using predefined category filters such as general, geometry, or attribute, you can narrow the property list. Property Categories for Filtering a Data Extraction Extracted properties are categorized for easier filtering.
Property Names After the property data is extracted, the default property names are used as the column labels in the data grid (example: Width, Length, Area, and so on). You can change these property names so that column labels are replaced with a name you specify. For example, if you extracted the length property of lines, but the column label needs to indicate the data refers to distance, you can change Length to Distance on the Display Name column on the Select Properties page.
Annotative Objects The property data for annotative objects is extracted using the current annotation scale setting. Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file. Organize and Refine the Extracted Data Extracted data can be organized, refined, and formatted before it is output to a table or external file.
■ Group identical rows or display them individually ■ Preview the table in a separate window ■ Create a data link to an Excel spreadsheet By right-clicking on a column label in the grid view on the Refine Data page, you access options for organizing the information the way you want it to appear in a table or in the order you want it in an external file. Data can be displayed in either an expanded or collapsed format.
in each Excel column label so that you can easily distinguish the columns that are from a spreadsheet from those columns that are from the extracted data. The icon is not displayed in the data extraction table.
4 In the column label field, enter a new name. Press ENTER. To sort extracted data in a column 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Extract Data. 2 In the Data Extraction wizard on the Refine Data page, click Sort Columns Options. 3 In the Sort Columns dialog box, select a column name from the drop-down list. 4 In the Order column, click Ascending or Descending. Click OK. The order of the data in the column is changed. 5 (Optional) To sort additional columns, click Add.
To specify formatting for extracted data in a column 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Extract Data. 2 In the Data Extraction wizard on the Refine Data page, right-click the column label for the column that will have its data type changed. From the shortcut menu, click Set Column Data Format. 3 In the Set Cell Format dialog box, select the data type from the Data Type list (Angle, Currency, Data, Decimal Number, General, Percentage, Point, Text, or Whole Number.
To edit a formula in a formula column added to extracted data 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Extract Data. 2 In the Data Extraction wizard on the Refine Data page, right-click the column label of the formula column. Click Edit Formula Column. 3 In the Edit Formula Column dialog box, make changes to the formula. 4 Click Validate. 5 Click OK. To insert a totals footer row for a column in a data extraction table 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Extract Data.
Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file. System Variables DXEVAL Controls when data extraction tables are compared against the data source, and if the data is not current, displays an update notification. Use Table Styles for Data Extraction Tables A table style or existing table can be used to format a data extraction table.
The bold line around the cells indicate the boundary of the cells that contain the extracted data. Before completing the extraction, you can see the results of your formatting choices in a separate preview window. See also: ■ Work with Table Styles on page 1511 Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file.
On the Refine Data page, you access the Link External Data dialog box; you can set up a link to an entire Excel spreadsheet, or to a range of rows and columns, to the extracted data. Before you can link a spreadsheet, Microsoft Excel needs to be installed on the same computer on which the data extraction is performed. If Microsoft Excel is not installed, or if the XLS file is not saved locally on the computer that is performing the data extraction, a data link cannot be established.
Validate Matched Data The data matching validation process fails when it cannot find a valid match between the drawing data and external data (spreadsheet). The following error messages will display: No match was found between any values in the drawing data and external data. ■ If the problem is not resolved, the external data will not be merged. Compare the spreadsheet column data to the drawing data column for any matching values.
8 In the Link External Data dialog box, in the Drawing Data Column list, specify the column you want to link. 9 In the External Data Column list, specify the Excel column you want to link. 10 Click Check Match. If an error displays, see Data Matching Validation. 11 From the Select External Data Columns to Include, select the Excel columns from the list you want to add to the extracted data. 12 Click OK.
Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file. System Variables DXEVAL Controls when data extraction tables are compared against the data source, and if the data is not current, displays an update notification. Output Extracted Data You can export extracted data to a table or an external file.
■ The cells are locked and their contents cannot be modified unless they are unlocked. (Be default, formatting for cells is unlocked.) Cells in a data extraction table are locked by default to prevent editing. Individual cells or the entire table can be unlocked if you want to make data changes. See Modify a Data Extraction Table on page 1999 for more information.
columns can be exported to the comma-separated (CSV) and tab-separated (TXT) file formats. To export extracted data to an external file using the Data Extraction wizard 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data. 2 In the Data Extraction wizard, click Next on each page until the Choose Output page is displayed. 3 Click Output Data to External File. 4 Click the Browse button. Select a file format from the drop-down list. 5 Click Next. Proceed through the wizard until the Finish page displays.
Update Extracted Data Extracted data in a table can be updated either manually or automatically. Overview of Updating Extracted Data Extracted data can be updated so that it is current with the data source. You can manually update the extracted data, whether it is output to a data extraction table or to an external file, or rely on a notification to display when using certain trigger commands, such as SAVE or PLOT. You can then update the table from the Data Extraction - Outdated Table dialog box.
To convert an attribute extraction table to a data extraction table 1 Right-click the attribute extraction table. Click Convert to Data Extraction Table. 2 In the dialog box, enter a name for the data extraction (DXE) file and click Save. Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file.
Using the data extraction (DXE) file, you can also edit an existing data extraction to add or remove drawings, add or remove objects, or select different properties from which to extract data. Tables that reference the same DXE file, even if those tables are in other drawings, will display the changes when those tables are updated.
To view a data extraction (DXE) file associated with a data extraction table ■ In the drawing, right-click a cell in the data extraction table. Click Cell Data Link. The path and the DXE file name is displayed. To view a data extraction (DXE) file and linked Excel (XLS) file associated with a drawing ■ Click Insert ➤ External References. The file name and path are displayed. If a data link exists to a Microsoft Excel (XLS) file, information about the data link is displayed on the Details pane.
When information in the data source has changed that affects the extracted data in a table, you are notified the data is not current. (Notification does not occur with attribute extraction tables.) Depending on how the DXEVAL system variable is set, the Data Extraction - Outdated Table dialog box displays when certain commands are used, such as OPEN or SAVE. By default, DXEVAL is set to check if the extracted data is not current without automatically updating it when the PLOTor ETRANSMIT commands are used.
System Variables DXEVAL Controls when data extraction tables are compared against the data source, and if the data is not current, displays an update notification. Modify a Data Extraction Table You can modify a data extraction table by changing the formatting, adding columns and rows, or editing data in the cells. Once a data extraction table is inserted into the drawing, you can make formatting changes, add columns and rows, and edit cells containing extracted data.
additional data is extracted during an update, or conversely, there are fewer columns or rows containing extracted data. For example, if you added a row and column to a table after you inserted into the drawing, the area populated with extracted data will be expanded by an additional column after the table is updated. The column and row that you manually added are still part of the table, but a blank cell is created where a void exists in the table.
To identify which cells in a table are unlocked or locked 1 In the drawing, right-click a cell in the data extraction table. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, look at the Cell Locking field. One of the following states display ■ If the cell is unlocked for data and formatting, Unlocked displays. ■ If the cell is locked for data, Data Locked displays. ■ If the cell is locked for formatting, Format Locked displays.
System Variables DXEVAL Controls when data extraction tables are compared against the data source, and if the data is not current, displays an update notification. Detach a Data Extraction Table To completely remove a data extraction table, you need to detach it. You can delete a data extraction table from the External References Palette by detaching it. Quick Reference Commands DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file.
Access External Databases 39 You can use the program to associate, or link, data stored in external database programs such as dBASE, Oracle, and Microsoft Access with graphical objects. You can use all of the external database features without prior knowledge of databases or query languages. This section, however, does not cover in detail the theory of database design or the semantics of Structured Query Language (SQL).
Most database systems are extremely flexible and can be easily modified. You can add new fields or remove existing ones from database tables. Likewise, you can add or delete records from database tables and edit existing records. With many databases, you can also define relationships between multiple database tables. For example, suppose you have two database tables that share a common field, Room ID. Using a relational database, you can join these two database tables using their common field.
Access a Database from Within Drawings When you have configured a data source, you can view and edit its records from within a drawing file. Configure a Database for Use with Drawing Files The configuration process involves creating a new data source that points to a collection of data and provides information about the drivers necessary to access it.
■ Paradox ■ Microsoft Visual FoxPro ■ SQL Server NOTE The 64-bit release of AutoCAD does not support the use of Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider (for .MDB connectivity) and Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers (for .XLS connectivity). For more information, see Substituting SQL Server for OLE DB. The program includes a Microsoft Access sample database file and a preconfigured direct driver (jet_dbsamples.udl) that you can use to work with the database. You do not need to have Access installed.
All of the various nodes and database objects in the dbConnect Manager have shortcut menu options associated with them. For example, you can use shortcut menu options to configure a data source or edit a stored query. To open and close the dbConnect Manager ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. To update the jet_dbsamples.udl configuration file with new information 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, in the tree view, right-click Data Sources.
View Data in a Database Table When you have configured a data source, you can use the Data View window to view database records from within the program. Once you have configured a data source, you can access its database tables from within the program. The Data View is a window where you can view and edit database records. You can open database tables in Read-only mode or in Edit mode. You cannot add, delete, or edit records in a database table that you open in Read-only mode.
The Data View window provides a great deal of flexibility in how records are displayed.
2 Do one of the following: ■ To open a database table in Read-only mode, click DbConnect menu ➤ View Data ➤ View External Table. ■ To open a database table in Edit mode, click DbConnect menu ➤ View Data ➤ Edit External Table. If required by the database to which you are connecting, you are prompted to enter a valid user name and password. 3 In the Select Data Object dialog box, navigate to and select the database table you want to open. Click OK.
To hide a column in a database table 1 In the Data View window, select the column header of the column that you want to hide. 2 Right-click the column header. Click Hide. To display all hidden columns in a database table ■ Right-click any column header in the Data View window. Click Unhide All. To specify a sort order for the Data View window display 1 Right-click any column header in the Data View window. Click Sort. 2 Select a column to sort in the Sort By list.
To align text in a column or columns 1 Select one or more columns in the Data View window whose text you want to align. 2 Right-click any column header. Click Align. 3 Select one of the following to align the text: ■ Standard. Right-aligns numeric fields and left-aligns all other fields. ■ Left. Left-aligns the column cells. ■ Center. Center-aligns the column cells. ■ Right. Right-aligns the column cells.
Edit Data in a Database Table In the Data View window, you can search database records for a particular value, and you can add, delete, or change records. If you have opened a database table in Edit mode, you can edit its data in a number of ways. You can add or delete records, or edit a record's values. You can also search a particular column for occurrences of a specific value. NOTE The Find option limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell.
2 Select a cell in the new record and enter a value. 3 Repeat step 2 for any additional fields. To delete a database record ■ In the Data View window, right-click a record header (the empty square at the left of the row) of the record that you want to delete. Click Delete Record. To search the Data View window for a particular value 1 Right-click a cell in the column that you want to search. Click Find. 2 Enter a value to search for in Find What.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace additional occurrences of the value you're searching for. NOTE The Replace option limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell. There is no way to issue a global Replace command that searches the entire database table for a specific value. You must select individual cells in any additional columns you want to search, and then click Replace again.
information contained in a room database with a polyline object representing a room boundary in a drawing. You establish the association between the graphical object and the database table by creating a link, which references one or more records stored in the database table. You cannot create links to nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes. Links are tightly connected with the graphical objects they are associated with. If you move or copy a linked object, the link is moved or copied with it.
Edit Link Templates Occasionally after creating a link template, you may want to edit it. For example, you might decide to add an additional key field or remove an existing one. You may also need to update a link template if any changes are made to the data source it points to. For example, you might rename a database table or move it to a different location. NOTE You can only change the key fields of link templates that don't have any links defined in their associated drawing.
4 Select one or more key fields by clicking in their check boxes. You should keep the number of key fields to a minimum. Large numbers of key fields can have a negative impact on the performance of Link Select and other connectivity operations. 5 Click OK to create the link template. To create a link between an object and a record in an external database 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, open a database table that has at least one link template defined.
To edit a link template 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 Click DbConnect menu ➤ Templates ➤ Edit Link Template. 3 In the Select a Database Object dialog box, select a link template to edit. Click Continue. 4 Select one or more key fields from the list by clicking their check boxes. 5 Click OK to save your changes to the link template. To update a link template's properties 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 Click DbConnect menu ➤ Templates ➤ Link Template Properties.
6 Enter a new value in the Value field of the key field you want to edit, or click the [...] button. Repeat, if necessary, for any additional key fields that you want to edit. The [...] button displays a list of all values for the specified field from the database table, allowing you to select the value you want. After selecting a value, click OK. NOTE The [...] button is available only if you are connected to the data source that the selected link references.
Other Display Options You can use the Data View and Query Options dialog box to set a number of viewing options that affect how linked records and linked graphical objects are displayed whenever a corresponding linked item is selected. The Automatically Pan Drawing option automatically pans the drawing to display objects that are associated with the current selection set of records in the Data View window.
For a description of all the options available, see “Data View and Query Options Dialog Box” under DBCONNECT in the Command Reference. To view graphical objects that are linked to a set of database records 1 In the dbConnect Manager, double-click a database table to open it. 2 In the Data View window, select a link template from the Link Template list. 3 In the Data View window, select one or more records. 4 Right-click the selected record.
5 Repeat step 4 to select additional linked graphical objects. 6 Repeat step 3 to turn off the AutoView Linked Objects mode. To automatically view database table records that are linked to a selection set of objects 1 In the dbConnect Manager, double-click a database table to open it. 2 In the Data View window, select a link template from the Link Template list. 3 In the Data View window, click the AutoView Linked Records in Data View button. 4 In the drawing area, select one or more graphical objects.
It is recommended that you periodically check the links in your drawings to update or delete broken links. The program provides a Synchronize option to analyze the links in a drawing that are based on a particular link template. After you run the Synchronize option, a list of detected errors is provided in the Synchronize dialog box. Certain errors (such as a resized column in the source database table) can be fixed directly from the Synchronize dialog box.
database that your drawing is linked to does not contain this information. All the database provides is a list of the various light fixtures that make up its record set. The database table has no knowledge of the number of instances of individual light fixtures in your drawing. If you want to prepare a summary report containing this information, you have to export the links in your drawing. To export links from a drawing 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect.
Use Labels to Display Database Information in the Drawing Labels are multiline text objects that display data in a drawing from selected fields stored in an external database table. Create and Edit Labels and Label Templates Labels may be freestanding or attached to an object. The label template defines what fields from the database table are displayed in the label. Links provide a powerful mechanism for associating external data with program graphical objects.
Edit Label Templates After defining a label template, you might have cause to edit it. For example, you may decide that you want additional database table fields to be displayed in your drawings, or that you want to change the font or size of the label object. You can also specify a number of offset settings that affect the insertion point of labels and, in the case of attached labels, their associated leader objects.
Label Offset tab options Option Freestanding labels Attached labels Y Tip Offset settings of -1 cause the label to be inserted offset 1 negative unit in the X and Y planes from the insertion point you specify in the drawing. setting of Top Left for a label attached to a rectangle graphical object. You also specify X and Y Tip Offset values of 1. The tip of the leader is inserted offset 1 positive unit in the X and Y planes from the upper left corner of the rectangle.
7 Click OK. To create a link with a freestanding label 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, open a database table that has at least one link template and one label template defined. 3 In the Data View window, select a link template from the Link Template list. 4 In the Data View window, select a label template from the Label Template list. 5 In the Data View window, select the record that you want to link.
6 Click Data View menu ➤ Link And Label Settings ➤ Create Attached Labels. 7 Click Data View menu ➤ Link. 8 Select an object or objects in the drawing that you want the label associated with. 9 Press Enter. To edit a label template 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, in the tree view, right-click a label template to edit. Click Edit. 3 In the Label Template dialog box, make the changes you want as described in To create a label template. 4 Click OK.
Quick Reference Commands DBCONNECT Provides an interface to external database tables. Update Labels with New Values from the Database When database records change, you update labels to reflect the new values. After you have added labels to your drawings, you may make occasional changes to the database tables that affect the label values. If you make frequent changes to your database tables, you must regularly update the labels in your drawings to ensure data integrity.
Use Queries to Filter Database Information A query to the database is a search criterion that you construct to return the records you want. Overview of Queries Part of the fundamental power of database systems is their ability to present a subset of records based on a search criterion or query that you specify. For example, you might have a database table containing records of all the rooms that exist at your company's headquarters facilities.
For example, you can find all records from the current database table where the value of the "room type" field equals "office." ■ Range Query. Provides an environment where you can develop a query that returns all records that fall within a given range of values. For example, you can find all records from the current database table where the value of the "room area" field is greater than or equal to 90 square feet and less than or equal to 120 square feet. ■ Query Builder.
Construct Simple Queries The simplest query uses one operator to search one field for a certain value. The range query searches one field to return records that fall within a range you specify. The Quick Query Tab The Quick Query tab is designed to familiarize you with query syntax as quickly as possible. Constructing a quick query involves selecting a field from the current database table, applying a conditional operator to it, and specifying a value for the field.
To construct a quick query 1 Open the Query Editor. 2 On the Quick Query tab, select a field from the Field list. 3 Select an operator from the Operator list. 4 Enter a value in the Value field, or click Look Up Values. Look Up Values returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table, so you can select the value that you want. After selecting a value, click OK. 5 Select one or both of the following: ■ Indicate Records in Data View.
2 On the Range Query tab, select a field from the Field list. 3 Enter a value in From, or click Look Up Values (From). Look Up Values displays a list of all values for the specified field from the database table, so you can select the value that you want. After selecting a value, click OK. The query searches for all values greater than or equal to the value that you specify. 4 Enter a value in Through, or click Look Up Values (Through).
Use the Query Builder Boolean operators and parenthetical grouping are used to create queries with two or more search criteria. The Query Builder tab is the primary query environment. Unlike the Quick Query and Range Query tabs, the Query Builder can be used to create queries based on multiple criteria. You can also parenthetically group criteria and specify what fields are displayed and how they are sorted when the query is returned in the Data View window.
To open the Query Editor 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ dbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, in the tree view, select a database table. 3 Click the New Query button. 4 In the New Query dialog box, enter a name for the query in New Query Name. 5 Click Continue to open the Query Editor. To construct a query with a single parameter on the Query Builder tab 1 Open the Query Editor. 2 On the Query Builder tab, select a field from the drop-down list in the Field cell.
To construct a query with multiple parameters on the Query Builder tab 1 Enter the first parameter of your query as described above. 2 Select the appropriate And or Or operator from the Logical field. Clicking in the Logical field inserts an And operator. Clicking the cell again changes the value to Or. 3 Enter additional query parameters on subsequent rows of the Query grid. 4 Repeat step 2 for each additional parameter except the final query parameter. 5 Apply any parenthetical grouping, if appropriate.
Quick Reference Commands DBCONNECT Provides an interface to external database tables. Use SQL Queries If your database is fully compliant with the SQL 92 standard, you can use SQL statements to query more than one database table at a time. The SQL Query tab provides you with both a query editor box where you can enter a free-form SQL query and a set of tools to assist you in constructing a query.
The following additional interface elements are introduced on the SQL Query tab: ■ Table List. Lists all database tables available in the current data source. You can add tables to the SQL query editor by double-clicking them, by selecting them and choosing Add, or by typing their names directly in the SQL query editor. ■ Check. Checks your SQL query for proper syntax without actually executing it. This function helps you isolate syntax errors before you issue your query.
issue a query to further refine your selection set. This second selection set is referred to as set B. You must establish a relationship between set A and set B to further refine the selection set. The following relationships or set operations are available: ■ Select. Creates an initial query or selection set. This selection set can be refined through subsequent Link Select operations. ■ Union. Adds the results of the new query or selection set to the running selection set.
3 Select the Select option from the Do list. 4 Select a link template from Using. 5 Select one of the following options: ■ Use Query. Constructs a query using one of the tabs in the Query Editor. ■ Select in Drawing. Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select graphical objects in the drawing. When you select the Select in Drawing option, the Execute button changes to Select. 6 Click either Execute or Select to add your query or graphical object selection set to the Link Select operation.
■ Indicate Objects in Drawing. Creates a selection set of linked graphical objects in the drawing area when you click Finish. You can perform further Link Select iterations by pressing Enter at the command prompt. NOTE It is recommended that you turn off the Indicate Records in Data View option if you are performing a Link Select operation on links from more than one database table. Link Select only displays records from the table that the current link template references.
3 Use the Query Editor dialog box to make the necessary changes. Click Store to save the edited query with the current drawing. To rename a stored query 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, right-click the query you want to rename. Click Rename. 3 Enter a new name for the query. Press Enter. To delete a stored query 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, in the tree view, right-click a stored query. Click Delete.
Quick Reference Commands DBCONNECT Provides an interface to external database tables. Share Link and Label Templates and Queries with Other Users You can export and import links and link templates, labels and label templates, and queries. Occasionally you may want to make templates or queries that you have developed available to other users, or use templates or queries that others have developed.
4 Under File Name, specify a name for the template set. Click Save. To import a set of queries into the current drawing 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 In the dbConnect Manager, in the tree view, right-click a drawing file. Click Import Query Set. 3 In the Import Query Set dialog box, select the query set. 4 Click Open to import the query set into the current drawing.
replaces key column in Release 14; link template replaces link path name; and label replaces displayable attribute. You also need to create a configuration file that points to the data source referenced by the legacy links. When you open a drawing that contains legacy links, the program attempts to perform an automatic conversion of the legacy information. If, for example, you open a Release 14 drawing that contains links that point to a data source with the structure db3.ase.db3sample.
■ In Environment, enter the name of the Release 13 or Release 14 environment for the link that you want to convert. ■ In Catalog, enter the name of the Release 13 or Release 14 catalog for the link that you want to convert. ■ In Schema, enter the name of the Release 13 or Release 14 schema for the link that you want to convert. ■ In Table, enter the name of the Release 13 or Release 14 database table for the link that you want to convert .
NOTE You must specify an environment, database table, and link path name for all links that you convert. Catalog and schema are optional parameters that are not required by all database management systems. To convert Release 12 links 1 Click Toolsmenu ➤ Palettes ➤ DbConnect. 2 Click DbConnect menu ➤ Link Conversion. 3 In Old Link Format, do all of the following: ■ Select R12 Link Format. ■ In DBMS, enter the name of the Release 12 database management system for the link that you want to convert.
■ Select the appropriate catalog from the Catalog list. ■ Select the appropriate schema from the Schema list. ■ Select the appropriate table from the Table list. ■ Select the appropriate link template from the Link Template list. 5 Click OK. 6 Open the drawing whose links you want to convert, and then save it.
2052
Part 12: Collaborate with Others 2053
2054
Protect and Sign Drawings 40 You can provide a safe environment for sending and receiving data, and maintain the authenticity of drawings. A password protects a drawing with encryption, and a digital signature identifies an individual or an organization through a digital ID (certificate). Drawing Encryption When a password is attached to a drawing, the password encrypts the drawing and prevents unauthorized people from viewing it.
measures such as a secure intranet and rules about information disclosure, that would help keep the factory design confidential. Passwords work only on AutoCAD 2004® and later drawing files (DWG, DWS, and DWT files). NOTE If you want to attach a password and a digital signature to a drawing file, attach the password first. Modifications to files, including the adding of passwords, invalidate their digital signatures.
If you encrypt drawing properties, such as the title, author, subject, and keywords, then a password is required to view the properties and thumbnail preview of the drawing. If you decide to specify an encryption type and key length, you can select them from the ones available on your computer. NOTE Settings for a password apply only to the current drawing. To add a password while modifying a drawing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, click Security Options.
To remove a password from a drawing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, click Security Options. 3 In the Security Options dialog box, Password tab, clear the Password or Phrase to Open This Drawing option. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. Choose the Type of Encryption You can choose an advanced encryption level to protect your drawing.
5 In the Security Options dialog box, click OK. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. View Password-Protected Drawings To view the data in a password-protected drawing, you must first obtain and enter the password. After you enter the password, it stays with the drawing, even if you modify and save the drawing, unless you remove the password.
2 In the Select File dialog box, select a file. Click Open. 3 In the Password dialog box, enter a password. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. View Password-Protected Xrefs You can view drawings that contain xrefs to password-protected drawings. If you open a password-protected drawing that contains xrefs, you must enter a password for any xref whose password is different from the current drawing's password.
View Properties of an Encrypted Drawing You can view drawing properties, such as the title, author, subject, and keywords, unless they were encrypted when a password was attached to the drawing. If drawing properties were not encrypted when a password was attached, you can view the properties in your operating system's Properties dialog box. To view properties of an encrypted drawing 1 In Windows Explorer, locate the file whose properties you want to view. 2 Right-click the file name. Click Properties.
■ A signed file cannot be rejected as invalid. The signer of a file cannot disown the file later by claiming the signature was forged. A digital signature is not the same as a digitized signature. While a digital signature helps prove your identity and a drawing's authenticity, a digitized signature is nothing more than an electronic version of your own signature. It can be forged and copied, and has no real security value.
Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. Personally Sign Drawings When you attach a digital signature to a file, anyone who views the file is notified if modifications were made after you signed it. Modifications invalidate a digital signature. Obtain a Digital ID To attach a digital signature to a file, you must have a digital ID (certificate), which is issued by a certificate authority. A digital ID identifies either an individual or an organization.
To obtain a digital ID on the Internet 1 Open a search engine in your Internet browser and search for the term “digital certificate.” 2 Click a search result to find out more about a digital ID vendor and how to obtain a digital ID. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. SIGVALIDATE Displays information about the digital signature attached to a drawing file.
NOTE Unless you use the Attach Digital Signatures utility, you must individually sign each drawing. To set an option for a signature to be attached after you save a file 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Options. In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, click Security Options. ■ Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, click Tools ➤ Security Options. 2 In the Security Options dialog box, Digital Signature tab, select Attach Digital Signature After Saving Drawing.
Attach Digital Signatures to Multiple Files When you attach a digital signature to a set of files, you are helping to ensure that anyone viewing the files knows about any changes that are made to the files after you signed them.
8 If the file you want to sign is read-only, the Read-only File dialog box is displayed. Do one of the following: ■ To sign a read-only file, click Yes. ■ To sign all read-only files, select Use the Same Answer for All Read-only Files in This Batch. Click Yes. ■ To cancel the application of the digital signature to a single read-only file, click No. ■ To cancel the application of the digital signature to all of the read-only files, click Cancel.
Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. Add a Comment and Time Stamp You can add a comment and time stamp to a digital signature. Servers are used to obtain the current time when adding a time stamp to a digital signature. When you send drawing files over the Internet or work on collaborative projects, you can use a specific server to create an accurate, consistent time stamp.
To choose a time server and add a comment 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Options. In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, click Security Options. ■ Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, click Tools ➤ Security Options. 2 In the Security Options dialog box, Digital Signature tab, select Attach Digital Signature After Saving Drawing. 3 In the Get Time Stamp From box, click a time server. 4 In the Comment box, add a comment. 5 Click OK.
SIGVALIDATE Displays information about the digital signature attached to a drawing file. System Variables SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. Digitally Sign an Encrypted Drawing You can attach a password and a digital signature to a drawing file. The password must be attached first.
Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. View Drawings with Digital Signatures Digital signatures provide an electronic means of verifying the authenticity of signatures that are attached to drawing files. Overview of Drawings with Digital Signatures A digital signature identifies an individual or an organization through a digital ID (certificate), and enables you to validate the file.
View Digital Signature Details When you receive a file that contains a digital signature, you can check whether the file was modified since it was signed, and other information. An icon is displayed in the status bar when a file contains digital signature information.
In the Digital Signature Contents dialog box, in the Other Fields list, select details of the digital signature, such as the issuer, beginning and expiration dates of the digital ID, and the serial number. 5 Click Close. To validate a signature using the Validate Digital Signatures icon 1 Open a signed file. 2 On the status bar, click the Validate Digital Signatures icon. 3 In the Validate Digital Signatures dialog box, if the file has a valid digital signature, click View Base Signature.
5 When you have finished viewing the digital signature information, click OK. To identify a signed file in Windows Explorer ■ In Windows Explorer, locate files that you want to check for a digital signature. Signed files are displayed with the Digital Signatures icon. To turn on or off the Digital Signatures icon display in Windows Explorer 1 In Windows Explorer, locate a file that has a digital signature icon. 2 Right-click the file name. Click Enable/Disable Digital Signature Icons.
System Variables SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files.
Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. SIGVALIDATE Displays information about the digital signature attached to a drawing file. System Variables SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files.
41 Use the Internet for Collaboration You can access and store drawings and related files on the Internet. Get Started with Internet Access Before you can transfer or save files to an Internet or an intranet location, you have to get access permissions and take security precautions. In this topic and others, the term Internet is used to refer to both the Internet and an intranet. An intranet is a private network that uses the same standards as the Internet.
Quick Reference Commands BROWSER Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. System Variables HYPERLINKBASE Specifies the path used for all relative hyperlinks in the drawing. INETLOCATION Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web dialog box. Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing You can add hyperlinks that provide jumps in your drawings to specific files or websites.
partial path to a file location, relative to a default URL or directory you specify using the HYPERLINKBASE system variable. Quick Reference Commands ATTACHURL Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing. DETACHURL Removes hyperlinks in a drawing. GOTOURL Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink.
Use a Hyperlink to Access a File or a Web Page Hyperlinks can point to files that are stored locally, on a network drive, or on the Internet, or to named locations in drawings, such as views. By default, the hyperlink cursor and tooltip are displayed when the crosshairs are positioned over an object that has an attached hyperlink. You can then hold down the CTRL key and click (CTRL+click) to follow the link. NOTE The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks.
3 Do one of the following: ■ Under Type the File or Web Page Name, enter the path and name of the file that you want to associate with the hyperlink. ■ Click the File button. Navigate to the location of the file that you want to associate with the hyperlink. Click Open. 4 (Optional) If you are creating a hyperlink to a drawing, select Target to specify a named location in the drawing to jump to and do the following: ■ Select a named location to jump to. ■ Click OK.
To remove a hyperlink from a graphical object 1 In the drawing area, select one or more graphical objects that use the same hyperlink. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink. 3 In the drawing area, select one or more graphical objects that use the same hyperlink. 4 Click Remove Hyperlink. Click OK. To open a file associated with a hyperlink 1 In the drawing area, select a graphical object with an attached hyperlink.
2 On the Summary tab, enter a relative path in Hyperlink Base. 3 Click OK. To create a relative hyperlink 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink. 2 In the drawing area, select one or more graphical objects to attach the hyperlink to. 3 Enter the name of the file to attach in Type the File or Web Page Name. Do not enter any path information with the file name, or you will create a full hyperlink. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands ATTACHURL Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing.
OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables HYPERLINKBASE Specifies the path used for all relative hyperlinks in the drawing. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. Use a Hyperlink to Create an Email Message Typically you use hyperlinks in a drawing to associate graphical objects with related documents.
Quick Reference Commands HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. System Variables PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. Use Hyperlinks in Blocks Hyperlinks can be associated with blocks, including nested objects contained within blocks. If the blocks contain any relative hyperlinks, the relative hyperlinks adopt the relative base path of the current drawing when you insert them.
2 Use one of the following methods to follow the link: ■ Hold down the CTRL key and click. ■ Right-click. Click Hyperlink. Select the name of the hyperlink you want. Each hyperlink has either a description or the full URL to the referenced file. Quick Reference Commands ATTACHURL Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing. DETACHURL Removes hyperlinks in a drawing. GOTOURL Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object.
2 Use one of the following methods to follow the link: ■ Hold down the CTRL key and click. ■ Right-click. Click Hyperlink. Select the name of the hyperlink you want. Each hyperlink has either a description or the full URL to the referenced file. A new drawing opens based on the hyperlinked DWT file. NOTE If you have turned off display of the hyperlink cursor, Hyperlink options are not available on the shortcut menu.
Open and Save Drawing Files from the Internet The file input and output commands recognize any valid Uniform Resource Locator (URL) path to a DWG file. You can use AutoCAD to open and save files from the Internet. The AutoCAD file input and output commands (OPEN, EXPORT, and so on) recognize any valid URL path to an AutoCAD file. The drawing file that you specify is downloaded to your computer and opened in the AutoCAD drawing area.
3 In the Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog box, under Name of FTP Site, enter the site name for the FTP location (for example, ftp.autodesk.com). 4 Under Log On As, select one of the following: ■ Anonymous. Logs on to the FTP site as an anonymous user. If the FTP site does not allow anonymous logons, select User and enter a valid user name. ■ User. Logs on to the FTP site using the specified user name. 5 Enter a password if required by the FTP site. 6 Click Add. Click OK.
To save a drawing file to the Internet by browsing an FTP site 1 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Save Drawing As dialog box, select FTP from the Places list. If you have not yet added the FTP site to the available FTP locations, click Tools ➤ Add/Modify FTP Locations and define the FTP location. 3 Double-click one of the FTP sites, and select a file. 4 Select a file format from the Files of Type list. Click Save. To save an file to the Internet by browsing a web folder 1 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
To open an file from the Internet with the Browse the Web dialog box 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click the Search the Web button. Many Internet connections require you to enter a valid user name and password before accessing the Internet. AutoCAD prompts you to enter this information. 3 In the Browse the Web dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Click a hyperlink on the HTML page that is displayed. ■ Enter a full or partial URL in Look In, and then press ENTER.
EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. Share Drawing Files Internationally Beginning with AutoCAD 2007-based products, drawing files and most files associated with drawing files use the Unicode standard. This lets you maintain both the visual fidelity and data integrity of international characters when you save and open drawing files.
■ Linetype and hatch pattern file names and their contents ■ Text used in notes and dimensions within a drawing ■ DWF or DWFx markup files This means that drawings can be opened, worked on, and saved worldwide regardless of language-specific characters. The only requirement is that the appropriate language pack must be installed first.
SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT Provides Unicode options for log files. Access Buzzsaw for Project Collaboration Using Autodesk® Buzzsaw® you can store, manage, and share documents that populate a Buzzsaw site. Buzzsaw is a secure, online project collaboration service in which members in different locations can post files to and access files from a centralized site.
■ eTransmit Support. You can send a transmittal set of DWG files to a Buzzsaw site and you can create and send a transmittal set using the Sheet Set Manager. If you plan to use Buzzsaw for project collaboration, set up some shortcuts so you can navigate to frequently used sites more quickly. Using the Buzzsaw icon in the Places list, you can specify a shortcut to an existing project collaboration site from the list or create a new shortcut using the Add a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut.
7 In the Select a Buzzsaw Location dialog box, navigate to a project or folder you want to access. Click OK. The path is displayed in the Select a Buzzsaw Folder, Project, or Document Set box. 8 Under Enter a Name for This Buzzsaw Location Shortcut, enter a name for the shortcut. Click OK. You are returned to the File navigation dialog box; the shortcut has been created. You can double-click the shortcut to access the Buzzsaw location specified by the shortcut.
6 In the Create a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut dialog box, under Select a Buzzsaw Folder, Project, or Document Set, click the Browse button to navigate to the location of the project or folder. 7 In the directory tree of the Select a Buzzsaw Location dialog box, click the site name to view the contents and navigate to either a project or folder. Click OK. The path is now displayed in the Create a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut dialog box, under Select a Buzzsaw Folder, Project, or Document Set.
6 Click OK. Click Close. To delete a Buzzsaw location shortcut 1 In a file navigation dialog box that supports Buzzsaw, in the Places list, click the Buzzsaw icon. Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts is displayed in the Look In box along with any configured Buzzsaw shortcuts. 2 Right-click a Buzzsaw shortcut. Click Manage Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts. 3 In the Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts dialog box, select a shortcut. Click Delete. The selected shortcut is deleted. 4 Click Close.
3 In the Specify Zip File dialog box, in the Places list, click the Buzzsaw icon. Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts is displayed in the Save In box. Existing Buzzsaw shortcuts are displayed in the Site column. 4 Double-click an existing shortcut or create a new shortcut. NOTE If you have not logged into the site, the Log In To Buzzsaw dialog box is displayed. After logging in, you go to the location defined by that shortcut. 5 Click Save. The transmittal package is created.
3 In the Publish Options dialog box, under Default Output Location, click Location. Click the [...] button. 4 In the Select a Folder for Generated Files dialog box, in the Places list, click the Buzzsaw icon. Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts is displayed in the Look In box along with any configured Buzzsaw shortcuts. 5 Double-click an existing shortcut or create a new shortcut. NOTE If you have not logged into the site, the Log In To Buzzsaw dialog box is displayed.
8 In the Publish dialog box, click Publish. 9 In the Specify DWF File dialog box, click Select. Publishing begins. A status box indicates when publishing is complete. Quick Reference Commands OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Use AutoCAD® WS to share, edit, and manage AutoCAD drawings on the Web. AutoCAD WS is an application that interfaces directly with AutoCAD.
from real-time collaborations. All comments made over the progress of a drawing are displayed. While viewing a past version of the drawing, you cannot make changes. Save a copy of the drawing to continue working on the selected version. For additional information and tutorials on how to use AutoCAD WS, see the AutoCAD WS website. To auto-upload drawings and files ■ Click Online tab ➤ Upload panel ➤ Upload.
3 To remove a file from the list, right-click the file and click Remove from This List. To open and edit drawings online ■ Click Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Open Online. The current drawing is uploaded and opened in AutoCAD WS. Use the available online tools to edit the drawing and collaborate with others. To view your online files in AutoCAD WS 1 Click Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Online Drawings. All drawings and files are displayed in the Drawings section in AutoCAD WS.
5 Click Share. To get a URL to the online copy of the current drawing 1 Click Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Get Link. 2 In the Get Link dialog box, select the Share Link check box. 3 Define the access permissions for each recipient. 4 Click Copy to copy the link to your clipboard. 5 Click OK. 6 Paste the link into any text editor and share it with others. To review messages ■ Click Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Messages. The AutoCAD WS Messages section is displayed.
SHARE Shares the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing with other users. TIMELINE Provides access to previous versions of the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing. UPLOAD Uploads the current drawing to AutoCAD WS and controls whether to automatically upload changes. UPLOADFILES Uploads selected files to AutoCAD WS. Work with Xrefs over the Internet You can attach externally referenced drawings stored on the Internet or an intranet to drawings stored locally on your system.
If your network or ISP requires a user name and password, you are prompted to enter this information. 3 Click Open. 4 In the External Reference dialog box, click OK. 5 Specify an insertion point for the xref. Quick Reference Commands HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. Insert Content from a Website ® ® With the Autodesk i-drop functionality, you can use a drag-and-drop method to insert web content into your drawing.
Quick Reference Commands SETIDROPHANDLER Specifies the default type of i-drop content for the current Autodesk application. Use i-drop To use i-drop, you simply drag a representative i-drop content image from a web page into your drawing area. You can also specify the type of i-drop content for your application. The representative i-drop content image will usually be a visual representation of what will appear in your drawing.
2 Drag a representative i-drop content image from a web page into your current drawing. When you move your cursor over a representative i-drop content image on a website, the cursor changes to a dropper image.You are now in Insertion mode. 3 In your current drawing, click where you want the i-drop content inserted. The i-drop content is inserted into your drawing.
To view a log file of i-drop content in your drawing ■ In the folder where your drawing is stored, double-click the file named _idrop.txt. The log file displays the name of the drawing file (target file), the name of the i-drop content file inserted in your drawing (located at the end of the source URL), the date and time it was inserted, the source URL of each associated data file, and the destination (location) of any associated data files.
sets. Using these tabs, you can view and change the files to be included in the transmittal package. ■ Sheets. This tab is available only when a sheet set is open. It displays a hierarchical list of sheets in the current sheet set. When you check a sheet, all dependent files are automatically included in the transmittal package. ■ Files Tree. This tab displays a list of files. You can expand or collapse each drawing file in the list to display its dependent files.
File Types Automatically Added to a Transmittal Package File Type Description *.pdf PDF files that are attached externally to the root drawing or external referenced drawings *.dxe Data extraction files that contain extraction settings and data link information *.xls Microsoft Excel spreadsheet files that are linked to data extraction tables *.fmp Font Mapping File used for the In-Place Text Editor when working with Multiline Text objects *.
that were originally used to format objects in the drawing and are not longer needed to properly view the drawing when sent to another user. File Types Not Automatically Added to a Transmittal Package File Type Description *.arx, *.dbx, *.lsp, *.vlx, *.dvb, *.dll Custom application files (ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, AutoLISP, Visual LISP, VBA and .NET) *.shx Compiled shape files used for text styles or complex linetypes *.ttf True Type font files used for text styles *.pfa, *.
Include Instructions to the Recipient A report file is automatically generated that includes a list of files in the transmittal package. The report also includes instructions describing what must be done with drawing-dependent files such as xrefs and font files so that they are usable with the included drawing files. You can also add your own notes to the report file. Save Transmittal Setups You will probably send transmittal packages multiple times during a project.
Transmit Sheet Sets In the Sheet Set Manager, you can create a transmittal package conveniently from a sheet set, a sheet subset, or a sheet. Use the Sheet Set Manager to specify what you want to transmit. NOTE In the Sheet Set Manager, on the Sheet List tab, right-click a sheet set node, a sheet subset node, or a sheet node on the sheet tree. On the shortcut menu, the eTransmit option will assemble the correct sheets depending on the node that you selected.
When you convert drawings to a legacy drawing file format (AutoCAD 2007 or earlier), drawings containing objects that exceed the legacy large object size limits are reported as errors in the Conversion Error Encountered dialog box and are not converted. Transmit Files Internationally Beginning with AutoCAD 2007, the names of the files generated by AutoCAD-based products use Unicode standards and can be shared internationally. However, eTransmit uses WinZip technology to create transmittal packages.
7 Under Transmittal File Folder, click Browse to specify the folder where the transmittal package should be created. A standard file selection dialog box is displayed. 8 Locate the folder where you want to create the transmittal package. Click Open. 9 Click OK to close the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box. 10 Click Close to close the Transmittal Setups dialog box. 11 (Optional) In the Create Transmittal dialog box, in the area for notes, specify any additional comments to include with the report file.
7 Under Transmittal File Folder, click Browse to specify the folder where the transmittal package should be created. A standard file selection dialog box is displayed. 8 Locate the folder where you want to create the transmittal package. Click Open. 9 Click OK to close the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box. 10 Click Close to close the Transmittal Setups dialog box. 11 (Optional) In the Create Transmittal dialog box, in the area for notes, specify any additional comments to include with the report file.
package that you want to create. Also, specify any additional transmittal options that you want to use. Under Transmittal Options, the first option, Use Organized Folder Structure, is usually recommended. Source root folder is the folder where the Drawing Set file (.dst) is stored. Use the Keep Files and Folders As Is option for AutoCAD 2007 eTransmit behavior. 6 Under Transmittal File Folder, click Browse to specify the folder where the transmittal package should be created.
HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. Review and Markup Files with Design Review Autodesk® Design Review is a free program used for creating and reviewing DWF files. An open, published, and secure file format developed by Autodesk, DWF enables you to combine and publish rich 2D- and 3D-design data and share it with others.
XPS Viewer can be downloaded directly from Microsoft.) Unlike DWF files, DWFx files include additional information to display design data in the Microsoft XPS Viewer. As such, DWFx files are larger than corresponding DWF files. TIP In Design Review, you can choose between DWFx and DWF as the default file format on the General tab in the Options dialog box.
The digital workflow can be repeated indefinitely to support the iterative nature of the design and review process. Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages The Publish to Web wizard simplifies the process of creating DWF or DWFx files and formatting them for display in HTML pages. The Publish to Web wizard provides a simplified interface for creating formatted web pages that include DWF, DWFx, JPEG, or PNG images of drawings. ■ DWF or DWFx format does not compress the drawing file.
See also: ■ DesignCenter on page 84 To use the Publish to Web wizard 1 Click File menu ➤ Publish to Web. 2 Follow the instructions to generate a web page. Quick Reference Commands PUBLISHTOWEB Creates HTML pages that include images of selected drawings. Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings With Autodesk Seek, you can share, search, and reuse digital design content.
Blocks and drawings are uploaded with their attribute values to the Autodesk Seek website. The host drawing file uploaded to the Autodesk Seek website does not include any external images, external references (xref), or underlay file references. NOTE Autodesk Seek is currently available in US English only. To search for blocks and drawings in Autodesk Seek 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Content panel. 2 Click inside the Seek design content text box.
Quick Reference Commands ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. CONTENTEXPLORER Finds and inserts content such as drawing files, blocks, and styles. CONTENTEXPLORERCLOSE Closes the Content Explorer window. SEEK Opens a web browser and displays the Autodesk Seek home page. SHAREWITHSEEK Uploads a selected block or the current drawing to the Autodesk Seek website. System Variables CONTENTEXPLORERSTATE Indicates whether the Content Explorer window is open or closed.
Use Markups for Design Review 42 When you are in the final stages of a design, you can publish drawings for review, and receive corrections and comments electronically. You can then implement and respond to these comments and republish your drawings. Doing all this electronically streamlines communication, shortens review cycles, and results in a more efficient design process. Overview of Using Markups for Design Review You can use only Autodesk Design Review to mark up DWF or DWFx files for review.
Quick Reference Commands MARKUP Opens the Markup Set Manager. MARKUPCLOSE Closes the Markup Set Manager. OPENDWFMARKUP Opens a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Publish Drawings for Review Publish drawings for review at the end of the design cycle. You should publish drawings for review at the end of the design cycle.
Quick Reference Commands PUBLISH Insert Markups Use Autodesk Design Review to insert markups into a DWF or DWFx file. A markup is a single comment or a redline geometry correction inserted into a DWF or DWFx file. Using Autodesk Design Review, you can add markups electronically, just as you would mark up a paper version of the drawing. You can also assign a status to the markup and add comments. The markups and their status are saved in the DWF or DWFx file.
■ Add sheets to a DWF or DWFx file NOTE Markup Set Manager displays the Sheet status (in Detail view) as “File is missing”, if you add sheets using Autodesk Design Review. The reason is that the newly added sheets are not listed in the DSD file. ■ Delete sheets from a DWF or DWFx file Markup Set Manager will reflect the new order for every markup set that has sheets added to, deleted from, or rearranged from within Autodesk Design Review.
■ Put the drawing files you used to publish the DWF or DWFx file in the search path. This action ensure that you can load the corresponding drawing sets for a marked-up DWF or DWFx file. Set the search path using the Files tab in the Options dialog box. NOTE You can view markups in AutoCAD only if the marked-up DWF or DWFx file was originally created in AutoCAD 2005 or later. You must also have the original drawing file to view its markups in AutoCAD.
2 In the Open Markup DWF dialog box, select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Click Open. NOTE If you open a digitally signed DWFx file, click Open File in the DWFx - Digital Signature Warning dialog box. The Markup Set Manager displays the markup set in the tree view. 3 In the Markup Set Manager, click an individual markup node. The Markup Details area in the lower portion of the Markup Set Manager displays details for the selected markup.
3 In the Markup Set Manager, double-click a drawing sheet node to open the original DWG file. 4 Click the View DWG Geometry button to hide the DWG geometry. You can click the same button again to show the DWG geometry.
3 In the Markup Set Manager, click a markup node to view the redline geometry in the drawing area. 4 Click the View Redline Geometry button to hide the redline geometry. You can click the same button again to show the redline geometry. To print a drawing with markups ■ In Windows Explorer, double-click a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. The DWF or DWFx file opens in Autodesk Design Review. You can then print the marked-up DWF or DWFx file.
In the Markup Set Manager, in the Notes area under Markup Details, you can add comments or notes for the selected markup. Changes in markup status and added comments are automatically saved in the DWF or DWFx file and included when you republish it. You can also save markup changes by right-clicking the markup set node and clicking Save Markup History Changes on the shortcut menu. WARNING Saving changes to a digitally signed DWFx file will invalidate the digital signature.
You can also save markup changes by right-clicking the markup set node. Click Save Markup History Changes. To save changes to markups 1 Click File menu ➤ Load Markup Set. 2 In the Open Markup DWF dialog box, select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Click Open. The Markup Set Manager opens and displays the markup set in the tree view. 3 In the Markup Set Manager, click a markup node and change its status or add comments. 4 Right-click the markup set node. Click Save Markup History Changes.
made to the drawings are visible as well as any changes made to the status and the details of the markups. If you republish a DWF or DWFx file that has had sheets deleted from it or rearranged within it in Autodesk Design Review, the new order of sheets will be reflected in the republished DWF or DWFx file; however, if any sheets were added to the DWF or DWFx file in Autodesk Design Review, those sheets will not be included in the republished DWF or DWFx file.
Quick Reference Commands MARKUP Opens the Markup Set Manager. MARKUPCLOSE Closes the Markup Set Manager. OPENDWFMARKUP Opens a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups.
Part 13: Render Drawings 2137
2138
Draw 2D Isometric Views 43 The Isometric Snap/Grid mode helps you create 2D isometric images that represent 3D objects. The Isometric Snap/Grid mode helps you create 2D images that represent 3D objects. By setting the Isometric Snap/Grid, you can easily align objects along one of three isometric planes; however, although the isometric drawing appears to be 3D, it is actually a 2D representation.
Choosing one of the three isometric planes causes Ortho and the crosshairs to be aligned along the corresponding isometric axes. For example, when Ortho is on, the points you specify align along the simulated plane you are drawing on. Therefore, you can draw the top plane, switch to the left plane to draw another side, and switch to the right plane to complete the drawing. To turn on an isometric plane 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings.
Quick Reference Commands DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. GRID Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport. ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane. ORTHO Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction. SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. System Variables SNAPISOPAIR Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport.
To draw an isometric circle 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings. 2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap and Grid tab, select Isometric Snap. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Draw ➤ Ellipse ➤ Axis, End. 5 Enter i (Isocircle). 6 Specify the center of the circle. 7 Specify the radius or diameter of the circle. Quick Reference Commands ELLIPSE Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane.
Add Lighting to Your Model 44 Lighting can be added to a scene to create a more realistic rendering. Overview of Lighting Lighting adds the finishing touch to the scene. Default Lighting When there are no lights in a scene, the scene is shaded with default lighting. Default lighting is derived from two distant sources that follow the viewpoint as you move around the model. All faces in the model are illuminated so that they are visually discernible.
a discrete position and affect the entire scene. You can turn the display of light glyphs on or off while you work. By default, light glyphs are not plotted. Photometric Lighting Workflow For more precise control over lighting, you can use photometric lights to illuminate your model. Photometric lights use photometric (light energy) values that enable you to define lights more accurately as they would be in the real world.
background feature), which adds soft, subtle lighting effects caused by the lighting interactions between the sun and the atmosphere. Luminaire Objects Light fixtures can be represented by embedding photometric lights in blocks that also contain geometry. A luminary assembles a set of light objects into a light fixture. Quick Reference Commands CONVERTOLDLIGHTS Converts lights created in previous drawing file formats to the current format. DISTANTLIGHT Creates a distant light.
LIGHTLIST Turns on and off the Lights in Model palette that lists all lights in the model. FREESPOT Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target. FREEWEB Creates a free web light which is similar to a web light without a specified target. POINTLIGHT Creates a point light that radiates light in all directions from its location. RENDEREXPOSURE Provides settings to adjust the global lighting for the most recently rendered output.
LIGHTINGUNITS Controls whether generic or photometric lights are used, and specifies the lighting units for the drawing. LIGHTSINBLOCKS Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering. LINEARBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LINEARCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights.
Set the Type of Lighting AutoCAD offers three choices for lighting units: standard (generic), International (SI), and American. The standard (generic) lighting workflow is equivalent to the lighting workflow in AutoCAD prior to AutoCAD 2008. The default lighting workflow for drawings created in AutoCAD 2008 and later is a photometric workflow based on International (SI) lighting units. This choice results in physically correct lighting. The American lighting unit provides another option.
■ At the command prompt, enter LIGHTINGUNITS and set the value to 0 for standard lighting. As each light is added it will have standard lighting properties. To set the drawing for photometric workflow Do one of the following: ■ Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ International Lighing Units. International lighting units are used and photometric lighting is enabled. ■ Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ American Lighing Units.
LOGEXPDAYLIGHT Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPMIDTONES Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE Controls the relative brightness of self-illuminated materials in a photometric environment. Illuminate a Scene You can add point lights, spotlights, and distant lights and set the location and photometric properties of each.
an orange or brownish tint. At sunrise and sunset, the color can be more orange or red than yellow. Shadows are more distinct the clearer the day is, and can be essential for bringing out the three-dimensionality of a naturally lit scene. A directional light can also simulate moonlight, which is white but dim compared to the sun. Artificial Light A scene illuminated by point lights, spotlights, or distant lights is artificially illuminated. Therefore, it can be helpful to know how light behaves.
SPOTLIGHT Creates a spotlight that emits a directional cone of light. TARGETPOINT Creates a target point light. System Variables DEFAULTLIGHTING Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting. DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE Specifies the type of default lighting, old or new. LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Turns on and off the display of light glyphs. LIGHTINGUNITS Controls whether generic or photometric lights are used, and specifies the lighting units for the drawing.
create a point light by entering the POINTLIGHT command or by selecting a point light from the Lights panel on the ribbon. You create a target point light with the TARGETPOINT command. The difference between the target point light and a point light is the additional target properties that are available. A target light can be pointed to an object. A target point light can also be created from a point light by changing the target property of the point light from No to Yes.
■ Lamp Color. Specifies the inherent color of the light in Kelvin temperature or standard. ■ Resulting Color. Gives the final color of the light. This is determined by a combination of the lamp color and the filter color. (Product of lamp color and filter color. Read-only.) NOTE When the drawing lighting units are photometric, the attenuation type property becomes disabled. Photometric lights have fixed, inverse-square attenuation.
To create a point light in standard lighting workflow 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ Generic Lighing Units. No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled. NOTE Alternatively, you can enter lightingunits at the Command prompt and set the value to 0 for standard (generic) lighting. 2 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Create Light drop-down ➤ Point. 3 Click in the drawing to specify a location for the light.
2 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Create Light drop-down ➤ Point. 3 Click in the drawing to specify a location for the light. 4 At the Command prompt, enter n and enter a name. This name will appear in the properties and in the Lights in Model window (LIGHTLIST). You can continue to specify properties by entering options, or you can exit and set properties interactively. When you use the interactive method, you can see the results of your changes as you work. 5 Press Enter twice to exit the command.
Right-click the light. Click Properties. You can use the Lighting Properties palette to change the light. Note that compared to the point light there are additional target positioning properties available. To create a target point light from a point light 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ Generic Lighing Units. No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled.
2 In the drawing, select a point light whose properties you want to use for the tool. 3 Drag the light to the active tool palette. The new light tool retains all of the properties of the light except its location properties. Quick Reference Commands LIGHT Creates a light. LIGHTLIST Turns on and off the Lights in Model palette that lists all lights in the model. POINTLIGHT Creates a point light that radiates light in all directions from its location.
LIGHTSINBLOCKS Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering. LINEARBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LINEARCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using photometric lighting.
features and areas in your model. A free spotlight (FREESPOT) is similar to spotlight. A spotlight has target properties. Spotlights in Photometric Workflow In photometric workflow, the hotspot intensity falls to 50 percent. The hotspot for standard lighting is at 100 percent. At its falloff angle, intensity of the spotlight falls to zero.
The following image is an example of a photometric spotlight and lighting properties palette with the photometric properties outlined: To create a spotlight 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ Generic Lighing Units. No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled. NOTE Alternatively, you can enter lightingunits at the Command prompt and set the value to 0 for standard (generic) lighting.
2 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Create Light drop-down ➤ Spot. 3 Click in the drawing to specify a location for the light. 4 Click to specify a target for the spotlight. 5 At the Command prompt, enter n and enter a name. This name will appear in the properties and in the Lights in Model window (LIGHTLIST). You can continue to specify properties by entering options, or you can exit and set properties interactively. When you use the interactive method, you can see the results of your changes as you work.
6 Press Enter twice to exit the command. Select the light and use grip tools to change the light. 7 To change properties, right-click the light. Click Properties. Use the Lighting Properties palette to change the photometric properties. To create a free spot light in photometric lighting workflow 1 At the Command prompt, enter lightingunits and set the value to 1 (American units) or 2 (International SI units) for photometric lighting. 2 At the command prompt, enter freespot.
Quick Reference Commands FREESPOT Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target. LIGHT Creates a light. LIGHTLIST Turns on and off the Lights in Model palette that lists all lights in the model. RENDEREXPOSURE Provides settings to adjust the global lighting for the most recently rendered output. SPOTLIGHT Creates a spotlight that emits a directional cone of light. System Variables DEFAULTLIGHTING Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting.
LINEARCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPDAYLIGHT Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPMIDTONES Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when using photometric lighting.
manufacturers under the Photometric Web panel in the Properties palette for the light. The light icon represents the photometric web you select. A light that uses a photometric web can be added to a drawing by entering the commands WEBLIGHT and FREEWEB at the command prompt. The WEBLIGHT command creates a targeted weblight, whereas the FREEWEB command creates a weblight without an explicit target.
This type of diagram visually represents how the luminous intensity of a source varies with the vertical angle. However, the horizontal angle is fixed and, unless the distribution is axially symmetric, more than one goniometric diagram may be needed to describe the complete distribution. Photometric Webs The photometric web is a three dimensional representation of the light distribution.
Example of Ellipsoidal distribution In this example, the points in the negative Z direction are the same distance from the origin as the corresponding points in the positive Z direction, so the same amount of light shines upward and downward. No point has a very large X or Y component, either positive or negative, so less light is cast laterally from the light source.
The light has been changed to have a web distribution with the web settings from the IES file. Quick Reference Commands LIGHT Creates a light. LIGHTLIST Turns on and off the Lights in Model palette that lists all lights in the model. FREEWEB Creates a free web light which is similar to a web light without a specified target. RENDEREXPOSURE Provides settings to adjust the global lighting for the most recently rendered output. WEBLIGHT Creates a web light.
LINEARBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LINEARCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPDAYLIGHT Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting.
The poles of the web lie along the vertical axis, with the nadir corresponding to a vertical angle of zero degrees. The horizontal axis corresponds to a horizontal angle of zero degrees and is oriented parallel to the length of the luminaire. This type of photometric web is generated by a Type C goniometer and is the most popular in North America; other types of goniometry are supported by the IES standard file format but are not discussed here. The photometric data is stored in an ASCII file.
14 The set of vertical angles, listed in increasing order. If the distribution lies completely in the bottom hemisphere, the first and last angles must be 0° and 90°, respectively. If the distribution lies completely in the top hemisphere, the first and last angles must be 90° and 180°, respectively. Otherwise, they must be 0° and 180°, respectively. 15 The set of horizontal angles, listed in increasing order. The first angle must be 0°.
Quick Reference Commands CONVERTOLDLIGHTS Converts lights created in previous drawing file formats to the current format. DISTANTLIGHT Creates a distant light. FREESPOT Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target. FREEWEB Creates a free web light which is similar to a web light without a specified target. GEOGRAPHICLOCATION Specifies the geographic location information for a drawing file. LIGHT Creates a light.
WEBLIGHT Creates a web light. System Variables 3DCONVERSIONMODE Used to convert material and light definitions to the current product release. DEFAULTLIGHTING Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting. DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE Specifies the type of default lighting, old or new. LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Turns on and off the display of light glyphs. LIGHTINGUNITS Controls whether generic or photometric lights are used, and specifies the lighting units for the drawing.
LOGEXPMIDTONES Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. RENDERUSERLIGHTS Controls whether to override the setting for viewport lighting during rendering. SUNSTATUS Turns on and off the lighting effects of the sun in the current viewport. Common Lamp Values for Photometric Lights Lists of commonly used lamps for defining photometric lights are available on the Lighting tool palette.
System Variables LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Turns on and off the display of light glyphs. LIGHTINGUNITS Controls whether generic or photometric lights are used, and specifies the lighting units for the drawing. LIGHTSINBLOCKS Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering. LINEARBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LINEARCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights.
Distant Lights in Standard Lighting Workflow A distant light emits uniform parallel light rays in one direction only. You specify a FROM point and a TO point anywhere in the viewport to define the direction of the light. Spotlights and point lights are each represented by a different light glyph. Distant lights are not represented by glyphs in the drawing because they do not have a discrete position and affect the entire scene.
6 Press Enter twice to exit the command. A distant light is not displayed as a light glyph. To change the properties of a distant light. Enter lightlist at the command prompt. In the Lights in Model window, double click on the distant light name from the light list and use the Lighting Properties palette to change its color and other properties. Quick Reference Commands DISTANTLIGHT Creates a distant light.
The following types are available: Soft (shadow) map, Sharp (default), Soft (sampled). By selecting the Soft (sampled) option, the Shape property becomes available. The available shapes depend on the type of light. You can select the Type property for the light distribution under the General panel in the Lighting category. If Spotlight and Soft (sampled) are selected, then the Shape types available are Rectangular and Disk.
8 Scroll down the Lighting Properties palette to the Rendered Shadow details. 9 Change the Type property to Soft (sampled). 10 Change the Shape property to Rectangular. Add dimensions to the Length and Width properties. 11 Change the Visible Render property to Yes. 12 Render the image. The light is represented as a rectangle in the drawing. Adjust and Manipulate Lights You can add point lights, spotlights, and distant lights and set the location and properties of each.
To control the appearance of light glyphs 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Drafting tab, click Lights Glyph Settings. 3 In the Light Glyph Appearance dialog box, click Point or Spot to display a point light or spotlight glyph in Glyph Preview. 4 To change colors, click Edit Glyph Colors to open the Drawing Window Colors dialog box. For more information, see Set Interface Options on page 149 5 To change the size of the glyph in the drawing, use the Glyph Size slider.
LIGHT Creates a light. LIGHTLIST Turns on and off the Lights in Model palette that lists all lights in the model. LIGHTLISTCLOSE Closes the Lights in Model window. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. POINTLIGHT Creates a point light that radiates light in all directions from its location. SPOTLIGHT Creates a spotlight that emits a directional cone of light. System Variables LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Turns on and off the display of light glyphs.
■ Flip. Rotates the target of the light in the opposite direction. NOTE Rotating a targeted light is useful for aligning the area shadow region appropriately. Also, the orientation of the area shadow light is reset when the position or the target of the light is changed. Location (Point Lights and Spotlights) You can use the grip labeled Position to move a point light or a spotlight, or you can set the location in the Properties palette. The Position grip moves the light but does not change the target.
To delete a light 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Dialog box launcher. 2 Select one or more lights to delete. 3 Right-click the selection. Click Delete Light or Delete Lights. To move a point light or a spotlight 1 Select the light glyph, or select the light in the Lights in Model window. 2 Select the Position grip. The Position grip is at the bottom of a spotlight and at the center of a point light. 3 Drag the light to the new location and click to place it there.
LIGHT Creates a light. LIGHTLIST Turns on and off the Lights in Model palette that lists all lights in the model. POINTLIGHT Creates a point light that radiates light in all directions from its location. RENDEREXPOSURE Provides settings to adjust the global lighting for the most recently rendered output. SPOTLIGHT Creates a spotlight that emits a directional cone of light. SUNPROPERTIES Displays the Sun Properties window. TARGETPOINT Creates a target point light. WEBLIGHT Creates a web light.
LINEARBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LINEARCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPCONTRAST Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. LOGEXPDAYLIGHT Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting.
You can use grip tools to move or rotate a selected light and change other properties such as the hotspot and falloff cone in spotlights. You can see the effect on the model as you change the properties of a light. General Properties The following properties are common to all lights. Full descriptions of the controls are located under the Properties command in Lighting Properties: ■ Name. Specifies the name assigned to the light. ■ Type.
■ Rapid decay area. Consists of the region between the hotspot and falloff angles. The greater the difference between the hotspot and falloff angles, the softer the edge of the light beam. If the hotspot and falloff angles are near equal, the edge of the light beam is sharp. Both values can range from 0 to 160 degrees. You can adjust these values directly with the Hotspot and Falloff grips.
Geometry Properties The Geometry properties control for the location and target point of the light. If the light is a target point light, spotlight, or weblight, additional target point properties are available. The Target property of a light can also be turned on an off. Attenuation Properties (Point Lights and Spotlights) Attenuation controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a light, the darker the object appears.
To set attenuation in a point light or a spotlight 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ Generic Lighing Units. No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled. NOTE Alternatively, you can enter lightingunits at the command prompt and set the value to 0 for standard (generic) lighting. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the drawing, click the light glyph.
To specify a source vector for a distant light 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ Generic Lighing Units. No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled. NOTE Alternatively, you can enter lightingunits at the command prompt and set the value to 0 for standard (generic) lighting. 2 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lights In Model. 3 In the Lights in Model palette, select the distant light. 4 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
Quick Reference Commands CONVERTOLDLIGHTS Converts lights created in previous drawing file formats to the current format. DISTANTLIGHT Creates a distant light. FREESPOT Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target. FREEWEB Creates a free web light which is similar to a web light without a specified target. GEOGRAPHICLOCATION Specifies the geographic location information for a drawing file. LIGHT Creates a light.
WEBLIGHT Creates a web light. System Variables DEFAULTLIGHTING Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting. DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE Specifies the type of default lighting, old or new. LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Turns on and off the display of light glyphs. LIGHTINGUNITS Controls whether generic or photometric lights are used, and specifies the lighting units for the drawing. LIGHTSINBLOCKS Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering.
RENDERUSERLIGHTS Controls whether to override the setting for viewport lighting during rendering. SUNSTATUS Turns on and off the lighting effects of the sun in the current viewport. Sun and Sky Simulation The sun is a light that simulates the effect of sunlight and can be used to show how the shadows cast by a structure affect the surrounding area. Sun and sky are the primary sources of natural illumination in AutoCAD.
Sky Background The option to choose the sky background is only available when the lighting unit is photometric (the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2). If you choose the sky background and change the lighting to standard (generic) lighting (the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0), the sky background is disabled.
NOTE Alternatively, you can enter lightingunits at the command prompt and set the value to 0 for standard (generic) lighting. 2 Click Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ ➤ Sun Properties. 3 In the General settings, click the Status setting, and select On or Off. To change the brightness of the sun 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lighting Units drop-down ➤ Generic Lighing Units. No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled.
3 Click the Time setting, and select a new time. Use the Daylight Saving setting if necessary. To change the color of the sun 1 Click Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ ➤ Sun Properties. 2 In the General settings, click the Color setting, and select a color. Click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box.
System Variables LATITUDE Specifies the latitude of the drawing model in decimal format. LONGITUDE Specifies the longitude of the drawing model in decimal format. NORTHDIRECTION Specifies the angle of the sun from north. SUNPROPERTIESSTATE Indicates whether the Sun Properties window is open or closed. SUNSTATUS Turns on and off the lighting effects of the sun in the current viewport. TIMEZONE Sets the time zone for the sun in the drawing.
An example of a luminaire object. To add a photometric light to be used in a luminaire 1 Click Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ .Lights drop-down ➤ At the command prompt, enter lightingunits. 2 Set the value to 1 (American lighting units) or 2 (International lighting units) for photometric lighting. 3 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 4 Right-click the Tool palette title bar. Click Photometric Lights. 5 Drag a light from the palette to the drawing.
Converting Lights Properties of lights converting from previous releases of AutoCAD and other products. Work with Lights in Drawings from Previous Versions of AutoCAD Converting lights from previous versions. With AutoCAD 2008, you can choose either standard (generic) lighting or photometric lighting. Prior to AutoCAD 2008, the only option was standard (generic) lighting. There is no explicit conversion required for lights from AutoCAD 2007 to AutoCAD 2008.
Import Drawings into 3ds Max or VIZ Drawing can be opened in 3ds Max or VIZ. Please review the 3ds Max or VIZ DWG import documentation for information regarding the import of the DWG format. Quick Reference Commands CONVERTOLDLIGHTS Converts lights created in previous drawing file formats to the current format. System Variables 3DCONVERSIONMODE Used to convert material and light definitions to the current product release.
2202
Materials and Textures 45 Materials define the shininess, bumpiness, and transparency of object’s surfaces to give them a realistic appearance. Overview of Materials Add materials to objects in your drawings to provide a realistic effect in any rendered view. Autodesk provides a large library of predefined materials for you to use. Use the Materials Browser to browse materials and apply them to objects in your drawing. Use the Materials Editor to create and modify materials.
MATEDITORCLOSE Closes the Materials Editor. MATEDITOROPEN Opens the Materials Editor. MATERIALATTACH Associates materials with layers. MATERIALMAP Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object. MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. MATERIALSCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. System Variables 3DCONVERSIONMODE Used to convert material and light definitions to the current product release. CMATERIAL Sets the material of new objects.
Materials Browser Use the Materials Browser to navigate and manage your materials. You can organize, sort, search, and select materials for use in your drawing. The Autodesk library and user-defined libraries are accessible in the Materials Browser. The browser contains the following main components: ■ Browser toolbar. Contains the Create Material menu, which allows you to create generic materials or from a list of templates, and the search box. ■ Document Materials.
Materials Libraries The Autodesk library, with over 700 materials and over 1000 textures, is included with the product. The library is read-only, but you can copy Autodesk materials into the drawing, edit them, and save them to your own library. There are three types of libraries: ■ Autodesk Library. Contains predefined materials provided by Autodesk for use by all applications that support materials. It contains material-related resources, such as textures, thumbnails, and so on.
NOTE When you remove a library from the Materials Browser, the library file remains on the hard disk. You must manually delete the library file to reclaim hard disk space. To access the Materials Browser ■ Click Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser. To manage a library 1 Click Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser. 2 In the Materials Browser, Manage drop-down, you can do the following: ■ Open existing library.
NOTE If you change the properties of the material in the Materials Editor later, the material tool is not automatically updated. Delete the old material tool. Drag the updated swatch to create a new one. Quick Reference Commands MATBROWSERCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. MATBROWSEROPEN Opens the Materials Browser. MATEDITORCLOSE Closes the Materials Editor. MATEDITOROPEN Opens the Materials Editor. MATERIALATTACH Associates materials with layers.
MATEDITORSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Editor is open or closed. Create New Materials A material is defined by a number of properties. The available properties depend on the selected material type. Create a new material in the Materials Browser or the Materials Editor. Select the type of material to create, or duplicate and modify an existing material. After you set properties, you can further modify materials even more by using maps, such as texture or procedural maps.
Image Fade Controls the composite between the base color and the diffuse image. The image fade property is only editable if an image is used. Glossiness The reflective quality of the material defines the degree of glossiness or dullness. To simulate a glossy surface, the material has a small highlight, and its specular color is lighter, perhaps even white. A duller material has a larger highlight that is closer to the main color of the material.
the material is completely transparent; at lower values, the material is partly opaque; and at 0.0, the material is completely opaque. The Translucency and Index of Refraction properties becomes editable only when the Transparency value is greater than 0. A translucent object lets some light pass through and scatters some light within the object; for example, frosted glass. The translucency value is a percentage: at 0.0, the material is not translucent; at 1.0, the material is as translucent as possible.
Luminance causes a material to simulate being lit within a photometric light source. How much light is emitted is a selected value in photometric units. No light is cast on other objects.
■ Material Color Temperature (degrees Kelvin) Xenon Arc Lamp 6420 TV Screen 9320 Custom unclamped Bump. The Bump check box turns on or off the use of the relief patterns of the material. The object appears to have a bumpy or irregular surface. When you render an object with a bump-mapped material, the lighter areas of the map appear to be raised and the darker areas appear to be low. The Amount adjusts the height of the bump.
MATBROWSERCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. MATBROWSEROPEN Opens the Materials Browser. MATEDITORCLOSE Closes the Materials Editor. MATEDITOROPEN Opens the Materials Editor. MATERIALASSIGN Uses the current material defined in the CMATERIAL system variable. MATERIALATTACH Associates materials with layers. MATERIALMAP Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object. MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. MATERIALSCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser.
LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE Controls the relative brightness of self-illuminated materials in a photometric environment. MATBROWSERSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Browser is open or closed. MATEDITORSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Editor is open or closed. VSMATERIALMODE Controls the display of materials in the current viewport. Manage and Organize Materials Duplicate materials to different libraries to create your own organization.
for all matching materials in the selected library. But if you select a category, it searches only within that category. You can delete a selected and unlocked material by using the shortcut menu or with the Delete key. Locked materials cannot be deleted from the Materials Browser or from the shortcut menu. To add a material to a library 1 Click Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser. 2 In the Materials Browser, right-click the material and click Add To.
MATBROWSEROPEN Opens the Materials Browser. MATEDITORCLOSE Closes the Materials Editor. MATEDITOROPEN Opens the Materials Editor. MATERIALATTACH Associates materials with layers. MATERIALMAP Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object. MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. MATERIALSCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. System Variables 3DCONVERSIONMODE Used to convert material and light definitions to the current product release.
As you modify the settings, they are saved with the material. The changes are displayed in the material swatch preview. By holding down the button below the swatch preview window, a set of flyout buttons display different geometry options for the material preview. To change the name of a material 1 Click Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser. 2 In the Materials Browser, select the material and right-click. Click Rename. 3 Change the name and description of the material in place.
MATERIALMAP Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object. MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. MATERIALSCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. System Variables 3DCONVERSIONMODE Used to convert material and light definitions to the current product release. MATBROWSERSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Browser is open or closed. MATEDITORSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Editor is open or closed.
When you create or modify a material in the Materials Browser, you can ■ Click a material in the library and the material is applied to any selected objects in your drawing. ■ Drag the material swatch directly onto objects in your drawing. ■ Assign a material to an object by clicking the Assign to Selection in the shortcut menu on the material swatch in the Materials Browser. NOTE AutoCAD 2012 supports per-face color for all materials and textures.
The material is applied to all objects on the layer whose Material property is set to BYLAYER. BYLAYER is the default for the Material property when you create an object. Quick Reference Commands MATBROWSERCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. MATBROWSEROPEN Opens the Materials Browser. MATEDITORCLOSE Closes the Materials Editor. MATEDITOROPEN Opens the Materials Editor. MATERIALATTACH Associates materials with layers. MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. MATERIALSCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser.
Overview of Maps The images you assign to materials are called maps. You use maps to improve the appearance and realism of materials. Materials that contain one or more images are called mapped materials. Maps can simulate textures, reflections, refractions, and other effects. When used with materials, maps add details without adding complexity to the geometry of an object. Use Map Channels for Added Texture Realism Textures add the realism of details to a material.
Reflectivity Map Reflectivity maps simulate a scene reflected on the surface of a shiny object. Use a reflectivity map to simulate a scene reflected on the surface of a shiny object. For reflectivity maps to render well, the material should be shiny, and the reflection image itself should have a high resolution (at least 512 by 480 pixels). Transparency Map Transparency maps create the effect of transparency and opacity.
When you use transparency for frosting or translucent effects, reflectivity is maintained. Use a cutout in addition to make the material take a particular shape or pattern. Cutout areas do not reflect. Self Illumination Map Self illumination maps make portions of an object appear to glow. White areas of the map render as fully self illuminating. Black areas render with no self illumination. Gray areas render as partially self illuminating, depending on the grayscale value.
Overview of Map Types Each map type has its own specific set of map controls. Within each map channel, you can control settings, such as disable a map, delete a map, or synchronize a map.The Nested Map Navigation display is quick reference for the nested maps assigned to a material. To display the nested maps, click the drop-down arrow next to the name of the material. After you apply a map type, you can adjust it to fit on a face or object using material mapping.
■ PNG ■ TGA ■ TIFF Procedural Maps Procedural maps add further realism to a material. Overview of Procedural Maps Unlike bitmap images, which are produced by a fixed matrix of colored pixels, a procedural map is generated by a mathematical algorithm. Consequently, the types of controls you find for a procedural map vary depending on the capabilities of the procedure. A procedural map can be generated in either two or three dimensions.
See also: ■ Checker Property Settings Gradient Creates gradients using colors, and blends. You can make highly customized gradients with the Gradient procedural map. Gradient uses several colors to create shades or ramps from one to another. See also: ■ Gradient Property Settings Marble Applies a stone and vein color pattern. You can use the Marble map to specify stone and vein color. You can modify the vein spacing and vein width.
See also: ■ Marble Property Settings Noise Creates random perturbation of a surface based on the interaction of two colors, texture maps or a combination. You can use Noise to attenuate the repetitiveness aspect of bitmap and tiles. The noise procedural map uses two colors, sub-procedural maps or a combination of both to create a random pattern. See also: ■ Noise Property Settings Speckle Generates a speckled surface pattern.
The Speckle map is useful for diffuse mapping and bump mapping to create granite-like and other patterned surfaces. See also: ■ Speckle Property Settings Tiles Applies a brick or stacked tiling of colors or material mappings. You can apply an image and repeat the image as a pattern using Tiles. The Materials Browser provides commonly defined architectural brick patterns, which you can select and modify in the Materials Editor. See also: ■ Tiles Property Settings Waves Simulates water or wave effects.
You can use the Bump map to simulate the surface of a body of water. The Waves map generates a number of spherical wave centers and randomly distributes them over a sphere. You can control the number of wave sets, the amplitude, and the speed of the waves. This map works effectively as both a diffuse and bump map at the same time, or combined with an opacity map. See also: ■ Waves Property Settings Wood Creates the color and grain pattern of wood.
The map property settings displayed on the Texture Editor depend on the selected map type. The Texture Editor, which is a modeless inspector panel, allows you to modify texture properties. This is displayed when you click on a texture swatch for a procedural or image-based texture. Texture Preview A preview of the texture swatch is displayed and any changes to the settings is reflected in the preview. You can enlarge or reduce the preview of the image in order to accurately manipulate the texture.
The Position, Scale, and Repeat are three standard transformations used in various texture sockets.
Texture Type Position Scale Repeat Marble Yes No No ■ Position. Each map has its own material offset and rotation factors. You can control the coordinates of the material on a swatch. You can also rotate the image around the W axis of the UVW coordinate system. As these settings are changed, a preview is displayed in the Texture Editor. NOTE UVW stands for the three axes of the texture space, similar to XYZ in world, object, camera, and other coordinate systems.
■ Repeat. You can tile or mirror a material to create a pattern, or select None for no modification to the map pattern. You can apply an image and repeat the image as a pattern using Tile. This effect is used to represent a tiled floor or fountain. repeated map Tiling wraps the selected object with the map image. In default mapping, tiling is active. Because the map is scaled to fit the object, you must offset the UV coordinates or rotate the map to see the tiling effect.
Adjust Mapping On Objects and Faces After you apply a texture to a material, you can adjust the orientation of the texture map on objects or faces. When materials are mapped, you can adjust the material to fit the shape of the object. Applying the appropriate type of material mapping to an object improves the fit. ■ Planar mapping. Maps the image onto the object as if you were projecting it from a slide projector onto a 2D surface.
The mapping gizmos are viewport tools that let you quickly choose one or two axes when transforming a selection with the mouse. You choose an axis by placing the mouse over any axis of the icon, then drag the mouse to transform the selection along that axis. When moving or scaling an object, you can use other areas of the gizmo to perform transforms along any two axes simultaneously. Using a gizmo lets you switch quickly and easily between different transform axes and planes.
MATERIALMAP Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object. MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. MATERIALSCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. System Variables MATBROWSERSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Browser is open or closed. MATEDITORSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Editor is open or closed.
2238
Render 3D Objects for Realism 46 A realistic rendering of a model can often give a product team or prospective client a clearer vision of a conceptual design than a plotted drawing. Overview of Rendering Rendering creates a 2D image based on your 3D scene. It shades the scene's geometry using the lighting you've set up, the materials you've applied, and environmental settings such as background and fog.
The renderer is a general-purpose renderer that generates physically correct simulations of lighting effects, including ray-traced reflections and refractions, and global illumination. A range of standard rendering presets, reusable rendering parameters, are available. Some of the presets are tailored for relatively quick preview renderings while others are for higher quality renderings. Quick Reference Commands RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model.
Prepare a Model for Rendering The way a model is built plays an important role in optimizing rendering performance and image quality. Understand Face Normals and Hidden Surfaces There are several steps commonly taken to speed up the rendering process. In order to minimize the time it takes to render a model, it is common practice to remove hidden surfaces or hide objects that are positioned off-camera.
NOTE Solid objects have meshes and normals correctly oriented, which can be an aid to creating models for rendering. When rendering, the renderer searches for all normals that point away from the viewpoint and removes the associated faces from the scene. This removal step is called back-face culling and is controlled by the Force 2-Sided option on the Render Settings palette. After the back faces have been removed, the renderer uses a Z buffer to compare relative distances along the Z axis.
By turning off layers containing objects that are not in the view, you can increase rendering speed substantially. See also: ■ Use Models with Other Applications on page 2283 ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model on page 294 To make sure both normals of a face get rendered 1 Click Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ ➤ Advanced Render Settings. 2 In the Materials section of the Advanced Render Settings palette, make sure Force 2-Sided in set to On. 3 Render the scene.
is a fast way to visualize how something will look. However, the edge created where the two objects intersect can exhibit a rippled appearance. In the following example, the edge appears rippled in the left image and much cleaner after a Boolean union. When edges do not appear to be as precise as you want, use Boolean operations like union, intersect, and subtract. A much cleaner and precise edge is created to better reflect the object’s appearance.
Twisted Faces Faces that self-overlap due to a 180-degree twist can also produce ambiguous results, because the normal for the face is not well defined. In the following example, artifacts appear where the face is twisted due to crossing the second and third corner points. This situation is often encountered when trying to fix a model that has a hole in its surface.
■ A polygon is a quadrilateral portion of a surface object. ■ An edge is the boundary of a face or polygon. In a drawing, all faces have three vertices, except faces in polyface meshes, which are treated as adjoining triangles. For rendering purposes, each quadrilateral face is a pair of triangular faces that share one edge. Smoothing of an object is handled automatically by the renderer. Two types of smoothing occur during the rendering process.
Control Display of Curved Solids FACETRES controls the mesh density and smoothness of shaded and rendered curved solids. In the following example, facets display on curved geometry when FACETRES is low. FACETRES = .25. When FACETRES is set to 1, there is a one-to-one correlation between the viewing resolution of circles and arcs and the tessellation, a means of subdividing the faces of solid objects. For example, when FACETRES is set to 2, the tessellation will be twice the tessellation set by VIEWRES.
2 Do one of the following: ■ Enter a value greater than .5 to increase the smoothness of curved surfaces. ■ Enter a value lower than .5 to decrease the smoothness of curved surfaces. To alter the display resolution of arcs and circles 1 At the Command prompt, enter viewres. 2 Ignore the prompt about fast zooms if you only want to make circles and arcs in the drawing look better for your rendering.
Use the Render Settings Palette The Render Setting palette contains the main controls for the renderer. You can choose from predefined render settings or make custom settings. The RPREF command opens the Render Settings palette, where you set the parameters for rendering. The palette is separated into several sections ranging from basic to advanced settings.
to produce varying quality images. The standard presets range from Draft quality, for quick test images, up to Presentation quality, which provides photorealistic images. You can also open the Render Presets Manager where you can create custom presets. See also: ■ Create Custom Render Presets on page 2251 To create a custom render preset from the Advanced Render Settings palette 1 At the Command prompt, enter rpref. 2 In the Advanced Render Settings palette, select an existing standard or custom preset.
RENDERPRESETS Specifies render presets, reusable rendering parameters, for rendering an image. Create Custom Render Presets When you specify a collection of render settings that give you the results you want, saving them as a custom preset lets you quickly reuse the settings. Using a standard preset as a base, you can experiment with settings and see how the rendered images look. Once you’re satisfied with the results, you can create a new, custom preset.
It will also appear in the Render Presets lists in the Render panel on the ribbon and the Render Settings palette. Many of the render settings found on the Render Settings palette can also be set in the Render Presets Manager. Using a standard preset as a base, you can make adjustments to the settings and see how the rendered images look. Once you’re satisfied with the results, you can create a new, custom preset. Only custom render presets can be deleted.
3 Make adjustments from the render settings section. The preset name is prefaced with an asterisk to show it has been changed. 4 Click the Set Current button and render the scene. If the results are good, you can choose to update the current preset or re-open the Render Preset Manager and create a new, custom preset. Quick Reference Commands RPREF Displays or hides the Advanced Render Settings palette for access to advanced rendering settings.
The RENDERENVIRONMENT command is used to set up fog or depth cue parameters. The key parameters you’ll set are the color of the fog or depth cueing, the near and far distances, and the near and far fog percentages. Fog and depth cueing are based on the front or back clipping planes of your camera coupled with the near and far distance settings on the Render Environment dialog box. For example, the back clipping plane of a camera is active and located 30 feet from the camera location.
Backgrounds work best when you are rendering still images, or animations in which the view doesn’t change or the camera doesn't move. Once set, the background is associated with the named view or camera and is saved with the drawing. You set backgrounds from the View Manager. To use fog / depth cueing 1 Select a camera and open its Property palette. 2 Turn on its front or back clipping plane. 3 Set the clipping plane offset value. 4 Click Visualize tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Environment.
2 In the View Manager, select an existing named view from the Model Views list. 3 On the General panel, click the Background Override list and select Solid, Gradient, or Image. 4 In the Background dialog box, set the colors or choose a bitmap image to use for the background. Click OK. 5 Click OK to close the View Manager. 6 On the ribbon, select the named view from the drop-down list on the View tab ➤ Viewports panel. 7 Render the scene.
Basics of Rendering While the final goal is to create a photorealistic, presentation-quality image that illustrates your vision, you create many renderings before you reach that goal. At a basic level, you can use the RENDER command to render your model without applying any materials, adding any lights, or setting up a scene. When you render a new model, the renderer automatically uses a virtual “over-the-shoulder” distant light. You cannot move or adjust this light.
compare with later images. If you want to keep the image that you rendered to the viewport, you can use the SAVEIMG command to save the images. Rendering to a viewport always renders against the background color you set for the drawing area. The Render Window background color matches the background color. Use the REGEN command to refresh the display. See also: ■ Render Window To set the render destination 1 At the Command prompt, enter rpref.
Render a View The default rendering procedure is to render all objects in the current view in the drawing. If you haven’t opened a named view or a camera view, the current view is rendered. While the rendering process is faster when you render key objects or smaller portions of a view, rendering the entire view lets you see how all objects are oriented to one another.
Rendering a selection set of objects is very efficient when testing different materials, especially when the materials include texture mapping. By rendering a selected object, you can quickly verify how the material looks and if its texture coordinates must be altered. Render a Cropped Region Sometimes you need to render only a portion of what is displayed in the viewport but you still want to see some of the surrounding environment.
To render a view 1 Display a 3D view of your model. 2 Click Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ ➤ Advanced Render Settings. 3 Choose a render preset to control the quality and speed of the rendered output. The Draft preset is very fast but its quality is low. Presentation generates a high quality image but takes substantially longer to render. 4 Set the Destination to Window or Viewport to specify where you want the rendered image to be displayed.
2 Specify a window in the viewport that you want to render. 3 Render the scene. Quick Reference Commands RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model. RENDERCROP Renders a specified rectangular area, called a crop window, within a viewport. RPREF Displays or hides the Advanced Render Settings palette for access to advanced rendering settings.
the project, 1024 x 768 or greater, since this is the image that is presented to the customer or submitted for print. Aspect ratio describes the proportions of a still image or the frames in an animation, expressed as the ratio of width to height, regardless of the image's resolution. The aspect ratio of an image is controlled by the Image Aspect setting. Aspect ratio is usually expressed either as a ratio of width over height (for example, 4:3) or as a multiplier (such as, 1.333).
RPREF Displays or hides the Advanced Render Settings palette for access to advanced rendering settings. Material Adjustments Adding materials to objects greatly increases the realism of a model. In the context of rendering, materials describe how an object reflects or transmits light. Within a material, maps can simulate textures, bump effects, reflections, or refractions.
flipped or to import complex geometry in which the face normals are not properly unified. When Force 2-Sided is active, both sides of faces are raytraced as shaded. While this incurs a slight increase in rendering time, it is often faster than trying to fix multiple instances of flipped faces. Quick Reference Commands MATERIALATTACH Associates materials with layers. MATERIALMAP Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object. MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser.
Because the image on a monitor is made up of discrete pixels on a fixed grid, scenes rendered using the Draft or Low render presets produce jagged and inaccurate images. In the following example, image quality is highly degraded - Min. Samples = 1/64; Max. Samples = 1/4. The greater the resolution (and thus the smaller the pixels), the less apparent aliasing is. However, it is often best to reduce the effect further by using anti-aliasing techniques.
There are five filter methods: Box, Gauss, Triangle, Mitchell, or Lanczos. Box, the default, is the quickest. Mitchell is often the most accurate. The Box filter combines samples evenly, without weighting them. Each of the other filters uses a particular curve to weight samples before combining them. Anti-aliasing techniques involve at least two trade-offs. ■ Extra calculation.
Use Shadows in Rendering With shadows, you can create rendered images that have greater depth and realism. The renderer can generate shadows by shadow mapping or by ray tracing. Shadow mapped shadows rely on a bitmap that the renderer generates during a pre-rendering pass of the scene. Shadow mapping provide softer edges and can require less calculation time than ray-traced shadows, but are less accurate. Ray tracing traces the path of rays sampled from the light source.
Ray-traced Shadows Ray-traced shadows (like other ray-traced effects of reflection and refraction) are generated by tracing the path of light beams or rays sampled from a light source. Ray-traced shadows are more accurate than shadow-mapped shadows. The following example shows that while ray tracing takes longer to process, it produces more realistic, precise shadows. Ray-traced shadows have hard edges and accurate outlines; they also transmit color from transparent and translucent objects.
light source will cast shadows. For shadows to display in the viewport as you set up the scene, you need to turn on shadows for the visual style. If you want shadows to appear in the rendered image, you need to turn on shadows and choose the type of shadows to render on the Advanced Render Settings palette. To view shadows in the viewport 1 Click View tab ➤ 3D Palettes panel ➤ Visual Styles. 2 In the Visual Style Manager, select either Conceptual or Realistic.
4 Turn off Shadow Map. 5 Render the model. Quick Reference Commands RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model. RPREF Displays or hides the Advanced Render Settings palette for access to advanced rendering settings. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. Advanced Rendering Advanced rendering techniques allow you to render highly detailed and photorealistic images.
When ray tracing is turned off, no reflection or refraction occurs. The following example shows the same model with ray tracing turned off. Trace depth controls the number of times a light ray can be reflected or refracted. Increasing these values can increase the complexity and realism of a rendered image, at a cost of greater rendering time. The following example shows how increasing the trace depth improves the rendering. Max Depth = 4; Max Reflections and Refractions = 2.
Ray-tracing Controls The Max Depth setting limits the combination of reflection and refraction. Tracing of a ray stops when the total number of reflections and refractions reaches the maximum depth. For example, if Max Depth equals 3 and Max Reflections and Max Refractions are both set to 2, a ray can be reflected twice and refracted once, or vice versa, but the ray cannot be reflected and refracted four times. The Max Reflections setting specifies the number of times a ray can be reflected.
Benefits of Indirect Illumination Indirect illumination techniques, like global illumination and final gathering, enhance the realism of a scene by simulating radiosity, or the interreflection of light in a scene. Global illumination (GI) provides effects such as color bleeding. For example, if a red countertop is next to a white wall, the white wall gets a slightly pink tint.
Photons and Sampling Radius The intensity of global illumination is computed by the number of photons you’ve specified. Increased numbers of photons makes global illumination less noisy but also more blurry. When the number of photons are decreased, global illumination is more noisy but less blurry. The greater the number of photons, the longer the rendering time.
twice and refracted once, or vice versa, but it can’t be reflected and refracted four times. The Max Reflections setting specifies the number of times a photon can be reflected. At 0, no reflection occurs. At 1, the photon can be reflected once only. At 2, the photon can be reflected twice, and so on. The Max Refractions setting specifies the number of times a photon can be refracted. At 0, no refraction occurs. At 1, the photon can be refracted once only. At 2, the photon can be refracted twice, and so on.
There is a catch when deciding to use final gathering. Final gathering can greatly increase rendering time. It is most useful for scenes with overall diffuse lighting. TIP Leave final gathering off to preview the scene, then turn it on for the finished rendering. (Increasing the number of photons used to calculate global illumination can also improve global illumination.) You activate and adjust final gathering in the Advanced Render Settings palette.
Each history entry contains information about the images that have been recently rendered. The information stored in history entries includes ■ Date and time of the rendering task ■ Statistics for the rendering task ■ Current view or the name of a stored view ■ Active render preset name ■ Active render settings, such as output resolution ■ Size of a cropped region, if crop was used for the render task NOTE Rendered images are not stored in the history entry, only a link to the image location.
outlines the circumstances of when a history entry is created and when it is saved. Destination History entry created? Entry saved with drawing? File Yes Yes Render Window Yes Only if the Render Window view is saved Viewport No Not applicable Any history entries that are generated, but not saved with the drawing only exist for the duration of the current drawing session. Once you close the file or exit the program, unsaved history entries are lost.
RENDERWIN Displays the Render window without starting a rendering operation. RPREF Displays or hides the Advanced Render Settings palette for access to advanced rendering settings. Save and Redisplay Rendered Images You can save a rendering and then redisplay it later. Redisplaying is much faster than rendering again. Save a Rendered Image You can save an image of a model rendered to a viewport or a render window, or you can render the image directly to a file.
assortment of different grayscale or color depths that are offered by the file format you’ve selected. Save a Render Window Rendering If you’ve chosen the render destination to be the render window, you can save the image or save a copy of the image to one of the following file formats: BMP, TGA, TIF, PCX, JPG, or PNG. Depending upon the file format you’ve selected, you can choose to save grayscale or color depths ranging from 8 bits to 32 bits per pixel (bpp).
2 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Render Output File dialog box, select a file format, and enter a storage location and file name. Click Save. The image is saved in the selected file format. Quick Reference Commands RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model. RENDERWIN Displays the Render window without starting a rendering operation. RPREF Displays or hides the Advanced Render Settings palette for access to advanced rendering settings.
RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model. Save Copies of Rendered Images You can save copies of images that are part of a drawing’s render history. With the Save Copy option, located in the Render Window, you can save a rendered image to a new location even though an output path may already be set. This is useful if you want to re-render a history entry and compare the new image with the previous.
® Autodesk products continually improve their ability to share drawings and ® ® ® models, including 3ds Max , Autodesk VIZ, AutoCAD Architecture, and ® AutoCAD Mechanical. 3ds Max or Autodesk VIZ With these products, you can make greater improvements on your models. You have the option of opening DWG or DXF files without converting or you can use the File Link Manager to create a live link with a drawing file.
Lights, Materials, and Cameras Lights, materials, and cameras have been improved but some older drawings may contain AutoShade information, such as lights, scene blocks, and camera blocks. Lights and materials used in older drawings can be converted. AutoCAD 2008 introduced the 3DCONVERSIONMODE system variable. With the system variable set to the default value of 1, lighting and materials are automatically converted for older drawings.
2286
Glossary Commands associated with definitions are shown in parentheses at the end of the definition. 3D mesh primitive Basic mesh forms such as boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, wedges, spheres, and tori. 3D view Any view where the UCS icon appears in rendered colored form; current visual style is not 2D Wireframe, and the model is being viewed from an isometric view. 3Dconnexion Set of navigation tools used to reorient the current view of a model with a 3Dconnexion device.
adaptive degradation A method of controlling performance that turns off features in a certain order when performance falls below a specified level. adaptive sampling A method to accelerate the anti-aliasing process within the bounds of the sample matrix size. See also anti-aliasing. adjacent cell selection A selection of table cells that share at least one boundary with another cell in the same selection.
ambient light Light that illuminates all surfaces of a model with equal intensity. Ambient light has no single source or direction and does not diminish in intensity over distance. angular dimension A dimension that measures angles or arc segments and consists of text, extension lines, and leaders. (DIMANGULAR) angular unit The unit of measurement for an angle. Angular units can be measured in decimal degrees, degrees/minutes/seconds, grads, and radians.
or key, arranged so a computer can examine the collection and retrieve data with the key. arrowhead A terminator, such as an arrowhead, slash, or dot, at the end of a dimension line showing where a dimension begins and ends. aspect ratio Ratio of display width to height. associative dimension A dimension that automatically adapts as the associated geometry is modified. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also nonassociative dimension and exploded dimension.
attribute tag A text string associated with an attribute that identifies a particular attribute during extraction from the drawing database. See also attribute definition, attribute prompt, and attribute value. attribute value The alphanumeric information associated with an attribute tag. See also attribute definition, attribute prompt, and attribute tag.
bitmap The digital representation of an image having bits referenced to pixels. In color graphics, a different value represents each red, green, and blue component of a pixel. blips Temporary screen markers displayed in the drawing area when you specify a point or select objects. (BLIPMODE) block A generic term for one or more objects that are combined to create a single object. Commonly used for either block definition or block reference. See also block definition and block reference.
bounded area A closed area that consists of a single object (such as a circle) or of multiple, coplanar objects that overlap. You can insert hatch fills within bounded areas. Bounded areas are also used to create 3D objects through extrusion by using the PRESSPULL command. bulge magnitude The amount of curvature where two surfaces meet. This only applies to surfaces that have G1 or G2 continuity.
associated with that parameter, just as if you had edited the parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. circular external reference An externally referenced drawing (xref) that references itself directly or indirectly. The xref that creates the circular condition is ignored. clamp curve A smooth, closed curve such as a circle. Because it has a vertex that is tangent to the object, if the curve is reshaped, it may create kinks. See also periodic curve.
Rules that govern the position, slope, tangency, dimensions, and relationships among objects in a geometry. construction plane See work plane. contextual ribbon tab A ribbon tab that is displayed only when a particular type of object or when a particular command is executed. For example, selecting a hatch or table, or executing the mtext command brings up the corresponding contextual menu.
crease A sharpened ridge that defines one or more edges of a mesh face subobject. (MESHCREASE) cross sections Generally, curves or lines that define the profile (shape) of a lofted solid or surface. Cross sections can be open or closed. A lofted solid or surface is drawn in the space between the cross sections. (LOFT) crosshairs A type of cursor consisting of two lines that intersect. crossing selection A rectangular area drawn to select objects fully or partly within its borders.
CV hull A NURBS surface is modified through its control vertices (CV) hull. It consists of the control vertices and the lines that connect them in the U and V directions The hull sits outside of (not on) the surface. NURBS curves do not have a CV hull; they only have control vertices. data link A connection between a table and an external source of data. decimal degrees A notation for specifying latitude and longitude. For example, 35.1234°, 100.5678°.
diffuse color An object's predominant color. dimension line arc An arc (usually with arrows at each end) spanning the angle formed by the extension lines of an angle being measured. The dimension text near this arc sometimes divides it into two arcs. See also angular dimension. dimension style A named group of dimension settings that determines the appearance of the dimension and simplifies the setting of dimension system variables. (DIMSTYLE) dimension text The measurement value of dimensioned objects.
drawing limits See grid limits. drawing set A collection of drawings assembled using the Publish dialog box. drawing state A collection of known settings that define the behavioral properties of the drawing environment and/or drawing at a known period of time, such as when an action macro was recorded or before the playback of an action macro. drawing template A drawing file with preestablished settings for new drawings such as acad.dwtand acadiso.dwt however, any drawing can be used as a template.
dynamic constraint Dimensional constraint (Constraint Form property = "dynamic") that displays the constraints only when you select the constrained object. See also: parameter constraint See also: annotational constraint dynamic dimension Temporary dimensions that appear on objects, including dynamic block references, when they are grip edited. edge The boundary of a face. edge modifiers Effects such as overhang and jitter that control how edges are displayed in a shaded model.
any reflective object will show the appropriate portion of the map in the reflective parts of its material. environment variable A setting stored in the operating system that controls the operation of a program. expanded panel An area on the ribbon associated with a ribbon panel. An expanded panel contains additional tools and controls. See also ribbon panel and ribbon. explode To disassemble a complex object, such as a block, dimension, solid, or polyline, into simpler objects.
field A specialized text object set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. (FIELD) fill A solid color covering an area bounded by lines or curves. (FILL) filters See coordinate filters. final gathering Final gathering is an optional, additional step to calculating global illumination.
front faces Faces with their normals pointed outward. G0 continuity See continuity on page 2295. G1 continuity See continuity on page 2295. G2 continuity See continuity on page 2295. general property Properties that are common between a selection of objects. These include Color, Layer, Linetype, Linetype scale, Plot style, Lineweight, Transparency, Hyperlink, and Thickness. generic surface A 3D surface object with no control vertices, history, or analytic information.
grid An area covered with regularly spaced dots or lines to aid drawing. The grid spacing is adjustable. The grid dots are never plotted. See also grid limits. (GRID) grid limits The user-defined rectangular boundary of the drawing area covered by dots when the grid is turned on. Also called drawing limits. (LIMITS) grip menu options See multi-functional grip menu options.
helix An open 2D or 3D spiral. (HELIX) Help menu The legacy way to access online Help. In the current version of AutoCAD, you can find Help on the InfoCenter toolbar or by pressing F1. HLS For hue, lightness, and saturation. A system of defining color by specifying the amount of hue, lightness, and saturation. Home view A special view saved with the drawing that is controlled through the ViewCube tool.
as a column to a lookup table. When the parameter values in a dynamic block reference match a row of input property values, the corresponding lookup property values in that table row are assigned to the block reference. (BLOOKUPTABLE) interface element A user interface object that can be customized, such as a toolbar, pull-down menu, shortcut key, dockable window, and so on. interpolation points Defining points that a B-spline passes through. See also approximation points and fit points.
Saving a layer index with a drawing also enhances performance when you work with external references. The INDEXCTL system variable controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with a drawing. layer translation mappings Assignments of a set of layers to another set of layers that defines standards. These standards include layer names and layer properties. Also called layer mappings. layout The environment in which you create and design paper space layout viewports to be plotted.
resulting solid or surface. Cross sections (generally, curves or lines) can be open or closed. (LOFT) lookup property In a dynamic block definition, a lookup parameter that you add to a lookup table. The lookup parameter label is used as the property name. When the parameter values in a dynamic block reference match a row of input property values, the corresponding lookup property values in that table row are assigned to the block reference.
and creased to introduce ridges. Before , only the less modifiable polygon and polyface mesh was available. mini wheels The small version of SteeringWheels. No labels are displayed on any of the wedges and they are often the size of the cursor. mirror To create a new version of an existing object by reflecting it symmetrically with respect to a prescribed line or plane. (MIRROR) mode A software setting or operating state. model A two- or three-dimensional representation of an object.
navigation bar Navigation tools that are common across multiple Autodesk programs. The unified navigation tools include Autodesk® ViewCube®, SteeringWheels®, ShowMotion®, and 3Dconnexion®. node An object snap specification to locate points, dimension definition points, and dimension text origins. non-associative dimension A dimension that does not automatically change as the associated geometry is modified. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also associative dimension and exploded dimension.
opacity map Projection of opaque and transparent areas onto objects, creating the effect of a solid surface with holes or gaps. origin The point where coordinate axes intersect. For example, the origin of a Cartesian coordinate system is where the X, Y, and Z axes meet at 0,0,0. Ortho mode A setting that limits pointing device input to horizontal or vertical (relative to the current snap angle and the user coordinate system). See also snap angle and user coordinate system (UCS).
path curve Defines the direction and length that a profile curve is lofted, swept, or extruded to create a solid or surface. (SWEEP, LOFT, EXTRUDE) PC2 file Complete plotter configuration file. PC2 files contain all plot settings and device-specific settings that were saved in previous versions. See also PCP file and PC3 file. PC3 file Partial plotter configuration file.
photon map A technique to generate the indirect illumination effects of global illumination used by the renderer. When it calculates indirect illumination, the renderer traces photons emitted from a light. The photon is traced through the model, being reflected or transmitted by objects, until it strikes a diffuse surface. When it strikes a surface, the photon is stored in the photon map. photorealistic rendering Rendering that resembles a photograph.
plot style table A set of plot styles. Plot styles are defined in plot style tables and apply to objects only when the plot style table is attached to a layout or viewport. plug-ins Plug-ins are libraries of reuseable content that extend the functionality of AutoCAD. Plug-ins are created by third party developers and can be accessed from the Featured Technologies and Content channel of the Communications Center. PMP file Plot Model Parameter.
pre-selection set A selection set of objects that is defined prior to the execution of an action macro. primary table fragment The fragment of a broken table that contains the beginning set of rows up to the first table break. primitive Basic 3D forms such as boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, wedges, spheres, and tori. You can create primitive meshes and primitive 3D solid objects. procedural materials Materials that generate a 3D pattern in two or more colors, and apply it to an object.
recorded value The input captured during the recording of an action macro for a sub-prompt of a command. rectangular break To break a table into multiple parts that are evenly spaced and set at a user-specified height using the table breaking grips. redraw To quickly refresh or clean up blip marks in the current viewport without updating the drawing's database. See also regenerate. (REDRAW) reference A definition, known as an external reference or block reference, that is used and stored in the drawing.
request user input An item that is assigned to an action node that pauses the playback of an action macro so a user can provide some form of input before playback resumes. reverse lookup Adds a lookup grip to a dynamic block reference. When you click this grip, a drop-down list of the lookup values for that lookup property (column in the lookup table) is displayed. When you select a value from the list, the corresponding input property values are assigned to the block reference.
running object snap Setting an Object Snap mode so it continues for subsequent selections. See also Object Snap mode and object snap override. (OSNAP) sampling Sampling is an anti-aliasing technique. It provides a "best guess" color for each rendered pixel. The renderer first samples the scene color at locations within the pixel or along the pixel's edge, then uses a filter to combine the samples into a single pixel color.
ShapeManager ShapeManager is the Autodesk technology that provides 3D solid modeling to AutoCAD and other products. sheet A layout selected from a drawing file and assigned to a sheet set. See also sheet set. sheet list table A table listing all sheets in a sheet set. A sheet list table can be generated automatically with the Sheet Set Manager. sheet selection A named selection of sheets in a sheet set that can be conveniently recalled for archiving, transmitting, and publishing operations.
smooth shading Smoothing of the edges between polygon faces. smoothness A property of mesh objects that controls the roundness of the object. Objects with higher levels of smoothness have more faces, or tessellations. snap angle The angle that the snap grid is rotated. snap grid The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid points according to the spacing set by Snap. Snap grid does not necessarily correspond to the visible grid, which is controlled separately by GRID.
stretch frame In a dynamic block definition that contains a stretch action or a polar stretch action, determines how the objects within or crossed by the frame are edited in the block reference. sub-prompt A command prompt that instructs for a form of input to complete a command or alter a property. subdivision A division, or tessellation in a mesh object. As a mesh object is smoothed, the number of subdivisions increases. subobject A part of a composite object.
table style A style that contains a specific table format and structure. A table style contains at least 3 cell styles. temporary files Data files created during an program session. The files are deleted by the time you end the session. If the session ends abnormally, such as during a power outage, temporary files might be left on the disk. tessellation lines Lines that help you visualize a curved surface. In a 3D mesh object, tessellations indicate the boundaries of the mesh faces.
translucency How light is scattered through an object. transmittance scale Increases or decreases the amount of energy a transparent material transmits out to the scene. transparency A quantity defining how much light is let through an object. transparent command A command started while another is in progress. Precede transparent commands with an apostrophe. two sided material The positive and negative normal of the material will be considered during the rendering process.
You can set the UCS origin and its X, Y, and Z axes to suit your needs. See also world coordinate system (WCS). user parameter Named user-defined variable (real number or an expression) that can be used in expressions for dimensional constraints or other user parameters. UVW The material’s coordinate space. Used instead of XYZ because that is usually reserved for the world coordinate system (WCS). Most material maps are a 2D plane assigned to a 3D surface.
drawing area is divided into non-overlapping model viewports. See also TILEMODE, view, and viewpoint. (VPORTS) viewport configuration A named collection of model viewports that can be saved and restored. (VPORTS) virtual screen display The area in which the program can pan and zoom without regenerating the drawing. visibility mode Displays or does not display geometry (in a dimmed state) that is invisible for a visibility state.
working set A group of objects selected for in-place reference editing. workspace A set of menus, toolbars and dockable windows (such as the Properties palette, DesignCenter, and the Tool palettes window) that are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented drawing environment. world coordinate system (WCS) The fixed coordinate system used as the basis for defining all objects and other coordinate systems. See also user coordinate system (UCS).
Index 2D Cartesian coordinates coordinate filters 648 entering 609 x and y values 607 2D coordinates Cartesian 607 entering 609 polar 607 2D Drafting & Annotation workspace 189 2D isometric views 2139 2D Navigation wheel 356 2D objects flattened views of 3D objects 1317 multi-functional grips 778 sectioning 1312 simplified display 583 simulating 3D 2139 2D polar coordinates 607, 611 2D UCS icon 603 2D wireframe visual style 295 3D Cartesian coordinates coordinate filters 648 defining 3D views 291 entering 6
history 1214 importing 1295 interference problems in 1078 Inventor Fusion 1268 live sectioning 1305 meshes 1238, 1261 motion path animations 400 navigating views 325 outputting physical models 1766 parallel views 284 performance issues and 314, 316, 320 perspective views 158, 284 preview animations 396 properties 1213, 1268 publishing 1758 rendering 2239 shadows 304 subobjects 1186 sun and sky 2194 synchronizing views 1284 thickness 1156 types of 1025 viewing 1160 visual styles 294 weblights 2165 wireframes
edges on 309, 1186 exporting 1953 extruding 1034, 1183 faces 1186 filleting 1196 flattened views of 1317 gizmos 1176 grips 1176, 1183 history 1203, 1214 imprinting objects on 1212 interferences 1078 lofting 1042, 1184 mass properties 668 meshes 1136, 1150 modifying 1159 multi-functional grips 778 polysolids 1066 pressing or pulling areas 1210 primitives 1214 properties 1213, 1268 revolving 1046, 1185 separating into original shapes 1206 shells 1207 slicing 1076 smoothness 2247 solid primitives 1049, 1052 su
3D coordinates 615 entering 607 absolute hyperlinks 2078, 2080 absolute xref paths 1782 ACA objects (AutoCAD Architecture) 1845 ACB files 561 Access databases accessing 2005 exporting extracted data to 1992 ACI colors 556 ACIS files 1856, 1952 Acrobat PDF files layers and 1895 plotting 1721 underlays 1884–1885 action macros playback 199 action parameters 923 actions dependencies 986 actions (dynamic blocks) about 989 array actions 996 Block Authoring palettes 971 Block Editor display 984 Chain Actions prope
constraints 888 defining 3D views with 291 polar angles 644 polar coordinates 611 QuickCalc display units 677 rotating objects by 791 snap angle 638 spotlights 2187 sunlight 2194 unit types 607 angular constraints 888 angular dimensions breaks in 1609 creating 1586 definition points 1594 spacing between 1614 angular units 210 animations motion path animation 400 preview animations 396 ShowMotion 380 anisotropic light distributions 2165 annotation objects annotative styles 1333 blocks as 1347 creating 1329 d
array actions 996 array objects 800 arrays of objects associativity 800, 809 creating 799 editing 809 limitations 813 path arrays 803 polar 806 properties 809 rectangular 801 arrow grips 1307 arrowheads customizing 1541 dimension arrowheads 1526, 1539 leader styles 1451 artifical lighting 2151 ARX applications 196 ASE links 2047 Asian fonts 1475, 1482 Asian set 1474 ASM files 1868, 1874 aspect ratio OLE objects 1835 rendering 2263 association points of dimensions 1597 associative arrays 800, 809 associative
Auto-list feature 1420 AutoCAD previous releases 1954 working in AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT 1963 AutoCAD Architecture (ACA) objects 1845 AutoCAD Classic workspace 189 autocompleting commands and variables 46 Autodesk 3D Printing website 1766 Autodesk 3ds Max 2284 Autodesk 3ds MAX files 1849 Autodesk Architecture 2284 Autodesk Authorized Training Centers 4 Autodesk Consulting 5 Autodesk Content Service 102, 123 Autodesk Design Review about 2119, 2125 publishing for 1728 viewing drawing sets in 1751 viewing DWF f
binding dependent named objects to drawings 1811 object definitions 1810 xrefs to drawings 1791 bisecting objects with construction lines 732 bitcodes 50 bitmaps (BMP images) exporting 1949 importing 1916 pasting 773 plotting to 1719 rendering 2266 bitonal raster images 1928 blank text objects 769 blending surfaces 1090 BLK files 1753 Block Attribute Manager duplicate tags 958 reordering prompts 943 block attributes about 940 annotative 1329 attaching 943 attribute definitions 942 attribute extraction templ
inserting blocks 918 updating block definitions 954 block references action parameters 923 annotations and 1347 associative dimensions and 1528 block attributes 940 clipping 1793 colors 935 constraints 867 database links in 2016 descriptions 954 dynamic blocks 965 editing 953, 1799 exploding 845, 962 extracting data from 1969, 1977 grips 786 groups compared to 760 hyperlinks in 2085 inserting 917 layers and 916 leader objects and 1454 linetypes 935 model space settings 426 nested 936 non-uniform scaling 197
C CAD Manager Control utility DesignCenter Online and 97 CAD standards 257 calculating angles 663 areas 664 circumferences 665 command prompt calculator 687 converting measurement units 681 distances 663 model space scale factors 427 perimeters 665 point coordinates 663 QuickCalc calculator 670 calculator variables in QuickCalc 682 calculators command prompt calculator 687 QuickCalc 670 callout blocks annotations 1323, 1344 sheet sets 484 CALS files 1719, 1916 Camera Properties palette 393 cameras about 389
circles calculating geometric data for 665 dimensioning 1580, 1586 donuts 719 drawing 712 grips on 779 isometric circles 721, 2141 modifying 741 PostScript rendering 1951 rendering 2246 circular references between xrefs 1809 circumferences 665 clamp curves 1102 classic menu bar 39 Classic workspace 189 cleaning 3D solids 1209 clearing screen 150 screen display 769 clearing screen 150 Clipboard (Windows) 772 clipping blocks 1793 layout viewport boundaries 447 underlays 1903 xrefs 1793, 1817 clipping boundari
RAL color sets 556 raster images 1916, 1928 rendered image backgrounds 2258 screening 456, 1704 shades 1373 table elements 1511 tints 1373 True Colors 556 underlays 1901 visual styles and 301 xref layer properties 1776 columns (data extraction tables) adding 1999 organizing 1981 columns (multiline text) 1434 columns (tables) adding or deleting 1505 formatting 1511 modifying 1503 combining database queries 2041 regions 734 solids 1074, 1202 comma-delimited files (CDF) 950 comma-separated files (CSV) 1992 lin
modifying 1214 configuring external databases 2005 Render 2248 conflicting CAD standards 260 conflicting xref names 1810 conical helixes 729 connecting queries 2040 constant block attributes 940 constants 682 Constrained Orbit tool 325 constraining object movement 1167 object rotation 1171 object scaling 1173 constraint bars 879 constraint icons 878 constraint parameters about 976 blocks 926 user variables 978 constraint points 874 constraints annotational constraints 893 applying 892 applying automatically
continued dimensions 1575 continuity (surfaces) 1082, 1228, 1232 Continuous Orbit tool 325 contrast in raster images 1901, 1927 control points on splines 725, 853, 1102 control vertices 724, 1225, 1227 conversion units 1946 converting 3D models to objects 1159 about conversions 1839 colors to grayscale 1704 custom objects 1845 database links in older files 2047 DGN files to DWG 1858 dimension units 1555 dimensions to annotations 1340 drawing units 207 drawings to other formats 1938 file formats 1839 files t
mistakes 766 spelling 1493 CPolygon selection 745 crashes, recovering from 252 creases limiting distortion 1262 mesh objects 1249–1250 Create Layout wizard 438, 1653 Create Sheet Set wizard 476 cropped regions 2260 cross sectioning 2D and 3D sections 1312 live sectioning 1305 lofting objects and 1042, 1184 section objects 1296 crosshairs coloring 149 functions of 34 crossing polygon selection 745 crossing selections 745 CSV files (comma-separated) 1508 exporting extracted data to 1992 CTB files 1661, 1687,
D damaged drawing files 247 data extraction 1844 about 1969 block attributes and 946 converting older files and 1957 Data Extraction wizard 1971 drawing units and 1979 editing settings 1996 exporting data 1991 formulas 1981 including spreadsheet data in 1981 linking to Excel spreadsheets 1987 matching data 1988–1989 monitoring drawings for updates 1975, 1998 non-uniform scaling and 1979 notifications 1998 overview 1969 saving settings 1972 selecting objects for 1977 updating data 1994 validation 1989 data e
datum composite tolerances 1625 geometric tolerances 1624 ordinate dimensions 1589 dBase databases 2005 dbConnect Manager editing database records 2006 DBX applications 196 DC Online tab (DesignCenter) 97 deleting 3D solid history 1203 back faces 2241 block attributes 958 block definitions 927 clipping boundaries 1925 color mapping tables 1702 constraints 868 creases 1251 data extraction elements 1996 data extraction tables 2002 dimension breaks 1611 drawing views 1290 duplicate objects 769 edges 1195 faces
MicroStation and AutoCAD terminology 1890 seed files 1946 translation mapping 1860 types of 1885 underlays 1884–1885 DGN seed files 1946 dialog boxes calculations in 674, 688 display options 54 suppressing display 54 transparent commands and 48 diameter constraints 888 diameter dimensions 1579 creating 1579 definition points 1594 text 1544 DIC color guide 556 dictionaries 1494 diffuse color maps 2209 digital design workflow 2120 digital IDs about 2063 certificate authorities 2063, 2075 obtaining 2063 root c
dimensional constraints 888 elements of 1526 exploded 845, 1527, 1595–1596, 1600 extension lines 1526 grips 1593 inspection 1607 jog lines 1604 lateral 1562 linear 1570 model space settings 426 modifying 1592 nonassociative 1527, 1594, 1598 ordinate 1589 previous release formats and 1956, 1960 radial 1579 scale 1567 spacing between 1614 styles 1530, 1617 text 1526, 1543, 1599 text styles 1552 types 1523, 1570 units of measurement 1552, 1555 values 1554 direct distance entry 607, 655 direction axes 592 direc
docked toolbars 41 docked windows 55, 175 doglegs 1439, 1579 donuts drawing 719 exploding 845 simplified display 583 double click actions editing 776 opening Quick Properties palette 509 downloading AutoCAD WS files 2101 Autodesk Seek content 119, 2122 DesignCenter Online content 96, 99 draft analysis 1229, 1237 draft quality display of raster images 1936 dragging objects 788, 798 draw order changing 587 hatches 1389 OLE objects 1826 drawing 3D solids 1052 arcs 707 boxes 1053 circles 712 cones 1056 construc
drawing sets plotting 1734 publishing 1727, 1730, 1737 republishing 1750 sheet sets 1742 viewing published files 1751 drawing status bar 44 drawing templates creating 212 DGN seed files 1946 hyperlinks to 2086 opening 212 saving 238 starting drawings with 212 startup routines and 195 web page templates 2121 drawing units about 207 angular units 210 converted DGN files 1859 converting 208 data extraction and 1979 linear units 210 model space settings 425 precision 210 rounding off 210 drawing views associati
partially opening 226 passwords 2055 plot settings 1629 plotting 1659 previewing 229, 1714 previous release formats 1839, 1846, 1848, 1960 publishing 1727, 2094 rendering 2239 repairing damaged drawings 247 saving 238, 1839, 1846, 1848, 2088 saving as templates 212 scaling 425 sharing 2077, 2101 sheet sets 471 sheets 471 standards violations 258, 262 starting 205 switching between 230 templates 212 text in 1402 transmittal packages 2109 TrustedDWG drawings 223 unconstrained drawings 866 underconstrained dra
assigning data to 997 AutoCAD LT functionality 1965 block attributes 940 Block Editor 967 constraints 976 construction geometry 938 correcting 974 creating 966 dependencies 986 designing 966 grips and 1012 inserting blocks 917 lookup tables 997 parameter sets 971 parameters 980, 1012 properties 1003 saving 974 testing 973–974 value sets 1008 visibility states 1017 workflow 966 dynamic block references about 922, 965 actions 989 block attributes 940 constraints 867 grips 923 modifying 926 restoring 926 dynam
helixes 858 hyperlinks 2080, 2085 Inventor Fusion 1268 label templates 2027 labels 2028 layer objects 517 layers 525, 549 leader objects 1441 link templates 2017 maps 2231 markups 2127, 2134 materials 2217 meshes 1238 multiline styles 861 multilines 860 objects 741, 775 OLE objects 1835 paper size 1672 plot style tables 1692, 1698 plot styles 1702 point clouds 1854 polylines 846 predefined searches 128 printable areas 1672 queries 2044 revision clouds 738 separating solids into shapes 1206 sheet and sheet s
extracting data to 1969, 1992 including in data extractions 1981, 1987 opening attribute extraction files 951 EXP files 1871 exploded dimensions 1527, 1596 exploding block references 845 blocks 962 compound objects 845 objects 845 xrefs 846 exporting 3D files 1758 3D solids 1952–1953 ACIS SAT files 1952 animations 402 associative drawing views 1272 block attribute data 946–947 database links 2024 DGN files 1944 drawings 1938 DWF or DWFx files 1938 DXF files 1941 export file formats 1938 extracted data 1969,
exploding 846 External References palette 1775 fields in 1464 freezing layers of 1817 icons 1775 Internet-based xrefs 2105 layer properties 1776 layer states and 549 log files 1812 missing 222, 1808 name conflicts 1810 nested 1780 notifications about 1775, 1783, 1789 OLE objects and 1806, 1826 overlays 1780 password-protected 2059–2060 paths 1781–1782, 1820 project names and 1783 properties 1805 Reference Manager 1784 reloading 1788 relocated xrefs 1783 saving changes to 1804 saving with indexes 1817–1818 s
attribute extraction and 948 labels 2026 links 2015 fields (text) about 1458 AutoCAD LT functionality 1963 hyperlinks in 1467 previous releases of AutoCAD and 1465 file formats animations 402 attribute extraction files 950 converting 1839 data extraction 1972, 1992 digital signatures and 2066 drawing interchange formats 1718 export file formats 1938 importable files 1849 pasted objects 773 plot files 1715 plottable formats 1716–1719, 1721, 1723 PostScript formats 1951 publishing drawing sets 1727 Quick View
files for data extraction 1976 layers 522, 536 object selection 10, 749 object-type searches 132 objects for data extraction 1977 paramenters 910 predefined searches 128 subobject selection filters 1180, 1264 texture filtering 2264 unreconciled new layers 542, 544 viewport overrides and 530 filters 132 final gathering 2276 finding advanced techniques 126 basic search feature 125 commands 15 Content Explorer indexing 109 content in files 136–137 content sources 113 database records 2013 default searches 130
types of 1472 Unicode 1474 forcing internal lines 1544 foreshortened radius dimensions 1581 form tolerances 1621 formatting text character formatting 1470 codes for 1497 data extraction tables 1999 fields 1458 multiline text 1411, 1417 stacked text 1430 table cells 1511, 1514 formulas copying 1518 data extraction tables 1981 inserting in table cells 1518 parametric constraints 903 Forward tool 365 FoxPro databases 2005 fractions 1411, 1430, 1566 frame rates in animations 402 frames underlay frames 1907 Free
projecting 1221 rendering 2243 trimming edges with 1221 GI (global illumination) 2274, 2276 gizmos 3D meshes 1241 3D models 1176 about 1161 displaying 1163 mapping materials with 2235 mesh objects and 1263 moving objects with 1167 rotating objects with 1170 scaling objects with 1172 settings 1164 switching 1164 global constants 683 global illumination (GI) 2274, 2276 global linetype scale factor 572 glossy materials 2210 goniometers 2170 goniometric diagrams 2166 Gooch face style 299 Google Earth 217 gradie
layer group filters 536 names 760 parameter groups 910 removing group definition 764 removing objects from 764 reordering objects in 764 selecting 762 selecting objects in 762 sorting search results 133 tool palette groups 80, 82 ungrouping 764 guide curves 1032, 1184 gutters between text columns 1435 H handdrawn effects 309 handles (i-drop) 2107 hanging indents 1427 hardware acceleration 316 linetypes and 564 hatches alignment 1391 annotations and 1323, 1350 associative 1360, 1367 background colors 1373 b
holes in meshes 1241 hollow objects 1207 Home view 345 about 117 adding folders to 117 browsing folders from 131 configuring 117 indexing content and 117 removing items from 117 saving 117 hook lines 1439, 1579 horizontal dimension text 1548 horizontal dimensions 1572 horizontal ribbon 26 horizontal text 1482 hotspot angle of spotlights 2187 hyperlinks about 2078 absolute 2078, 2080 blocks and 2085 creating 2080 cursor display options 2080 editing 2080, 2085 email hyperlinks 2084 fields and 1467 full 2078,
table text and 1505, 1518 incremental saves 239 indenting paragraphs 1427 Index of Refraction 2211 indexing Content Explorer results 109 Home view and 117 watched folders 112 indexing point cloud data 1851 indirect illumination benefits 2274 final gathering 2276 inferring constraints 885 infinite lines 731 InfoCenter 3 inheritance blocks 934 in-place reference editing and 1805 joined objects 848 Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) 1864 Initial Setup about 201 initializing layouts 1660 input Quick
ISO 8859 Latin 1 character set 1951 ISO hatch patterns 1372 ISO pen widths 565 ISO projection standards 1273 ISO thread styles 1273 isolating objects 589 isoline edges 309 isometric circles 721, 2141 isometric drawings 2139 isometric planes 2139 Isometric Snap/Grid mode 2139 isometric views 2D views 2139 3D views 290 Isotropic distribution of lights 2167 iterative selection sets 2041 J JFIF files 1916 jitter edge effect 309 jog lines in dimensions 1604 jogged radius dimensions 1581 jogged segments in secti
latitude 216 Layer control limits 510 layer group filters 536 layer indexes 1817–1818 layer properties 1843 blocks and 934 converting to drawing standards 270 filters 537 tool overrides 73 xref properties 1776 Layer Properties Manager filtering layers 536 layer names 522 property overrides 529 sorting layers 536 unreconciled new layers and layer property filters 537 layer states 547, 552 Layer States Manager LMAN layer states 553 restoring layer states 548 xrefs and 549 Layer Translator 270 layers about 514
drawing in 441 freezing layers in 453 linetypes in 459 magnifying 441 modifying views in 441 multiple 446 plotting 1651 resizing 448 rotating views in 463 scale 441 screening objects in 456 shaded 1651 turning on or off 457 views in 450 visibility in 453 Layout Wizard creating layouts 1653 layouts adding 437 dimensioning in 1568 display options 164 exporting objects to model space 443 importing plotter configuration files 1654 initializing 1630, 1660 inserting from DesignCenter 467 layer visibility 441, 516
illuminating scenes 2150 importing 2201 indirect illumination 2274 lamp values 2175 light glyphs 2143, 2180 light intensity 2165 luminaire objects 2198 luminous intensity distribution (LID) 2170 materials 2210 photometric lighting 2144, 2148 placement and location 2182 point lights 2152 previous release formats and 1844 properties 2186 sky and 2194 spotlights 2159 Standard lighting 2143, 2148 sunlight 2194 visual styles and 296 weblights 2165 workflow 2148 limitations of previous release formats 1841 limits
lineweights about 574 applying 575 block properties 934 current 579 defaults 517 dimension elements 1533 displaying 577, 580 filtering selection sets by 749 layers and 514, 525, 581 model space and 575 objects not displaying 575 overriding 581 plot style lineweights 1709 plotting 575, 1681 previous releases and 579 reassigning 581 regenerating drawings and 577 scale 575, 1648 turning on or off 577, 583 Link Manager editing database links 2017 Link Select feature 2041 link templates (database links) creating
luminous intensity distribution (LID) 2170 LZW compression 1919 M M symbol (maximum material condition) 1623 magnet snapping 631 magnifying views 275 major grid lines 637 manufacturer data DesignCenter 98 IES lighting data files 2165, 2170 lighting fixtures 2144 map channels about 2222 map types 2222, 2225 mapping adjusting maps 2235 fonts 1477 layers to standard layers 270 map properties 2231 map types 2225 materials 2222 mapping gizmo 2235 marble maps 2227 markers equal segments on objects 658–659, 661 g
tolerances 1621 member views (Inventor) 1279 memory (RAM) allocating 314 memory tuning 320 menu grips 1307 menus classic menu bar 39 shortcut menus 58 workspace arrangements 189 merge extend surfaces 1223 merging cells in tables 1505 extracted data 1988 mesh faces 1241 mesh models 1027 meshes about 1111, 1136 best practices 1261 boxes 1116 cones 1119 converting objects to 1143, 1159 converting to 3D solids 1069, 1160, 1265 creases 1249–1250, 1262 creating 1111, 1136 custom 1147 cylinders 1122 density 1245 e
textures 2234 misspellings 1493 MMC symbol (maximum material condition) 1623 MODEL files 1871 model space accessing from layout viewports 440 annotations and 425, 1325, 1327 cameras in 389 defined 431 DGN file conversions and 1859 dimensioning in 1567 display options 164 drawing process in 423, 436 exporting layout objects to 443 layer states and 549 layer visibility settings 441 lineweight display in 575, 577 live sectioning and 1305 markups and 2128 moving objects to paper space 437 plot scale 1674 plotti
text 1483, 1497 text styles 1470 tools 64, 77 vertices 1200 visual styles 296 xrefs 1797, 1799 molds 1237 moments of inertia 668 monitoring data source changes 1998 drawings for updates 1975 monochrome settings underlays 1901 moonlight 2151 motion path animation about 400 linking cameras to paths 400 recording 403 settings 402 mouse devices 410 move actions 990 moving 3D Move gizmo 1161, 1167 3D subobjects 1186 blocks 990 constraining movement 1167 dimension text 1600 dragging objects 798 drawing views 1288
tabs 1427 text editors 1497 text wrap 1411 Multiline Text Editor 1497 multilines drawing 701 editing commands 861 intersections 860 modifying 860 styles 701, 861 vertices 860 multiple drawings opening 229 switching between 237 multiple users 2101 multiple-view drawing layouts 431 My Documents folder 224, 245 N named layer states saving 548 named layouts 437 named objects CAD standards 257 partially open drawings and 226 standards violations 264 xref name conflicts 1810 named page setups applying 1629 creat
nonsystem plotter drivers DXB driver 1718 PDF output 1721 plotting to 1715 PostScript driver 1723 raster driver 1719 nonuniform rational B-spline curves 723 nonuniform scaling 1979 normals of 3D faces about 2241 flipped normals 2264 Not Found raster images 1930 notes about 1399 annotations 1323, 1335 creating text 1402 markups 2133 notification attached xrefs 1775 changed xrefs 1789 data extraction updates 1971, 1998 new layers added 544 relocated xrefs 1783 standards violations 264 nudging objects 788 Numb
counting 10 creating 3D solids from 1069 creating meshes from 1136 creating solids or surfaces from 1030, 1097 cross sectioning 1296 custom objects 1966 cutting 772 deleting 772 deleting duplicates 769 deselecting 742, 745 draw order 587 drawing 691 editing 741, 775 equal intervals on 657 erasing 769 extracting data from 1969 feature classifications 1967 filleting 832 filtering 749 fully-constrained 983 geometric data 663 grouping 759 highlighting 754 isolating 589 joining 843 large objects 223, 240, 2115 l
plot quality of 1824 reconnecting 1828 resizing 1835 text in 1826 updating 1827 online copies of files 2101 opacity transparency settings 586 visual styles 300 open curves 1102 Open Database Connectivity 2005 Open Documents list 19 open meshes 1147 opening attribute extraction files 951 dbConnect Manager 2006 DesignCenter drawings 91 drawings 221, 2088 files 16 files in other formats 1849 files with hyperlinks 2086 files with large objects 223, 240 layouts 229 multiple drawings 229 older files 1954 sheets a
plot settings 1665 settings 1629 sheet sets 477, 495, 1655, 1742 pages page setups 1629 sheets in sheet sets 471 Pan tool 325, 371 panning 3D views 325 about 275 dynamic 275 layout viewports 441 Pantone color books 556 paper drawing sets 1734 paper size fitting drawings on 1675 layout settings 1637 modifying 1672 plot scale and 1674 scaling drawings to fit 1646 settings 1668 paper space about 431 blocks and 932 dimensioning in 1568 drawing in 431 exporting objects from 443 hiding objects 1682 layer states a
partially open drawings 226 Partner Products and Services (Autodesk) 5 parts DesignCenter Online content 96, 98 inspection dimensions 1607 parts lists 947, 1969 passwords case sensitivity 2059 characters in 2056 DWF files 1887 encryption passwords 2055–2056, 2070 entering 2059 password-protected xrefs 2059–2060 published files 1753 removing 2059 viewing passworded drawings 2059 pasting converting data while pasting 773 lists 1421 objects 773 objects from other drawings 237 text 1438 patching surfaces 1092 p
perspective view 343 perspective views about 284 defining 286 settings 158 photometric lights distant lights and 2177 goniometric diagrams 2166 IES data files 2165, 2170 lamp values 2175 luminous intensity distribution (LID) 2170 overview 2148 point lights 2153 properties 2153, 2188 sky settings 2195 spotlights 2160 sun properties and 2194 weblights 2165, 2188 workflow 2144 photon maps 2274, 2276 photorealistic rendering 2239 physical models 1766 pickbox cursor 34, 741 PICT files 1916 pinned files 18 pivot
paper size 1668 paper-saving features 1672 pen assignments 1707 raster plotters 1707 selecting 1636, 1666 plotting about 1659 draw order and 587 drawing sets 1734 exporting files 1715 file formats 1715 fit options 1646 hardware linetypes 564 layout process and 433 light glyphs 2187 lineweights 575, 578, 1681 model space settings 426 new layer notification and 545 offsets 1644 OLE objects 1824 orientation 1642, 1674 page setups 1629, 1665 paper size 1668 paper space objects 1681 plot scale 1674 plot style ta
rendering 2246 polygon meshes 1147, 1149 polygons calculating geometric data for drawing 698, 715 polyface meshes 1149 rendering 2246 polyline arcs 714 polylines calculating geometric data for chamfering 839 closed 715 drawing 693 exploding 845 filleting 834 grips 777, 847 joining 848 linetypes 573 modifying 741, 846 offsetting 816 polyline arcs 714 PostScript rendering 1951 revision clouds 738 simplifying display 583 subobjects 848 wide polylines 694, 715 polysolids drawing 1066 portrait orientation 1642,
lineweights and 579 rendering and 2285 saving drawings as 1960 underlays and 1913 primitive solids about 1052 grips 1183 modifying 1214 spheres 1061 primitives mesh primitives 1116 solids 1052 printable areas 1629, 1636, 1644, 1667, 1672 printers offsetting plots 1673 selecting 1636, 1666 printing 3D DWF files 1758 3D physical models 1766 page setups 1629 plotting 1659 privacy 96 private keys 2062 Pro/ENGINEER files 1295, 1868 procedural maps 2226 procedural surfaces about 1080 converting objects to 1097 cr
text 1411, 1486 tool overrides 73 tool properties 72 user-created 139 views 280 Properties palette limits 510 object properties 509 performing calculations in 674 table properties 1503 Properties panel limits 510 object properties 510 proxy fonts 1473 proxy objects 1966 proxy servers 2077 PRT files 1868, 1874, 1878 PS files (PostScript) exporting 1951 plotting to 1723 public keys 2062 Publish to Web wizard about 2121 publishing about 1727 background processing 1728 Buzzsaw sites and 2094 drawing sets 1727,
file size 1719 finding files 1933 hiding 1936 image information 1929 Internet-based files 1919 loading 1935 missing 1934 naming 1933 pixels 1916 plotting to 1719 preview images 244 resolution 1921 ribbon contextual tab 1917 scaling 1921 tiled images 1936 transparency 1917 unloading 1935 raster plotters 1707 ray-tracing ray-traced reflections 2271 ray-traced shadows 2269 trace depth 2271 rays drawing 731 filleting 835 modifying 741 RC4 encryption providers 2058 read-only tool palettes 78 Readme help topic 5
regions calculating geometric data for 665 composite 734 creating 734 cross sections 1300 relational databases 2004 relative coordinates 2D coordinates 609 3D coordinates 615 copying objects with 797 cylindrical coordinates 617 entering 607 spherical coordinates 619 relative hyperlinks 2078, 2080 relative paths hyperlinks 2080 xrefs 1781–1782 relaxing constraints 868 relocated xrefs 1783 removing 3D solid history 1203 back faces 2241 blips 769 block attributes 958 block definitions 927 color mapping tables
repeating patterns 2234 replacing dimension text 1600 text 1489 reports 263 republishing drawing sets 1750 reshaping objects 828, 1210 resizing 3D solid faces 1189 annotations 1325, 1327, 1353 arrowheads 1541 columns in text 1435 data extraction tables 1999 dimension breaks 1612 dimensions 1567 edges 1194 extending objects 823 fitting drawings on paper 1646 layout viewports 448 object grips and 779 objects 828 OLE objects 1835 tables 1504 text 1484, 1486, 1491 textures 2233 toolbars 41 trimming objects 822
UCSs 591 underlays 1897 vertices 1200 views in layout viewports 463 rotation grips 923, 1012 rotation parameters 1008 rotation snaps 782 rounding corners 832 edges 1196 rounding off dimension values 1558 drawing units 210 roundtripping 2120 rows (data extraction tables) 1999 rows (tables) adding or deleting 1505 formatting 1511 modifying 1503 RTF files 1438 rubber-band lines locking 642 tracking 654 ruled meshes 1137 running object snaps 627, 633 S S (regardless of feature size symbol) 1623 sampling in ren
scale factors layout viewports 450 model space settings 426 raster images 1921 scaling objects 829 scale locking in layout viewports 441 scaling 3D Scale gizmo 1161, 1172 3D subobjects 1186 annotations 1325, 1327, 1353 arrowheads 1541 blocks 917, 991 constraining scale 1173 drawings 426 drawings to fit paper 1646 edges 1194 faces 1189 grip methods for 779 hatch patterns 1381, 1391 linetypes 459, 571, 1709 lineweights 1648 model space settings 425–426 objects 778, 829 OLE objects 1835 plot scale 1674 raster
jogged segments 1303 live sectioning 1305 object states 1308 plotting 1316 properties 1309 publishing 1316 rendering 1316 saving 1312 viewing 1316 views and 1311 section planes 1297 sectioning 2D sections 1312 3D objects 1312 3D views and 332 cameras and 1311 jogged segments 1303 live sectioning 1296, 1299, 1305 lofting objects and 1042, 1184 publishing or plotting cross sections 1316 section objects 1296 views and 1311 security of files about 2055 digital ID levels 2063 Seek utility 2122 Seek view 119 segm
rendering 2268 shadow mapping 2268 shadow mode settings 2269 visual styles 304 sharing drawings 2101 sheet creation templates 476, 495 sheet list tables 484 sheet metal views (Inventor) 1280 Sheet Set Manager about 471 Buzzsaw sites and 2094 eTransmit and 2114 features 473 locking and unlocking sheets 500 publishing options 1742 shortcut menus 474 team collaboration 500 sheet sets archiving 495 backing up and recovering 477 basing on drawing files 477 creating and modifying sheets 483 creating sets 476 defi
sky background settings 2195 display options 158 illumination 2195 lighting overview 2144 natural lighting and 2148 slanted text 1481 SLDPRT files 1874 slicing solids 1076 smooth lighting 299 smooth rendering 1759, 2245 smoothing mesh objects 1243, 1248, 1261 tessellation 1112 snapping (object snaps) 626 software acceleration 316 solid fills creating 1360, 1372 overlapping objects 587 PostScript rendering 1951 turning off 583 solid primitives about 1049 boxes 1053 cones 1056 creating 1052 cylinders 1059 pyr
splines B-splines 1098 base points 855 calculating geometric data for 666 control points 853 drawing 723 editing 853 extending 856 filleting 856 grips 777, 853 knots 854 modifying 741 NURBS splines 1101 offsetting 816 trimming 856 splitting faces 1262 mesh faces 1253 spotlights artifical lighting 2151 attenuation rates 2189 beam angle 2187 falloff angle 2187 field angle 2187 hotspot angle 2187 location 2183 overview 2159 rapid decay area 2187 spreadsheets accessing data from 1508 attribute extraction data f
dimensions 1530 leader objects 1451 multiline styles 701 reference points 730 text 1469 visual 294 subobjects 848, 1186 subsets of sheet sets 479 substitute fonts 1473, 1477 subtracing composite solids 1074 subtracting areas 667 objects 1074 regions 734 sunlight about 2144, 2194 geographic locations 216 natural lighting 2148, 2150 support files search paths 245 surface models 1026 surfaces 3D surfaces 1080 about 1080 associative 1033, 1103 blending 1090 bulge magnitude 1082 chamfering 1196 composite solids
block attribute extraction data 950 bullets in lists 1419 file names 240 inserting 1411 material conditions 1623 passwords 2056 projected tolerances 1625 query operators 2034 symbols of termination 1526 tolerances 1562 wildcard characters 126 xref symbols 1811 symmetrical tolerances 1562 synchronizing associative drawing views 1272, 1284 AutoCAD WS files 2101 database links 2024 syntax command line switches 197 QuickCalc 676 SQL 2032 system variables bitcodes and 50 command line changes and 48 command line
sheet sets and 500 templates attribute extraction templates 947 block template files 1753 database link templates 2015 drawing templates 212 hyperlinks to 2086 label templates 2026 layout templates 466 new layer notification and 545 saving 238 sheet creation templates 476 sheet sets 495 startup routines and 195 web page templates 2121 temporary files 245 tessellation about 1112 curved solids 2247 mesh objects 1243 refinement 1112 smoothing 1112 test plots 583 testing dynamic blocks 973–974 part dimensions 1
textures about 2203 adjusting maps 2235 compression 2222 map channels 2222 map types 2225 materials libraries 2206 previewing 2231 publishing 3D files and 1758 rendering 2264 scaling 2233 transformations 2231 TGA files plotting to 1719 thawing layers layout viewports 453 regenerating drawings 516 themes for web pages 2121 thickness of objects 1071, 1156 third angle projection 1273 thread styles 1273 thumbnail previews 22 thumbnails 230 tick marks for dynamic blocks 923 TIFF files attaching 1916 exporting 19
rearranging 77 tool flyouts 63 tooltips AutoSnap 631 Dynamic Input 620 dynamic prompts 622 grips 1014 settings 150 tori 3D solids 1064 mesh tori 1134 modifying 1214 torus objects 3D solids 1064 mesh tori 1134 modifying 1214 Tour Building wheels 359 trace depth 2271, 2275 tracking object snap tracking 651 polar tracking 644 specifying points 654 tracking points 651 training 4 transformations (textures) 2231 translating data from DGN files 1858 translation mapping setup 1860 transmittal packages Buzzsaw sites
dynamic UCSs 601 named definitions 596 paper space and 593 preset orientations 596 restoring 596 UCS icon 603 workplanes 591 UGS NX files 1878 unbounded hatches 1359, 1386 unconstrained drawings 866 underconstrained drawings 866 underground (3D modeling) 158 underlays about 1884 backgrounds 1901 clipping boundaries 1903 colors 1901 contrast 1901 detaching 1894 DGN files 1884–1885 display settings 1901 DWF files 1884 DWFx files 1884–1885 External References palette 1909 fade settings 1901 finding files 1912
older files for rendering 2285 OLE objects 1824, 1827 Quick View images 231 sheet sets 500 table data 1508 xrefs 1771, 1788 uploading AutoCAD WS files 2101 Autodesk Seek content 2122 URLs (Uniform Resource Locators) opening drawings with 2088 saving drawings to 2088 user libraries 2206 user parameters 978 user profiles 193 user variables 978 user-created properties 139 users (multiple) 2101 V validating 3D solids 1209 digital IDs 2075 digital signatures 2071–2072 extracted data 1989 files 2072 surfaces 122
UCSs and 599 visual styles in 296, 530 views 2D isometric 2139 3D projection styles 284 3D views 323 aligning in viewports 460 associative drawings 1270 cameras in 389 changing 275 cross sections 1296 database views 2009 flattened 3D objects 1317 layout viewports 450 live sectioning 1311 model space 3D views 288 modifying 441 multiple-view drawing layouts 431 OLE links and 1833 out-of-date 1272, 1284 panning 275 partially opened drawings 226 performance issues and 314 plot options 1643 plotting 1668 preset
weather 2150 web folders opening drawings from 2088 saving drawings to 2088 web pages creating 2106, 2121 i-drop content and 2106 templates 2121 themes 2121 web sites attaching xrefs from Internet files 2105 AutoCAD WS files 2101 Autodesk Seek 2123 i-drop content 2106 weblights about 2165 distribution in photometric webs 2167 free weblights 2166 goniometric diagrams 2166 luminous intensity distribution (LID) 2170 properties 2188 websites 3D physical model printing services 1766 Buzzsaw sites 2094 DesignCent
X yellow alert icons X axis 149 X_B and X_T files 1880 X-ray visual style 295 X, Y coordinates 607 XGP files 82 xlines 731 filleting 835 modifying 741 XLS files (spreadsheets) 1988, 1992 XPS compatible files 1717 xrefs (external references) 1771 XTP files 82 XY parameters 1008 XY planes (workplanes) 293, 607 XYB files 1852 Z Y Y axis 149 2398 | Index 974 Z axis 149 z coordinate values 615 zebra analysis 1232 zero suppression dimensions 1559 tolerances 1563 zero-length geometry 769 ZIP files 2113 Zoo
